Patent Publication Number: US-2021191612-A1

Title: Devices, Methods, and Graphical User Interfaces for Navigating Between User Interfaces and Interacting with Control Objects

Description:
RELATED APPLICATIONS 
     This application is a continuation of U.S. application Ser. No. 15/980,609, filed May 15, 2018, which claims priority to U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/668,171, filed May 7, 2018, U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/557,101, filed Sep. 11, 2017, U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/556,410, filed Sep. 9, 2017, U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/514,900, filed Jun. 4, 2017, and U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/507,212, filed May 16, 2017, all of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety. 
    
    
     TECHNICAL FIELD 
     This relates generally to electronic devices with touch-sensitive surfaces, including but not limited to electronic devices with touch-sensitive surfaces for navigating between user interfaces and interacting with control objects. 
     BACKGROUND 
     The use of touch-sensitive surfaces as input devices for computers and other electronic computing devices has increased significantly in recent years. Example touch-sensitive surfaces include touchpads and touch-screen displays. Such surfaces are widely used to manipulate user interfaces and objects therein on a display. Example user interface objects include digital images, video, text, icons, and control elements such as buttons and other graphics. 
     Example manipulations include adjusting the position and/or size of one or more user interface objects or activating buttons or opening files/applications represented by user interface objects, as well as associating metadata with one or more user interface objects or otherwise manipulating user interfaces. Example user interface objects include digital images, video, text, icons, control elements such as buttons and other graphics. A user will, in some circumstances, need to perform such manipulations on user interface objects in a file management program (e.g., Finder from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, Calif.), an image management application (e.g., Aperture, iPhoto, Photos from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, Calif.), a digital content (e.g., videos and music) management application (e.g., iTunes from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, Calif.), a drawing application, a presentation application (e.g., Keynote from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, Calif.), a word processing application (e.g., Pages from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, Calif.), or a spreadsheet application (e.g., Numbers from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, Calif.). 
     But methods for performing these manipulations are cumbersome and inefficient. For example, using a sequence of mouse based inputs to select one or more user interface objects and perform one or more actions on the selected user interface objects is tedious and creates a significant cognitive burden on a user. In addition, these methods take longer than necessary, thereby wasting energy. This latter consideration is particularly important in battery-operated devices. 
     SUMMARY 
     Accordingly, there is a need for electronic devices with improved methods and interfaces for navigating between user interfaces and interacting with control objects. Such methods and interfaces optionally complement or replace conventional methods for navigating between user interfaces and interacting with control objects. Such methods and interfaces reduce the number, extent, and/or nature of the inputs from a user and produce a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated devices, such methods and interfaces conserve power and increase the time between battery charges. 
     The above deficiencies and other problems associated with user interfaces for electronic devices with touch-sensitive surfaces are reduced or eliminated by the disclosed devices. In some embodiments, the device is a desktop computer. In some embodiments, the device is portable (e.g., a notebook computer, tablet computer, or handheld device). In some embodiments, the device is a personal electronic device (e.g., a wearable electronic device, such as a watch). In some embodiments, the device has a touchpad. In some embodiments, the device has a touch-sensitive display (also known as a “touch screen” or “touch-screen display”). In some embodiments, the device has a graphical user interface (GUI), one or more processors, memory and one or more modules, programs or sets of instructions stored in the memory for performing multiple functions. In some embodiments, the user interacts with the GUI primarily through stylus and/or finger contacts and gestures on the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the functions optionally include image editing, drawing, presenting, word processing, spreadsheet making, game playing, telephoning, video conferencing, e-mailing, instant messaging, workout support, digital photographing, digital videoing, web browsing, digital music playing, note taking, and/or digital video playing. Executable instructions for performing these functions are, optionally, included in a non-transitory computer readable storage medium or other computer program product configured for execution by one or more processors. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at a device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface. The method includes: displaying a first user interface of a first application on the display; while displaying the first user interface on the display, detecting a first portion of an input by a first contact, including detecting the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface, and after detecting the first portion of the input by the first contact, detecting a second portion of the input by the first contact, including detecting first movement of the first contact across the touch-sensitive surface in a first direction; displaying, during the first movement of the first contact across the touch-sensitive surface, a plurality of application views that including a first application view that corresponds to the first user interface of the first application and a second application view that corresponds to a second user interface of a second application that is different from the first application; while displaying the plurality of application views, detecting a third portion of the input by the first contact, including detecting liftoff of the first contact from the touch-sensitive surface after detecting the first movement by the first contact; and in response to detecting the third portion of the input by the first contact: in accordance with a determination that application-switcher-display criteria are met, wherein application-switcher-display criteria require that the second portion of the input or the first application view meets a first movement condition in order for the application-switcher-display criteria to be met, displaying an application-switcher user interface that includes a plurality of representations of applications for selectively activating one of a plurality of applications represented in the application-switcher user interface; and in accordance with a determination that home-display criteria are met, wherein the home-display criteria require that the second portion of the input or the first application view meets a second movement condition that is different from the first movement condition in order for the home-display criteria to be met, displaying a home screen user interface that includes a plurality of application launch icons that correspond to a plurality of applications. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at a device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface. The method includes: displaying a first user interface of a first application on the display; while displaying the first user interface of the first application on the display, detecting an input by a first contact, including detecting the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface, detecting first movement of the first contact across the touch-sensitive surface, and detecting liftoff of the first contact at an end of the first movement, and in response to detecting the input by the first contact: in accordance with a determination that the input meets last-application-display criteria, wherein the last-application-display criteria require that the first movement meets a first directional condition in order for the last-application-display criteria to be met, displaying a second user interface of a second application that is distinct from the first application; and in accordance with a determination that the input meets home-display criteria, wherein the home-display criteria require that the first movement meets a second directional condition that is distinct from the first directional condition in order for the home-display criteria to be met, displaying a home screen user interface that includes a plurality of application launch icons that correspond to a plurality of applications installed on the device. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at a device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface. The method includes: displaying a first user interface of a first application on the display; while displaying the first user interface of the first application on the display, detecting an input by a first contact, including detecting the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface, detecting first movement of the first contact across the touch-sensitive surface, and detecting liftoff of the first contact at an end of the first movement, and in response to detecting the input by the first contact: in accordance with a determination that the input meets edge-swipe criteria and that the first movement meets a first directional condition, displaying a second user interface of a second application that is distinct from the first application; in accordance with a determination that the input meets the edge-swipe criteria and that the first movement meets a second directional condition that is distinct from the first directional condition, displaying a control panel user interface that includes a plurality of controls that correspond to a plurality of system functions of the device; and in accordance with a determination that the input does not meet the edge-swipe criteria: forgoing displaying the second user interface of the second application; forgoing displaying the control panel user interface; and performing a function within the first application in accordance with the first movement of the first contact. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at a device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface. The method includes: displaying a first user interface of a first application on the display; while displaying the first user interface of the first application, detecting a first input by a first contact on the touch-sensitive surface that meets navigation-gesture criteria, wherein the navigation-gesture criteria require that the first input includes a movement of the first contact across the touch-sensitive surface that crosses a boundary of a predefined edge region of the touch-sensitive surface in order for the navigation-gesture criteria to be met; in response to detecting the first input by the first contact that meets the navigation-gesture criteria: in accordance with a determination that the first application is not protected, ceasing to display the first user interface of the first application and displaying a respective other user interface on the display; and in accordance with a determination that the first application is protected, maintaining display of the first user interface of the first application without displaying the respective other user interface. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at a device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface. The method includes: displaying a control panel user interface, wherein the control panel user interface includes a first control region, and the first control region includes a first control for controlling a first function of the device and a second control for controlling a second function of the device; detecting a first input by a first contact on the touch-sensitive surface; and in response to detecting the first input by the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface: in accordance with a determination that the first input meets control-region-expansion criteria, wherein the control-region-expansion criteria require that an intensity of the first contact exceeds a first intensity threshold in order for the control-region-expansion criteria to be met, replacing display of the first control region with display of an expanded first control region, wherein the expanded first control region includes the first control, the second control, and one or more additional controls that are not included in the first control region; in accordance with a determination that the first input meets first-control-activation criteria, wherein the first-control-activation criteria require that the first contact is detected at a first location on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to the first control in the first control region and do not require that intensity of the first contact exceeds the first intensity threshold in order for the first-control-activation criteria to be met, activating the first control for controlling the first function of the device; and in accordance with a determination that the first input meets second-control-activation criteria, wherein the second-control-activation criteria require that the first contact is detected at a second location on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to the second control in the first control region and do not require that intensity of the first contact exceeds the first intensity threshold in order for the second-control-activation criteria to be met, activating the second control for controlling the second function of the device. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at a device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface. The method includes: displaying a first user interface on the display; while displaying the first user interface, detecting a first input; in response to detecting the first input, displaying a control panel user interface in a first configuration, wherein: the control panel user interface in the first configuration includes a first set of control affordances in a first region of the control panel user interface that correspond to respective functions of the device, and a first subset of the first set of control affordances are not user-configurable and a second subset of the first set of control affordances are user-configurable; after displaying the control panel user interface in the first configuration, detecting a second input; in response to detecting the second input, displaying a control panel settings user interface, wherein: the control panel settings user interface displays: representations of the second subset of the first set of control affordances in a selected state without displaying the first subset of the first set of control affordances in the selected state; and representations of a second set of control affordances, distinct from the first set of control affordances, in an unselected state, wherein control affordances that correspond to representations of the second set of control affordances are not included in the control panel user interface in the first configuration; while displaying the control panel settings user interface, detecting one or more configuration inputs, including detecting a third input that changes a selection state for a representation of a first control affordance in the second set of control affordances from the unselected state to the selected state; after detecting the third input that changes the selection state for the representation of the first control affordance from the unselected state to the selected state, detecting a fourth input; and, in response to detecting the fourth input, displaying the control panel user interface in a second configuration that is distinct from the first configuration, wherein the control panel user interface in the second configuration includes the first control affordance in the first region of the control panel user interface. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at a device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface. The method includes: displaying a first user interface that includes a slider control on the display, wherein the slider control includes: respective indications of a plurality of control values for a control function that corresponds to the slider control including a maximum value, a minimum value, and one or more intermediate values between the maximum and minimum values, and an indicator that marks a currently selected control value among the plurality of control values; while displaying the slider control, detecting an input by a contact, including detecting the contact on the touch-sensitive surface at a location that corresponds to the slider control in the first user interface; and in response to detecting the input by the contact: in accordance with a determination that the input meets control-adjustment criteria, wherein the control-adjustment criteria require that more than a threshold amount of movement of the contact across the touch-sensitive surface is detected in order for the control-adjustment criteria to be met, changing a position of the indicator to indicate an update to the currently selected control value among the plurality of control values in accordance with the movement of the contact; and in accordance with a determination that the input meets slider-toggle criteria, wherein the slider-toggle criteria require that lift-off of the contact is detected with less than the threshold amount of movement of the contact across the touch-sensitive surface in order for the slider-toggle criteria to be met, toggling the control function that corresponds to the slider control. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at an electronic device with a display and a touch-sensitive surface. The method includes: displaying, on the display, a first user interface that includes one or more applications displayed without displaying a dock; while displaying the first user interface, detecting a sequence of one or more inputs that includes detecting movement of a contact from an edge of the device onto the device; and in response to detecting the sequence of one or more inputs: in accordance with a determination that the sequence of one or more inputs meets dock-display criteria, displaying the dock overlaid on the first user interface without displaying a control panel; and in accordance with a determination that the sequence of one or more inputs meets control-panel-display criteria, displaying the control panel. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at an electronic device with a touch-sensitive display. The method includes: detecting a first swipe gesture in a respective direction from a first edge of the touch-sensitive display and in response to detecting the first swipe gesture from the first edge of the touch-sensitive display: in accordance with a determination that a respective portion of the first swipe gesture occurs at a first portion of the first edge of the touch-sensitive display, displaying a plurality of controls for adjusting settings of the touch-sensitive display; and in accordance with a determination that the respective portion of the first swipe gesture occurs at a second portion of the first edge of the touch-sensitive display, displaying a plurality of recently received notifications. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at an electronic device with one or more input devices. The method includes detecting, via the one or more input devices, an input. While the input continues to be detected via the one or more input devices, the method includes entering a transitional user interface mode in which a plurality of different user interface states are available to be selected based on a comparison of a set of one or more properties of the input to a corresponding set of one or more thresholds. While in the transitional user interface mode, the method includes detecting a gesture that includes a first change in one or more respective properties in the set of one or more properties of the input and, in response to detecting the gesture: in accordance with a determination that the end of the input is detected with a first temporal proximity to the first change in the one or more respective properties of the input, selecting a final state for the user interface based on one or more values for the set of one or more properties of the input that correspond to the end of the input and one or more first values of the corresponding set of one or more thresholds; and in accordance with a determination that the end of the input is detected with a second temporal proximity to the first change in the one or more respective properties of the input, selecting a final state for the user interface based on the one or more values for the set of one or more properties of the input that correspond to the end of the input and one or more second values of the corresponding set of one or more thresholds. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at an electronic device with a touch-sensitive display. The method includes: displaying a user interface of an application; while displaying the user interface of the application, detecting a swipe gesture by a first contact from an edge of the touch-sensitive display: in response to detecting the swipe gesture from the edge of the touch-sensitive display: in accordance with a determination that the swipe gesture meets first movement criteria, displaying a dock overlaid on the user interface of the application; in accordance with a determination that the swipe gesture meets second movement criteria that are distinct from the first movement criteria, replacing display of the user interface of the application with display of an application-switcher user interface that includes representations of a plurality of recently used applications on the display; and in accordance with a determination that the swipe gesture meets third movement criteria that are distinct from the first criteria and the second criteria, replacing display of the user interface of the application with display of a home screen that includes a plurality of application launch icons for launching a plurality of different applications. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes a display, a touch-sensitive surface, optionally one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface, optionally one or more tactile output generators, one or more processors, and memory storing one or more programs; the one or more programs are configured to be executed by the one or more processors and the one or more programs include instructions for performing or causing performance of the operations of any of the methods described herein. In accordance with some embodiments, a non-transitory computer readable storage medium has stored therein instructions, which, when executed by an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, optionally one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface, and optionally one or more tactile output generators, cause the device to perform or cause performance of the operations of any of the methods described herein. In accordance with some embodiments, a graphical user interface on an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, optionally one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface, optionally one or more tactile output generators, a memory, and one or more processors to execute one or more programs stored in the memory includes one or more of the elements displayed in any of the methods described herein, which are updated in response to inputs, as described in any of the methods described herein. In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes: a display, a touch-sensitive surface, optionally one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface, and optionally one or more tactile output generators; and means for performing or causing performance of the operations of any of the methods described herein. In accordance with some embodiments, an information processing apparatus, for use in an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, optionally one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface, and optionally one or more tactile output generators, includes means for performing or causing performance of the operations of any of the methods described herein. 
     Thus, electronic devices with displays, touch-sensitive surfaces, optionally one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface, optionally one or more tactile output generators, optionally one or more device orientation sensors, and optionally an audio system, are provided with improved methods and interfaces for navigating between user interfaces and interacting with control objects thereby increasing the effectiveness, efficiency, and user satisfaction with such devices. Such methods and interfaces optionally complement or replace conventional methods for navigating between user interfaces and interacting with control objects. 
    
    
     
       BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS 
       For a better understanding of the various described embodiments, reference should be made to the Description of Embodiments below, in conjunction with the following drawings in which like reference numerals refer to corresponding parts throughout the figures. 
         FIG. 1A  is a block diagram illustrating a portable multifunction device with a touch-sensitive display in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIG. 1B  is a block diagram illustrating example components for event handling in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIG. 2  illustrates a portable multifunction device having a touch screen in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIG. 3  is a block diagram of an example multifunction device with a display and a touch-sensitive surface in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIG. 4A  illustrates an example user interface for a menu of applications on a portable multifunction device in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIG. 4B  illustrates an example user interface for a multifunction device with a touch-sensitive surface that is separate from the display in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS. 4C-4E  illustrate examples of dynamic intensity thresholds in accordance with some embodiments. 
       FIGS.  5 A 1 - 5 A 77  illustrate example user interfaces for navigating between user interfaces, in accordance with some embodiments. 
       FIGS.  5 B 1 - 5 B 33  illustrate example user interfaces for limiting navigation to a different user interface (e.g., a system user interface or another application) when a currently displayed application is determined to be protected, in accordance with some embodiments. 
       FIGS.  5 C 1 - 5 C 45  illustrate example user interfaces for displaying a control panel user interface and, in response to different inputs, displaying an expanded region of the control panel user interface or activating a control, in accordance with some embodiments. 
       FIGS.  5 D 1 - 5 D 42  illustrate example user interfaces for displaying and editing a control panel user interface, in accordance with some embodiments. 
       FIGS.  5 E 1 - 5 E 39  illustrate example user interfaces for displaying a control panel user interface with a slider control and, in response to different inputs on the slider control, changing the position of the slider or toggling the control function, in accordance with some embodiments. 
       FIGS.  5 F 1 - 5 F 45  illustrate example user interfaces for displaying a dock or displaying a control panel instead of or in addition to the dock, in accordance with some embodiments. 
       FIGS.  5 G 1 - 5 G 17  illustrate example user interfaces for navigating to a control panel user interface from different user interfaces, in accordance with some embodiments. 
       FIGS.  5 H 1 - 5 H 27  illustrated example user interfaces for displaying a dock and navigating between user interfaces, in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS. 6A-6L  are flow diagrams illustrating a method of navigating between an application user interface, an application-switcher user interface, and a home screen user interface, in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS. 7A-7F  are flow diagrams illustrating a method of navigating to a home screen user interface or a recently open application in response to a navigation gesture, in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS. 8A-8E  are flow diagrams illustrating a method of navigating to a control panel user interface or a recently open application in response to a navigation gesture, in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS. 9A-9D  are flow diagrams illustrating a method of limiting operation of a navigation gesture, in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS. 10A-10B  are flow diagrams illustrating a method of navigating between user interfaces, in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS. 11A-11E  are flow diagrams illustrating a method of displaying a control panel user interface and, in response to different inputs, displaying an expanded region of the control panel user interface or activating a control, in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS. 12A-12I  are flow diagrams illustrating a method of displaying and editing a control panel user interface, in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS. 13A-13D  are flow diagrams illustrating a method of displaying a control panel user interface with a slider control and, in response to different inputs on the slider control, changing the position of the slider or toggling the control function, in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS. 14A-14E  are flow diagrams illustrating a method of displaying a dock or displaying a control panel instead of or in addition to the dock, in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS. 15A-15C  are flow diagrams illustrating a method of navigating to a control panel user interface from different user interfaces, in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS. 16A-16D  are flow diagrams illustrating a method of navigating between application user interfaces, an application-switcher user interface, and a home screen user interface, in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS. 17A-17C  illustrate static and dynamic velocity and positional boundaries for navigating between application user interfaces, an application-switcher user interface, and a home screen user interface, in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS. 18A-18G  are flow diagrams illustrating a method of navigating between user interfaces using one or more dynamic thresholds, in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS. 19A-19C  are flow diagrams illustrating a method of displaying a dock and navigating between different user interfaces, in accordance with some embodiments. 
     
    
    
     DESCRIPTION OF EMBODIMENTS 
     Conventional methods of navigating between user interfaces, in particular, between application user interfaces and system user interfaces (e.g., a home screen user interface, an application-switcher user interface, a control panel user interface) often require multiple separate inputs (e.g., gestures and button presses, etc.), and discrete user interface transitions that are irreversible. The embodiments below provide a single gesture that is dynamically adjustable cause navigation into different user interfaces (e.g., a recently open application, a home screen user interface, an application-switcher user interface, a control panel user interface), based on different criteria (e.g., different criteria based on position, timing, movement parameters, of the contact and/or user interface objects that are displayed). In addition, the embodiments below provide a customizable control panel user interface with control objects that include zoomed views with enhanced control functions, and depending on the user interaction that is detected, the controls respond in different manners, e.g., to toggle a control function, to transform into a slider control, or to zoom into an expanded control panel, etc. In addition, the embodiments below provide a method for displaying a dock or displaying a control panel instead of or in addition to the dock. In addition, the embodiments below provide a method for displaying a dock and/or navigating to an application-switcher user interface or a home screen user interface, based on different criteria (e.g., different criteria based on position, timing, movement parameters, of the contact and/or user interface objects that are displayed). 
     Below,  FIGS. 1A-1B, 2, and 3  provide a description of example devices.  FIGS. 4A-4B ,  5 A 1 - 5 A 77 ,  5 B 1 - 5 B 33 ,  5 C 1 - 5 C 45 ,  5 D 1 - 5 D 42 ,  5 E 1 - 5 E 39 ,  5 F 1 - 5 F 45 ,  5 G 1 - 5 G 17 , and  5 H 1 - 5 H 27  illustrate example user interfaces for navigating between user interfaces, interacting with control objects, and displaying a dock or control panel, in accordance with some embodiments.  FIGS. 17A-17C  illustrate examples of position and velocity thresholds, in accordance with some embodiments.  FIGS. 6A-6L, 7A-7F, 8A-8E, 9A-9D, 10A-10B, 11A-11E, 12A-12I, 13A-13D, 14A-14E, 15A-15C, 16A - 16 D,  18 A- 18 G, and  19 A- 19 C are flow diagrams of methods of navigating between user interfaces, interacting with control objects, and displaying a dock or a control panel, in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in  FIGS. 4A-4B, 5A - 5 A 77 ,  5 B 1 - 5 B 33 ,  5 C 1 - 5 C 45 ,  5 D 1 - 5 D 42 ,  5 E 1 - 5 E 39 ,  5 F 1 - 5 F 45 ,  5 G 1 - 5 G 17 , and  5 H 1 - 5 H 27  and position and velocity thresholds in  FIGS. 17A-17C  are used to illustrate the processes in  FIGS. 6A-6L, 7A-7F, 8A-8E, 9A-9D, 10A-10B, 11A-11E, 12A-12I, 13A-13D, 14A-14E, 15A-15C, 16A - 16 D,  18 A- 18 G, and  19 A- 19 C. 
     Example Devices 
     Reference will now be made in detail to embodiments, examples of which are illustrated in the accompanying drawings. In the following detailed description, numerous specific details are set forth in order to provide a thorough understanding of the various described embodiments. However, it will be apparent to one of ordinary skill in the art that the various described embodiments are, optionally, practiced without these specific details. In other instances, well-known methods, procedures, components, circuits, and networks have not been described in detail so as not to unnecessarily obscure aspects of the embodiments. 
     It will also be understood that, although the terms first, second, etc. are, in some instances, used herein to describe various elements, these elements should not be limited by these terms. These terms are only used to distinguish one element from another. For example, a first contact could be termed a second contact, and, similarly, a second contact could be termed a first contact, without departing from the scope of the various described embodiments. The first contact and the second contact are both contacts, but they are not the same contact, unless the context clearly indicates otherwise. 
     The terminology used in the description of the various described embodiments herein is for the purpose of describing particular embodiments only and is not intended to be limiting. As used in the description of the various described embodiments and the appended claims, the singular forms “a,” “an,” and “the” are intended to include the plural forms as well, unless the context clearly indicates otherwise. It will also be understood that the term “and/or” as used herein refers to and encompasses any and all possible combinations of one or more of the associated listed items. It will be further understood that the terms “includes,” “including,” “comprises,” and/or “comprising,” when used in this specification, specify the presence of stated features, integers, steps, operations, elements, and/or components, but do not preclude the presence or addition of one or more other features, integers, steps, operations, elements, components, and/or groups thereof. 
     As used herein, the term “if” is, optionally, construed to mean “when” or “upon” or “in response to determining” or “in response to detecting,” depending on the context. Similarly, the phrase “if it is determined” or “if [a stated condition or event] is detected” is, optionally, construed to mean “upon determining” or “in response to determining” or “upon detecting [the stated condition or event]” or “in response to detecting [the stated condition or event],” depending on the context. 
     Embodiments of electronic devices, user interfaces for such devices, and associated processes for using such devices are described. In some embodiments, the device is a portable communications device, such as a mobile telephone, that also contains other functions, such as PDA and/or music player functions. Example embodiments of portable multifunction devices include, without limitation, the iPhone®, iPod Touch®, and iPad® devices from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, Calif. Other portable electronic devices, such as laptops or tablet computers with touch-sensitive surfaces (e.g., touch-screen displays and/or touchpads), are, optionally, used. It should also be understood that, in some embodiments, the device is not a portable communications device, but is a desktop computer with a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a touch-screen display and/or a touchpad). 
     In the discussion that follows, an electronic device that includes a display and a touch-sensitive surface is described. It should be understood, however, that the electronic device optionally includes one or more other physical user-interface devices, such as a physical keyboard, a mouse and/or a joystick. 
     The device typically supports a variety of applications, such as one or more of the following: a note taking application, a drawing application, a presentation application, a word processing application, a website creation application, a disk authoring application, a spreadsheet application, a gaming application, a telephone application, a video conferencing application, an e-mail application, an instant messaging application, a workout support application, a photo management application, a digital camera application, a digital video camera application, a web browsing application, a digital music player application, and/or a digital video player application. 
     The various applications that are executed on the device optionally use at least one common physical user-interface device, such as the touch-sensitive surface. One or more functions of the touch-sensitive surface as well as corresponding information displayed on the device are, optionally, adjusted and/or varied from one application to the next and/or within a respective application. In this way, a common physical architecture (such as the touch-sensitive surface) of the device optionally supports the variety of applications with user interfaces that are intuitive and transparent to the user. 
     Attention is now directed toward embodiments of portable devices with touch-sensitive displays.  FIG. 1A  is a block diagram illustrating portable multifunction device  100  with touch-sensitive display system  112  in accordance with some embodiments. Touch-sensitive display system  112  is sometimes called a “touch screen” for convenience, and is sometimes simply called a touch-sensitive display. Device  100  includes memory  102  (which optionally includes one or more computer readable storage mediums), memory controller  122 , one or more processing units (CPUs)  120 , peripherals interface  118 , RF circuitry  108 , audio circuitry  110 , speaker  111 , microphone  113 , input/output (I/O) subsystem  106 , other input or control devices  116 , and external port  124 . Device  100  optionally includes one or more optical sensors  164 . Device  100  optionally includes one or more intensity sensors  165  for detecting intensities of contacts on device  100  (e.g., a touch-sensitive surface such as touch-sensitive display system  112  of device  100 ). Device  100  optionally includes one or more tactile output generators  167  for generating tactile outputs on device  100  (e.g., generating tactile outputs on a touch-sensitive surface such as touch-sensitive display system  112  of device  100  or touchpad  355  of device  300 ). These components optionally communicate over one or more communication buses or signal lines  103 . 
     As used in the specification and claims, the term “tactile output” refers to physical displacement of a device relative to a previous position of the device, physical displacement of a component (e.g., a touch-sensitive surface) of a device relative to another component (e.g., housing) of the device, or displacement of the component relative to a center of mass of the device that will be detected by a user with the user&#39;s sense of touch. For example, in situations where the device or the component of the device is in contact with a surface of a user that is sensitive to touch (e.g., a finger, palm, or other part of a user&#39;s hand), the tactile output generated by the physical displacement will be interpreted by the user as a tactile sensation corresponding to a perceived change in physical characteristics of the device or the component of the device. For example, movement of a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a touch-sensitive display or trackpad) is, optionally, interpreted by the user as a “down click” or “up click” of a physical actuator button. In some cases, a user will feel a tactile sensation such as an “down click” or “up click” even when there is no movement of a physical actuator button associated with the touch-sensitive surface that is physically pressed (e.g., displaced) by the user&#39;s movements. As another example, movement of the touch-sensitive surface is, optionally, interpreted or sensed by the user as “roughness” of the touch-sensitive surface, even when there is no change in smoothness of the touch-sensitive surface. While such interpretations of touch by a user will be subject to the individualized sensory perceptions of the user, there are many sensory perceptions of touch that are common to a large majority of users. Thus, when a tactile output is described as corresponding to a particular sensory perception of a user (e.g., an “up click,” a “down click,” “roughness”), unless otherwise stated, the generated tactile output corresponds to physical displacement of the device or a component thereof that will generate the described sensory perception for a typical (or average) user. Using tactile outputs to provide haptic feedback to a user enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, a tactile output pattern specifies characteristics of a tactile output, such as the amplitude of the tactile output, the shape of a movement waveform of the tactile output, the frequency of the tactile output, and/or the duration of the tactile output. 
     When tactile outputs with different tactile output patterns are generated by a device (e.g., via one or more tactile output generators that move a moveable mass to generate tactile outputs), the tactile outputs will, in some circumstances, invoke different haptic sensations in a user holding or touching the device. While the sensation of the user is based on the user&#39;s perception of the tactile output, most users will be able to identify changes in waveform, frequency, and amplitude of tactile outputs generated by the device. Thus, the waveform, frequency and amplitude can be adjusted to indicate to the user that different operations have been performed. As such, tactile outputs with tactile output patterns that are designed, selected, and/or engineered to simulate characteristics (e.g., size, material, weight, stiffness, smoothness, etc.); behaviors (e.g., oscillation, displacement, acceleration, rotation, expansion, etc.); and/or interactions (e.g., collision, adhesion, repulsion, attraction, friction, etc.) of objects in a given environment (e.g., a user interface that includes graphical features and objects, a simulated physical environment with virtual boundaries and virtual objects, a real physical environment with physical boundaries and physical objects, and/or a combination of any of the above) will, in some circumstances, provide helpful feedback to users that reduces input errors and increases the efficiency of the user&#39;s operation of the device. Additionally, tactile outputs are, optionally, generated to correspond to feedback that is unrelated to a simulated physical characteristic, such as an input threshold or a selection of an object. Such tactile outputs will, in some circumstances, provide helpful feedback to users that reduces input errors and increases the efficiency of the user&#39;s operation of the device. 
     In some embodiments, a tactile output with a suitable tactile output pattern serves as a cue for the occurrence of an event of interest in a user interface or behind the scenes in a device. Examples of the events of interest include activation of an affordance (e.g., a real or virtual button, or toggle switch) provided on the device or in a user interface, success or failure of a requested operation, reaching or crossing a boundary in a user interface, entry into a new state, switching of input focus between objects, activation of a new mode, reaching or crossing an input threshold, detection or recognition of a type of input or gesture, etc. In some embodiments, tactile outputs are provided to serve as a warning or an alert for an impending event or outcome that would occur unless a redirection or interruption input is timely detected. Tactile outputs are also used in other contexts to enrich the user experience, improve the accessibility of the device to users with visual or motor difficulties or other accessibility needs, and/or improve efficiency and functionality of the user interface and/or the device. Tactile outputs are optionally accompanied with audio outputs and/or visible user interface changes, which further enhance a user&#39;s experience when the user interacts with a user interface and/or the device, and facilitate better conveyance of information regarding the state of the user interface and/or the device, and which reduce input errors and increase the efficiency of the user&#39;s operation of the device. 
     It should be appreciated that device  100  is only one example of a portable multifunction device, and that device  100  optionally has more or fewer components than shown, optionally combines two or more components, or optionally has a different configuration or arrangement of the components. The various components shown in  FIG. 1A  are implemented in hardware, software, firmware, or a combination thereof, including one or more signal processing and/or application specific integrated circuits. 
     Memory  102  optionally includes high-speed random access memory and optionally also includes non-volatile memory, such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid-state memory devices. Access to memory  102  by other components of device  100 , such as CPU(s)  120  and the peripherals interface  118 , is, optionally, controlled by memory controller  122 . 
     Peripherals interface  118  can be used to couple input and output peripherals of the device to CPU(s)  120  and memory  102 . The one or more processors  120  run or execute various software programs and/or sets of instructions stored in memory  102  to perform various functions for device  100  and to process data. 
     In some embodiments, peripherals interface  118 , CPU(s)  120 , and memory controller  122  are, optionally, implemented on a single chip, such as chip  104 . In some other embodiments, they are, optionally, implemented on separate chips. 
     RF (radio frequency) circuitry  108  receives and sends RF signals, also called electromagnetic signals. RF circuitry  108  converts electrical signals to/from electromagnetic signals and communicates with communications networks and other communications devices via the electromagnetic signals. RF circuitry  108  optionally includes well-known circuitry for performing these functions, including but not limited to an antenna system, an RF transceiver, one or more amplifiers, a tuner, one or more oscillators, a digital signal processor, a CODEC chipset, a subscriber identity module (SIM) card, memory, and so forth. RF circuitry  108  optionally communicates with networks, such as the Internet, also referred to as the World Wide Web (WWW), an intranet and/or a wireless network, such as a cellular telephone network, a wireless local area network (LAN) and/or a metropolitan area network (MAN), and other devices by wireless communication. The wireless communication optionally uses any of a plurality of communications standards, protocols and technologies, including but not limited to Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM), Enhanced Data GSM Environment (EDGE), high-speed downlink packet access (HSDPA), high-speed uplink packet access (HSUPA), Evolution, Data-Only (EV-DO), HSPA, HSPA+, Dual-Cell HSPA (DC-HSPA), long term evolution (LTE), near field communication (NFC), wideband code division multiple access (W-CDMA), code division multiple access (CDMA), time division multiple access (TDMA), Bluetooth, Wireless Fidelity (Wi-Fi) (e.g., IEEE 802.11a, IEEE 802.11ac, IEEE 802.11ax, IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g and/or IEEE 802.11n), voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP), Wi-MAX, a protocol for e-mail (e.g., Internet message access protocol (IMAP) and/or post office protocol (POP)), instant messaging (e.g., extensible messaging and presence protocol (XMPP), Session Initiation Protocol for Instant Messaging and Presence Leveraging Extensions (SIMPLE), Instant Messaging and Presence Service (IMPS)), and/or Short Message Service (SMS), or any other suitable communication protocol, including communication protocols not yet developed as of the filing date of this document. 
     Audio circuitry  110 , speaker  111 , and microphone  113  provide an audio interface between a user and device  100 . Audio circuitry  110  receives audio data from peripherals interface  118 , converts the audio data to an electrical signal, and transmits the electrical signal to speaker  111 . Speaker  111  converts the electrical signal to human-audible sound waves. Audio circuitry  110  also receives electrical signals converted by microphone  113  from sound waves. Audio circuitry  110  converts the electrical signal to audio data and transmits the audio data to peripherals interface  118  for processing. Audio data is, optionally, retrieved from and/or transmitted to memory  102  and/or RF circuitry  108  by peripherals interface  118 . In some embodiments, audio circuitry  110  also includes a headset jack (e.g.,  212 ,  FIG. 2 ). The headset jack provides an interface between audio circuitry  110  and removable audio input/output peripherals, such as output-only headphones or a headset with both output (e.g., a headphone for one or both ears) and input (e.g., a microphone). 
     I/O subsystem  106  couples input/output peripherals on device  100 , such as touch-sensitive display system  112  and other input or control devices  116 , with peripherals interface  118 . I/O subsystem  106  optionally includes display controller  156 , optical sensor controller  158 , intensity sensor controller  159 , haptic feedback controller  161 , and one or more input controllers  160  for other input or control devices. The one or more input controllers  160  receive/send electrical signals from/to other input or control devices  116 . The other input or control devices  116  optionally include physical buttons (e.g., push buttons, rocker buttons, etc.), dials, slider switches, joysticks, click wheels, and so forth. In some alternate embodiments, input controller(s)  160  are, optionally, coupled with any (or none) of the following: a keyboard, infrared port, USB port, stylus, and/or a pointer device such as a mouse. The one or more buttons (e.g.,  208 ,  FIG. 2 ) optionally include an up/down button for volume control of speaker  111  and/or microphone  113 . The one or more buttons optionally include a push button (e.g.,  206 ,  FIG. 2 ). 
     Touch-sensitive display system  112  provides an input interface and an output interface between the device and a user. Display controller  156  receives and/or sends electrical signals from/to touch-sensitive display system  112 . Touch-sensitive display system  112  displays visual output to the user. The visual output optionally includes graphics, text, icons, video, and any combination thereof (collectively termed “graphics”). In some embodiments, some or all of the visual output corresponds to user interface objects. As used herein, the term “affordance” refers to a user-interactive graphical user interface object (e.g., a graphical user interface object that is configured to respond to inputs directed toward the graphical user interface object). Examples of user-interactive graphical user interface objects include, without limitation, a button, slider, icon, selectable menu item, switch, hyperlink, or other user interface control. 
     Touch-sensitive display system  112  has a touch-sensitive surface, sensor or set of sensors that accepts input from the user based on haptic and/or tactile contact. Touch-sensitive display system  112  and display controller  156  (along with any associated modules and/or sets of instructions in memory  102 ) detect contact (and any movement or breaking of the contact) on touch-sensitive display system  112  and converts the detected contact into interaction with user-interface objects (e.g., one or more soft keys, icons, web pages or images) that are displayed on touch-sensitive display system  112 . In some embodiments, a point of contact between touch-sensitive display system  112  and the user corresponds to a finger of the user or a stylus. 
     Touch-sensitive display system  112  optionally uses LCD (liquid crystal display) technology, LPD (light emitting polymer display) technology, or LED (light emitting diode) technology, although other display technologies are used in other embodiments. Touch-sensitive display system  112  and display controller  156  optionally detect contact and any movement or breaking thereof using any of a plurality of touch sensing technologies now known or later developed, including but not limited to capacitive, resistive, infrared, and surface acoustic wave technologies, as well as other proximity sensor arrays or other elements for determining one or more points of contact with touch-sensitive display system  112 . In some embodiments, projected mutual capacitance sensing technology is used, such as that found in the iPhone®, iPod Touch®, and iPad® from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, Calif. 
     Touch-sensitive display system  112  optionally has a video resolution in excess of 100 dpi. In some embodiments, the touch screen video resolution is in excess of 400 dpi (e.g., 500 dpi, 800 dpi, or greater). The user optionally makes contact with touch-sensitive display system  112  using any suitable object or appendage, such as a stylus, a finger, and so forth. In some embodiments, the user interface is designed to work with finger-based contacts and gestures, which can be less precise than stylus-based input due to the larger area of contact of a finger on the touch screen. In some embodiments, the device translates the rough finger-based input into a precise pointer/cursor position or command for performing the actions desired by the user. 
     In some embodiments, in addition to the touch screen, device  100  optionally includes a touchpad for activating or deactivating particular functions. In some embodiments, the touchpad is a touch-sensitive area of the device that, unlike the touch screen, does not display visual output. The touchpad is, optionally, a touch-sensitive surface that is separate from touch-sensitive display system  112  or an extension of the touch-sensitive surface formed by the touch screen. 
     Device  100  also includes power system  162  for powering the various components. Power system  162  optionally includes a power management system, one or more power sources (e.g., battery, alternating current (AC)), a recharging system, a power failure detection circuit, a power converter or inverter, a power status indicator (e.g., a light-emitting diode (LED)) and any other components associated with the generation, management and distribution of power in portable devices. 
     Device  100  optionally also includes one or more optical sensors  164 .  FIG. 1A  shows an optical sensor coupled with optical sensor controller  158  in I/O subsystem  106 . Optical sensor(s)  164  optionally include charge-coupled device (CCD) or complementary metal-oxide semiconductor (CMOS) phototransistors. Optical sensor(s)  164  receive light from the environment, projected through one or more lens, and converts the light to data representing an image. In conjunction with imaging module  143  (also called a camera module), optical sensor(s)  164  optionally capture still images and/or video. In some embodiments, an optical sensor is located on the back of device  100 , opposite touch-sensitive display system  112  on the front of the device, so that the touch screen is enabled for use as a viewfinder for still and/or video image acquisition. In some embodiments, another optical sensor is located on the front of the device so that the user&#39;s image is obtained (e.g., for selfies, for videoconferencing while the user views the other video conference participants on the touch screen, etc.). 
     Device  100  optionally also includes one or more contact intensity sensors  165 .  FIG. 1A  shows a contact intensity sensor coupled with intensity sensor controller  159  in I/O subsystem  106 . Contact intensity sensor(s)  165  optionally include one or more piezoresistive strain gauges, capacitive force sensors, electric force sensors, piezoelectric force sensors, optical force sensors, capacitive touch-sensitive surfaces, or other intensity sensors (e.g., sensors used to measure the force (or pressure) of a contact on a touch-sensitive surface). Contact intensity sensor(s)  165  receive contact intensity information (e.g., pressure information or a proxy for pressure information) from the environment. In some embodiments, at least one contact intensity sensor is collocated with, or proximate to, a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch-sensitive display system  112 ). In some embodiments, at least one contact intensity sensor is located on the back of device  100 , opposite touch-screen display system  112  which is located on the front of device  100 . 
     Device  100  optionally also includes one or more proximity sensors  166 .  FIG. 1A  shows proximity sensor  166  coupled with peripherals interface  118 . Alternately, proximity sensor  166  is coupled with input controller  160  in I/O subsystem  106 . In some embodiments, the proximity sensor turns off and disables touch-sensitive display system  112  when the multifunction device is placed near the user&#39;s ear (e.g., when the user is making a phone call). 
     Device  100  optionally also includes one or more tactile output generators  167 .  FIG. 1A  shows a tactile output generator coupled with haptic feedback controller  161  in I/O subsystem  106 . In some embodiments, tactile output generator(s)  167  include one or more electroacoustic devices such as speakers or other audio components and/or electromechanical devices that convert energy into linear motion such as a motor, solenoid, electroactive polymer, piezoelectric actuator, electrostatic actuator, or other tactile output generating component (e.g., a component that converts electrical signals into tactile outputs on the device). Tactile output generator(s)  167  receive tactile feedback generation instructions from haptic feedback module  133  and generates tactile outputs on device  100  that are capable of being sensed by a user of device  100 . In some embodiments, at least one tactile output generator is collocated with, or proximate to, a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch-sensitive display system  112 ) and, optionally, generates a tactile output by moving the touch-sensitive surface vertically (e.g., in/out of a surface of device  100 ) or laterally (e.g., back and forth in the same plane as a surface of device  100 ). In some embodiments, at least one tactile output generator sensor is located on the back of device  100 , opposite touch-sensitive display system  112 , which is located on the front of device  100 . 
     Device  100  optionally also includes one or more accelerometers  168 .  FIG. 1A  shows accelerometer  168  coupled with peripherals interface  118 . Alternately, accelerometer  168  is, optionally, coupled with an input controller  160  in I/O subsystem  106 . In some embodiments, information is displayed on the touch-screen display in a portrait view or a landscape view based on an analysis of data received from the one or more accelerometers. Device  100  optionally includes, in addition to accelerometer(s)  168 , a magnetometer and a GPS (or GLONASS or other global navigation system) receiver for obtaining information concerning the location and orientation (e.g., portrait or landscape) of device  100 . 
     In some embodiments, the software components stored in memory  102  include operating system  126 , communication module (or set of instructions)  128 , contact/motion module (or set of instructions)  130 , graphics module (or set of instructions)  132 , haptic feedback module (or set of instructions)  133 , text input module (or set of instructions)  134 , Global Positioning System (GPS) module (or set of instructions)  135 , and applications (or sets of instructions)  136 . Furthermore, in some embodiments, memory  102  stores device/global internal state  157 , as shown in  FIGS. 1A and 3 . Device/global internal state  157  includes one or more of: active application state, indicating which applications, if any, are currently active; display state, indicating what applications, views or other information occupy various regions of touch-sensitive display system  112 ; sensor state, including information obtained from the device&#39;s various sensors and other input or control devices  116 ; and location and/or positional information concerning the device&#39;s location and/or attitude. 
     Operating system  126  (e.g., iOS, Darwin, RTXC, LINUX, UNIX, OS X, WINDOWS, or an embedded operating system such as VxWorks) includes various software components and/or drivers for controlling and managing general system tasks (e.g., memory management, storage device control, power management, etc.) and facilitates communication between various hardware and software components. 
     Communication module  128  facilitates communication with other devices over one or more external ports  124  and also includes various software components for handling data received by RF circuitry  108  and/or external port  124 . External port  124  (e.g., Universal Serial Bus (USB), FIREWIRE, etc.) is adapted for coupling directly to other devices or indirectly over a network (e.g., the Internet, wireless LAN, etc.). In some embodiments, the external port is a multi-pin (e.g., 30-pin) connector that is the same as, or similar to and/or compatible with the 30-pin connector used in some iPhone®, iPod Touch®, and iPad® devices from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, Calif. In some embodiments, the external port is a Lightning connector that is the same as, or similar to and/or compatible with the Lightning connector used in some iPhone®, iPod Touch®, and iPad® devices from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, Calif. 
     Contact/motion module  130  optionally detects contact with touch-sensitive display system  112  (in conjunction with display controller  156 ) and other touch-sensitive devices (e.g., a touchpad or physical click wheel). Contact/motion module  130  includes various software components for performing various operations related to detection of contact (e.g., by a finger or by a stylus), such as determining if contact has occurred (e.g., detecting a finger-down event), determining an intensity of the contact (e.g., the force or pressure of the contact or a substitute for the force or pressure of the contact), determining if there is movement of the contact and tracking the movement across the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., detecting one or more finger-dragging events), and determining if the contact has ceased (e.g., detecting a finger-up event or a break in contact). Contact/motion module  130  receives contact data from the touch-sensitive surface. Determining movement of the point of contact, which is represented by a series of contact data, optionally includes determining speed (magnitude), velocity (magnitude and direction), and/or an acceleration (a change in magnitude and/or direction) of the point of contact. These operations are, optionally, applied to single contacts (e.g., one finger contacts or stylus contacts) or to multiple simultaneous contacts (e.g., “multitouch”/multiple finger contacts). In some embodiments, contact/motion module  130  and display controller  156  detect contact on a touchpad. 
     Contact/motion module  130  optionally detects a gesture input by a user. Different gestures on the touch-sensitive surface have different contact patterns (e.g., different motions, timings, and/or intensities of detected contacts). Thus, a gesture is, optionally, detected by detecting a particular contact pattern. For example, detecting a finger tap gesture includes detecting a finger-down event followed by detecting a finger-up (lift off) event at the same position (or substantially the same position) as the finger-down event (e.g., at the position of an icon). As another example, detecting a finger swipe gesture on the touch-sensitive surface includes detecting a finger-down event followed by detecting one or more finger-dragging events, and subsequently followed by detecting a finger-up (lift off) event. Similarly, tap, swipe, drag, and other gestures are optionally detected for a stylus by detecting a particular contact pattern for the stylus. 
     In some embodiments, detecting a finger tap gesture depends on the length of time between detecting the finger-down event and the finger-up event, but is independent of the intensity of the finger contact between detecting the finger-down event and the finger-up event. In some embodiments, a tap gesture is detected in accordance with a determination that the length of time between the finger-down event and the finger-up event is less than a predetermined value (e.g., less than 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4 or 0.5 seconds), independent of whether the intensity of the finger contact during the tap meets a given intensity threshold (greater than a nominal contact-detection intensity threshold), such as a light press or deep press intensity threshold. Thus, a finger tap gesture can satisfy particular input criteria that do not require that the characteristic intensity of a contact satisfy a given intensity threshold in order for the particular input criteria to be met. For clarity, the finger contact in a tap gesture typically needs to satisfy a nominal contact-detection intensity threshold, below which the contact is not detected, in order for the finger-down event to be detected. A similar analysis applies to detecting a tap gesture by a stylus or other contact. In cases where the device is capable of detecting a finger or stylus contact hovering over a touch sensitive surface, the nominal contact-detection intensity threshold optionally does not correspond to physical contact between the finger or stylus and the touch sensitive surface. 
     The same concepts apply in an analogous manner to other types of gestures. For example, a swipe gesture, a pinch gesture, a depinch gesture, and/or a long press gesture are optionally detected based on the satisfaction of criteria that are either independent of intensities of contacts included in the gesture, or do not require that contact(s) that perform the gesture reach intensity thresholds in order to be recognized. For example, a swipe gesture is detected based on an amount of movement of one or more contacts; a pinch gesture is detected based on movement of two or more contacts towards each other; a depinch gesture is detected based on movement of two or more contacts away from each other; and a long press gesture is detected based on a duration of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface with less than a threshold amount of movement. As such, the statement that particular gesture recognition criteria do not require that the intensity of the contact(s) meet a respective intensity threshold in order for the particular gesture recognition criteria to be met means that the particular gesture recognition criteria are capable of being satisfied if the contact(s) in the gesture do not reach the respective intensity threshold, and are also capable of being satisfied in circumstances where one or more of the contacts in the gesture do reach or exceed the respective intensity threshold. In some embodiments, a tap gesture is detected based on a determination that the finger-down and finger-up event are detected within a predefined time period, without regard to whether the contact is above or below the respective intensity threshold during the predefined time period, and a swipe gesture is detected based on a determination that the contact movement is greater than a predefined magnitude, even if the contact is above the respective intensity threshold at the end of the contact movement. Even in implementations where detection of a gesture is influenced by the intensity of contacts performing the gesture (e.g., the device detects a long press more quickly when the intensity of the contact is above an intensity threshold or delays detection of a tap input when the intensity of the contact is higher), the detection of those gestures does not require that the contacts reach a particular intensity threshold so long as the criteria for recognizing the gesture can be met in circumstances where the contact does not reach the particular intensity threshold (e.g., even if the amount of time that it takes to recognize the gesture changes). 
     Contact intensity thresholds, duration thresholds, and movement thresholds are, in some circumstances, combined in a variety of different combinations in order to create heuristics for distinguishing two or more different gestures directed to the same input element or region so that multiple different interactions with the same input element are enabled to provide a richer set of user interactions and responses. The statement that a particular set of gesture recognition criteria do not require that the intensity of the contact(s) meet a respective intensity threshold in order for the particular gesture recognition criteria to be met does not preclude the concurrent evaluation of other intensity-dependent gesture recognition criteria to identify other gestures that do have a criterion that is met when a gesture includes a contact with an intensity above the respective intensity threshold. For example, in some circumstances, first gesture recognition criteria for a first gesture—which do not require that the intensity of the contact(s) meet a respective intensity threshold in order for the first gesture recognition criteria to be met—are in competition with second gesture recognition criteria for a second gesture—which are dependent on the contact(s) reaching the respective intensity threshold. In such competitions, the gesture is, optionally, not recognized as meeting the first gesture recognition criteria for the first gesture if the second gesture recognition criteria for the second gesture are met first. For example, if a contact reaches the respective intensity threshold before the contact moves by a predefined amount of movement, a deep press gesture is detected rather than a swipe gesture. Conversely, if the contact moves by the predefined amount of movement before the contact reaches the respective intensity threshold, a swipe gesture is detected rather than a deep press gesture. Even in such circumstances, the first gesture recognition criteria for the first gesture still do not require that the intensity of the contact(s) meet a respective intensity threshold in order for the first gesture recognition criteria to be met because if the contact stayed below the respective intensity threshold until an end of the gesture (e.g., a swipe gesture with a contact that does not increase to an intensity above the respective intensity threshold), the gesture would have been recognized by the first gesture recognition criteria as a swipe gesture. As such, particular gesture recognition criteria that do not require that the intensity of the contact(s) meet a respective intensity threshold in order for the particular gesture recognition criteria to be met will (A) in some circumstances ignore the intensity of the contact with respect to the intensity threshold (e.g. for a tap gesture) and/or (B) in some circumstances still be dependent on the intensity of the contact with respect to the intensity threshold in the sense that the particular gesture recognition criteria (e.g., for a long press gesture) will fail if a competing set of intensity-dependent gesture recognition criteria (e.g., for a deep press gesture) recognize an input as corresponding to an intensity-dependent gesture before the particular gesture recognition criteria recognize a gesture corresponding to the input (e.g., for a long press gesture that is competing with a deep press gesture for recognition). 
     Graphics module  132  includes various known software components for rendering and displaying graphics on touch-sensitive display system  112  or other display, including components for changing the visual impact (e.g., brightness, transparency, saturation, contrast or other visual property) of graphics that are displayed. As used herein, the term “graphics” includes any object that can be displayed to a user, including without limitation text, web pages, icons (such as user-interface objects including soft keys), digital images, videos, animations and the like. 
     In some embodiments, graphics module  132  stores data representing graphics to be used. Each graphic is, optionally, assigned a corresponding code. Graphics module  132  receives, from applications etc., one or more codes specifying graphics to be displayed along with, if necessary, coordinate data and other graphic property data, and then generates screen image data to output to display controller  156 . 
     Haptic feedback module  133  includes various software components for generating instructions (e.g., instructions used by haptic feedback controller  161 ) to produce tactile outputs using tactile output generator(s)  167  at one or more locations on device  100  in response to user interactions with device  100 . 
     Text input module  134 , which is, optionally, a component of graphics module  132 , provides soft keyboards for entering text in various applications (e.g., contacts  137 , e-mail  140 , IM  141 , browser  147 , and any other application that needs text input). 
     GPS module  135  determines the location of the device and provides this information for use in various applications (e.g., to telephone  138  for use in location-based dialing, to camera  143  as picture/video metadata, and to applications that provide location-based services such as weather widgets, local yellow page widgets, and map/navigation widgets). 
     Applications  136  optionally include the following modules (or sets of instructions), or a subset or superset thereof:
         contacts module  137  (sometimes called an address book or contact list);   telephone module  138 ;   video conferencing module  139 ;   e-mail client module  140 ;   instant messaging (IM) module  141 ;   workout support module  142 ;   camera module  143  for still and/or video images;   image management module  144 ;   browser module  147 ;   calendar module  148 ;   widget modules  149 , which optionally include one or more of weather widget  149 - 1 , stocks widget  149 - 2 , calculator widget  149 - 3 , alarm clock widget  149 - 4 , dictionary widget  149 - 5 , and other widgets obtained by the user, as well as user-created widgets  149 - 6 ;   widget creator module  150  for making user-created widgets  149 - 6 ;   search module  151 ;   video and music player module  152 , which is, optionally, made up of a video player module and a music player module;   notes module  153 ;   map module  154 ; and/or   online video module  155 .       

     Examples of other applications  136  that are, optionally, stored in memory  102  include other word processing applications, other image editing applications, drawing applications, presentation applications, JAVA-enabled applications, encryption, digital rights management, voice recognition, and voice replication. 
     In conjunction with touch-sensitive display system  112 , display controller  156 , contact module  130 , graphics module  132 , and text input module  134 , contacts module  137  includes executable instructions to manage an address book or contact list (e.g., stored in application internal state  192  of contacts module  137  in memory  102  or memory  370 ), including: adding name(s) to the address book; deleting name(s) from the address book; associating telephone number(s), e-mail address(es), physical address(es) or other information with a name; associating an image with a name; categorizing and sorting names; providing telephone numbers and/or e-mail addresses to initiate and/or facilitate communications by telephone  138 , video conference  139 , e-mail  140 , or IM  141 ; and so forth. 
     In conjunction with RF circuitry  108 , audio circuitry  110 , speaker  111 , microphone  113 , touch-sensitive display system  112 , display controller  156 , contact module  130 , graphics module  132 , and text input module  134 , telephone module  138  includes executable instructions to enter a sequence of characters corresponding to a telephone number, access one or more telephone numbers in address book  137 , modify a telephone number that has been entered, dial a respective telephone number, conduct a conversation and disconnect or hang up when the conversation is completed. As noted above, the wireless communication optionally uses any of a plurality of communications standards, protocols and technologies. 
     In conjunction with RF circuitry  108 , audio circuitry  110 , speaker  111 , microphone  113 , touch-sensitive display system  112 , display controller  156 , optical sensor(s)  164 , optical sensor controller  158 , contact module  130 , graphics module  132 , text input module  134 , contact list  137 , and telephone module  138 , videoconferencing module  139  includes executable instructions to initiate, conduct, and terminate a video conference between a user and one or more other participants in accordance with user instructions. 
     In conjunction with RF circuitry  108 , touch-sensitive display system  112 , display controller  156 , contact module  130 , graphics module  132 , and text input module  134 , e-mail client module  140  includes executable instructions to create, send, receive, and manage e-mail in response to user instructions. In conjunction with image management module  144 , e-mail client module  140  makes it very easy to create and send e-mails with still or video images taken with camera module  143 . 
     In conjunction with RF circuitry  108 , touch-sensitive display system  112 , display controller  156 , contact module  130 , graphics module  132 , and text input module  134 , the instant messaging module  141  includes executable instructions to enter a sequence of characters corresponding to an instant message, to modify previously entered characters, to transmit a respective instant message (for example, using a Short Message Service (SMS) or Multimedia Message Service (MMS) protocol for telephony-based instant messages or using XMPP, SIMPLE, Apple Push Notification Service (APNs) or IMPS for Internet-based instant messages), to receive instant messages, and to view received instant messages. In some embodiments, transmitted and/or received instant messages optionally include graphics, photos, audio files, video files and/or other attachments as are supported in a MMS and/or an Enhanced Messaging Service (EMS). As used herein, “instant messaging” refers to both telephony-based messages (e.g., messages sent using SMS or MMS) and Internet-based messages (e.g., messages sent using XMPP, SIMPLE, APNs, or IMPS). 
     In conjunction with RF circuitry  108 , touch-sensitive display system  112 , display controller  156 , contact module  130 , graphics module  132 , text input module  134 , GPS module  135 , map module  154 , and video and music player module  152 , workout support module  142  includes executable instructions to create workouts (e.g., with time, distance, and/or calorie burning goals); communicate with workout sensors (in sports devices and smart watches); receive workout sensor data; calibrate sensors used to monitor a workout; select and play music for a workout; and display, store and transmit workout data. 
     In conjunction with touch-sensitive display system  112 , display controller  156 , optical sensor(s)  164 , optical sensor controller  158 , contact module  130 , graphics module  132 , and image management module  144 , camera module  143  includes executable instructions to capture still images or video (including a video stream) and store them into memory  102 , modify characteristics of a still image or video, and/or delete a still image or video from memory  102 . 
     In conjunction with touch-sensitive display system  112 , display controller  156 , contact module  130 , graphics module  132 , text input module  134 , and camera module  143 , image management module  144  includes executable instructions to arrange, modify (e.g., edit), or otherwise manipulate, label, delete, present (e.g., in a digital slide show or album), and store still and/or video images. 
     In conjunction with RF circuitry  108 , touch-sensitive display system  112 , display system controller  156 , contact module  130 , graphics module  132 , and text input module  134 , browser module  147  includes executable instructions to browse the Internet in accordance with user instructions, including searching, linking to, receiving, and displaying web pages or portions thereof, as well as attachments and other files linked to web pages. 
     In conjunction with RF circuitry  108 , touch-sensitive display system  112 , display system controller  156 , contact module  130 , graphics module  132 , text input module  134 , e-mail client module  140 , and browser module  147 , calendar module  148  includes executable instructions to create, display, modify, and store calendars and data associated with calendars (e.g., calendar entries, to do lists, etc.) in accordance with user instructions. 
     In conjunction with RF circuitry  108 , touch-sensitive display system  112 , display system controller  156 , contact module  130 , graphics module  132 , text input module  134 , and browser module  147 , widget modules  149  are mini-applications that are, optionally, downloaded and used by a user (e.g., weather widget  149 - 1 , stocks widget  149 - 2 , calculator widget  149 - 3 , alarm clock widget  149 - 4 , and dictionary widget  149 - 5 ) or created by the user (e.g., user-created widget  149 - 6 ). In some embodiments, a widget includes an HTML (Hypertext Markup Language) file, a CSS (Cascading Style Sheets) file, and a JavaScript file. In some embodiments, a widget includes an XML (Extensible Markup Language) file and a JavaScript file (e.g., Yahoo! Widgets). 
     In conjunction with RF circuitry  108 , touch-sensitive display system  112 , display system controller  156 , contact module  130 , graphics module  132 , text input module  134 , and browser module  147 , the widget creator module  150  includes executable instructions to create widgets (e.g., turning a user-specified portion of a web page into a widget). 
     In conjunction with touch-sensitive display system  112 , display system controller  156 , contact module  130 , graphics module  132 , and text input module  134 , search module  151  includes executable instructions to search for text, music, sound, image, video, and/or other files in memory  102  that match one or more search criteria (e.g., one or more user-specified search terms) in accordance with user instructions. 
     In conjunction with touch-sensitive display system  112 , display system controller  156 , contact module  130 , graphics module  132 , audio circuitry  110 , speaker  111 , RF circuitry  108 , and browser module  147 , video and music player module  152  includes executable instructions that allow the user to download and play back recorded music and other sound files stored in one or more file formats, such as MP3 or AAC files, and executable instructions to display, present or otherwise play back videos (e.g., on touch-sensitive display system  112 , or on an external display connected wirelessly or via external port  124 ). In some embodiments, device  100  optionally includes the functionality of an MP3 player, such as an iPod (trademark of Apple Inc.). 
     In conjunction with touch-sensitive display system  112 , display controller  156 , contact module  130 , graphics module  132 , and text input module  134 , notes module  153  includes executable instructions to create and manage notes, to do lists, and the like in accordance with user instructions. 
     In conjunction with RF circuitry  108 , touch-sensitive display system  112 , display system controller  156 , contact module  130 , graphics module  132 , text input module  134 , GPS module  135 , and browser module  147 , map module  154  includes executable instructions to receive, display, modify, and store maps and data associated with maps (e.g., driving directions; data on stores and other points of interest at or near a particular location; and other location-based data) in accordance with user instructions. 
     In conjunction with touch-sensitive display system  112 , display system controller  156 , contact module  130 , graphics module  132 , audio circuitry  110 , speaker  111 , RF circuitry  108 , text input module  134 , e-mail client module  140 , and browser module  147 , online video module  155  includes executable instructions that allow the user to access, browse, receive (e.g., by streaming and/or download), play back (e.g., on the touch screen  112 , or on an external display connected wirelessly or via external port  124 ), send an e-mail with a link to a particular online video, and otherwise manage online videos in one or more file formats, such as H.264. In some embodiments, instant messaging module  141 , rather than e-mail client module  140 , is used to send a link to a particular online video. 
     Each of the above identified modules and applications correspond to a set of executable instructions for performing one or more functions described above and the methods described in this application (e.g., the computer-implemented methods and other information processing methods described herein). These modules (i.e., sets of instructions) need not be implemented as separate software programs, procedures or modules, and thus various subsets of these modules are, optionally, combined or otherwise re-arranged in various embodiments. In some embodiments, memory  102  optionally stores a subset of the modules and data structures identified above. Furthermore, memory  102  optionally stores additional modules and data structures not described above. 
     In some embodiments, device  100  is a device where operation of a predefined set of functions on the device is performed exclusively through a touch screen and/or a touchpad. By using a touch screen and/or a touchpad as the primary input control device for operation of device  100 , the number of physical input control devices (such as push buttons, dials, and the like) on device  100  is, optionally, reduced. 
     The predefined set of functions that are performed exclusively through a touch screen and/or a touchpad optionally include navigation between user interfaces. In some embodiments, the touchpad, when touched by the user, navigates device  100  to a main, home, or root menu from any user interface that is displayed on device  100 . In such embodiments, a “menu button” is implemented using a touchpad. In some other embodiments, the menu button is a physical push button or other physical input control device instead of a touchpad. 
       FIG. 1B  is a block diagram illustrating example components for event handling in accordance with some embodiments. In some embodiments, memory  102  (in  FIG. 1A ) or  370  ( FIG. 3 ) includes event sorter  170  (e.g., in operating system  126 ) and a respective application  136 - 1  (e.g., any of the aforementioned applications  136 ,  137 - 155 ,  380 - 390 ). 
     Event sorter  170  receives event information and determines the application  136 - 1  and application view  191  of application  136 - 1  to which to deliver the event information. Event sorter  170  includes event monitor  171  and event dispatcher module  174 . In some embodiments, application  136 - 1  includes application internal state  192 , which indicates the current application view(s) displayed on touch-sensitive display system  112  when the application is active or executing. In some embodiments, device/global internal state  157  is used by event sorter  170  to determine which application(s) is (are) currently active, and application internal state  192  is used by event sorter  170  to determine application views  191  to which to deliver event information. 
     In some embodiments, application internal state  192  includes additional information, such as one or more of: resume information to be used when application  136 - 1  resumes execution, user interface state information that indicates information being displayed or that is ready for display by application  136 - 1 , a state queue for enabling the user to go back to a prior state or view of application  136 - 1 , and a redo/undo queue of previous actions taken by the user. 
     Event monitor  171  receives event information from peripherals interface  118 . Event information includes information about a sub-event (e.g., a user touch on touch-sensitive display system  112 , as part of a multi-touch gesture). Peripherals interface  118  transmits information it receives from I/O subsystem  106  or a sensor, such as proximity sensor  166 , accelerometer(s)  168 , and/or microphone  113  (through audio circuitry  110 ). Information that peripherals interface  118  receives from I/O subsystem  106  includes information from touch-sensitive display system  112  or a touch-sensitive surface. 
     In some embodiments, event monitor  171  sends requests to the peripherals interface  118  at predetermined intervals. In response, peripherals interface  118  transmits event information. In other embodiments, peripheral interface  118  transmits event information only when there is a significant event (e.g., receiving an input above a predetermined noise threshold and/or for more than a predetermined duration). 
     In some embodiments, event sorter  170  also includes a hit view determination module  172  and/or an active event recognizer determination module  173 . 
     Hit view determination module  172  provides software procedures for determining where a sub-event has taken place within one or more views, when touch-sensitive display system  112  displays more than one view. Views are made up of controls and other elements that a user can see on the display. 
     Another aspect of the user interface associated with an application is a set of views, sometimes herein called application views or user interface windows, in which information is displayed and touch-based gestures occur. The application views (of a respective application) in which a touch is detected optionally correspond to programmatic levels within a programmatic or view hierarchy of the application. For example, the lowest level view in which a touch is detected is, optionally, called the hit view, and the set of events that are recognized as proper inputs are, optionally, determined based, at least in part, on the hit view of the initial touch that begins a touch-based gesture. 
     Hit view determination module  172  receives information related to sub-events of a touch-based gesture. When an application has multiple views organized in a hierarchy, hit view determination module  172  identifies a hit view as the lowest view in the hierarchy which should handle the sub-event. In most circumstances, the hit view is the lowest level view in which an initiating sub-event occurs (i.e., the first sub-event in the sequence of sub-events that form an event or potential event). Once the hit view is identified by the hit view determination module, the hit view typically receives all sub-events related to the same touch or input source for which it was identified as the hit view. 
     Active event recognizer determination module  173  determines which view or views within a view hierarchy should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In some embodiments, active event recognizer determination module  173  determines that only the hit view should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In other embodiments, active event recognizer determination module  173  determines that all views that include the physical location of a sub-event are actively involved views, and therefore determines that all actively involved views should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In other embodiments, even if touch sub-events were entirely confined to the area associated with one particular view, views higher in the hierarchy would still remain as actively involved views. 
     Event dispatcher module  174  dispatches the event information to an event recognizer (e.g., event recognizer  180 ). In embodiments including active event recognizer determination module  173 , event dispatcher module  174  delivers the event information to an event recognizer determined by active event recognizer determination module  173 . In some embodiments, event dispatcher module  174  stores in an event queue the event information, which is retrieved by a respective event receiver module  182 . 
     In some embodiments, operating system  126  includes event sorter  170 . Alternatively, application  136 - 1  includes event sorter  170 . In yet other embodiments, event sorter  170  is a stand-alone module, or a part of another module stored in memory  102 , such as contact/motion module  130 . 
     In some embodiments, application  136 - 1  includes a plurality of event handlers  190  and one or more application views  191 , each of which includes instructions for handling touch events that occur within a respective view of the application&#39;s user interface. Each application view  191  of the application  136 - 1  includes one or more event recognizers  180 . Typically, a respective application view  191  includes a plurality of event recognizers  180 . In other embodiments, one or more of event recognizers  180  are part of a separate module, such as a user interface kit or a higher level object from which application  136 - 1  inherits methods and other properties. In some embodiments, a respective event handler  190  includes one or more of: data updater  176 , object updater  177 , GUI updater  178 , and/or event data  179  received from event sorter  170 . Event handler  190  optionally utilizes or calls data updater  176 , object updater  177  or GUI updater  178  to update the application internal state  192 . Alternatively, one or more of the application views  191  includes one or more respective event handlers  190 . Also, in some embodiments, one or more of data updater  176 , object updater  177 , and GUI updater  178  are included in a respective application view  191 . 
     A respective event recognizer  180  receives event information (e.g., event data  179 ) from event sorter  170 , and identifies an event from the event information. Event recognizer  180  includes event receiver  182  and event comparator  184 . In some embodiments, event recognizer  180  also includes at least a subset of: metadata  183 , and event delivery instructions  188  (which optionally include sub-event delivery instructions). 
     Event receiver  182  receives event information from event sorter  170 . The event information includes information about a sub-event, for example, a touch or a touch movement. Depending on the sub-event, the event information also includes additional information, such as location of the sub-event. When the sub-event concerns motion of a touch, the event information optionally also includes speed and direction of the sub-event. In some embodiments, events include rotation of the device from one orientation to another (e.g., from a portrait orientation to a landscape orientation, or vice versa), and the event information includes corresponding information about the current orientation (also called device attitude) of the device. 
     Event comparator  184  compares the event information to predefined event or sub-event definitions and, based on the comparison, determines an event or sub-event, or determines or updates the state of an event or sub-event. In some embodiments, event comparator  184  includes event definitions  186 . Event definitions  186  contain definitions of events (e.g., predefined sequences of sub-events), for example, event  1  ( 187 - 1 ), event  2  ( 187 - 2 ), and others. In some embodiments, sub-events in an event  187  include, for example, touch begin, touch end, touch movement, touch cancellation, and multiple touching. In one example, the definition for event  1  ( 187 - 1 ) is a double tap on a displayed object. The double tap, for example, comprises a first touch (touch begin) on the displayed object for a predetermined phase, a first lift-off (touch end) for a predetermined phase, a second touch (touch begin) on the displayed object for a predetermined phase, and a second lift-off (touch end) for a predetermined phase. In another example, the definition for event  2  ( 187 - 2 ) is a dragging on a displayed object. The dragging, for example, comprises a touch (or contact) on the displayed object for a predetermined phase, a movement of the touch across touch-sensitive display system  112 , and lift-off of the touch (touch end). In some embodiments, the event also includes information for one or more associated event handlers  190 . 
     In some embodiments, event definition  187  includes a definition of an event for a respective user-interface object. In some embodiments, event comparator  184  performs a hit test to determine which user-interface object is associated with a sub-event. For example, in an application view in which three user-interface objects are displayed on touch-sensitive display system  112 , when a touch is detected on touch-sensitive display system  112 , event comparator  184  performs a hit test to determine which of the three user-interface objects is associated with the touch (sub-event). If each displayed object is associated with a respective event handler  190 , the event comparator uses the result of the hit test to determine which event handler  190  should be activated. For example, event comparator  184  selects an event handler associated with the sub-event and the object triggering the hit test. 
     In some embodiments, the definition for a respective event  187  also includes delayed actions that delay delivery of the event information until after it has been determined whether the sequence of sub-events does or does not correspond to the event recognizer&#39;s event type. 
     When a respective event recognizer  180  determines that the series of sub-events do not match any of the events in event definitions  186 , the respective event recognizer  180  enters an event impossible, event failed, or event ended state, after which it disregards subsequent sub-events of the touch-based gesture. In this situation, other event recognizers, if any, that remain active for the hit view continue to track and process sub-events of an ongoing touch-based gesture. 
     In some embodiments, a respective event recognizer  180  includes metadata  183  with configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate how the event delivery system should perform sub-event delivery to actively involved event recognizers. In some embodiments, metadata  183  includes configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate how event recognizers interact, or are enabled to interact, with one another. In some embodiments, metadata  183  includes configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate whether sub-events are delivered to varying levels in the view or programmatic hierarchy. 
     In some embodiments, a respective event recognizer  180  activates event handler  190  associated with an event when one or more particular sub-events of an event are recognized. In some embodiments, a respective event recognizer  180  delivers event information associated with the event to event handler  190 . Activating an event handler  190  is distinct from sending (and deferred sending) sub-events to a respective hit view. In some embodiments, event recognizer  180  throws a flag associated with the recognized event, and event handler  190  associated with the flag catches the flag and performs a predefined process. 
     In some embodiments, event delivery instructions  188  include sub-event delivery instructions that deliver event information about a sub-event without activating an event handler. Instead, the sub-event delivery instructions deliver event information to event handlers associated with the series of sub-events or to actively involved views. Event handlers associated with the series of sub-events or with actively involved views receive the event information and perform a predetermined process. 
     In some embodiments, data updater  176  creates and updates data used in application  136 - 1 . For example, data updater  176  updates the telephone number used in contacts module  137 , or stores a video file used in video and music player module  152 . In some embodiments, object updater  177  creates and updates objects used in application  136 - 1 . For example, object updater  177  creates a new user-interface object or updates the position of a user-interface object. GUI updater  178  updates the GUI. For example, GUI updater  178  prepares display information and sends it to graphics module  132  for display on a touch-sensitive display. 
     In some embodiments, event handler(s)  190  includes or has access to data updater  176 , object updater  177 , and GUI updater  178 . In some embodiments, data updater  176 , object updater  177 , and GUI updater  178  are included in a single module of a respective application  136 - 1  or application view  191 . In other embodiments, they are included in two or more software modules. 
     It shall be understood that the foregoing discussion regarding event handling of user touches on touch-sensitive displays also applies to other forms of user inputs to operate multifunction devices  100  with input-devices, not all of which are initiated on touch screens. For example, mouse movement and mouse button presses, optionally coordinated with single or multiple keyboard presses or holds; contact movements such as taps, drags, scrolls, etc., on touch-pads; pen stylus inputs; movement of the device; oral instructions; detected eye movements; biometric inputs; and/or any combination thereof are optionally utilized as inputs corresponding to sub-events which define an event to be recognized. 
       FIG. 2  illustrates a portable multifunction device  100  having a touch screen (e.g., touch-sensitive display system  112 ,  FIG. 1A ) in accordance with some embodiments. The touch screen optionally displays one or more graphics within user interface (UI)  200 . In these embodiments, as well as others described below, a user is enabled to select one or more of the graphics by making a gesture on the graphics, for example, with one or more fingers  202  (not drawn to scale in the figure) or one or more styluses  203  (not drawn to scale in the figure). In some embodiments, selection of one or more graphics occurs when the user breaks contact with the one or more graphics. In some embodiments, the gesture optionally includes one or more taps, one or more swipes (from left to right, right to left, upward and/or downward) and/or a rolling of a finger (from right to left, left to right, upward and/or downward) that has made contact with device  100 . In some implementations or circumstances, inadvertent contact with a graphic does not select the graphic. For example, a swipe gesture that sweeps over an application icon optionally does not select the corresponding application when the gesture corresponding to selection is a tap. 
     Device  100  optionally also includes one or more physical buttons, such as “home” or menu button  204 . As described previously, menu button  204  is, optionally, used to navigate to any application  136  in a set of applications that are, optionally executed on device  100 . Alternatively, in some embodiments, the menu button is implemented as a soft key in a GUI displayed on the touch-screen display. 
     In some embodiments, device  100  includes the touch-screen display, menu button  204  (sometimes called home button  204 ), push button  206  for powering the device on/off and locking the device, volume adjustment button(s)  208 , Subscriber Identity Module (SIM) card slot  210 , head set jack  212 , and docking/charging external port  124 . Push button  206  is, optionally, used to turn the power on/off on the device by depressing the button and holding the button in the depressed state for a predefined time interval; to lock the device by depressing the button and releasing the button before the predefined time interval has elapsed; and/or to unlock the device or initiate an unlock process. In some embodiments, device  100  also accepts verbal input for activation or deactivation of some functions through microphone  113 . Device  100  also, optionally, includes one or more contact intensity sensors  165  for detecting intensities of contacts on touch-sensitive display system  112  and/or one or more tactile output generators  167  for generating tactile outputs for a user of device  100 . 
       FIG. 3  is a block diagram of an example multifunction device with a display and a touch-sensitive surface in accordance with some embodiments. Device  300  need not be portable. In some embodiments, device  300  is a laptop computer, a desktop computer, a tablet computer, a multimedia player device, a navigation device, an educational device (such as a child&#39;s learning toy), a gaming system, or a control device (e.g., a home or industrial controller). Device  300  typically includes one or more processing units (CPU&#39;s)  310 , one or more network or other communications interfaces  360 , memory  370 , and one or more communication buses  320  for interconnecting these components. Communication buses  320  optionally include circuitry (sometimes called a chipset) that interconnects and controls communications between system components. Device  300  includes input/output (I/O) interface  330  comprising display  340 , which is typically a touch-screen display. I/O interface  330  also optionally includes a keyboard and/or mouse (or other pointing device)  350  and touchpad  355 , tactile output generator  357  for generating tactile outputs on device  300  (e.g., similar to tactile output generator(s)  167  described above with reference to  FIG. 1A ), sensors  359  (e.g., optical, acceleration, proximity, touch-sensitive, and/or contact intensity sensors similar to contact intensity sensor(s)  165  described above with reference to  FIG. 1A ). Memory  370  includes high-speed random access memory, such as DRAM, SRAM, DDR RAM or other random access solid state memory devices; and optionally includes non-volatile memory, such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, optical disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid state storage devices. Memory  370  optionally includes one or more storage devices remotely located from CPU(s)  310 . In some embodiments, memory  370  stores programs, modules, and data structures analogous to the programs, modules, and data structures stored in memory  102  of portable multifunction device  100  ( FIG. 1A ), or a subset thereof. Furthermore, memory  370  optionally stores additional programs, modules, and data structures not present in memory  102  of portable multifunction device  100 . For example, memory  370  of device  300  optionally stores drawing module  380 , presentation module  382 , word processing module  384 , website creation module  386 , disk authoring module  388 , and/or spreadsheet module  390 , while memory  102  of portable multifunction device  100  ( FIG. 1A ) optionally does not store these modules. 
     Each of the above identified elements in  FIG. 3  are, optionally, stored in one or more of the previously mentioned memory devices. Each of the above identified modules corresponds to a set of instructions for performing a function described above. The above identified modules or programs (i.e., sets of instructions) need not be implemented as separate software programs, procedures or modules, and thus various subsets of these modules are, optionally, combined or otherwise re-arranged in various embodiments. In some embodiments, memory  370  optionally stores a subset of the modules and data structures identified above. Furthermore, memory  370  optionally stores additional modules and data structures not described above. 
     Attention is now directed towards embodiments of user interfaces (“UI”) that are, optionally, implemented on portable multifunction device  100 . 
       FIG. 4A  illustrates an example user interface for a menu of applications on portable multifunction device  100  in accordance with some embodiments. Similar user interfaces are, optionally, implemented on device  300 . In some embodiments, user interface  400  includes the following elements, or a subset or superset thereof:
         Signal strength indicator(s) for wireless communication(s), such as cellular and Wi-Fi signals;   Time;   a Bluetooth indicator;   a Battery status indicator;   Tray  408  with icons for frequently used applications, such as:
           Icon  416  for telephone module  138 , labeled “Phone,” which optionally includes an indicator  414  of the number of missed calls or voicemail messages;   Icon  418  for e-mail client module  140 , labeled “Mail,” which optionally includes an indicator  410  of the number of unread e-mails;   Icon  420  for browser module  147 , labeled “Browser;” and   Icon  422  for video and music player module  152 , labeled “Music;” and   
           Icons for other applications, such as:
           Icon  424  for IM module  141 , labeled “Messages;”   Icon  426  for calendar module  148 , labeled “Calendar;”   Icon  428  for image management module  144 , labeled “Photos;”   Icon  430  for camera module  143 , labeled “Camera;”   Icon  432  for online video module  155 , labeled “Online Video;”   Icon  434  for stocks widget  149 - 2 , labeled “Stocks;”   Icon  436  for map module  154 , labeled “Maps;”   Icon  438  for weather widget  149 - 1 , labeled “Weather;”   Icon  440  for alarm clock widget  149 - 4 , labeled “Clock;”   Icon  442  for workout support module  142 , labeled “Workout Support;”   Icon  444  for notes module  153 , labeled “Notes;” and   Icon  446  for a settings application or module, which provides access to settings for device  100  and its various applications  136 .   
               

     It should be noted that the icon labels illustrated in  FIG. 4A  are merely examples. For example, other labels are, optionally, used for various application icons. In some embodiments, a label for a respective application icon includes a name of an application corresponding to the respective application icon. In some embodiments, a label for a particular application icon is distinct from a name of an application corresponding to the particular application icon. 
       FIG. 4B  illustrates an example user interface on a device (e.g., device  300 ,  FIG. 3 ) with a touch-sensitive surface  451  (e.g., a tablet or touchpad  355 ,  FIG. 3 ) that is separate from the display  450 . Device  300  also, optionally, includes one or more contact intensity sensors (e.g., one or more of sensors  357 ) for detecting intensity of contacts on touch-sensitive surface  451  and/or one or more tactile output generators  359  for generating tactile outputs for a user of device  300 . 
     Although many of the examples that follow will be given with reference to inputs on touch screen display  112  (where the touch sensitive surface and the display are combined), in some embodiments, the device detects inputs on a touch-sensitive surface that is separate from the display, as shown in  FIG. 4B . In some embodiments, the touch-sensitive surface (e.g.,  451  in  FIG. 4B ) has a primary axis (e.g.,  452  in  FIG. 4B ) that corresponds to a primary axis (e.g.,  453  in  FIG. 4B ) on the display (e.g.,  450 ). In accordance with these embodiments, the device detects contacts (e.g.,  460  and  462  in  FIG. 4B ) with the touch-sensitive surface  451  at locations that correspond to respective locations on the display (e.g., in  FIG. 4B, 460  corresponds to  468  and  462  corresponds to  470 ). In this way, user inputs (e.g., contacts  460  and  462 , and movements thereof) detected by the device on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g.,  451  in  FIG. 4B ) are used by the device to manipulate the user interface on the display (e.g.,  450  in  FIG. 4B ) of the multifunction device when the touch-sensitive surface is separate from the display. It should be understood that similar methods are, optionally, used for other user interfaces described herein. 
     Additionally, while the following examples are given primarily with reference to finger inputs (e.g., finger contacts, finger tap gestures, finger swipe gestures, etc.), it should be understood that, in some embodiments, one or more of the finger inputs are replaced with input from another input device (e.g., a mouse based input or a stylus input). For example, a swipe gesture is, optionally, replaced with a mouse click (e.g., instead of a contact) followed by movement of the cursor along the path of the swipe (e.g., instead of movement of the contact). As another example, a tap gesture is, optionally, replaced with a mouse click while the cursor is located over the location of the tap gesture (e.g., instead of detection of the contact followed by ceasing to detect the contact). Similarly, when multiple user inputs are simultaneously detected, it should be understood that multiple computer mice are, optionally, used simultaneously, or a mouse and finger contacts are, optionally, used simultaneously. 
     As used herein, the term “focus selector” refers to an input element that indicates a current part of a user interface with which a user is interacting. In some implementations that include a cursor or other location marker, the cursor acts as a “focus selector,” so that when an input (e.g., a press input) is detected on a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touchpad  355  in  FIG. 3  or touch-sensitive surface  451  in  FIG. 4B ) while the cursor is over a particular user interface element (e.g., a button, window, slider or other user interface element), the particular user interface element is adjusted in accordance with the detected input. In some implementations that include a touch-screen display (e.g., touch-sensitive display system  112  in  FIG. 1A  or the touch screen in  FIG. 4A ) that enables direct interaction with user interface elements on the touch-screen display, a detected contact on the touch-screen acts as a “focus selector,” so that when an input (e.g., a press input by the contact) is detected on the touch-screen display at a location of a particular user interface element (e.g., a button, window, slider or other user interface element), the particular user interface element is adjusted in accordance with the detected input. In some implementations, focus is moved from one region of a user interface to another region of the user interface without corresponding movement of a cursor or movement of a contact on a touch-screen display (e.g., by using a tab key or arrow keys to move focus from one button to another button); in these implementations, the focus selector moves in accordance with movement of focus between different regions of the user interface. Without regard to the specific form taken by the focus selector, the focus selector is generally the user interface element (or contact on a touch-screen display) that is controlled by the user so as to communicate the user&#39;s intended interaction with the user interface (e.g., by indicating, to the device, the element of the user interface with which the user is intending to interact). For example, the location of a focus selector (e.g., a cursor, a contact, or a selection box) over a respective button while a press input is detected on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a touchpad or touch screen) will indicate that the user is intending to activate the respective button (as opposed to other user interface elements shown on a display of the device). 
     As used in the specification and claims, the term “intensity” of a contact on a touch-sensitive surface refers to the force or pressure (force per unit area) of a contact (e.g., a finger contact or a stylus contact) on the touch-sensitive surface, or to a substitute (proxy) for the force or pressure of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface. The intensity of a contact has a range of values that includes at least four distinct values and more typically includes hundreds of distinct values (e.g., at least 256). Intensity of a contact is, optionally, determined (or measured) using various approaches and various sensors or combinations of sensors. For example, one or more force sensors underneath or adjacent to the touch-sensitive surface are, optionally, used to measure force at various points on the touch-sensitive surface. In some implementations, force measurements from multiple force sensors are combined (e.g., a weighted average or a sum) to determine an estimated force of a contact. Similarly, a pressure-sensitive tip of a stylus is, optionally, used to determine a pressure of the stylus on the touch-sensitive surface. Alternatively, the size of the contact area detected on the touch-sensitive surface and/or changes thereto, the capacitance of the touch-sensitive surface proximate to the contact and/or changes thereto, and/or the resistance of the touch-sensitive surface proximate to the contact and/or changes thereto are, optionally, used as a substitute for the force or pressure of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface. In some implementations, the substitute measurements for contact force or pressure are used directly to determine whether an intensity threshold has been exceeded (e.g., the intensity threshold is described in units corresponding to the substitute measurements). In some implementations, the substitute measurements for contact force or pressure are converted to an estimated force or pressure and the estimated force or pressure is used to determine whether an intensity threshold has been exceeded (e.g., the intensity threshold is a pressure threshold measured in units of pressure). Using the intensity of a contact as an attribute of a user input allows for user access to additional device functionality that will, in some circumstances, otherwise not be readily accessible by the user on a reduced-size device with limited real estate for displaying affordances (e.g., on a touch-sensitive display) and/or receiving user input (e.g., via a touch-sensitive display, a touch-sensitive surface, or a physical/mechanical control such as a knob or a button). 
     In some embodiments, contact/motion module  130  uses a set of one or more intensity thresholds to determine whether an operation has been performed by a user (e.g., to determine whether a user has “clicked” on an icon). In some embodiments, at least a subset of the intensity thresholds are determined in accordance with software parameters (e.g., the intensity thresholds are not determined by the activation thresholds of particular physical actuators and can be adjusted without changing the physical hardware of device  100 ). For example, a mouse “click” threshold of a trackpad or touch-screen display can be set to any of a large range of predefined thresholds values without changing the trackpad or touch-screen display hardware. Additionally, in some implementations a user of the device is provided with software settings for adjusting one or more of the set of intensity thresholds (e.g., by adjusting individual intensity thresholds and/or by adjusting a plurality of intensity thresholds at once with a system-level click “intensity” parameter). 
     As used in the specification and claims, the term “characteristic intensity” of a contact refers to a characteristic of the contact based on one or more intensities of the contact. In some embodiments, the characteristic intensity is based on multiple intensity samples. The characteristic intensity is, optionally, based on a predefined number of intensity samples, or a set of intensity samples collected during a predetermined time period (e.g., 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10 seconds) relative to a predefined event (e.g., after detecting the contact, prior to detecting liftoff of the contact, before or after detecting a start of movement of the contact, prior to detecting an end of the contact, before or after detecting an increase in intensity of the contact, and/or before or after detecting a decrease in intensity of the contact). A characteristic intensity of a contact is, optionally based on one or more of: a maximum value of the intensities of the contact, a mean value of the intensities of the contact, an average value of the intensities of the contact, a top 10 percentile value of the intensities of the contact, a value at the half maximum of the intensities of the contact, a value at the 90 percent maximum of the intensities of the contact, a value produced by low-pass filtering the intensity of the contact over a predefined period or starting at a predefined time, or the like. In some embodiments, the duration of the contact is used in determining the characteristic intensity (e.g., when the characteristic intensity is an average of the intensity of the contact over time). In some embodiments, the characteristic intensity is compared to a set of one or more intensity thresholds to determine whether an operation has been performed by a user. For example, the set of one or more intensity thresholds optionally include a first intensity threshold and a second intensity threshold. In this example, a contact with a characteristic intensity that does not exceed the first threshold results in a first operation, a contact with a characteristic intensity that exceeds the first intensity threshold and does not exceed the second intensity threshold results in a second operation, and a contact with a characteristic intensity that exceeds the second intensity threshold results in a third operation. In some embodiments, a comparison between the characteristic intensity and one or more intensity thresholds is used to determine whether or not to perform one or more operations (e.g., whether to perform a respective option or forgo performing the respective operation) rather than being used to determine whether to perform a first operation or a second operation. 
     In some embodiments, a portion of a gesture is identified for purposes of determining a characteristic intensity. For example, a touch-sensitive surface optionally receives a continuous swipe contact transitioning from a start location and reaching an end location (e.g., a drag gesture), at which point the intensity of the contact increases. In this example, the characteristic intensity of the contact at the end location is, in some circumstances, based on only a portion of the continuous swipe contact, and not the entire swipe contact (e.g., only the portion of the swipe contact at the end location). In some embodiments, a smoothing algorithm is, optionally, applied to the intensities of the swipe contact prior to determining the characteristic intensity of the contact. For example, the smoothing algorithm optionally includes one or more of: an unweighted sliding-average smoothing algorithm, a triangular smoothing algorithm, a median filter smoothing algorithm, and/or an exponential smoothing algorithm. In some circumstances, these smoothing algorithms eliminate narrow spikes or dips in the intensities of the swipe contact for purposes of determining a characteristic intensity. 
     The user interface figures described herein optionally include various intensity diagrams (e.g.,  5530 ) that show the current intensity of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface relative to one or more intensity thresholds (e.g., a contact detection intensity threshold IT 0 , a light press intensity threshold IT L , a deep press intensity threshold IT D  (e.g., that is at least initially higher than IT L ), and/or one or more other intensity thresholds (e.g., an intensity threshold IT H  that is lower than IT L )). This intensity diagram is typically not part of the displayed user interface, but is provided to aid in the interpretation of the figures. In some embodiments, the light press intensity threshold corresponds to an intensity at which the device will perform operations typically associated with clicking a button of a physical mouse or a trackpad. In some embodiments, the deep press intensity threshold corresponds to an intensity at which the device will perform operations that are different from operations typically associated with clicking a button of a physical mouse or a trackpad. In some embodiments, when a contact is detected with a characteristic intensity below the light press intensity threshold (e.g., and above a nominal contact-detection intensity threshold IT 0  below which the contact is no longer detected), the device will move a focus selector in accordance with movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface without performing an operation associated with the light press intensity threshold or the deep press intensity threshold. Generally, unless otherwise stated, these intensity thresholds are consistent between different sets of user interface figures. 
     In some embodiments, the response of the device to inputs detected by the device depends on criteria based on the contact intensity during the input. For example, for some “light press” inputs, the intensity of a contact exceeding a first intensity threshold during the input triggers a first response. In some embodiments, the response of the device to inputs detected by the device depends on criteria that include both the contact intensity during the input and time-based criteria. For example, for some “deep press” inputs, the intensity of a contact exceeding a second intensity threshold during the input, greater than the first intensity threshold for a light press, triggers a second response only if a delay time has elapsed between meeting the first intensity threshold and meeting the second intensity threshold. This delay time is typically less than 200 ms (milliseconds) in duration (e.g., 40, 100, or 120 ms, depending on the magnitude of the second intensity threshold, with the delay time increasing as the second intensity threshold increases). This delay time helps to avoid accidental recognition of deep press inputs. As another example, for some “deep press” inputs, there is a reduced-sensitivity time period that occurs after the time at which the first intensity threshold is met. During the reduced-sensitivity time period, the second intensity threshold is increased. This temporary increase in the second intensity threshold also helps to avoid accidental deep press inputs. For other deep press inputs, the response to detection of a deep press input does not depend on time-based criteria. 
     In some embodiments, one or more of the input intensity thresholds and/or the corresponding outputs vary based on one or more factors, such as user settings, contact motion, input timing, application running, rate at which the intensity is applied, number of concurrent inputs, user history, environmental factors (e.g., ambient noise), focus selector position, and the like. Example factors are described in U.S. patent application Ser. Nos. 14/399,606 and 14/624,296, which are incorporated by reference herein in their entireties. 
     For example,  FIG. 4C  illustrates a dynamic intensity threshold  480  that changes over time based in part on the intensity of touch input  476  over time. Dynamic intensity threshold  480  is a sum of two components, first component  474  that decays over time after a predefined delay time p 1  from when touch input  476  is initially detected, and second component  478  that trails the intensity of touch input  476  over time. The initial high intensity threshold of first component  474  reduces accidental triggering of a “deep press” response, while still allowing an immediate “deep press” response if touch input  476  provides sufficient intensity. Second component  478  reduces unintentional triggering of a “deep press” response by gradual intensity fluctuations of in a touch input. In some embodiments, when touch input  476  satisfies dynamic intensity threshold  480  (e.g., at point  481  in  FIG. 4C ), the “deep press” response is triggered. 
       FIG. 4D  illustrates another dynamic intensity threshold  486  (e.g., intensity threshold ID).  FIG. 4D  also illustrates two other intensity thresholds: a first intensity threshold IT H  and a second intensity threshold I L . In  FIG. 4D , although touch input  484  satisfies the first intensity threshold IT H  and the second intensity threshold IT L  prior to time p 2 , no response is provided until delay time p 2  has elapsed at time  482 . Also in  FIG. 4D , dynamic intensity threshold  486  decays over time, with the decay starting at time  488  after a predefined delay time p 1  has elapsed from time  482  (when the response associated with the second intensity threshold IT L  was triggered). This type of dynamic intensity threshold reduces accidental triggering of a response associated with the dynamic intensity threshold IT D  immediately after, or concurrently with, triggering a response associated with a lower intensity threshold, such as the first intensity threshold IT H  or the second intensity threshold I L . 
       FIG. 4E  illustrate yet another dynamic intensity threshold  492  (e.g., intensity threshold ID). In  FIG. 4E , a response associated with the intensity threshold IT L  is triggered after the delay time p 2  has elapsed from when touch input  490  is initially detected. Concurrently, dynamic intensity threshold  492  decays after the predefined delay time p 1  has elapsed from when touch input  490  is initially detected. So a decrease in intensity of touch input  490  after triggering the response associated with the intensity threshold I L , followed by an increase in the intensity of touch input  490 , without releasing touch input  490 , can trigger a response associated with the intensity threshold IT D  (e.g., at time  494 ) even when the intensity of touch input  490  is below another intensity threshold, for example, the intensity threshold I L . 
     An increase of characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensity below the light press intensity threshold IT L  to an intensity between the light press intensity threshold IT L  and the deep press intensity threshold IT D  is sometimes referred to as a “light press” input. An increase of characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensity below the deep press intensity threshold IT D  to an intensity above the deep press intensity threshold IT D  is sometimes referred to as a “deep press” input. An increase of characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensity below the contact-detection intensity threshold IT 0  to an intensity between the contact-detection intensity threshold IT 0  and the light press intensity threshold IT L  is sometimes referred to as detecting the contact on the touch-surface. A decrease of characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensity above the contact-detection intensity threshold IT 0  to an intensity below the contact-detection intensity threshold IT 0  is sometimes referred to as detecting liftoff of the contact from the touch-surface. In some embodiments IT 0  is zero. In some embodiments, IT 0  is greater than zero. In some illustrations a shaded circle or oval is used to represent intensity of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface. In some illustrations, a circle or oval without shading is used represent a respective contact on the touch-sensitive surface without specifying the intensity of the respective contact. 
     In some embodiments, described herein, one or more operations are performed in response to detecting a gesture that includes a respective press input or in response to detecting the respective press input performed with a respective contact (or a plurality of contacts), where the respective press input is detected based at least in part on detecting an increase in intensity of the contact (or plurality of contacts) above a press-input intensity threshold. In some embodiments, the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the increase in intensity of the respective contact above the press-input intensity threshold (e.g., the respective operation is performed on a “down stroke” of the respective press input). In some embodiments, the press input includes an increase in intensity of the respective contact above the press-input intensity threshold and a subsequent decrease in intensity of the contact below the press-input intensity threshold, and the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the subsequent decrease in intensity of the respective contact below the press-input threshold (e.g., the respective operation is performed on an “up stroke” of the respective press input). 
     In some embodiments, the device employs intensity hysteresis to avoid accidental inputs sometimes termed “jitter,” where the device defines or selects a hysteresis intensity threshold with a predefined relationship to the press-input intensity threshold (e.g., the hysteresis intensity threshold is X intensity units lower than the press-input intensity threshold or the hysteresis intensity threshold is 75%, 90%, or some reasonable proportion of the press-input intensity threshold). Thus, in some embodiments, the press input includes an increase in intensity of the respective contact above the press-input intensity threshold and a subsequent decrease in intensity of the contact below the hysteresis intensity threshold that corresponds to the press-input intensity threshold, and the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the subsequent decrease in intensity of the respective contact below the hysteresis intensity threshold (e.g., the respective operation is performed on an “up stroke” of the respective press input). Similarly, in some embodiments, the press input is detected only when the device detects an increase in intensity of the contact from an intensity at or below the hysteresis intensity threshold to an intensity at or above the press-input intensity threshold and, optionally, a subsequent decrease in intensity of the contact to an intensity at or below the hysteresis intensity, and the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the press input (e.g., the increase in intensity of the contact or the decrease in intensity of the contact, depending on the circumstances). 
     For ease of explanation, the description of operations performed in response to a press input associated with a press-input intensity threshold or in response to a gesture including the press input are, optionally, triggered in response to detecting: an increase in intensity of a contact above the press-input intensity threshold, an increase in intensity of a contact from an intensity below the hysteresis intensity threshold to an intensity above the press-input intensity threshold, a decrease in intensity of the contact below the press-input intensity threshold, or a decrease in intensity of the contact below the hysteresis intensity threshold corresponding to the press-input intensity threshold. Additionally, in examples where an operation is described as being performed in response to detecting a decrease in intensity of a contact below the press-input intensity threshold, the operation is, optionally, performed in response to detecting a decrease in intensity of the contact below a hysteresis intensity threshold corresponding to, and lower than, the press-input intensity threshold. As described above, in some embodiments, the triggering of these responses also depends on time-based criteria being met (e.g., a delay time has elapsed between a first intensity threshold being met and a second intensity threshold being met). 
     User Interfaces and Associated Processes 
     Attention is now directed towards embodiments of user interfaces (“UI”) and associated processes that are, optionally, implemented on an electronic device, such as portable multifunction device  100  or device  300 , with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and (optionally) one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. 
     FIGS.  5 A 1 - 5 A 77  illustrate example user interfaces for navigating between user interfaces in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in  FIGS. 6A-6AL, 7A-7F, 8A-8E, and 10A-10B . For convenience of explanation, some of the embodiments will be discussed with reference to operations performed on a device with a touch-sensitive display system  112 . In such embodiments, the focus selector is, optionally: a respective finger or stylus contact, a representative point corresponding to a finger or stylus contact (e.g., a centroid of a respective contact or a point associated with a respective contact), or a centroid of two or more contacts detected on the touch-sensitive display system  112 . However, analogous operations are, optionally, performed on a device with a display  450  and a separate touch-sensitive surface  451  in response to detecting the contacts on the touch-sensitive surface  451  while displaying the user interfaces shown in the figures on the display  450 , along with a focus selector. 
     For convenience of explanation, some of the embodiments will be discussed with reference to operations performed on a device without a home button, and a gesture meeting predefined criteria is used to cause dismissal of a currently displayed user interface and display of the home screen user interface. In some embodiments, a home button (e.g., a mechanical button, a solid state button, or a virtual button) is included on the device and is used to cause dismissal of a currently displayed user interface and display of the home screen user interface. (e.g., in response to a single press input) and/or display a multitasking user interface (e.g., in response to a double press input). 
     FIGS.  5 A 1 - 5 A 77  illustrate example embodiments of a user interface selection process that allows a user to efficiently navigate between multiple user interfaces, e.g., quickly switching between different applications and system user interfaces, on an electronic device, in accordance with some embodiments. Example user interfaces for the user interface selection process include representations of multiple user interfaces for applications (e.g., recently opened applications, a currently displayed application, and a system control panel) associated with the electronic device displayed as a virtual stack of cards (e.g., the “stack”), where each card in the stack represents a user interface for a different application. The cards are also referred to herein as “application views,” when corresponding to a user interface for a recently open application, or as a “control panel view,” when corresponding to a user interface for a control panel). User inputs (e.g., contacts, swipe/drag gestures, flick gestures, etc.) detected on touch screen  112  (e.g., a touch-sensitive surface) are used to navigate between user interfaces that can be selected for display on the screen. In some embodiments, the home screen user interface is optionally displayed as a “card” in the virtual stack of cards. In some embodiments, the home screen user interface is displayed in a display layer underlying the stack of cards. 
     While the device displays any user interface, a gesture beginning at the bottom of the screen (e.g., within a predefined region of the device that is proximate to the edge of the display (e.g., an edge region that includes a predefined portion (e.g., 20 pixels wide) of the display near the bottom edge of the device) invokes the user interface selection process and directs navigation between multiple user interfaces based on the speed and direction of the input, and, optionally, based on movement parameters and characteristics of user interface objects (e.g., the cards) that are currently displayed. The device replaces display of the current user interface with a card representing that user interface. The user has the option to use different gestures to navigate (i) to the home screen, (ii) to the application displayed on the screen immediately prior to the user interface that was displayed when the user interface selection process was invoked, (iii) to a control panel user interface, (iv) to an application-switcher user interface that allows the user to select from applications previously displayed on the screen, or (v) back to the user interface that was displayed when the user interface selection process was invoked, in accordance with some embodiments. During the input, the device provides dynamic visual feedback indicating what navigation choice will be made upon termination of the input, facilitating effective user navigation between multiple choices. In some embodiments, the visual feedback and user interface response is fluid and reversible. 
     Example user interfaces for applications operated on the electronic device include a visual indication (e.g., home affordance  5002 ) that provides visual guidance to a user regarding the position of an edge region that the device is ready for a navigation gesture to be started, and, optionally, whether navigation is restricted in the current operating mode of the currently displayed application (e.g., absence of the home affordance indicates that the navigation is limited, and that a confirmation input or, optionally, whether an enhanced navigation gesture is required to navigate between user interfaces (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.  5 B 1 - 5 B 33 )). In some embodiments, the home affordance is not activatable or responsive to touch-inputs directly, e.g., in a manner that is similar to a virtual button. 
     FIGS.  5 A 1 - 5 A 8  illustrate an example embodiment where the electronic device navigates to an application-switcher user interface because an input invokes the user interface selection process and directs movement of cards in the stack beyond a first movement threshold (and, optionally, below a second movement threshold). 
     FIG.  5 A 1  illustrates a web browsing user interface with time  404  and status  402  indicators in the upper left and right corners of the screen, respectively. After the user interface selection process is activated by contact  5004  travelling upwards from the bottom of the screen, in FIG.  5 A 2 , the web browsing user interface is replaced by card  5010  that represents the web browser user interface in FIG.  5 A 3 . As the input moves upwards on the screen, in FIGS.  5 A 3 - 5 A 5 , card  5010  shrinks dynamically, revealing a blurred view of the home screen in the background and expanded status bar  5008  in the foreground (status bar  5008  optionally appears to move down from the upper left and right-hand corners of the display, or be revealed by shrinking card  5010 ). When movement  5006  of contact  5004  pauses, in FIG.  5 A 6 , cards  5014  (representing the messaging application user interface displayed on the screen prior to the web browsing user interface) and  5016  (representing a control panel user interface (e.g., a control center)) appear displayed alongside card  5010 , indicating that termination of the input at this time would cause the device to display an application-switcher user interface. Because the input is terminated, in FIG.  5 A 7 , while several cards in the stack are displayed, the device displays the application-switcher user interface, in FIG.  5 A 8 . Cards  5010 ,  5014 , and  5016 , which appeared to be relatively co-planar while the input was active (e.g., in FIG.  5 A 6 ), are animated to form the stack in FIGS.  5 A 7 - 5 A 8 , with control panel card  5016  sliding over, and messaging card  5014  sliding under, web browsing card  5010 . Other cards representing user interfaces of applications last displayed prior to the messaging user interface (e.g., card  5022  representing the user interface of an email application) appear below messaging card  5014  in the stack. Application icons (e.g., Safari icon  5012 ; and Messages icon  5020 ; see also Email icon  5028  and Settings icon  5032  in FIGS.  5 A 9 - 5 A 13 ) are displayed in the application-switcher user interface to facilitate quicker identification of the application associated with the user interface shown on the card. 
     FIGS.  5 A 9 - 5 A 14  illustrate an example embodiment where the application-switcher user interface is used to navigate between previously displayed user interfaces (e.g., switch between applications). Movement  5026  of contact  5024  to the right in FIGS.  5 A 9 - 5 A 11  scrolls through the stack of user interface cards. As cards  5016 ,  5010 , and  5014 , from the top of the stack are pushed off the right-hand side of the screen, additional cards  5030  and  5034  are revealed from the bottom of the stack, in FIGS.  5 A 10 - 5 A 11 . After selection of email card  5022  in FIG.  5 A 13 , the device replaces the application-switcher user interface with the email user interface in FIG.  5 A 14 . 
     FIGS.  5 A 15 - 5 A 18  illustrate example embodiments where an input results in navigation within an application, rather than between user interfaces of different applications and system user interfaces, because the input does not meet criteria that invokes the user interface selection process. For example, a tap gesture including contact  5037  on back button  5035  in FIG.  5 A 15  causes the device to navigate from the apple web page to the “news about sports” web page in FIG.  5 A 16 , rather than invoke the user interface selection process, because there is no upwards movement of contact  5037  from the bottom edge of the screen. Similarly, the upwards swipe gesture including movement  5041  of contact  5039  in FIG.  5 A 17  causes the device to navigate the “news about sports” web page in FIG.  5 A 18 , rather than invoke the user interface selection process, because the swipe gesture did not initiate at the bottom of the screen. 
     FIGS.  5 A 19 - 5 A 25  illustrate an example embodiment where the electronic device navigates back to a home screen because an input invokes the user interface selection process and direct movement of cards in the stack past the second movement threshold. 
     FIG.  5 A 19  illustrates an email user interface. The user interface selection process is activated by contact  5040  travelling upwards from the bottom of the screen and, as a result, the email user interface is replaced by card  5022  that represents the email user interface in FIG.  5 A 20 . Because movement  5042  of contact  5040  is slow in FIGS.  5 A 20 - 5 A 21 , and contact  5040  has not satisfied predefined movement criteria for navigating to the home screen (e.g., passed a particular distance threshold), cards  5016  (a control panel) and  5010  (web browsing) are displayed to indicate that termination of the input will cause the device to navigate to the application-switcher user interface. Once movement  5042  speeds up and/or contact  5040  satisfies the predefined movement criteria for navigating to the home screen (e.g., passes the distance threshold), cards  5016  and  5010  disappear, in FIG.  5 A 22 , indicating that termination of the input will cause the device to navigate to the home screen, as opposed to navigating back to the application-switcher user interface. As contact  5040  moves upwards on the screen, in FIGS.  5 A 19 - 5 A 24 , the blurring of the home screen displayed behind the cards is gradually reduced and the icons displayed on the home screen appear to come towards the user as they gradually come into focus, further indicating that navigation is tending towards the home screen. 
     Because the input is terminated, in FIG.  5 A 24 , while only a single card is displayed, the device navigates to the home screen in FIG.  5 A 25 . This is in contrast to the navigation event in FIGS.  5 A 2 - 5 A 8 , which navigates to the application-switcher user interface because the input was terminated while the device displayed multiple cards from the stack on the screen. While navigating home, card  5022  appears to shrink into the launch icon for the mail application. 
     FIGS.  5 A 25 - 5 A 30  illustrate an example embodiment where the electronic device navigates from the home screen to an email application user interface. FIG.  5 A 25  illustrates a home screen with multiple application launch icons. Similar to navigation events invoked from an application user interface, as shown in FIGS.  5 A 2  and  5 A 19 , movement  5048  of contact  5046  upwards from the bottom of the screen, in FIG.  5 A 25 , invokes the user interface selection process from the home screen. Rather than replacing display of the home screen with a card, as done for the web browsing user interface in FIG.  5 A 3  and mail user interface in FIG.  5 A 20 , the home screen appears to fade away from the screen and cards  5016  (a control panel) and  5022  (email) slide onto the screen in FIG.  5 A 26 . Cards from the stack appear to come from the left-hand side of the screen, while the card for the control panel appears to come from the right-hand side of the screen. As contact  5046  continues to move upwards, in FIG.  5 A 27 , control panel card  5016  slides over mail card  5022  assembling the stack while the home screen continues to blur in the background, indicating that the device will navigate to the application switching user interface. Upon termination of the input in FIG.  5 A 28 , cards  5010  (web browsing) and  5014  (messaging) slide below mail card  5022 , completing the stack. Selection of mail card  5022 , in FIG.  5 A 29 , directs the device to display the mail user interface in FIG.  5 A 30 . In some embodiments, when movement of contact  5046  does not include a large vertical component, and is substantially horizontal to the left (e.g., a leftward swipe gesture that starts from the bottom edge of the screen (such as the gesture by contact  5074  shown in FIGS.  5 A 57 - 5 A 58 )), control panel user interface slides in from the right, and is overlaid on the home screen user interface (e.g., in a final state as shown in FIG.  5 A 77 ). 
     FIGS.  5 A 31 - 5 A 36  illustrate an example embodiment where an input results in navigation within an application, or between applications, depending on whether the input meets criteria invoking the user interface selection process. FIG.  5 A 31  illustrates a mail user interface displaying previews  5049  of multiple email messages. A swipe gesture, including movement  5053  of contact  5051  across email preview  5049 - d  in FIG.  5 A 32  causes the device to mark email preview  5049 - d  as read in FIG.  5 A 33 , rather than navigate between user interfaces of different applications or to a system user interface, because it did not originate from the bottom of the screen. In contrast, a swipe gesture including movement  5054  of contact  5052  across email preview  5049 - e , in FIGS.  5 A 34 - 5 A 35 , causes the device to navigate to the previously displayed web browsing user interface in FIG.  5 A 36 , rather than marking the email preview read, because it originated from the bottom of the screen. 
     In contrast to the inputs illustrated in FIGS.  5 A 2 - 5 A 8  and  5 A 19 - 5 A 25 , which cause the device to navigate to the application-switcher user interface and the home screen, respectively, the input illustrated in FIGS.  5 A 34 - 5 A 36  causes the device to navigate to the web browsing user interface because the horizontal component of movement  5054  is much greater than the vertical component of movement  5054 . The input appears to push mail card  5022  back into the screen and then slide it off of the right-hand side of the screen, while dragging web browsing card  5010  onto the screen from the left-hand side of the screen. The cards appear to be moving over the home screen, which is blurred in the background. 
     FIGS.  5 A 37 - 5 A 39  illustrate an example embodiment where the device navigates back to the user interface displayed after the input ended because the input did not meet the criteria to navigate to other user interfaces (e.g., not enough movement to completely invoke the user interface selection process). FIG.  5 A 37  illustrates a web browsing user interface. An input including movement  5058  of contact  5056  begins to invoke the user interface selection process, as indicated by replacement of the web browsing user interface with web browsing card  5010  in FIG.  5 A 38 . However, because the input terminates before contact  5056  travels far enough to completely invoke the user interface selection process, the device navigates back to displaying the web browser user interface, in FIG.  5 A 39 . 
     FIGS.  5 A 40 - 5 A 56  illustrate an example embodiment where the stack of cards is not updated immediately after navigating to a different user interface, allowing forward and backwards navigation within the card stack in response to multiple consecutive swipe gestures (e.g., leftward/rightward edge swipe gestures or up-and-left/up-and-right arc swipe gestures). FIG.  5 A 40  illustrates a web browsing user interface including time  404  and status  402  indicators. A first swipe gesture to the right, initiated in FIG.  5 A 40 , navigates the device to the email user interface, in FIG.  5 A 42 , which was the application user interface displayed immediately prior to the web browsing user interface. Before the stack is resorted to reflect navigation to the email user interface, a second swipe gesture to the right is initiated in FIG.  5 A 43 . The second swipe gesture results in navigation to a messaging user interface, which is the next user interface represented in the stack, as illustrated in FIG.  5 A 45 . Again, before the stack is resorted to reflect navigation to the messaging user interface, a third swipe gesture to the left is initiated in FIG.  5 A 46 . The third swipe gesture results in forward navigation within stack, rather than backwards, back to the email user interface in FIG.  5 A 48  because the gesture is in the opposite direction. A fourth swipe gesture to the right, initiated in FIG.  5 A 49 , navigates the device backwards in the stack to the messaging user interface, in FIG.  5 A 51 . 
     After each of the first three navigation events, the stack is not resorted because another navigation gesture is detected before a predetermined amount of time (e.g., TT 1 ) has elapsed since the termination of the previous navigation gesture. The fact that the threshold amount of time has not elapsed is indicated visually by the absence of time  404  and status  402  indicators immediately after the navigation event. As shown in FIG.  5 A 52 , after the predetermined period of time passes without detecting another navigation input, the device resorts the stack to reflect navigation to the messaging user interface. This is visually indicated by display of time  404  and status  402  indicators. In some embodiments, the size of the center card expands slightly to indicate that it has now become the top card in the stack. Thus, after movement  5072  of contact  5070  invokes the user interface selection process in FIG.  5 A 52 , cards  5014  (messaging) and  5010  (web browsing) are displayed side-by-side in FIG.  5 A 53 , reflecting the last two applications used on the device. Although the mail user interface was displayed on the screen (in FIG.  5 A 49 ) more recently than the web browsing user interface (in FIG.  5 A 40 ), mail card  5022  is not reordered in the stack because the user interface was only displayed transiently, while the user navigated through the stack. 
     FIGS.  5 A 57 - 5 A 59  illustrate an example embodiment where a navigation gesture to the left from any user interface causes navigation to a control panel user interface (e.g., control center). FIG.  5 A 57  illustrates a messaging user interface with time  404  and status  402  indicators, representing that the underlying card stack has been re-sorted since the last navigation event (e.g., the navigation from the email application to the messages application in FIGS.  5 A 49 - 5 A 51 ). A swipe gesture to the left in the bottom edge region of the screen, including movement  5076  of contact  5074  in FIG.  5 A 57 ) causes control panel view  5016  to slide over the messaging user interface from the right-hand side of the screen, as illustrated in FIG.  5 A 58 . In some embodiments, the control panel view  5016  is translucent and the portions of the messages user interface at least partially show through from underneath the visible portions of the control panel view  5016 . Termination of the input results in navigation to the control panel user interface, in FIG.  5 A 59 , displayed over a blurred view of the messaging user interface, which was displayed when the user interface navigation input was initiated. In contrast to the leftwards swipe gesture in FIGS.  5 A 46 - 5 A 48 , which caused forward navigation within the stack, the leftwards swipe in FIGS.  5 A 57 - 5 A 59  causes navigation to the control panel user interface because there are no user interface cards above the messaging card in the stack when the messaging user interface is actively displayed on the screen. In FIGS.  5 A 46 - 5 A 48 , the email card is above the messaging card in the stack because the user was actively navigating between user interfaces in the stack (e.g., the order of the stack had not reshuffled because time threshold TT 1  had not yet be met). 
     FIGS.  5 A 52 - 5 A 56  illustrate an example embodiment where the user interface selection process is fluid. FIG.  5 A 52  illustrates invocation of the user interface selection process from a messaging user interface with an upwards swipe gesture. In response, the device displays cards  5014  (messaging),  5010  (web browsing), and  5016  (control panel), in FIG.  5 A 53 , because the speed of movement  5072  is below a first movement threshold and the position of contact  5070  is below a first position threshold, indicating that termination of the input will result in navigation to the application-switcher user interface. Continuation of the gesture up and to the left, in FIG.  5 A 54 , causes cards  5010  (web browsing) and  5016  (control panel) to disappear, indicating that termination of the input will cause navigation to the home screen. Because the user interface selection process is fluid, messaging card  5014  continues to shrink and moves up and to the left on the screen, in accordance with movement  5072  of contact  5070 . When movement  5072  of contact  5070  changes direction towards the bottom of the screen, messaging card  5014  gets larger and the home screen blurs in the background, in FIG.  5 A 55 , indicating that termination of the input will result in navigation back to the messaging user interface, as shown in FIG.  5 A 56 . In some embodiments, between the states shown in FIGS.  5 A 54  and  5 A 55 , as contact  5070  moves downward, multiple cards  5010 ,  5014 , and  5016  are, optionally, redisplayed (e.g., in a manner shown in FIG.  5 A 53 ) to indicate that if termination of the input were detected at that time, the device will navigate to the application-switcher user interface after the termination of the input. 
     FIGS.  5 A 60 - 5 A 63  illustrate an example embodiment where an input navigates to the application-switcher user interface from the control panel user interface (e.g., control panel). FIG.  5 A 60  illustrates invocation of the user interface selection process from control panel user interface with an upwards swipe gesture from the bottom of the screen. In response, the stack appears to slide out from under control panel card  5016 , in FIG.  5 A 61 . As the swipe gesture continues upwards, the stack continues to spread out from under control panel card  5016 , in FIG.  5 A 62 , indicating that termination of the input will result in navigation to the application-switcher user interface, as illustrated in FIG.  5 A 63 . 
     FIGS.  5 A 64 - 5 A 69  illustrate an example embodiment where applications are closed within the application-switcher user interface. FIG.  5 A 64  illustrates the beginning of a long-press input by contact  5084  on messaging card  5014  within the application-switcher user interface. When contact  5084  has been detected at its initial touch-down location with less than a threshold amount of movement for at least a threshold amount of time (e.g., TT 2 ) to meet a touch-hold requirement, in FIG.  5 A 65 , the device activates an application termination mode and displays application closing affordances  5086  over the application cards in the stack. Selection of application closing affordance  5086  over messaging card  5014 , in FIG.  5 A 67 , results in closing of the messaging application on the device, as indicated by the removal of messaging card  5014  in the stack, in FIG.  5 A 68 . In some embodiments, closing an application from within the application-switcher user interface causes deletion of the retained state information; and when the application is launched again, the application will start from a default starting user interface, as opposed to a user interface corresponding to the state in which the application was last accessed by a user. In response to closing of the messages application, web browsing card  5010  and email card  5022  move up in the stack, revealing settings card  5030  in the stack. 
     FIGS.  5 A 69 - 5 A 71  illustrate an example embodiment where the device navigates to the home screen from the application-switcher user interface in response to an upwards swipe by contact  5090  with movement  5092 . FIG.  5 A 69  illustrates an upward swipe gesture (e.g., over web browsing card  5010 ) in the application-switcher user interface. In response to the upward swipe gesture by contact  5090 , web browsing card  5010  shrinks and moves upwards, other cards in the stack disappear, and the home screen begins to come into focus in the background, in FIG.  5 A 70 , indicating that termination of the input will result in navigation to the home screen, as shown in FIG.  5 A 71 . 
     FIGS.  5 A 72 - 5 A 77  illustrate an example embodiment where the electronic device navigates from the home screen to a control panel user interface. FIG.  5 A 72  illustrates a home screen with multiple launch icons. Movement  5096  of contact  5094  upwards from the bottom of the screen, in FIG.  5 A 72 , invokes the user interface selection process from the home screen. As contact  5094  moves upward on the screen, the home screen appears to fade away from the screen and cards  5016  (control panel) and  5022  (mail) slide onto the screen in FIG.  5 A 73 . As contact  5094  continues to move upwards, in FIG.  5 A 74 , control panel card  5016  slides over mail card  5022  assembling the stack while the home screen continues to blur in the background, indicating that the device will navigate to the application switching user interface. Upon termination of the input in FIG.  5 A 75 , cards  5010  (web browsing) and  5014  (messaging) slide below mail card  5022 , completing the stack. Selection of control panel card  5016  with contact  5098 , in FIG.  5 A 76 , results in navigation to the control panel user interface, in FIG.  5 A 77 . The control panel is displayed in a semi-transparent state over a blurred view of the home screen, which was displayed when the user interface navigation input was initiated in FIG.  5 A 72 . 
     FIGS.  5 B 1 - 5 B 33  illustrate example user interfaces for limiting navigation to a different user interface (e.g., a system user interface or a user interface of another application) in response to a navigation gesture when a currently displayed application is determined to be protected, in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in  FIGS. 9A-9D . For convenience of explanation, some of the embodiments will be discussed with reference to operations performed on a device with a touch-sensitive display system  112 . In such embodiments, the focus selector is, optionally: a respective finger or stylus contact, a representative point corresponding to a finger or stylus contact (e.g., a centroid of a respective contact or a point associated with a respective contact), or a centroid of two or more contacts detected on the touch-sensitive display system  112 . However, analogous operations are, optionally, performed on a device with a display  450  and a separate touch-sensitive surface  451  in response to detecting the contacts on the touch-sensitive surface  451  while displaying the user interfaces shown in the figures on the display  450 , along with a focus selector. 
     In FIG.  5 B 1 , a media-player application is operating in a first mode (e.g., interactive playback mode). User interface  5302  of the media-player application in the interactive playback mode includes multiple control regions, including a media playback region (e.g., a media playback window for displaying media content), a playback back control region (e.g., media scrubber, fast forward affordance, pause/play affordance, and rewind affordance), a network interactions control region (e.g., affordances for routing the media content to an output device, commenting on the media content in a social networking forum (e.g., like or dislike), sharing the media content with others, etc.), and a related content region (e.g., thumbnails of content that link to other media content related to the currently selected content in the media playback window), etc. User interface  5302  is designed to facilitate user interaction with the user interface (e.g., browsing related content in the related content region, or invoking network interactions via the affordances in the network interaction control region, etc.), while media playback in the media play back region is ongoing. In FIG.  5 B 1 , home affordance  5002  is overlaid on user interface  5302  to indicate an edge region of the touch-screen  112  from which a navigation gesture (e.g., an upward swipe gesture that causes the display of the application-switcher user interface or the home screen display user interface, or a sideway swipe that causes display of the control panel user interface or the user interface of a recently open application) is, in some circumstances, started. 
     FIGS.  5 B 1 - 5 B 3  illustrate that, when a navigation gesture that meets home-display criteria is detected, the device ceases to display user interface  5302  and displays home screen user interface  5314  after termination of the navigation gesture. In FIG.  5 B 1 , contact  5312  is detected in the bottom edge region of the touch-screen  112  (e.g., region is visually indicated by home affordance  5002 ). In FIG.  5 B 2 , in accordance with upward movement of contact  5312 , user interface  5302  shrinks and becomes application view  5304  (e.g., reduced scale, live or static image of user interface  5302 , also referred to as a “card”  5304 ) that is dragged by contact  5312 . When application-switcher display criteria are met, and before lift-off of contact  5312  is detected, control panel view  5306  (e.g., also referred to as a “card”  5306 ) that corresponds to a control panel user interface and application view  5308  (e.g., also referred to as a “card”  5308 ) that corresponds to a recently open application (e.g., a web browser application) are displayed on two sides of the application view  5304 , and the multiple views move and shrink together as contact  5312  moves upward across the touch-screen  112 . The multiple views  5304 ,  5306 , and  5308  are overlaid on top of a blurred version of the home screen user interface (e.g., blurred home screen  5310 ). In FIG.  5 B 3 , after lift-off of contact  5312  is detected, and home-display criteria are met (e.g., contact  5312  moved beyond a threshold position (e.g., three quarters of screen height) on the touch-screen  112 ), home screen user interface  5314  is displayed on the touch-screen  112 . 
     FIGS.  5 B 4 - 5 B 10  illustrate an alternate scenario to the scenario shown in FIGS.  5 B 1 - 5 B 3 . In FIGS.  5 B 4 - 5 B 10 , the media player application is operating in a full-screen playback mode. Intentional navigation to other user interfaces while media playback in the media play back region is relatively rare and accidental navigation to other user interfaces would be considered disruptive by many users. As such, the media player application operating in the full-screen playback mode is defined as an application that is currently “protected” from the effect of the usual navigation gesture (e.g., gesture to navigate to the home screen user interface, application-switcher user interface, a recently open application, or a control panel user interface). 
     In FIGS.  5 B 4 - 5 B 5 , while the media player application is operating in the interactive playback mode with ongoing playback of media content (e.g., a video of a baseball game), device  100  detects that the orientation of device  100  is changed from portrait to landscape orientation. In response to detecting the change in the orientation of the device, device  100  switches from the interactive playback mode to the full-screen display mode (as shown in FIG.  5 B 5 ). In FIG.  5 B 5 , full-screen playback user interface  5316  includes only the playback content (e.g., the baseball game video continues to play after rotation of device  100 ), and other control affordances and user interface objects cease to be displayed on the touch screen  112 . Home affordance  5002  is not visible on user interface  5316 . 
     FIGS.  5 B 5 - 5 B 7  illustrate that, while content is being played in the full-screen playback mode, contact  5318  is detected near the bottom edge of the touch-screen (e.g., the “bottom edge” is redefined to be the long edge of the device  100  on the left (e.g., the left edge based on device held in an upright portrait orientation) after device  100  is rotated to the landscape orientation as shown in FIG.  5 B 5 ). In FIG.  5 B 6 , in accordance with the upward movement of contact  5318 , home affordance  5322  (a longer version of home affordance  5002 ) is displayed overlaid on user interface  5316  near the bottom edge of touch screen  112 . In addition, the upward swipe gesture from the bottom edge is configured to cause display of media selection panel  5320  within the media player application. As shown in FIG.  5 B 6 , media selection panel  5320  including multiple media items related to the currently played media content is dragged upward from the bottom edge of the touch-screen, in accordance with the upward movement of contact  5318 . In FIG.  5 B 6 , user interface  5316  remains displayed during the upward movement of contact  5318 . Playback of the media content optionally continues during the movement of contact  5318 . In FIG.  5 B 7 , lift-off of contact  5318  has been detected, and after lift-off of contact  5318 , media playback continues in the full screen playback mode, media selection panel  5320  is fully displayed in user interface  5316 . The user can tap on one of the displayed media content item to start playback of the content item, or swipe horizontally on the media selection panel  5320  to browse through other related content items. In FIG.  5 B 7 , home affordance  5322  remains displayed on the touch-screen  112  after lift-off of contact  5318  for at least a threshold amount of time to indicate that another navigation gesture that is received while the home affordance is displayed will cause navigation to a different user interface. In some embodiments, if no navigation gesture or user input is detected on touch-screen  112  within the threshold amount of time, home affordance  5322  (and optionally, content selection panel  5320 ) ceases to be displayed. Another navigation gesture detected afterwards will have a similar effect as that shown in FIGS.  5 B 5 - 5 B 7 . In some embodiments, a tap gesture on user interface  5316  causes display of playback controls overlaid on user interface  5316 , and optionally, causes home affordance  5322  to be displayed as well. 
     FIGS.  5 B 8 - 5 B 10  illustrate that, while home affordance  5322  is displayed on touch-screen  112 , the device remains within a state that waits for a confirmation input for the navigation gesture detected earlier. In some embodiments, a repeat of the previously performed navigation gesture or another navigation gesture causes the device to navigate to another user interface in accordance with the newly received navigation gesture. In some embodiments, if home affordance  5322  is displayed in response to a tap gesture, a subsequently received navigation gesture will be treated as a confirmed navigation gesture and cause the device to navigate to a different user interface as well. 
     In FIG.  5 B 8 , contact  5324  is detected near the bottom edge region of touch-screen  112 , while home affordance  5322  remains displayed after the initial navigation gesture (e.g., upward swipe from the bottom edge of the touch-screen by contact  5318 ) was detected. In response to detecting contact  5324  and upward movement of contact  5324 , the device determines that a confirmation input is detected and responds to the current navigation gesture by displaying the multiple application views, e.g., application view  5330  for a recently open application, application view  5326  for the currently open application, and application view  5328  for the control panel user interface, e.g., as shown in FIG.  5 B 9 . In some embodiments, application views  5330 ,  5326 , and  5328  are reduced scale, live or state images of the corresponding user interfaces displayed in landscape orientation. The multiple application views are dragged upward and reduce in size in accordance with the upward movement of contact  5324 . FIG.  5 B 9  also illustrate that, the multiple application views are overlaid on top of blurred home screen user interface  5332  which optionally displays application launch icons in landscape orientation. In FIG.  5 B 10 , after lift-off of contact  5324  is detected and home-gesture criteria are met (e.g., contact  5324  was above three quarters of the screen height when lift-off of contact  5324  was detected), the device displays home screen user interface  5334  in landscape orientation. 
     FIGS.  5 B 11 - 5 B 33  illustrate another example application that has a protected state. Specifically, a maps application that has an interactive map display mode, and a navigation mode. When the maps application is in the navigation mode, the application is protected from the effect of a regular navigation gesture, and requires a confirmation input after detection of an initial navigation gesture, or requires an initial enhanced navigation gesture to navigate to another user interface. 
     In FIG.  5 B 11 , the maps application is operating in a first mode (e.g., the interactive map display mode). User interface  5336  of the maps application in the interactive map display mode includes multiple control regions, including a map display region (e.g., a window for displaying a map), a destination display region (e.g., displaying a currently selected destination, affordance to display an editing user interface for setting the start and end locations for a directions request, and affordance to cancel the currently displayed destination), a directions control region (e.g., including affordances for activating the navigation mode for guided navigation to the selected destination), and a transportation selection region (e.g., affordances to select a transportation mode for the directions), etc. User interface  5336  is designed to facilitate user interaction with the user interface (e.g., configuring directions request, and invoking navigation mode after directions request is configured, etc.), while displaying a map. In FIG.  5 B 11 , home affordance  5002  is overlaid on user interface  5336  to indicate an edge region of the touch-screen  112  from which a navigation gesture (e.g., an upward swipe gesture that causes the display of the application-switcher user interface or the home screen display user interface, or a sideway swipe that causes display of the control panel user interface or the user interface of a recently open application) is, in some circumstances, started. 
     FIGS.  5 B 11 - 5 B 13  illustrate that, when a navigation gesture that meets home-display criteria is detected, the device ceases to display user interface  5336  and displays homes screen user interface  5314  after termination of the navigation gesture. In FIG.  5 B 11 , contact  5338  is detected in the bottom edge region of the touch-screen  112  (e.g., region is visually indicated by home affordance  5002 ). In FIG.  5 B 12 , in accordance with upward movement of contact  5338 , user interface  5336  shrinks and becomes application view  5340  (e.g., reduced scale, live or static image of user interface  5336 ) that is dragged by contact  5338 . When application-switcher display criteria are met, and before lift-off of contact  5338  is detected, control panel view  5306  that corresponds to a control panel user interface and application view  5344  that corresponds to a recently open application (e.g., a browser application) are displayed on two sides of the application view  5340 , and the multiple views move and shrink together as contact  5338  moves upward across the touch-screen  112 . The multiple views  5344 ,  5340 , and  5306  are overlaid on top of a blurred version of the home screen user interface (e.g., blurred home screen  5310 ). In FIG.  5 B 13 , after lift-off of contact  5338  is detected, and home-display criteria are met (e.g., contact  5338  moved beyond a threshold position (e.g., three quarters of screen height) on the touch-screen  112 ), home screen user interface  5314  is displayed on the touch-screen  112 . 
     FIGS.  5 B 14 - 5 B 25  illustrate an alternate scenario to the scenario shown in FIGS.  5 B 11 - 5 B 13 . In FIGS.  5 B 14 - 5 B 25 , the maps application is operating in a navigation mode. Intentional navigation to other user interfaces while the maps application is in the navigation mode is relatively rare and accidental navigation to other user interfaces would be considered disruptive by many users. As such, the maps application operating in the navigation mode is defined as an application that is currently “protected” from the effect of the usual navigation gesture (e.g., gesture to navigate to the home screen user interface, application-switcher user interface, a recently open application, or a control panel user interface). 
     In FIG.  5 B 14 , full-screen user interface  5346  includes a zoomed view of a user&#39;s current location in a map, a banner indicating the next direction, and a control region  5350  that displays summary of the trip (e.g., estimated arrival time, estimated duration of the trip, etc.) and an affordance to end the navigation mode (e.g., an “End” button). Home affordance  5002  is not visible on full screen user interface  5346 . 
     FIGS.  5 B 14 - 5 B 16  illustrate that, while the maps application is in navigation mode, contact  5348  is detected near an affordance  5342  in the control region  5350  of user interface  5346 , above the bottom edge region of the touch-screen  112 . In FIG.  5 B 15 , in accordance with the upward movement of contact  5348 , control region  5350  is pulled up from the bottom of the display to reveal additional control options, such as icons to search for nearby gas stations, lunch locations, and coffee shops, etc. In FIG.  5 B 15 , user interface  5346  optionally remains displayed (e.g., as a blurred version  5346 ′ of the full screen user interface  5346 ) during the upward movement of contact  5348 . Navigation optionally continues during the movement of contact  5348 . In FIG.  5 B 16 , lift-off of contact  5348  has been detected, and after lift-off of contact  5348 , the maps application remains in navigation mode, control region  5350  is fully displayed in user interface  5346 ′ (e.g., additional control options are displayed in control region  5350 , including an affordance for displaying an overview of the route on the map, an affordance for displaying details of the directions, and an affordance for displaying audio settings for the navigation mode). 
     FIGS.  5 B 17 - 5 B 19  illustrate another scenario alternative to the scenarios shown in FIGS.  5 B 11 - 5 B 13 , and in FIGS.  5 B 14 - 5 B 16 . In FIG.  5 B 17 , while the maps application is operating in the navigation mode and no home affordance is displayed on the touch-screen  112 , the device detects contact  5352  near the bottom edge of the touch-screen  112  (e.g., as opposed to near affordance  5342  above the bottom edge region). In FIG.  5 B 18 , upward movement of contact  5352  is detected, and instead of displaying the application views as shown in FIG.  5 B 12 , full screen user interface  5346  remains displayed, and home affordance  5002  is optionally displayed in response to the upward movement of contact  5352 . In some embodiments, other inputs, such as a tap, or a short upward swipe from the bottom edge of the touch-screen optionally causes the display of the home affordance as well. In FIG.  5 B 19 , lift-off of contact  5352  is detected, and the maps application remain in navigation mode, with full screen user interface  5346  displayed on the touch screen and home affordance  5002  overlaid on full screen user interface  5346 . 
     FIGS.  5 B 20 - 5 B 22  illustrate that, after lift-off of contact  5352 , while home affordance  5002  is still displayed on the touch-screen (e.g., before a threshold amount of time has elapsed), contact  5354  is detected near affordance  5342  (as shown in FIG.  5 B 20 ). In FIG.  5 B 21 , in accordance with the upward movement of contact  5354 , control region  5350  is pulled up from the bottom of the touch-screen  112  over blurred version of user interface  5346  (e.g., shown as user interface  5346 ′). In FIG.  5 B 22 , lift-off of contact  5354  has been detected, and control region  5350  is fully displayed over blurred version of user interface  5346 . 
     FIGS.  5 B 23 - 5 B 25  illustrate that, after lift-off of contact  5352  (in FIG.  5 B 19 ), home affordance  5002  remains displayed for at least a threshold amount of time to indicate that another navigation gesture that is received while the home affordance is displayed will cause navigation to a different user interface. In some embodiments, if no navigation gesture or user input is detected on touch-screen  112  within the threshold amount of time, home affordance  5002  ceases to be displayed. Another navigation gesture detected afterwards will have a similar effect as that shown in FIGS.  5 B 17 - 5 B 19 . 
     In FIG.  5 B 23 , while home affordance  5002  is displayed on touch-screen  112 , the device remains within a state that waits for a confirmation input for the navigation gesture detected earlier. In some embodiments, a repeat of the previously performed navigation gesture or another navigation gesture causes the device to navigate to another user interface in accordance with the newly received navigation gesture. In some embodiments, if home affordance  5002  is displayed in response to a tap gesture, a subsequently received navigation gesture will be treated as a confirmed navigation gesture and cause the device to navigate to a different user interface as well. 
     In FIG.  5 B 23 , contact  5356  is detected near the bottom edge region of touch-screen  112 , while home affordance  5002  remains displayed after the initial navigation gesture (e.g., upward swipe from the bottom edge of the touch-screen by contact  5352  in FIGS.  5 B 17 - 5 B 19 ) was detected. In response to detecting contact  5356  and upward movement of contact  5356 , the device determines that a confirmation input has been detected and responds to the current navigation gesture by displaying the multiple application views, e.g., application view  5344  for a recently open application, application view  5358  for the currently open application, and application view  5306  for the control panel user interface, e.g., as shown in FIG.  5 B 24 . In some embodiments, application views  5344 ,  5358 , and  5306  are reduced scale, live or state images of the corresponding user interfaces. The multiple application views are dragged upward and reduce in size in accordance with the upward movement of contact  5356 . FIG.  5 B 24  also illustrate that, the multiple application views are overlaid on top of blurred home screen user interface  5310  which is a blurred version of home screen  5324  and includes a plurality of application launch icons. In FIG.  5 B 25 , after lift-off of contact  5356  is detected and home-gesture criteria are met (e.g., contact  5356  was above three quarters of the screen height when lift-off of contact  5356  was detected), the device displays home screen user interface  5314 . 
     FIGS.  5 B 26 - 5 B 29  illustrate an alternative scenario to those shown in FIGS.  5 B 11 - 5 B 13 , FIGS.  5 B 14 - 5 B 16 , and FIGS.  5 B 17 - 5 B 25 , respectively. In FIG.  5 B 26 - 5 B 29 , an enhanced navigation gesture is detected initially, and the enhanced navigation gesture overrides the protection over the maps application in the navigation mode, and causes navigation to a different user interface (e.g., the home screen user interface). 
     In FIG.  5 B 26 , while the maps application is operating in the navigation mode, full screen user interface  5346  is displayed, and home affordance is not visible on the display. Contact  5360  is detected near the bottom edge region of the touch-screen  112  at time t=t 0 . In FIG.  5 B 27 , contact  5360  has been maintained at initial touch-down location near the bottom edge of the touch-screen with less than a threshold amount of movement for at least a threshold amount of time T (e.g., an initial touch-hold requirement is met by contact  5360 ). In response to detecting that contact  5360  has met the touch-hold requirement, home affordance  5002  is displayed near the bottom edge region of the touch-screen to indicate that the touch-hold requirement has been met, and that the initial portion of an enhanced navigation gesture has been detected. In FIG.  5 B 28 , upward movement of contact  5360  is detected, and the device recognizes the input by contact  5360  as an enhanced navigation gesture, and in response to detecting the enhanced navigation gesture, the device displays the multiple application views  5344 ,  5358 , and  5306  in accordance with the upward movement of contact  5360 . In FIG.  5 B 29 , lift-off of contact  5360  has been detected and home-display criteria have been met (e.g., contact  5360  has reached above three quarters of the screen height), the device displays home screen user interface  5314  on the touch-screen. In some embodiments, navigation mode continues in the background, e.g., a floating banner indicating the next direction is optionally displayed at the top of the display, or a small direction indicator is optionally displayed in the left upper corner of the display. 
     FIGS.  5 B 30 - 5 B 33  illustrate an alternative scenario to those shown in FIGS.  5 B 11 - 5 B 13 , FIGS.  5 B 14 - 5 B 16 , and FIGS.  5 B 17 - 5 B 25 , respectively. In FIG.  5 B 30 - 5 B 33 , an enhanced navigation gesture is detected initially, and the enhanced navigation gesture overrides the protection over the maps application in the navigation mode, and causes navigation to a different user interface (e.g., the home screen user interface). 
     In FIG.  5 B 30 , while the maps application is operating in the navigation mode, full screen user interface  5346  is displayed, and home affordance is not visible on the display. Contact  5362  is detected near the bottom edge region of the touch-screen  112  with a first intensity. In FIG.  5 B 31 , intensity of contact  5362  is increased above a threshold intensity IT L  (e.g., an initial intensity requirement is met by contact  5362 ). In response to detecting that contact  5362  has met the intensity requirement, the device determines that the initial portion of an enhanced navigation gesture has been detected. In FIG.  5 B 32 , upward movement of contact  5362  is detected, and the device recognizes the input by contact  5362  as an enhanced navigation gesture, and in response to detecting the enhanced navigation gesture, the device displays the multiple application views  5344 ,  5358 , and  5306  in accordance with the upward movement of contact  5362 . In FIG.  5 B 33 , lift-off of contact  5362  has been detected and home-display criteria have been met (e.g., contact  5362  has reached above three quarters of the screen height), the device displays home screen user interface  5314  on the touch-screen. In some embodiments, navigation mode continues in the background, e.g., a floating banner indicating the next direction is optionally displayed at the top of the display, or a small direction indicator is optionally displayed in the left upper corner of the display. 
     FIGS.  5 C 1 - 5 C 45  illustrate example user interfaces for displaying a control panel user interface (also sometimes called a “control center”) and, in response to different inputs, displaying an expanded region of the control panel user interface or activating a control, in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in  FIGS. 11A-11E . For convenience of explanation, some of the embodiments will be discussed with reference to operations performed on a device with a touch-sensitive display system  112 . In such embodiments, the focus selector is, optionally: a respective finger or stylus contact, a representative point corresponding to a finger or stylus contact (e.g., a centroid of a respective contact or a point associated with a respective contact), or a centroid of two or more contacts detected on the touch-sensitive display system  112 . However, analogous operations are, optionally, performed on a device with a display  450  and a separate touch-sensitive surface  451  in response to detecting the contacts on the touch-sensitive surface  451  while displaying the user interfaces shown in the figures on the display  450 , along with a focus selector. 
     FIGS.  5 C 1 - 5 C 12  illustrate various ways to access a control panel user interface from other user interfaces. 
     FIGS.  5 C 1 - 5 C 3  illustrate accessing a control panel user interface from a lock screen. FIG.  5 C 1  illustrates displaying a lock screen user interface  5502 . In response to various inputs (e.g., in FIG.  5 C 2 ), device  100  displays a control panel user interface  5504  with home affordance  5506  (e.g., in FIG.  5 C 3 ). As shown in FIG.  5 C 2 , various gestures are used to access control panel user interface  5504 , including: a press input on the bottom edge of touch screen  112  by contact  5507  that exceeds an intensity threshold (e.g., light press intensity threshold IT L ), a horizontal swipe gesture on the bottom edge of touch screen  112  by contact  5508 , an up-and-left arc gesture by contact  5509 , and a tap gesture on the status indicators by contact  5510 . In some embodiments, a horizontal swipe gesture in the other direction (as opposed to the horizontal swipe gesture by contact  5508 ), an up-and-right arc gesture (as opposed to the up-and-left arc gesture by contact  5509 ), or a tap gesture on the other side of device  100  (as opposed to the tap gesture by contact  5510 ) are used to access control panel user interface  5504 . In some embodiments, when control panel user interface  5504  is accessed from the lock screen (e.g., lock screen user interface  5502 ), the current time and date (that was displayed in a central location on lock screen user interface  5502  in FIG.  5 C 2 ) are displayed in a shifted position on control panel user interface  5504 , as shown in FIG.  5 C 3 . 
     FIGS.  5 C 4 - 5 C 6  illustrate accessing a control panel user interface from a home screen. FIG.  5 C 4  illustrates displaying a home screen user interface  5512 . In response to various inputs (e.g., in FIG.  5 C 5 ), device  100  displays a control panel user interface  5518  (e.g., in FIG.  5 C 6 ). As shown in FIG.  5 C 5 , various gestures are used to access control panel user interface  5518 , including: a press input on the bottom edge of touch screen  112  by contact  5513  that exceeds an intensity threshold (e.g., light press intensity threshold IT L ), a horizontal swipe gesture on the bottom edge of touch screen  112  by contact  5514 , an up-and-left arc gesture by contact  5515 , and a tap gesture on the status indicators by contact  5516 . In some embodiments, a horizontal swipe gesture in the other direction (as opposed to the horizontal swipe gesture by contact  5514 ), an up-and-right arc gesture (as opposed to the up-and-left arc gesture by contact  5515 ), or a tap gesture on the other side of device  100  (as opposed to the tap gesture by contact  5516 ) are used to access control panel user interface  5518 . In some embodiments, when control panel user interface  5518  is accessed from the home screen (e.g., home screen user interface  5512 ) (and not from a lock screen user interface), the enlarged time and date (that were displayed on control panel user interface  5504 , as shown in FIG.  5 C 3 ) are not displayed on control panel user interface  5518 , as shown in FIG.  5 C 6 . 
     FIGS.  5 C 7 - 5 C 9  illustrate accessing a control panel user interface from an application. FIG.  5 C 7  illustrates displaying an application user interface  5520  (e.g., for a messaging application). In response to various inputs (e.g., in FIG.  5 C 8 ), device  100  displays a control panel user interface  5518  (e.g., in FIG.  5 C 9 ). As shown in FIG.  5 C 8 , various gestures are used to access control panel user interface  5518 , including: a press input on the bottom edge of touch screen  112  by contact  5521  that exceeds an intensity threshold (e.g., light press intensity threshold IT L ), a horizontal swipe gesture on the bottom edge of touch screen  112  by contact  5522 , an up-and-left arc gesture by contact  5523 , and a tap gesture on the status indicators by contact  5524 . In some embodiments, a horizontal swipe gesture in the other direction (as opposed to the horizontal swipe gesture by contact  5522 ), an up-and-right arc gesture (as opposed to the up-and-left arc gesture by contact  5523 ), or a tap gesture on the other side of device  100  (as opposed to the tap gesture by contact  5524 ) are used to access control panel user interface  5518 . In some embodiments, when control panel user interface  5518  is accessed from an application (e.g., application user interface  5520 ) (and not from a lock screen user interface), the enlarged time and date (that were displayed on control panel user interface  5504 , as shown in FIG.  5 C 3 ) are not displayed on control panel user interface  5518 , as shown in FIG.  5 C 9 . 
     FIGS.  5 C 10 - 5 C 12  illustrate accessing a control panel user interface from a multitasking user interface. FIG.  5 C 10  illustrates displaying a multitasking user interface  5526  that includes a representation of control panel user interface  5518 . In response to various inputs (e.g., in FIG.  5 C 11 ), device  100  displays a control panel user interface  5518  (e.g., in FIG.  5 C 12 ). As shown in FIG.  5 C 11 , various gestures are used to access control panel user interface  5518 , including: a tap input on a representation of control panel user interface  5518  by contact  5527 , a horizontal swipe gesture on the representation of control panel user interface  5518  by contact  5528 , and a tap gesture on the status indicators by contact  5529 . In some embodiments, a horizontal swipe gesture in the other direction (as opposed to the horizontal swipe gesture by contact  5528 ) or a tap gesture on the other side of device  100  (as opposed to the tap gesture by contact  5529 ) are used to access control panel user interface  5518 . In some embodiments, when control panel user interface  5518  is accessed from a multitasking user interface (e.g., multitasking user interface  5526 ) (and not from a lock screen user interface), the enlarged time and date (that were displayed on control panel user interface  5504 , as shown in FIG.  5 C 3 ) are not displayed on control panel user interface  5518 , as shown in FIG.  5 C 12 . 
     FIGS.  5 C 13 - 5 C 16  illustrate displaying a control panel user interface (e.g., control panel user interface  5518 , FIG.  5 C 13 ), and in response to a press input on a region of the control panel user interface (e.g., on Wi-Fi icon  5546  in connectivity module  5540 ), displaying an expanded view of the region (e.g., expanded connectivity module  5550 , FIG.  5 C 15 ). FIG.  5 C 13  illustrates displaying a control panel user interface  5518  that includes one or more control regions, each of which includes a respective plurality of controls for controlling corresponding functions of device  100 . As shown in FIG.  5 C 13 , control panel user interface  5518  includes connectivity module  5540 , which includes multiple controls (e.g., airplane mode icon  5542 , cellular data icon  5544 , Wi-Fi icon  5546 , and Bluetooth icon  5548 ). In FIGS.  5 C 14 - 5 C 15 , device  100  detects an input on connectivity module  5540 , such as a press gesture by contact  5532 , and in response, device  100  displays an expanded view of connectivity module  5540  (e.g., expanded connectivity module  5550 , FIG.  5 C 15 ). As shown in FIG.  5 C 14 , as the press gesture by contact  5532 - a  increases above a first intensity threshold (e.g., hint intensity threshold IT H ), connectivity module  5540  increases in size and the rest of control panel user interface  5518  starts to blur. As shown in FIG.  5 C 15 , as the press gesture by contact  5532 - b  continues to increase in intensity and increases above a second intensity threshold (e.g., light press intensity threshold IT L ), the control region is expanded (e.g., “popped open”) to display additional controls in expanded connectivity module  5550  and the rest of control panel user interface  5518  is blurred further. As shown in FIGS.  5 C 15 - 5 C 16 , expanded connectivity module  5550  includes additional controls (e.g., AirDrop icon  5552  and Personal Hotspot icon  5554 ) and additional information (e.g., status of each control) that were not shown in connectivity module  5540  (e.g., in FIG.  5 C 13 ). In some embodiments, device  100  displays the expanded view of a control region (e.g., expanded connectivity module  5550 , FIG.  5 C 15 ) in response to a touch-hold input (e.g., a long press input by contact  5532 ) (e.g., based on length of time of the contact rather than intensity of the contact). As shown in FIG.  5 C 16 , upon liftoff of contact  5532 , expanded connectivity module  5550  remains displayed. 
     In FIGS.  5 C 17 - 5 C 18 , device  100  detects an input on Wi-Fi icon  5546 , such as a tap gesture by contact  5534 , and in response, toggles the Wi-Fi control from OFF to ON (and changes the status of the Wi-Fi control from “Off” to “AppleWiFi”) and changes the appearance of Wi-Fi icon  5546  (e.g., from light to dark). As shown in FIG.  5 C 17 , depending on the intensity of the tap gesture by contact  5534 , Wi-Fi icon  5546  increases in size in accordance with a rate by which the intensity of the contact changes (e.g., increasing in size by a smaller amount in response to a tap gesture with a smaller intensity and increasing in size by a larger amount in response to a tap gesture with a larger intensity), indicating that Wi-Fi icon  5546  is sensitive to intensity-based inputs. 
     In FIGS.  5 C 19 - 5 C 20 , device  100  detects an input outside of expanded connectivity module  5550 , such as a tap gesture by contact  5536 , and in response, dismisses the expanded connectivity module  5550  and displays control panel user interface  5518  (e.g., in FIG.  5 C 20 ). As shown in FIG.  5 C 20 , Wi-Fi icon  5546  is now darkened, indicating that the Wi-Fi control is on. 
     In FIGS.  5 C 21 - 5 C 22 , device  100  detects an input on Wi-Fi icon  5546 , such as a tap gesture by contact  5556 , and in response, toggles the Wi-Fi control from ON to OFF and changes the appearance of Wi-Fi icon  5546  (e.g., from dark to light). As shown in FIG.  5 C 21 , depending on the intensity of the tap gesture by contact  5556 , connectivity module  5540  increases in size in accordance with a rate by which the intensity of the contact changes. For example, connectivity module  5540  will increase in size by a smaller amount in response to a tap gesture with a smaller intensity, as shown in FIG.  5 C 21 , and connectivity module  5540  will increase in size by a larger amount in response to a tap gesture with a larger intensity, as shown in FIG.  5 C 23 . Although the tap gestures shown in FIGS.  5 C 21  and  5 C 23  are both below hint intensity threshold IT H , a hard (and quick) tap (e.g., above hint intensity threshold IT H ) is still recognized as a tap gesture by device  100  and it is not a requirement that the intensity of a tap gesture remain below a particular intensity threshold. For example, in some embodiments, the intensity of a tap gesture is above hint intensity threshold IT H , above light press intensity threshold IT L , or above deep press intensity threshold IT D , but as long as the duration of the gesture is short enough to qualify as a tap, it is still recognized as a tap gesture. 
     In FIGS.  5 C 23 - 5 C 24 , device  100  detects an input on Bluetooth icon  5548 , such as a tap gesture by contact  5558 , and in response, toggles the Bluetooth control from OFF to ON and changes the appearance of Bluetooth icon  5548  (e.g., from light to dark). As shown in FIG.  5 C 23 , depending on the intensity of the tap gesture by contact  5558 , connectivity module  5540  increases in size in accordance with a rate by which the intensity of the contact changes. For example, since the intensity of contact  5558  (e.g., in FIG.  5 C 23 ) is greater than the intensity of contact  5556  (e.g., in FIG.  5 C 21 ), the size of connectivity module  5540  is larger in FIG.  5 C 23  compared to the size of connectivity module  5540  in FIG.  5 C 21 . 
     FIGS.  5 C 25 - 5 C 27  illustrate displaying a control panel user interface (e.g., user interface  5518 , FIG.  5 C 24 ), and in response to a press input on a region of the control panel user interface (e.g., in connectivity module  5540 , in a region not occupied by any controls), displaying an expanded view of the region (e.g., expanded connectivity module  5550 , FIG.  5 C 26 ). In FIGS.  5 C 25 - 5 C 26 , device  100  detects an input on connectivity module  5540 , such as a press gesture by contact  5560 , and in response, device  100  displays an expanded view of connectivity module  5540  (e.g., expanded connectivity module  5550 , FIG.  5 C 26 ). As shown in FIG.  5 C 25 , as the press gesture by contact  5560 - a  increases above a first intensity threshold (e.g., hint intensity threshold IT H ), connectivity module  5540  increases in size and the rest of control panel user interface  5518  starts to blur. As shown in FIG.  5 C 26 , as the press gesture by contact  5560 - b  continues to increase in intensity and increases above a second intensity threshold (e.g., light press intensity threshold IT L ), the control region is expanded (e.g., “popped open”) to display additional controls in expanded connectivity module  5550  and the rest of control panel user interface  5518  is blurred further. In some embodiments, device  100  displays the expanded view of a control region (e.g., expanded connectivity module  5550 , FIG.  5 C 26 ) in response to a touch-hold input (e.g., a long press input by contact  5560 ) (e.g., based on length of time of the contact rather than intensity of the contact). As shown in FIG.  5 C 27 , upon liftoff of contact  5560 , expanded connectivity module  5550  remains displayed. 
     In FIGS.  5 C 28 - 5 C 29 , device  100  detects an input on Wi-Fi icon  5546 , such as a tap gesture by contact  5562 , and in response, toggles the Wi-Fi control from OFF to ON (and changes the status of the Wi-Fi control from “Off” to “AppleWiFi”) and changes the appearance of Wi-Fi icon  5546  (e.g., from light to dark). As shown in FIG.  5 C 28 , depending on the intensity of the tap gesture by contact  5562 , Wi-Fi icon  5546  increases in size in accordance with a rate by which the intensity of the contact changes (e.g., increasing in size by a smaller amount in response to a tap gesture with a smaller intensity and increasing in size by a larger amount in response to a tap gesture with a larger intensity), indicating that Wi-Fi icon  5546  is sensitive to intensity-based inputs. In some embodiments, for the AirDrop control to be in the ON state, both Wi-Fi and Bluetooth must be ON. As shown in FIG.  5 C 29 , when Wi-Fi is toggled back on (and thus, both Wi-Fi and Bluetooth are in the ON state), AirDrop also turns back on (and the status is changed from “Receiving Off” to “Contacts Only”). 
     FIGS.  5 C 29 - 5 C 32  illustrate displaying an expanded view of a region from the control panel user interface (e.g., expanded connectivity module  5550 , FIG.  5 C 29 ), and in response to a press input on an expandable control icon (e.g., Wi-Fi icon  5546 ), displaying an enhanced view of the expandable control (e.g., enhanced Wi-Fi control  5566 , FIG.  5 C 31 ). In FIGS.  5 C 30 - 5 C 31 , device  100  detects an input on Wi-Fi icon  5546 , such as a press gesture by contact  5564 , and in response, device  100  displays an enhanced view of the Wi-Fi control (e.g., enhanced Wi-Fi control  5566 , FIG.  5 C 31 ). As shown in FIG.  5 C 30 , as the press gesture by contact  5564 - a  increases above a first intensity threshold (e.g., hint intensity threshold IT H ), Wi-Fi icon  5546  increases in size (and optionally, the rest of expanded connectivity module  5550  starts to blur). As shown in FIG.  5 C 31 , as the press gesture by contact  5564 - b  continues to increase in intensity and increases above a second intensity threshold (e.g., light press intensity threshold IT L ), the control icon is expanded (e.g., “popped open”) to display an enhanced view of the control in enhanced Wi-Fi control  5566  (and expanded connectivity module  5550  is blurred, although in FIG.  5 C 31 , expanded connectivity module  5550  is completely obscured by enhanced Wi-Fi control  5566 ). As shown in FIGS.  5 C 31 - 5 C 32 , enhanced Wi-Fi control  5566  includes additional information and/or controls (e.g., other available Wi-Fi connections, signal strength and other information for the Wi-Fi connections, access to Wi-Fi settings, etc.) that were not shown in expanded connectivity module  5550  (e.g., in FIG.  5 C 29 ). In some embodiments, device  100  displays the enhanced view of a control (e.g., enhanced Wi-Fi control  5566 ) in response to a touch-hold input (e.g., a long press input by contact  5564 ) (e.g., based on length of time of the contact rather than intensity of the contact). As shown in FIG.  5 C 32 , upon liftoff of contact  5564 , enhanced Wi-Fi control  5566  remains displayed. 
     In FIGS.  5 C 33 - 5 C 34 , device  100  detects an input outside of enhanced Wi-Fi control  5566 , such as a tap gesture by contact  5568 , and in response, dismisses the enhanced Wi-Fi control  5566  and displays expanded connectivity module  5550  (e.g., in FIG.  5 C 34 ). 
     In FIGS.  5 C 35 - 5 C 36 , device  100  detects an input on Wi-Fi icon  5546 , such as a tap gesture by contact  5570 , and in response, toggles the Wi-Fi control from ON to OFF (and changes the status of the Wi-Fi control from “AppleWiFi” to “Off”) and changes the appearance of Wi-Fi icon  5546  (e.g., from dark to light). As shown in FIG.  5 C 35 , depending on the intensity of the tap gesture by contact  5570 , Wi-Fi icon  5546  increases in size in accordance with a rate by which the intensity of the contact changes (e.g., increasing in size by a smaller amount in response to a tap gesture with a smaller intensity and increasing in size by a larger amount in response to a tap gesture with a larger intensity), indicating that Wi-Fi icon  5546  is sensitive to intensity-based inputs. In some embodiments, for the AirDrop control to be in the ON state, both Wi-Fi and Bluetooth must be ON. As shown in FIG.  5 C 36 , when Wi-Fi is toggled to the OFF state, AirDrop also turns off (and the status is changed from “Contacts Only” to “Receiving Off”). 
     In FIGS.  5 C 37 - 5 C 38 , device  100  detects an input on Bluetooth icon  5548 , such as a tap gesture by contact  5572 , and in response, toggles the Bluetooth control from ON to OFF (and changes the status of the Bluetooth control from “On” to “Off”) and changes the appearance of Bluetooth icon  5548  (e.g., from dark to light). As shown in FIG.  5 C 37 , depending on the intensity of the tap gesture by contact  5572 , Bluetooth icon  5548  increases in size in accordance with a rate by which the intensity of the contact changes (e.g., increasing in size by a smaller amount in response to a tap gesture with a smaller intensity and increasing in size by a larger amount in response to a tap gesture with a larger intensity), indicating that Bluetooth icon  5548  is sensitive to intensity-based inputs. 
     In FIGS.  5 C 39 - 5 C 40 , device  100  detects an input outside of expanded connectivity module  5550 , such as a tap gesture by contact  5574 , and in response, dismisses the expanded connectivity module  5550  and displays control panel user interface  5518  (e.g., in FIG.  5 C 40 ). Note that the change in appearance of any controls in the expanded connectivity module  5550  is preserved in the connectivity module  5540  of control panel user interface  5518  when the expanded connectivity module  5550  is dismissed. For example, since the Wi-Fi control and Bluetooth control were turned off while the expanded connectivity module  5550  was displayed (e.g., in FIGS.  5 C 35 - 5 C 38 ), Wi-Fi icon  5546  and Bluetooth icon  5548  in connectivity module  5540  (e.g., in FIG.  5 C 40 ) are both lightened, indicating that the Wi-Fi control is off and the Bluetooth control is off. 
     FIGS.  5 C 41 - 5 C 45  illustrate additional enhanced views of expandable controls (e.g., Bluetooth control, AirDrop control, and Personal Hotspot control) from the expanded connectivity module  5550  (e.g., in FIG.  5 C 41 ). 
     In FIGS.  5 C 42 - 5 C 43 , device  100  detects an input on Bluetooth icon  5548 , such as a press gesture by contact  5576 , and in response, device  100  displays an enhanced view of the Bluetooth control (e.g., enhanced Bluetooth control  5580 , FIG.  5 C 43 ). As shown in FIG.  5 C 42 , as the press gesture by contact  5576 - a  increases above a first intensity threshold (e.g., hint intensity threshold IT H ), Bluetooth icon  5548  increases in size (and optionally, the rest of expanded connectivity module  5550  starts to blur). As shown in FIG.  5 C 43 , as the press gesture by contact  5576 - b  continues to increase in intensity and increases above a second intensity threshold (e.g., light press intensity threshold IT L ), the control icon is expanded (e.g., “popped open”) to display an enhanced view of the control in enhanced Bluetooth control  5580  (and expanded connectivity module  5550  is blurred). As shown in FIG.  5 C 43 , enhanced Bluetooth control  5580  includes additional information and/or controls (e.g., number of Bluetooth connections, battery life of each Bluetooth device, access to Bluetooth settings, etc.) that were not shown in expanded connectivity module  5550  (e.g., in FIG.  5 C 41 ). In some embodiments, device  100  displays the enhanced view of a control (e.g., enhanced Bluetooth control  5580 ) in response to a touch-hold input (e.g., a long press input by contact  5576 ) (e.g., based on length of time of the contact rather than intensity of the contact). 
     In FIGS.  5 C 42  and  5 C 44 , device  100  detects an input on AirDrop icon  5552 , such as a press gesture by contact  5577 , and in response, device  100  displays an enhanced view of the AirDrop control (e.g., enhanced AirDrop control  5582 , FIG.  5 C 44 ). As shown in FIG.  5 C 42 , as the press gesture by contact  5577 - a  increases above a first intensity threshold (e.g., hint intensity threshold IT H ), AirDrop icon  5552  increases in size (and optionally, the rest of expanded connectivity module  5550  starts to blur). As shown in FIG.  5 C 44 , as the press gesture by contact  5577 - b  continues to increase in intensity and increases above a second intensity threshold (e.g., light press intensity threshold IT L ), the control icon is expanded (e.g., “popped open”) to display an enhanced view of the control in enhanced AirDrop control  5582  (and expanded connectivity module  5550  is blurred). As shown in FIG.  5 C 44 , enhanced AirDrop control  5582  includes additional information and/or controls (e.g., options to select between “Receiving Off,” “Contacts Only,” and “Everyone,” etc.) that were not shown in expanded connectivity module  5550  (e.g., in FIG.  5 C 41 ). In some embodiments, device  100  displays the enhanced view of a control (e.g., enhanced AirDrop control  5582 ) in response to a touch-hold input (e.g., a long press input by contact  5577 ) (e.g., based on length of time of the contact rather than intensity of the contact). 
     In FIGS.  5 C 42  and  5 C 45 , device  100  detects an input on Personal Hotspot icon  5554 , such as a press gesture by contact  5578 , and in response, device  100  displays an enhanced view of the Personal Hotspot control (e.g., enhanced Personal Hotspot control  5584 , FIG.  5 C 45 ). As shown in FIG.  5 C 42 , as the press gesture by contact  5578 - a  increases above a first intensity threshold (e.g., hint intensity threshold IT H ), Personal Hotspot icon  5554  increases in size (and optionally, the rest of expanded connectivity module  5550  starts to blur). As shown in FIG.  5 C 45 , as the press gesture by contact  5578 - b  continues to increase in intensity and increases above a second intensity threshold (e.g., light press intensity threshold IT L ), the control icon is expanded (e.g., “popped open”) to display an enhanced view of the control in enhanced Personal Hotspot control  5584  (and expanded connectivity module  5550  is blurred). As shown in FIG.  5 C 45 , enhanced Personal Hotspot control  5584  includes additional information and/or controls (e.g., Wi-Fi password, access to Personal Hotspot settings, etc.) that were not shown in expanded connectivity module  5550  (e.g., in FIG.  5 C 41 ). In some embodiments, device  100  displays the enhanced view of a control (e.g., enhanced Personal Hotspot control  5584 ) in response to a touch-hold input (e.g., a long press input by contact  5578 ) (e.g., based on length of time of the contact rather than intensity of the contact). 
     FIGS.  5 D 1 - 5 D 42  illustrate example user interfaces for displaying and editing a control panel user interface (also sometimes called a “control center”), in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in  FIGS. 12A-12I . For convenience of explanation, some of the embodiments will be discussed with reference to operations performed on a device with a touch-sensitive display system  112 . In such embodiments, the focus selector is, optionally: a respective finger or stylus contact, a representative point corresponding to a finger or stylus contact (e.g., a centroid of a respective contact or a point associated with a respective contact), or a centroid of two or more contacts detected on the touch-sensitive display system  112 . However, analogous operations are, optionally, performed on a device with a display  450  and a separate touch-sensitive surface  451  in response to detecting the contacts on the touch-sensitive surface  451  while displaying the user interfaces shown in the figures on the display  450 , along with a focus selector. 
     FIG.  5 D 1  illustrates displaying a control panel user interface  5518  that includes one or more control affordances. As shown in FIG.  5 D 1 , control panel user interface  5518  includes airplane mode icon  5542 , cellular data icon  5544 , Wi-Fi icon  5546 , Bluetooth icon  5548 , audio control  5622 , orientation lock icon  5624 , Do Not Disturb icon  5626 , AirPlay icon  5628 , brightness control  5630 , volume control  5632 , and one or more user-configurable control affordances, including: flashlight icon  5600 , timer icon  5602 , calculator icon  5604 , and camera icon  5606 . In some embodiments, one or more of the control affordances on control panel user interface  5518  are not user-configurable (e.g., is, optionally, not removed or rearranged by a user of device  100 ). For example, in some embodiments, control affordances such as airplane mode icon  5542 , cellular data icon  5544 , Wi-Fi icon  5546 , Bluetooth icon  5548 , audio control  5622 , orientation lock icon  5624 , Do Not Disturb icon  5626 , AirPlay icon  5628 , brightness control  5630 , and volume control  5632  are not user-configurable. In some embodiments, one or more of the control affordances on control panel user interface  5518  are user-configurable (e.g., are permitted, by the device, to be added, removed, or rearranged by a user of device  100 ). For example, in some embodiments, control affordances such as flashlight icon  5600 , timer icon  5602 , calculator icon  5604 , and camera icon  5606  are user-configurable. 
     FIGS.  5 D 2 - 5 D 7  illustrate navigating to a control panel settings user interface (e.g., control panel settings user interface  5648 , FIG.  5 D 7 ) from a control panel user interface (e.g., user interface  5518 , FIG.  5 D 2 ). In FIGS.  5 D 2 - 5 D 3 , device  100  detects an input on home affordance  5506 , such as a swipe up gesture by contact  5640 , and in response, displays the home screen (e.g., home screen user interface  5512 , FIG.  5 D 3 ). In FIGS.  5 D 4 - 5 D 5 , device  100  detects an input on settings icon  446 , such as a tap gesture by contact  5642 , and in response, displays a settings user interface (e.g., settings user interface  5644 , FIG.  5 D 5 ). In FIGS.  5 D 6 - 5 D 7 , device  100  detects an input to select the control panel settings, such as a tap gesture by contact  5646 , and in response, displays a control panel settings user interface (e.g., control panel settings user interface  5648 , FIG.  5 D 7 ). As shown in FIG.  5 D 7 , control panel settings user interface  5648  displays a set of selected modules (e.g., flashlight, timer, calculator, and camera) that are currently selected for display in control panel user interface  5518  (e.g., in FIG.  5 D 2 ) and a set of zero or more additional modules (e.g., in an unselected state) that are not currently included in control panel user interface  5518 , but are available to be included in the configurable portion(s) of control panel user interface  5518 . As in the example of FIG.  5 D 7 , if there are more modules than can be displayed in an initial single screen of control panel settings user interface  5648 , the list of modules is scrollable to allow display of additional modules (e.g., additional modules in the “More Modules” list). In FIG.  5 D 7 , “+” and “−” selection controls are used to add or remove modules, respectively, from control panel user interface  5518 . In some embodiments, other methods are used to add or remove modules (e.g., an ON/OFF toggle affordance for each module, dragging modules from the “More Modules” list to the “Selected Modules” list to add modules, dragging modules from the “Selected Modules” list to the “More Modules” list to remove modules, etc.). 
     FIGS.  5 D 8 - 5 D 11  illustrate an example of adding a control affordance to the control panel user interface. In FIGS.  5 D 8 - 5 D 9 , device  100  detects an input on the “+” selection control for the Home module, such as a tap gesture by contact  5650 , and in response, moves the Home module from the “More Modules” list to the “Selected Modules” list (e.g., as shown in FIG.  5 D 9 ). In FIGS.  5 D 10 - 5 D 11 , device  100  detects an input on the “Done” icon of control panel settings user interface  5648 , such as a tap gesture by contact  5652 , and in response, displays control panel user interface  5518 . Although the example in FIG.  5 D 11  uses the “Done” icon to return to control panel user interface  5518 , in some embodiments, the control panel user interface is, optionally, enabled, by the device, to be accessed in other ways, as described above with respect to FIGS.  5 C 1 - 5 C 12  (e.g., a press input on the bottom edge of touch screen  112  that exceeds an intensity threshold (e.g., light press intensity threshold IT L ), a horizontal swipe gesture on the bottom edge of touch screen  112 , an up-and-left arc gesture, or a tap gesture on the status indicators). As shown in FIG.  5 D 11 , now that the Home module has been selected for display, Home icon  5608  is displayed in control panel user interface  5518 . 
     FIG.  5 D 12  illustrates control panel user interface  5518  after multiple modules have been selected (e.g., in a similar manner as described above with respect to FIGS.  5 D 8 - 5 D 11 ). As shown in FIG.  5 D 12 , control panel user interface  5518  includes a set of control affordances that are not user-configurable (e.g., airplane mode icon  5542 , cellular data icon  5544 , Wi-Fi icon  5546 , Bluetooth icon  5548 , audio control  5622 , orientation lock icon  5624 , Do Not Disturb icon  5626 , AirPlay icon  5628 , brightness control  5630 , and volume control  5632 ), and one or more user-configurable control affordances, including: flashlight icon  5600 , timer icon  5602 , calculator icon  5604 , and camera icon  5606 , Home icon  5608 , accessibility icon  5610 , Apple TV remote icon  5612 , type size icon  5614 , low power mode icon  5616 , CarPlay icon  5618 , and hearing aid icon  5620 . 
     FIGS.  5 D 12 - 5 D 17  illustrate navigating to a control panel settings user interface (e.g., control panel settings user interface  5648 , FIG.  5 D 17 ) from a control panel user interface (e.g., user interface  5518 , FIG.  5 D 12 ). In FIGS.  5 D 12 - 5 D 13 , device  100  detects an input on home affordance  5506 , such as a swipe up gesture by contact  5654 , and in response, displays the home screen (e.g., home screen user interface  5512 , FIG.  5 D 13 ). In FIGS.  5 D 14 - 5 D 15 , device  100  detects an input on settings icon  446 , such as a tap gesture by contact  5656 , and in response, displays a settings user interface (e.g., settings user interface  5644 , FIG.  5 D 15 ). In FIGS.  5 D 16 - 5 D 17 , device  100  detects an input to select the control panel settings, such as a tap gesture by contact  5658 , and in response, displays a control panel settings user interface (e.g., control panel settings user interface  5648 , FIG.  5 D 17 ). As shown in FIG.  5 D 17 , control panel settings user interface  5648  displays a set of selected modules (e.g., flashlight, timer, calculator, camera, Home, accessibility, Apple TV remote, etc.) that are currently selected for display in control panel user interface  5518  (e.g., in FIG.  5 D 12 ). As in the example of FIG.  5 D 17 , if there are more modules than can be displayed in an initial single screen of control panel settings user interface  5648 , the list of modules is scrollable to allow display of additional modules (e.g., additional modules in the “Selected Modules” list). 
     FIGS.  5 D 18 - 5 D 22  illustrate scrolling through the “Selected Modules” list of control panel settings user interface  5648 . FIGS.  5 D 18 - 5 D 19  illustrate an upward movement of a contact  5660  (e.g., in a drag gesture from location of contact  5660 - a  to location of contact  5660 - b ). In some embodiments, the list of modules moves by the same amount as the horizontal component of movement of contact  5660  on the display. In this example, contact  5660 - a  started on the “Home” module (e.g., in FIG.  5 D 18 ), which is moved up (e.g., in accordance with movement of contact  5660 ) to display additional modules that were not visible in the initial single screen of control panel settings user interface  5648  of FIG.  5 D 18  (e.g., type size, low power mode, CarPlay, and Jane&#39;s Hearing Aids). In some embodiments, upon liftoff of contact  5660 , the scrollable list remains in the position to which it was scrolled, as shown in FIG.  5 D 20 . FIGS.  5 D 21 - 5 D 22  illustrate a downward movement of a contact  5662  (e.g., in a drag gesture from location of contact  5662 - a  to location of contact  5662 - b ). As contact  5662  moves downward, the scrollable list is scrolled back to the original starting point. 
     FIGS.  5 D 23 - 5 D 27  illustrate reordering representations of modules in control panel settings user interface  5648 , which corresponds to an analogous reordering in the control panel user interface  5518  (e.g., from an initial ordering of control affordances in FIG.  5 D 12  to an updated ordering of control affordances in FIG.  5 D 27 ). In some embodiments, each user-configurable control that is currently selected for display in the control panel user interface (e.g., the modules in the “Selected Modules” list of the control panel settings user interface) includes a reorder control. For example, the representation of the “Apple TV Remote” module includes reorder control  5664 . In FIGS.  5 D 24 - 5 D 25 , device  100  detects an input on reorder control  5664  to move the representation of “Apple TV Remote,” such as a drag gesture by contact  5666 , and in response, moves the representation of “Apple TV Remote” to between the representation of “Camera” and the representation of “Home.” In some embodiments, a drag gesture on a location other than a reorder control results in scrolling the list of modules, as described above with respect to FIG.  5 D 18 - 5 D 22 . In FIGS.  5 D 26 - 5 D 27 , device  100  detects an input on the “Done” icon of control panel settings user interface  5648 , such as a tap gesture by contact  5668 , and in response, displays control panel user interface  5518 . Although the example in FIG.  5 D 26  uses the “Done” icon to return to control panel user interface  5518 , in some embodiments, the control panel user interface is, optionally, enabled, by the device, to be accessed in other ways, as described above with respect to FIGS.  5 C 1 - 5 C 12  (e.g., a press input on the bottom edge of touch screen  112  that exceeds an intensity threshold (e.g., light press intensity threshold IT L ), a horizontal swipe gesture on the bottom edge of touch screen  112 , an up-and-left arc gesture, or a tap gesture on the status indicators). As shown in FIG.  5 D 27 , now that the Apple TV remote module has been reordered, Apple TV remote icon  5612  is displayed after camera icon  5606  and before Home icon  5608  in control panel user interface  5518 . 
     FIGS.  5 D 27 - 5 D 29  illustrate displaying a control panel user interface (e.g., user interface  5518 , FIG.  5 D 27 ), and in response to a press input on an expandable control icon (e.g., accessibility icon  5610 ), displaying an enhanced view of the expandable control (e.g., enhanced accessibility control  5672 , FIG.  5 D 29 ). In FIGS.  5 D 28 - 5 D 29 , device  100  detects an input on accessibility icon  5610 , such as a press gesture by contact  5670 , and in response, device  100  displays an enhanced view of the accessibility control (e.g., enhanced accessibility control  5672 , FIG.  5 D 29 ). As shown in FIG.  5 D 28 , as the press gesture by contact  5670 - a  increases above a first intensity threshold (e.g., hint intensity threshold IT H ), accessibility icon  5610  increases in size (and optionally, the rest of control panel user interface  5518  starts to blur). As shown in FIG.  5 D 29 , as the press gesture by contact  5670 - b  continues to increase in intensity and increases above a second intensity threshold (e.g., light press intensity threshold IT L ), the control icon is expanded (e.g., “popped open”) to display an enhanced view of the control in enhanced accessibility control  5672  and the rest of control panel user interface  5518  is blurred further. As shown in FIG.  5 D 29 , enhanced accessibility control  5672  includes additional information and/or controls (e.g., accessibility shortcuts such as “Color Filters,” “Invert Colors,” “Reduce White Point,” etc.) that were not shown in control panel user interface  5518  (e.g., in FIG.  5 D 27 ). In some embodiments, device  100  displays the enhanced view of a control (e.g., enhanced accessibility control  5672 ) in response to a touch-hold input (e.g., a long press input by contact  5670 ) (e.g., based on length of time of the contact rather than intensity of the contact). In some embodiments, upon liftoff of contact  5670 , enhanced accessibility control  5672  remains displayed. 
     In FIGS.  5 D 30 - 5 D 31 , device  100  detects an input to select an accessibility shortcut (e.g., to select “Reduce White Point”), such as a tap gesture by contact  5674 , and in response, activates “Reduce White Point” and changes the appearance of the accessibility icon (e.g., from light to dark, indicating that an accessibility feature is in an ON state). 
     In FIGS.  5 D 32 - 5 D 33 , device  100  detects an input outside of enhanced accessibility control  5672 , such as a tap gesture by contact  5676 , and in response, dismisses the enhanced accessibility control  5672  and displays control panel user interface  5518  (e.g., in FIG.  5 D 33 ). As shown in FIG.  5 D 33 , accessibility icon  5610  is now darkened, indicating that an accessibility feature is on. 
     In FIGS.  5 D 34 - 5 D 35 , device  100  detects an input on accessibility icon  5610 , such as a tap gesture by contact  5678 , and in response, toggles the accessibility control from ON to OFF and changes the appearance of accessibility icon  5610  (e.g., from dark to light). As shown in FIG.  5 D 34 , depending on the intensity of the tap gesture by contact  5678 , accessibility icon  5610  increases in size in accordance with a rate by which the intensity of the contact changes (e.g., increasing in size by a smaller amount in response to a tap gesture with a smaller intensity and increasing in size by a larger amount in response to a tap gesture with a larger intensity), indicating that accessibility icon  5610  is sensitive to intensity-based inputs. Although the tap gesture shown in FIG.  5 D 34  is below hint intensity threshold IT H , a hard (and quick) tap (e.g., above hint intensity threshold IT H ) is still recognized as a tap gesture by device  100  and it is not a requirement that the intensity of a tap gesture remain below a particular intensity threshold. For example, in some embodiments, the intensity of a tap gesture is above hint intensity threshold IT H , above light press intensity threshold IT L , or above deep press intensity threshold IT D , but as long as the duration of the gesture is short enough to qualify as a tap, it is still recognized as a tap gesture. 
     FIGS.  5 D 36 - 5 D 42  illustrate additional enhanced views of expandable controls (e.g., Do Not Disturb control, type size control, hearing aid control, audio control, and Apple TV remote control) from control panel user interface  5518  (e.g., in FIG.  5 D 36 ). 
     In FIGS.  5 D 36 - 5 D 37 , device  100  detects an input on Do Not Disturb icon  5626 , such as a press gesture by contact  5680 , and in response, device  100  displays an enhanced view of the Do Not Disturb control (e.g., enhanced Do Not Disturb control  5690 , FIG.  5 D 37 ). As shown in FIG.  5 D 36 , as the press gesture by contact  5680 - a  increases above a first intensity threshold (e.g., hint intensity threshold IT H ), Do Not Disturb icon  5626  increases in size (and optionally, the rest of control panel user interface  5518  starts to blur). As shown in FIG.  5 D 37 , as the press gesture by contact  5680 - b  continues to increase in intensity and increases above a second intensity threshold (e.g., light press intensity threshold IT L ), the control icon is expanded (e.g., “popped open”) to display an enhanced view of the control in enhanced Do Not Disturb control  5690  (and control panel user interface  5518  is blurred further). As shown in FIG.  5 D 37 , enhanced Do Not Disturb control  5690  includes additional information and/or controls (e.g., options to select timing of the Do Not Disturb feature, such as “Manual,” “On for next hour,” “On for rest of day,” “On until I leave this location,” and access to Do Not Disturb settings, etc.) that were not shown in control panel user interface  5518  (e.g., in FIG.  5 D 36 ). In some embodiments, device  100  displays the enhanced view of a control (e.g., enhanced Do Not Disturb control  5690 , FIG.  5 D 37 ) in response to a touch-hold input (e.g., a long press input by contact  5680 ) (e.g., based on length of time of the contact rather than intensity of the contact). 
     In FIGS.  5 D 36  and  5 D 38 , device  100  detects an input on type size icon  5614 , such as a press gesture by contact  5682 , and in response, device  100  displays an enhanced view of the type size control (e.g., enhanced type size control  5692 , FIG.  5 D 38 ). As shown in FIG.  5 D 36 , as the press gesture by contact  5682 - a  increases above a first intensity threshold (e.g., hint intensity threshold IT H ), type size icon  5614  increases in size (and optionally, the rest of control panel user interface  5518  starts to blur). As shown in FIG.  5 D 38 , as the press gesture by contact  5682 - b  continues to increase in intensity and increases above a second intensity threshold (e.g., light press intensity threshold IT L ), the control icon is expanded (e.g., “popped open”) to display an enhanced view of the control in enhanced type size control  5692  (and control panel user interface  5518  is blurred further). As shown in FIG.  5 D 38 , enhanced type size control  5692  includes a step slider bar for selecting between a first number of text sizes (e.g., seven different text sizes), ranging from a first minimum size to a first maximum size (e.g., from 6 point text size to 24 point text size). In some embodiments, enhanced type size control  5692  in FIG.  5 D 38  is a default step slider bar (e.g., when large text sizes for accessibility are not enabled). In some embodiments, device  100  displays the enhanced view of a control (e.g., enhanced type size control  5692 , FIG.  5 D 38 ) in response to a touch-hold input (e.g., a long press input by contact  5682 ) (e.g., based on length of time of the contact rather than intensity of the contact). 
     Alternatively, when large text sizes for accessibility are enabled, in FIGS.  5 D 36  and  5 D 39 , device  100  detects an input on type size icon  5614 , such as a press gesture by contact  5682 , and in response, device  100  displays an enhanced view of the type size control (e.g., enhanced type size control  5693 , FIG.  5 D 39 ). As shown in FIG.  5 D 36 , as the press gesture by contact  5682 - a  increases above a first intensity threshold (e.g., hint intensity threshold IT H ), type size icon  5614  increases in size (and optionally, the rest of control panel user interface  5518  starts to blur). As shown in FIG.  5 D 39 , as the press gesture by contact  5682 - b  continues to increase in intensity and increases above a second intensity threshold (e.g., light press intensity threshold IT L ), the control icon is expanded (e.g., “popped open”) to display an enhanced view of the control in enhanced type size control  5693  (and control panel user interface  5518  is blurred further). As shown in FIG.  5 D 39 , enhanced type size control  5693  includes a step slider bar for selecting between a second number of text sizes (e.g., twelve different text sizes), ranging from a second minimum size to a second maximum size (e.g., from 8 point text size to 60 point text size). In some embodiments, enhanced type size control  5693  in FIG.  5 D 39  is an expanded step slider bar (e.g., with more options and/or larger text size options than the default step slider bar in FIG.  5 D 38 ) that is provided when large text sizes for accessibility are enabled. In some embodiments, device  100  displays the enhanced view of a control (e.g., enhanced type size control  5693 , FIG.  5 D 39 ) in response to a touch-hold input (e.g., a long press input by contact  5682 ) (e.g., based on length of time of the contact rather than intensity of the contact). 
     In FIGS.  5 D 36  and  5 D 40 , device  100  detects an input on hearing aid icon  5620 , such as a press gesture by contact  5684 , and in response, device  100  displays an enhanced view of the hearing aid control (e.g., enhanced hearing aid control  5694 , FIG.  5 D 40 ). As shown in FIG.  5 D 36 , as the press gesture by contact  5684 - a  increases above a first intensity threshold (e.g., hint intensity threshold IT H ), hearing aid icon  5620  increases in size (and optionally, the rest of control panel user interface  5518  starts to blur). As shown in FIG.  5 D 40 , as the press gesture by contact  5684 - b  continues to increase in intensity and increases above a second intensity threshold (e.g., light press intensity threshold IT L ), the control icon is expanded (e.g., “popped open”) to display an enhanced view of the control in enhanced hearing aid control  5694  (and control panel user interface  5518  is blurred further). As shown in FIG.  5 D 40 , enhanced hearing aid control  5694  includes additional information and/or controls (e.g., battery indicators for each hearing aid, individual volume controls for each hearing aid, individual bass/treble controls, etc.) that were not shown in control panel user interface  5518  (e.g., in FIG.  5 D 36 ). In some embodiments, device  100  displays the enhanced view of a control (e.g., enhanced hearing aid control  5694 , FIG.  5 D 40 ) in response to a touch-hold input (e.g., a long press input by contact  5684 ) (e.g., based on length of time of the contact rather than intensity of the contact). 
     In FIGS.  5 D 36  and  5 D 41 , device  100  detects an input on audio control  5622 , such as a press gesture by contact  5686 , and in response, device  100  displays an enhanced view of the audio control (e.g., enhanced audio control  5696 , FIG.  5 D 41 ). As shown in FIG.  5 D 36 , as the press gesture by contact  5686 - a  increases above a first intensity threshold (e.g., hint intensity threshold IT H ), audio control  5622  increases in size (and optionally, the rest of control panel user interface  5518  starts to blur). As shown in FIG.  5 D 41 , as the press gesture by contact  5686 - b  continues to increase in intensity and increases above a second intensity threshold (e.g., light press intensity threshold IT L ), the control is expanded (e.g., “popped open”) to display an enhanced view of the control in enhanced audio control  5696  (and control panel user interface  5518  is blurred further). As shown in FIG.  5 D 41 , enhanced audio control  5696  includes additional information and/or controls (e.g., artist/album information, length of song and time played/remaining, volume control, and optionally, a control to switch the audio output to another audio device, etc.) that were not shown in control panel user interface  5518  (e.g., in FIG.  5 D 36 ). In some embodiments, device  100  displays the enhanced view of a control (e.g., enhanced audio control  5696 , FIG.  5 D 41 ) in response to a touch-hold input (e.g., a long press input by contact  5686 ) (e.g., based on length of time of the contact rather than intensity of the contact). 
     In FIGS.  5 D 36  and  5 D 42 , device  100  detects an input on Apple TV remote icon  5612 , such as a press gesture by contact  5688 , and in response, device  100  displays an enhanced view of the Apple TV remote control (e.g., enhanced Apple TV remote control  5698 , FIG.  5 D 42 ). As shown in FIG.  5 D 36 , as the press gesture by contact  5688 - a  increases above a first intensity threshold (e.g., hint intensity threshold IT H ), Apple TV remote icon  5612  increases in size (and optionally, the rest of control panel user interface  5518  starts to blur). As shown in FIG.  5 D 42 , as the press gesture by contact  5688 - b  continues to increase in intensity and increases above a second intensity threshold (e.g., light press intensity threshold IT L ), the control icon is expanded (e.g., “popped open”) to display an enhanced view of the control in enhanced Apple TV remote control  5698  (and control panel user interface  5518  is blurred further). As shown in FIG.  5 D 42 , enhanced Apple TV remote control  5698  includes additional information and/or controls (e.g., touch surface  5700  (used to swipe to navigate around another device (e.g., a TV) and tap to select), menu icon  5702  (used to return to the previous screen or menu), play/pause icon  5704  (used to play or pause content), home icon  5706  (used to see recently used apps, open an app, and/or go to the home screen), and Siri icon  5708  (used to access voice-activated controls and/or dictation), etc.) that were not shown in control panel user interface  5518  (e.g., in FIG.  5 D 36 ). In some embodiments, device  100  displays the enhanced view of a control (e.g., enhanced Apple TV remote control  5698 , FIG.  5 D 42 ) in response to a touch-hold input (e.g., a long press input by contact  5688 ) (e.g., based on length of time of the contact rather than intensity of the contact). 
     FIGS.  5 E 1 - 5 E 39  illustrate example user interfaces for displaying a control panel user interface (also sometimes called a “control center”) including one or more slider controls and, in response to different inputs on a slider control, displaying an enhanced slider control, updating the control value, or toggling the control, in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in  FIGS. 13A-13D . For convenience of explanation, some of the embodiments will be discussed with reference to operations performed on a device with a touch-sensitive display system  112 . In such embodiments, the focus selector is, optionally: a respective finger or stylus contact, a representative point corresponding to a finger or stylus contact (e.g., a centroid of a respective contact or a point associated with a respective contact), or a centroid of two or more contacts detected on the touch-sensitive display system  112 . However, analogous operations are, optionally, performed on a device with a display  450  and a separate touch-sensitive surface  451  in response to detecting the contacts on the touch-sensitive surface  451  while displaying the user interfaces shown in the figures on the display  450 , along with a focus selector. 
     FIG.  5 E 1  illustrates displaying a control panel user interface  5518  that includes one or more control affordances. As shown in FIG.  5 E 1 , control panel user interface  5518  includes airplane mode icon  5542 , cellular data icon  5544 , Wi-Fi icon  5546 , Bluetooth icon  5548 , audio control  5622 , orientation lock icon  5624 , Do Not Disturb icon  5626 , AirPlay icon  5628 , brightness control  5630 , volume control  5632 , and one or more user-configurable control affordances, including: flashlight icon  5600 , timer icon  5602 , calculator icon  5604 , and camera icon  5606 . In some embodiments, one or more of the control affordances on control panel user interface  5518  are slider control affordances that are responsive to inputs to adjust the control (e.g., by a drag input on the indicator of the slider control) and to inputs to toggle the control (e.g., by a tap input on the slide control). For example, in some embodiments, control affordances such as brightness control  5630  and volume control  5632  are slider control affordances. 
     FIGS.  5 E 2 - 5 E 3  illustrate an example of adjusting the brightness of device  100  using brightness control  5630 . In FIGS.  5 E 2 - 5 E 3 , device  100  detects an input on brightness control  5630 , such as a drag gesture by contact  5800 , and in response, device  100  changes the position of the indicator of brightness control  5630  (to indicate an update to the selected brightness control value) in accordance with movement of contact  5800  (e.g., as shown in FIG.  5 E 3 ). 
     FIGS.  5 E 4 - 5 E 7  illustrate an example of toggling a brightness function of device  100  using brightness control  5630 . In FIGS.  5 E 4 - 5 E 5 , device  100  detects an input on brightness control  5630 , such as a tap gesture by contact  5802 , and in response, toggles the brightness control from Night Shift OFF to Night Shift ON and changes the appearance of brightness control  5630  (e.g., from displaying the default brightness icon to displaying the Night Shift icon), while maintaining the currently selected brightness control value. In FIGS.  5 E 6 - 5 E 7 , device  100  detects an input on brightness control  5630 , such as a tap gesture by contact  5804 , and in response, toggles the brightness control from Night Shift ON to Night Shift OFF and changes the appearance of brightness control  5630  (e.g., from displaying the Night Shift icon to displaying the default brightness icon), while maintaining the currently selected brightness control value. As shown in FIGS.  5 E 4  and  5 E 6 , depending on the intensity of the tap gesture by the contact (e.g., contacts  5802  and  5804 , respectively), brightness control  5630  increases in size in accordance with a rate by which the intensity of the contact changes (e.g., increasing in size by a smaller amount in response to a tap gesture with a smaller intensity and increasing in size by a larger amount in response to a tap gesture with a larger intensity), indicating that brightness control  5630  is sensitive to intensity-based inputs. 
     FIGS.  5 E 7 - 5 E 10  illustrate displaying a control panel user interface (e.g., user interface  5518 , FIG.  5 E 7 ), and in response to a press input on brightness control  5630 , displaying an expanded view of the brightness control (e.g., expanded brightness control  5808 , FIG.  5 E 9 ). In FIGS.  5 E 7 - 5 E 8 , device  100  detects an input on brightness control  5630 , such as a press gesture by contact  5806 , and in response, device  100  displays an expanded view of the brightness control (e.g., expanded brightness control  5808 , FIG.  5 E 9 ). As shown in FIG.  5 E 8 , as the press gesture by contact  5806 - a  increases above a first intensity threshold (e.g., hint intensity threshold IT H ), brightness control  5630  increases in size and the rest of control panel user interface  5518  starts to blur. As shown in FIG.  5 E 9 , as the press gesture by contact  5806 - b  continues to increase in intensity and increases above a second intensity threshold (e.g., light press intensity threshold IT L ), the control is expanded (e.g., “popped open”) to display an expanded view of the control in expanded brightness control  5808  (and control panel user interface  5518  is blurred further). As shown in FIG.  5 E 9 , expanded brightness control  5808  includes additional controls (e.g., Night Shift icon and True Tone icon) and additional information (e.g., status of each control, a larger slider bar, etc.) that were not shown in control panel user interface  5518  (e.g., in FIG.  5 E 7 ). In some embodiments, device  100  displays the expanded view of a control (e.g., expanded brightness control  5808 , FIG.  5 E 9 ) in response to a touch-hold input (e.g., a long press input by contact  5806 ) (e.g., based on length of time of the contact rather than intensity of the contact). As shown in FIG.  5 E 10 , upon liftoff of contact  5806 , expanded brightness control  5808  remains displayed. 
     In FIGS.  5 E 11 - 5 E 12 , device  100  detects an input outside of expanded brightness control  5808 , such as a tap gesture by contact  5810 , and in response, dismisses the expanded brightness control  5808  and displays control panel user interface  5518  (e.g., in FIG.  5 E 12 ). Although in this example, no changes related to brightness (e.g., changing the brightness control value, turning on Night Shift, turning on True Tone, etc.) were made while the expanded brightness control  5808  was displayed, if any changes were made while the expanded brightness control  5808  was displayed, brightness control  5630  would change in appearance accordingly. 
     FIGS.  5 E 12 - 5 E 15  illustrate displaying a control panel user interface (e.g., user interface  5518 , FIG.  5 E 12 ), and in response to a press input on volume control  5632 , displaying an expanded view of the volume control (e.g., expanded volume control  5814 , FIG.  5 E 14 ). In FIGS.  5 E 13 - 5 E 14 , device  100  detects an input on volume control  5632 , such as a press gesture by contact  5812 , and in response, device  100  displays an expanded view of the volume control (e.g., expanded volume control  5814 , FIG.  5 E 14 ). As shown in FIG.  5 E 13 , as the press gesture by contact  5812 - a  increases above a first intensity threshold (e.g., hint intensity threshold IT H ), volume control  5632  increases in size and the rest of control panel user interface  5518  starts to blur. As shown in FIG.  5 E 14 , as the press gesture by contact  5812 - b  continues to increase in intensity and increases above a second intensity threshold (e.g., light press intensity threshold IT L ), the control is expanded (e.g., “popped open”) to display an expanded view of the control in expanded volume control  5814  (and control panel user interface  5518  is blurred further). As shown in FIG.  5 E 14 , expanded volume control  5814  includes additional controls (e.g., ringer icon  5816 ) and additional information (e.g., a larger volume slider bar  5818 ) that were not shown in control panel user interface  5518  (e.g., in FIG.  5 E 12 ). In some embodiments, device  100  displays the expanded view of a control (e.g., expanded volume control  5814 , FIG.  5 E 14 ) in response to a touch-hold input (e.g., a long press input by contact  5812 ) (e.g., based on length of time of the contact rather than intensity of the contact). As shown in FIG.  5 E 15 , upon liftoff of contact  5812 , expanded volume control  5814  remains displayed. 
     FIGS.  5 E 16 - 5 E 18  illustrate switching between controlling volume for a first type of audio output (e.g., regular audio output, such as for media content audio, represented by “Volume”) and controlling volume for a second type of audio output (e.g., ringer audio output, such as for a telephone ringer, represented by “Ringer”) in expanded volume control  5814 . In FIG.  5 E 16 , device  100  detects an input on ringer icon  5816 , such as a tap gesture by contact  5820 . In response, device  100  replaces display of the volume slider bar  5818  (e.g., in FIG.  5 E 16 ) with display of the ringer slider bar  5822  (e.g., in FIG.  5 E 18 ). In some embodiments, an animated transition from the volume slider bar  5818  to the ringer slider bar  5822  is displayed, as shown in FIGS.  5 E 16 - 5 E 18 , where ringer icon  5816  transforms into the ringer slider bar  5822  and the volume slider bar  5818  transforms into volume icon  5824 . 
     FIGS.  5 E 19 - 5 E 21  illustrate switching between controlling volume for a second type of audio output (e.g., ringer audio output, such as for a telephone ringer, represented by “Ringer”) and controlling volume for a first type of audio output (e.g., regular audio output, such as for media content audio, represented by “Volume”) in expanded volume control  5814 . In FIG.  5 E 19 , device  100  detects an input on volume icon  5824 , such as a tap gesture by contact  5826 . In response, device  100  replaces display of the ringer slider bar  5822  (e.g., in FIG.  5 E 19 ) with display of the volume slider bar  5818  (e.g., in FIG.  5 E 21 ). In some embodiments, an animated transition from the ringer slider bar  5822  to the volume slider bar  5818  is displayed, as shown in FIGS.  5 E 19 - 5 E 21 , where volume icon  5824  transforms into the volume slider bar  5818  and ringer slider bar  5822  transforms into ringer icon  5816 . 
     In FIGS.  5 E 22 - 5 E 23 , device  100  detects an input outside of expanded volume control  5814 , such as a tap gesture by contact  5828 , and in response, dismisses the expanded volume control  5814  and displays control panel user interface  5518  (e.g., in FIG.  5 E 23 ). Although in this example, no changes related to volume (e.g., changing the volume control value, switching to controlling volume for the ringer, changing the ringer volume control value, etc.) were maintained while the expanded volume control  5814  was displayed, if any changes were made (and maintained) while the expanded volume control  5814  was displayed, volume control  5632  would change in appearance accordingly. 
     FIGS.  5 E 24 - 5 E 27  illustrate an example of toggling volume control  5632 . In FIGS.  5 E 24 - 5 E 25 , device  100  detects an input on volume control  5632 , such as a tap gesture by contact  5830 , and in response, toggles the volume control from ON to OFF (e.g., from the currently selected volume level to a muted volume level) and changes the appearance of volume control  5632  (e.g., from displaying the default volume icon to displaying the muted volume icon and adjusting the indicator on the slider bar accordingly). In FIGS.  5 E 26 - 5 E 27 , device  100  detects an input on volume control  5632 , such as a tap gesture by contact  5832 , and in response, toggles the volume control from OFF to ON (e.g., from a muted volume level back to the previously selected volume level) and changes the appearance of volume control  5632  (e.g., from displaying the muted volume icon to displaying the default volume icon and adjusting the indicator on the slider bar accordingly). As shown in FIGS.  5 E 24  and  5 E 26 , depending on the intensity of the tap gesture by the contact (e.g., contacts  5830  and  5832 , respectively), volume control  5632  increases in size in accordance with a rate by which the intensity of the contact changes (e.g., increasing in size by a smaller amount in response to a tap gesture with a smaller intensity and increasing in size by a larger amount in response to a tap gesture with a larger intensity), indicating that volume control  5632  is sensitive to intensity-based inputs. 
     FIGS.  5 E 28 - 5 E 38  illustrate an example of adjusting text size while displaying the changes from the text size adjustments. FIG.  5 E 28  illustrates displaying a user interface of an open application (e.g., user interface  5840  of a messaging application). In FIGS.  5 E 28 - 5 E 29 , device  100  detects an input on the status indicators, such as a tap gesture by contact  5842 , and in response, device  100  displays a control panel user interface  5518  (e.g., in FIG.  5 E 29 ). Although the example in FIG.  5 E 8  uses a tap gesture on the status indicators to access control panel user interface  5518 , in some embodiments, the control panel user interface is, optionally, enabled, by the device, to be accessed in other ways, as described above with respect to FIGS.  5 C 7 - 5 C 9  (e.g., a press input on the bottom edge of touch screen  112  that exceeds an intensity threshold (e.g., light press intensity threshold IT L ), a horizontal swipe gesture on the bottom edge of touch screen  112 , an up-and-left arc gesture, etc.). 
     In FIGS.  5 E 30 - 5 E 32 , device  100  detects an input on type size icon  5614 , such as a press gesture by contact  5844 , and in response, device  100  displays an enhanced view of the type size control (e.g., enhanced type size control  5692 , FIG.  5 E 31 ). As shown in FIG.  5 E 30 , as the press gesture by contact  5844 - a  increases above a first intensity threshold (e.g., hint intensity threshold IT H ), type size icon  5614  increases in size and the rest of control panel user interface  5518  starts to blur. As shown in FIG.  5 E 31 , as the press gesture by contact  5844 - b  continues to increase in intensity and increases above a second intensity threshold (e.g., light press intensity threshold IT L ), the control icon is expanded (e.g., “popped open”) to display an enhanced view of the control in enhanced type size control  5692  (and control panel user interface  5518  is blurred further). As shown in FIG.  5 E 31 , enhanced type size control  5692  includes a step slider bar for selecting between a number of text sizes (e.g., seven different text sizes), ranging from a first minimum size to a first maximum size. In some embodiments, enhanced type size control  5692  in FIG.  5 E 31  is a default step slider bar (e.g., when large text sizes for accessibility are not enabled). In some embodiments, device  100  displays the enhanced view of a control (e.g., enhanced type size control  5692 , FIG.  5 E 31 ) in response to a touch-hold input (e.g., a long press input by contact  5844 ) (e.g., based on length of time of the contact rather than intensity of the contact). As shown in FIG.  5 E 32 , upon liftoff of contact  5844 , enhanced type size control  5692  remains displayed, with the blurred control panel user interface  5518  in the background. 
     In FIGS.  5 E 33 - 5 E 36 , device  100  detects an input on the step slider bar of enhanced type size control  5692 , such as a drag gesture by contact  5846 , to adjust the text size. In response, device  100  reveals a portion of user interface  5840  and changes the text size of the revealed portion of user interface  5840  in accordance with changes in the position of the text size indicator in the step slider bar. As shown in FIGS.  5 E 33 - 5 E 36 , as the position of the text size indicator is moved upward by movement of contact  5846 , the text size in user interface  5840  is increased accordingly. As shown in FIG.  5 E 36 , upon liftoff of contact  5846 , enhanced type size control  5692  remains displayed and user interface  5840  is replaced by the blurred control panel user interface  5518  in the background. 
     In FIGS.  5 E 37 - 5 E 38 , device  100  detects an input outside of enhanced type size control  5692 , such as a tap gesture by contact  5848 , and in response, dismisses the enhanced type size control  5692  and displays control panel user interface  5518  (e.g., in FIG.  5 E 38 ). 
     Previous examples of control panel user interface  5518  in  FIGS. 5E - 5 E 38  have shown control panel user interface  5518  in portrait mode. FIG.  5 E 39  illustrates displaying control panel user interface  5518  in landscape mode. Compared to the control panel user interface  5518  displayed in portrait mode (e.g., in FIG.  5 E 38 ), the control panel user interface  5518  displayed in landscape mode (e.g., in FIG.  5 E 39 ) includes the same control affordances. However, the slider controls, including brightness control  5630  and volume control  5632  are displayed with a different vertical length in landscape mode compared to portrait mode. For example, when brightness control  5630  is displayed in control panel user interface  5518  in portrait mode, brightness control  5630  is displayed below another control module and is shorter in vertical length, but when brightness control  5630  is displayed in control panel user interface  5518  in landscape mode, brightness control  5630  is displayed without another control module above it and is taller in vertical length. Similarly, volume control  5632  is shorter in portrait mode and taller in landscape mode. 
     FIGS.  5 F 1 - 5 F 45  illustrate example user interfaces for displaying a dock or displaying a control panel (e.g., instead of or in addition to the dock), in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in  FIGS. 14A-14E . For convenience of explanation, some of the embodiments will be discussed with reference to operations performed on a device with a touch-sensitive display system  112 . In such embodiments, the focus selector is, optionally: a respective finger or stylus contact, a representative point corresponding to a finger or stylus contact (e.g., a centroid of a respective contact or a point associated with a respective contact), or a centroid of two or more contacts detected on the touch-sensitive display system  112 . However, analogous operations are, optionally, performed on a device with a display  450  and a separate touch-sensitive surface  451  in response to detecting the contacts on the touch-sensitive surface  451  while displaying the user interfaces shown in the figures on the display  450 , along with a focus selector. 
     FIGS.  5 F 1 - 5 F 8  illustrate an example of displaying a dock and then a control panel (e.g., in an application-switcher user interface) in response to a single long upward swipe from the bottom edge of the device. FIG.  5 F 1  illustrates displaying a user interface  5850  of an application (e.g., of a browser application). FIGS.  5 F 2 - 5 F 7  illustrate movement of contact  5852  (e.g., in a swipe gesture) from the bottom edge of device  100  and across touch screen  112  in an upward direction. In FIGS.  5 F 3 - 5 F 4 , as contact  5852  moves upward (e.g., past a first threshold distance), dock  5854  moves onto user interface  5850  with movement of contact  5852 . In some embodiments, if the gesture stops (e.g., liftoff of the contact is detected) before reaching the first threshold distance for displaying the dock (e.g., in FIG.  5 F 3 ), the dock ceases to be displayed on liftoff (e.g., the dock slides back off of the display in the direction that it came from). In some embodiments, dock  5854  is a container that includes one or more application launch icons (e.g., a predefined set of application launch icons, application launch icons for one or more recently open applications on the device, application launch icons that are recommended by the device based on predetermined criteria, a combination of two or more of the above, etc.). In these examples, dock  5854  is shown with application launch icons for phone, mail, browser, and video. In some embodiments, dock  5854  includes other combinations of application launch icons (e.g., intelligently-selected application launch icons, such as icons for the most frequently used applications, the most recently used applications, and/or applications selected based on some other criteria, and, optionally, intelligently excluding certain application launch icons, such as icons or representations for currently displayed applications or currently open applications). In FIGS.  5 F 5 - 5 F 7 , as movement of contact  5852  continues to move upward (e.g., past a second threshold distance greater than the first threshold distance), the device displays an application switcher user interface that includes a grid of application views for a plurality of recently open applications and a control panel view corresponding to a control panel user interface, e.g., including displaying an animated transition of user interface  5850  decreasing in size to reveal an (initially blurred) application-switcher user interface  5856  (e.g., that includes control panel  5886 ) and the reduced-scale image of user interface  5850  dropping into place in the (no longer blurred) application-switcher user interface  5856 , as shown in FIG.  5 F 8 . In some embodiments, if the gesture stops (e.g., liftoff of the contact is detected) before reaching the second threshold distance for displaying the application-switcher user interface (e.g., in FIG.  5 F 6 ), the application expands to fill the display on liftoff. In some embodiments, the application-switcher user interface  5856  is revealed by an animated transition of the application-switcher user interface  5856  moving onto user interface  5850  (e.g., sliding in behind dock  5854 ), as shown below in FIGS.  5 F 16 - 5 F 18 . In some embodiments, as shown in FIG.  5 F 8 , when the application-switcher user interface  5856  is displayed, dock  5854  is obscured (e.g., masked or severely blurred). In some embodiments, as shown in FIG.  5 F 9 , when the application-switcher user interface  5856  is displayed, dock  5854  remains displayed with its original clarity and appearance. In some embodiments, the application-switcher user interface  5856  is slightly translucent and is overlaid on the previously-displayed user interface (e.g., a blurred user interface  5850 ). 
     FIG.  5 F 9  illustrates various examples of inputs on the application-switcher user interface  5856 . As shown in FIG.  5 F 9 , the application-switcher user interface  5856  includes control panel view  5886  (e.g., a reduced-scale image of a control panel user interface), dock  5854 , and one or more application views (e.g., a reduced scale image of a user interface of a corresponding application, such as application view  5851  of a browser application, application view  5858  of a reading application, application view  5860  of a timer application, and application view  5862  of a music application). In response to an input in an area not occupied by a selectable object (e.g., outside of any application views, control panel, and dock), such as a tap gesture by contact  5864 , device  100  dismisses (e.g., ceases to display) the application-switcher user interface  5856  and displays the previously-displayed user interface (e.g., user interface  5850 ), as shown in FIG.  5 F 10 . In response to an input on an application view, device  100  dismisses the application-switcher user interface  5856  and displays the corresponding application. For example, in response to an input on application view  5851 , such as a tap gesture by contact  5865 , device  100  dismisses the application-switcher user interface  5856  and displays user interface  5850  of the application corresponding to application view  5851 , as shown in FIG.  5 F 10 . As another example, in response to an input on application view  5862 , such as a tap gesture by contact  5866 , device  100  dismisses the application-switcher user interface  5856  and displays a user interface of the music application corresponding to application view  5862 . In response to an input on an application launch icon in dock  5854 , device  100  dismisses the application-switcher user interface  5856  and displays the corresponding application. For example, in response to an input on the application launch icon for the phone in dock  5854 , such as a tap gesture by contact  5868 , device  100  launches the phone application. In some embodiments, in response to an input on control panel view  5886 , such as a tap gesture on control panel view  5886 , device  100  dismisses the application-switcher user interface  5856  and displays control panel user interface. In some embodiments, some or all of the controls represented in control panel view  5886  are live controls, and in response to an input on a control in control panel view  5886 , device  100  displays an expanded or enhanced control region or activates the control (e.g., as discussed in detail with respect to FIGS.  5 C 1 - 5 C 45  and  FIGS. 11A-11E ). For example, in FIG.  5 F 9 , a tap gesture by contact  5870  on the flashlight icon launches the flashlight application. 
     FIGS.  5 F 10 - 5 F 14  illustrate an example of a displaying a dock in response to a short upward swipe from the bottom edge of the device. FIG.  5 F 10  illustrates displaying user interface  5850  of a browser application. FIGS.  5 F 11 - 5 F 13  illustrate movement of contact  5880  (e.g., in a swipe gesture) from the bottom edge of device  100  and across touch screen  112  in an upward direction. In FIGS.  5 F 11 - 5 F 12 , as contact  5880  moves upward (e.g., past a first threshold distance, but not past a second threshold distance greater than the first threshold distance), dock  5854  moves onto user interface  5850  with movement of contact  5880 . In some embodiments, if contact  5880  lifts off before reaching the first threshold distance, dock  5854  retracts back down and ceases to be displayed. In some embodiments, as shown in FIGS.  5 F 13 - 5 F 14 , if contact  5880  moves past the first threshold distance, dock  5854  continues to move onto user interface  5850 , even if contact  5880  lifts off before dock  5854  is fully revealed. 
     FIGS.  5 F 15 - 5 F 18  illustrate an example of a displaying a control panel (e.g., control panel view  5886  in application-switcher user interface  5856 ) in response to a short upward swipe from the bottom edge of the device when dock  5854  is already displayed. FIG.  5 F 15  illustrates displaying dock  5854  overlaid on user interface  5850  of a browser application (e.g., after an initial short upward swipe, as described above in FIGS.  5 F 10 - 5 F 14 ). FIGS.  5 F 15 - 5 F 17  illustrate movement of contact  5882  (e.g., in a swipe gesture) from the bottom edge of device  100  and across touch screen  112  in an upward direction. In FIGS.  5 F 15 - 5 F 16 , as contact  5882  moves upward (e.g., past a threshold distance), application-switcher user interface  5856  moves onto user interface  5850  with movement of contact  5882 . In some embodiments, user interface  5850  begins to blur as application-switcher user interface  5856  moves onto user interface  5850 , as shown in FIG.  5 F 16 - 5 F 17 . In some embodiments, if contact  5882  lifts off before reaching the threshold distance, application-switcher user interface  5856  retracts back down and ceases to be displayed. In some embodiments, as shown in FIGS.  5 F 17 - 5 F 18 , if contact  5882  moves past the threshold distance, application-switcher user interface  5856  continues to move onto user interface  5850 , even if contact  5882  lifts off before application-switcher user interface  5856  is fully revealed. In some embodiments, application-switcher user interface  5856  is revealed in a different animated transition (e.g., as shown above in FIGS.  5 F 6 - 5 F 8 ). 
     FIGS.  5 F 19 - 5 F 22  illustrate an alternative example of a displaying a control panel (e.g., control panel object  5886 ′ overlaid on blurred dock  5854 ) in response to a short upward swipe from the bottom edge of the device when dock  5854  is already displayed. FIG.  5 F 19  illustrates displaying dock  5854  overlaid on user interface  5850  of a browser application (e.g., after an initial short upward swipe, as described above in FIGS.  5 F 10 - 5 F 14 ). FIGS.  5 F 20 - 5 F 22  illustrate movement of contact  5884  (e.g., in a swipe gesture) from the bottom edge of device  100  and across touch screen  112  in an upward direction. In FIGS.  5 F 20 - 5 F 22 , as contact  5884  moves upward (e.g., past a threshold distance), control panel object  5886 ′ moves onto user interface  5850  with movement of contact  5884 . In some embodiments, user interface  5850  begins to blur as control panel object  5886 ′ moves onto user interface  5850  (and optionally, the blur increases as control panel object  5886 ′ continues to move onto user interface  5850 ), as shown in FIG.  5 F 21 - 5 F 22 . In some embodiments, if contact  5884  lifts off before reaching the threshold distance, control panel object  5886 ′ retracts back down and ceases to be displayed. In some embodiments, if contact  5884  moves past the threshold distance control panel object  5886 ′ continues to move onto user interface  5850 , even if contact  5884  lifts off before control panel object  5886 ′ is fully revealed. FIG.  5 F 22  illustrates an example of displaying control panel object  5886 ′ overlaid on blurred dock  5854 . 
     FIG.  5 F 23  illustrates an alternative example of displaying a control panel (e.g., control panel object  5886 ′) with dock  5854 . In some embodiments, control panel object  5886 ′ moves onto user interface  5850  (e.g., either sliding in from behind dock  5854  or sliding in over dock  5854 ) and continues until control panel  5886  is displayed on top of dock  5854 , as shown in FIG.  5 F 23 . In some embodiments, user interface  5850  is not blurred when displaying control panel object  5886 ′, as shown in FIG.  5 F 23 . In some embodiments, user interface  5850  is blurred when displaying control panel object  5886 ′ (e.g., as shown in FIG.  5 F 22 ). 
     FIG.  5 F 24  illustrates another alternative example of displaying control panel (e.g., control panel object  5886 ′) with dock  5854 . In some embodiments, control panel object  5886 ′ moves onto user interface  5850  (e.g., pushing up dock  5854 ) and continues until control panel object  5886 ′ is displayed below dock  5854 , as shown in FIG.  5 F 24 . In some embodiments, user interface  5850  is not blurred when displaying control panel object  5886 ′, as shown in FIG.  5 F 24 . In some embodiments, user interface  5850  is blurred when displaying control panel object  5886 ′ (e.g., as shown in FIG.  5 F 22 ). 
     FIGS.  5 F 25 - 5 F 28  illustrate an example of displaying deletion affordances in response to a long press input. FIG.  5 F 25  illustrates displaying application-switcher user interface  5856  (e.g., after a long upward swipe, as shown in FIGS.  5 F 1 - 5 F 8 , or after two short upward swipes, as shown in FIGS.  5 F 10 - 5 F 18 ). Although no blurred background is shown in application-switcher user interface  5856  of FIGS.  5 F 25 - 5 F 36 , in some embodiments, application-switcher user interface  5856  is overlaid on a blurred background (e.g., as described above in FIGS.  5 F 6 - 5 F 9  and  5 F 16 - 5 F 18 ). FIGS.  5 F 26 - 5 F 28  illustrate holding of contact  5890  from a time of t0 (e.g., in FIG.  5 F 26 ) until a time of t0+T (e.g., in FIG.  5 F 28 , where T is a long press time threshold). In response to the long press input by contact  5890 , device  100  displays a respective deletion affordance (e.g., “x” in the upper left corner of the application view) over each application view in application-switcher user interface  5856 , as shown in FIG.  5 F 28 . 
     FIGS.  5 F 29 - 5 F 31  illustrate an example of closing an application view in application-switcher user interface  5856  in response to a tap gesture on a deletion affordance. In FIGS.  5 F 30 - 5 F 31 , device  100  detects an input on the deletion affordance of application view  5860 , such as a tap gesture by contact  5892 , and in response, ceases to display application view  5860  (e.g., closing application view  5860 ). When an application view is deleted from the application-switcher user interface, the retained state of the application is deleted, and the application will open with a default starting state the next time that the application is launched. 
     FIGS.  5 F 32 - 5 F 33  illustrate an example of closing an application view in application-switcher user interface  5856  in response to a swipe gesture on an application view while the deletion affordances are displayed. In FIGS.  5 F 32 - 5 F 33 , device  100  detects an input on application view  5860 , such as a swipe gesture by contact  5894 , and in response, ceases to display application view  5860  (e.g., closing application view  5860 ). 
     FIGS.  5 F 34 - 5 F 36  illustrate an example of closing an application view in application-switcher user interface  5856  in response to a swipe gesture on an application view even when the deletion affordances are not displayed. In FIGS.  5 F 35 - 5 F 36 , device  100  detects an input on application view  5860 , such as a swipe gesture by contact  5896 , and in response, ceases to display application view  5860  (e.g., closing application view  5860 ). 
     FIGS.  5 F 37 - 5 F 41  illustrate an example of displaying a cover sheet user interface (e.g., with a downward swipe) over an application user interface and dismissing the cover sheet user interface (e.g., with an upward swipe) to redisplay the application user interface. FIG.  5 F 37  illustrates displaying a user interface  5850  of an application (e.g., of a browser application). In FIGS.  5 F 38 - 5 F 39 , device  100  detects an input from the top edge of the device, such as a downward swipe gesture by contact  5898 , and in response, displays cover sheet user interface  5900  (e.g., including displaying an animated transition showing the cover sheet user interface sliding down from the top edge of the display and covering user interface  5850  of the application, in accordance with the downward movement of contact  5898 ). In FIGS.  5 F 40 - 5 F 41 , device  100  detects an input from the bottom edge of the device, such as an upward swipe gesture by contact  5902 , an in response, displays user interface  5850 . 
     FIGS.  5 F 41 - 5 F 45  illustrate an example of turning off the display (e.g., by locking the device), displaying the cover sheet user interface as a wake screen user interface (e.g., in response to an input to wake the device from a display-off state), and displaying a control panel (e.g., control panel user interface  5886 ″ overlaid on the wake screen user interface) in response to the same input that can dismiss the cover sheet when the cover sheet is displayed over an application user interface (e.g., in response to an upward swipe as shown in FIGS.  5 F 40 - 5 F 41 ). In FIGS.  5 F 41 - 5 F 42 , device  100  transitions from a display-on state (e.g., displaying user interface  5850 ) to a display-off state (e.g., a locked state or a sleep state). In FIGS.  5 F 42 - 5 F 43 , device  100  transitions from a display-off state to a display-on state (e.g., displaying cover sheet user interface  5900 ). In some embodiments, cover sheet user interface  5900  serves as a wake screen user interface, as shown in FIG.  5 F 43 . In FIGS.  5 F 44 - 5 F 45 , device  100  detects an input from the bottom edge of the device, such as an upward swipe gesture by contact  5904 , an in response, displays control panel  5886 . In some embodiments, the cover sheet user interface  5900  blurs as control panel user interface  5886 ″ is displayed overlaid on the cover sheet user interface, as shown in FIG.  5 F 45 . In contrast to FIGS.  5 F 40 - 5 F 41  above (e.g., where the cover sheet user interface  5900  serves as a cover sheet to conceal an application user interface, and an upward swipe from the bottom edge of the device dismisses the cover sheet), in FIGS.  5 F 44 - 5 F 45 , the cover sheet user interface  5900  serves as a wake screen user interface, and an upward swipe from the bottom edge of the device displays control panel user interface  5886 ″ (e.g., overlaid on the blurred cover sheet user interface that servers as the wake screen user interface). 
     FIGS.  5 G 1 - 5 G 17  illustrate example embodiments for navigating between multiple user interfaces and, in particular, embodiments for accessing a control panel user interface (also referred to herein as a “control center”) from different user interfaces. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in  FIGS. 15A-15C . For convenience of explanation, some of the embodiments will be discussed with reference to operations performed on a device with a touch-sensitive display system  112 . In such embodiments, the focus selector is, optionally: a respective finger or stylus contact, a representative point corresponding to a finger or stylus contact (e.g., a centroid of a respective contact or a point associated with a respective contact), or a centroid of two or more contacts detected on the touch-sensitive display system  112 . However, analogous operations are, optionally, performed on a device with a display  450  and a separate touch-sensitive surface  451  in response to detecting the contacts on the touch-sensitive surface  451  while displaying the user interfaces shown in the figures on the display  450 , along with a focus selector. 
     The example user interfaces illustrated in FIGS.  5 G 1 - 5 G 17  relate to methods for accessing a control panel user interface, from which the user can control the device, with a system-specific edge-swipe gesture, in accordance with some embodiments. As shown in the FIGS.  5 G 1 - 5 G 17 , the control panel is accessed by a swipe gesture from the upper-right corner of the device, while other user interfaces (e.g., a system-wide notifications user interface, a home user interface, an application-switcher user interface, and a second application user interface) are accessed by edge-swipe gestures originating from other portions of the top edge or from the bottom edge. The method facilitates effective user navigation between multiple user interfaces on the device. 
     FIGS.  5 G 1 - 5 G 4  and  5 G 7 - 5 G 10  illustrate an example embodiment where the electronic device navigates to either a control panel user interface or a notification user interface in response to an edge-swipe gesture from the top edge of the display, based on the area of the edge the gesture originated. 
     FIG.  5 G 1  illustrates a home screen on device  100  with time  404  and status indicators  402  in the upper left and right corners of the screen, respectively. Electronic handle  5936  is displayed below status indicators  402  to indicate that a control panel is available to be pulled down onto the screen from the upper right hand corner of the display. A swipe gesture, including contact  5910  and movement  5912 , is detected from the right side of the top edge of the display. As input  5910  travels down the screen, control panel  5914  is pulled over the home screen, which simultaneously begins to blur out of focus, as illustrated in FIG.  5 G 2 . Electronic handle  5936  transitions from the upper right corner, where it provided a hint as to the ability to pull control panel  5914  down, to the bottom of control panel  5914 , where it indicates the control panel is available to be pulled down or pushed back up. Status bar  402  also moves down and expands with the swipe gesture, as shown by the addition of Bluetooth status icon  5916 . As the swipe gesture continues downward in FIG.  5 G 3 , control panel  5914  is pulled further down on the display and the home screen continues to blur. Upon termination of the swipe gesture in FIG.  5 G 4 , control panel  5914  sticks on the display, because it was pulled far enough down on the display, and electronic handle  5936  disappears, indicating that control panel  5914  is now statically displayed on the screen. 
     FIG.  5 G 7  illustrates the same home screen as FIG.  5 G 1 . However, in FIG.  5 G 7  a swipe gesture, including contact  5926  and movement  5928 , is initiated from the center of the top edge of the screen, rather than the right hand edge. Because the area of the top edge of the display to the left of boundary  5930 , which is larger than the area to the right of the boundary, corresponds to activation of a notifications user interface-rather than the control panel user interface, continuation of the swipe gesture downwards on the screen pulls notifications  5932  down from the top of the screen, as illustrated in FIG.  5 G 8 . Again, the home screen is dynamically blurred as notifications are pulled down. As the swipe gesture continues down in FIG.  5 G 9 , notifications  5932  is pulled further down on the display and the home screen continues to blur. Upon termination of the swipe gesture in FIG.  5 G 10 , notifications  5932  sticks on the display, because it was pulled far enough down on the display. 
     FIGS.  5 G 5  and  5 G 6  illustrate an example embodiment where the control panel pulled over the home screen can be navigated within to provide access to additional controls. As shown in FIG.  5 G 5 , a swipe gesture to the left, including contact  5918 - a  and movement  5920 , is detected. In response, the device slides previously displayed controls, such as flashlight control  5922 , off of the left side of the control panel to make room for additional controls, such as battery status  5924 , to slide onto the control panel from the right hand side. 
     FIGS.  5 G 11 - 5 G 17  illustrate example embodiments where the device provides hints as to possible navigations from the home screen. FIG.  5 G 11 , illustrates a lock screen of the device, including home affordance  5002  and status bar  402  showing icons representing various statuses of the device. Home affordance  5002  animates by slowly moving up and down to prompt the user to swipe up to unlock the device and navigate to a home user interface, as shown in FIGS.  5 G 11 - 5 G 15 . Similarly, control panel icon  5934  and caret  5936  slide down from under status bar  402  in the upper right hand corner of the display, in FIGS.  5 G 13  and  5 G 14  to prompt the user to swipe down from the right side of the top edge of the screen to pull down the control panel. A swipe gesture, including contact  5938  and movement  5940 , is detected from the right side of the top edge of the display, over control panel icon  5934 , as illustrated in FIG.  5 G 15 . As input  5938  travels down the screen, control panel  5914  is pulled over the lock screen, which simultaneously begins to blur out of focus (e.g., gradually increasing a magnitude and/or radius of a blur), as illustrated in FIG.  5 G 16 . Caret  5936  slides up in response to the swipe gesture, turning into flat handle  5936 , as illustrated in FIG.  5 G 16 . Upon termination of the swipe gesture in FIG.  5 G 17 , control panel  5914  sticks on the display, because it was pulled far enough down on the display. 
     FIGS.  5 H 1 - 5 H 27  illustrate example user interfaces for displaying a dock or navigating to different user interfaces (e.g., instead of or in addition to displaying the dock) in response to a gesture meeting different criteria, in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in  FIGS. 19A-19C . For convenience of explanation, some of the embodiments will be discussed with reference to operations performed on a device with a touch-sensitive display system  112 . In such embodiments, the focus selector is, optionally: a respective finger or stylus contact, a representative point corresponding to a finger or stylus contact (e.g., a centroid of a respective contact or a point associated with a respective contact), or a centroid of two or more contacts detected on the touch-sensitive display system  112 . However, analogous operations are, optionally, performed on a device with a display  450  and a separate touch-sensitive surface  451  in response to detecting the contacts on the touch-sensitive surface  451  while displaying the user interfaces shown in the figures on the display  450 , along with a focus selector. 
     For convenience of explanation, some of the embodiments will be discussed with reference to operations performed on a device without a home button, and a gesture meeting different predefined criteria is used to cause display of an application dock overlaid on a currently displayed application user interface and/or to cause dismissal of a currently displayed application user interface and display of a different user interface (e.g., an application-switcher user interface, a home screen user interface, or a previously displayed application user interface). In some embodiments, a home button (e.g., a mechanical button, a solid state button, or a virtual button, such as optional home button  204  shown in FIGS.  5 H 1 - 5 H 27 ) is included on the device and is used to cause dismissal of a currently displayed user interface and display of the home screen user interface. (e.g., in response to a single press input) and/or display a multitasking user interface (e.g., in response to a double press input). 
     The example user interfaces illustrated in FIGS.  5 H 1 - 5 H 27  relate to methods for efficiently displaying an application dock and navigating between multiple user interfaces, e.g., quickly switching between different applications and system user interfaces, on an electronic device, without requiring on presence and activation of a home button, in accordance with some embodiments. An example user interface for the user interface selection process includes an application-switcher user interface that includes representations of multiple user interfaces for applications (e.g., recently opened applications, a currently displayed application, and, optionally, a system control panel) associated with the electronic device displayed as a virtual stack of cards (e.g., the “stack”), where each card in the stack represents a user interface for a different application (e.g., the card is a snapshot of a saved final state of the application&#39;s user interface when the application was last displayed). The cards are also referred to herein as “application views,” when corresponding to a user interface for a recently open application, or as a “control panel view,” when corresponding to a user interface for a control panel). User inputs (e.g., contacts, swipe/drag gestures, flick gestures, etc.) detected on touch screen  112  (e.g., a touch-sensitive surface) are used to display the application dock overlaid on a currently displayed user interface and navigate between different user interfaces that can be selected for display on the screen. In some embodiments, the home screen user interface is optionally displayed as a “card” in the virtual stack of cards. In some embodiments, the home screen user interface is displayed in a display layer underlying the stack of cards. 
     While the device displays a user interface (e.g., a user interface for an application), a gesture beginning at the bottom of the screen (e.g., within a predefined region of the device that is proximate to the edge of the display (e.g., an edge region that includes a predefined portion (e.g., 20 pixels wide) of the display near the bottom edge of the device) invokes display of the application dock and/or the user interface selection process, and directs navigation between multiple user interfaces based on one or more movement parameters of the input (e.g., the speed, acceleration, distance, current or final position, and/or direction of the input), and, optionally, based on movement parameters and characteristics (e.g., displayed size, location, appearance states, etc.) of user interface objects (e.g., the cards) that are currently displayed. The device replaces display of the current user interface with a card representing that user interface (e.g., in some embodiments, the user interface appears to shrink into a card in accordance with movement of the input). The user has the option to (i) display the application dock, (ii) navigate to the home screen, (iii) navigate to the application displayed on the screen immediately prior to the user interface that was displayed when the user interface selection process was invoked, (iv) navigate to an application-switcher user interface that allows the user to select from applications previously displayed on the screen, or (v) navigate back to the user interface that was displayed when the user interface selection process was invoked, by varying the relevant movement parameters of the input after the input is initiated from the bottom of the screen, in accordance with some embodiments. During the input, the device provides dynamic visual feedback indicating what navigation destination will be chosen upon termination of the input, facilitating effective user navigation between multiple choices of user interface destinations. In some embodiments, the visual feedback and user interface response is fluid and reversible before the termination of the input. In some embodiments, the user also has the option to navigate to a control panel user interface using the gesture (e.g., by selecting a control panel card included in the application-switcher user interface as illustrated in FIGS.  5 A 1 - 5 A 14 ,  5 A 72 - 5 A 77 , and  5 F 1 - 5 F 18 , or pulling up a control panel as an extension of the application dock as illustrated in FIGS.  5 F 19 - 5 F 24 ). In other embodiments, a different input (e.g., initiating from a different edge of the display) is required to navigate to a control panel user interface (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.  5 G 1 - 5 G 17 ). 
     In some embodiments, example user interfaces for applications operated on an electronic device without a home button include a visual indication (e.g., home affordance  5002 ) that provides visual guidance to a user regarding the position of an edge region that the device is ready for a navigation gesture to be started, and, optionally, whether navigation is restricted in the current operating mode of the currently displayed application (e.g., absence of the home affordance indicates that the navigation is limited, and that a confirmation input or, optionally, whether an enhanced navigation gesture is required to navigate between user interfaces (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.  5 B 1 - 5 B 33 )). In some embodiments, the home affordance is not activatable or responsive to touch-inputs directly, e.g., in a manner that is similar to a virtual button. 
     Descriptions relevant to various user interface objects (e.g., dock, home screen user interface, application-switcher user interface, control panel user interface, cards, application views, home affordance, control panel user interface, etc.), device or user interface state (e.g., user interface selection mode/transitional user interface mode, user interface selection process, transitional user interface, etc.), navigation inputs (e.g., navigation gesture, edge swipe gesture, movement, contact, intensity, edge region, etc.), and navigation criteria (e.g., various criteria based on movement parameters of the input or user interface objects for navigating to different user interfaces or causing display of various types of user feedback to indicate internal states of the device and the user interface) provided with respect to  FIGS. 5A - 5 A 77 ,  5 B 1 - 5 B 33 ,  5 C 1 - 5 C 45 ,  5 D- 5 D 42 ,  5 E 1 - 5 E 39 ,  5 F- 5 F 45 , and  5 G 1 - 5 G 17  are also applicable to the embodiments described with respect to FIGS.  5 H 1 - 5 H 27 , in accordance with some embodiments. 
     FIGS.  5 H 1 - 5 H 4  illustrate an example embodiment where the electronic device displays an application dock (or “dock”) overlaid on an application user interface in response to an upward edge swipe gesture, without entering a transitional user interface, because the input is a short drag gesture (e.g., meeting dock-display criteria, but not any user-interface-navigation criteria, where the dock-display criteria and various user-interface-navigation criteria are based on one or more movement parameters of the input (e.g., the speed, acceleration, distance, current or final position, and/or direction of the input), and, optionally, based on movement parameters and characteristics (e.g., displayed size, location, appearance states, etc.) of user interface objects (e.g., the cards) that are currently displayed, e.g., in the manner illustrated in  FIGS. 16A-16D ). FIG.  5 H 1  illustrates an interactive map user interface of a maps application. After the dock-display and user interface selection process is activated by movement of contact  5942  upwards from the bottom edge of the screen, in FIG.  5 H 1 , application dock  5946  is dragged onto the screen over the map user interface, in FIGS.  5 H 2 - 5 H 3 , by the continued movement of contact  5942 . Because the upward movement of contact  5942  stops before the contact crosses threshold position  5948  (e.g., user-interface-navigation criteria are not met), in  FIG. 5942 , the device does not enter into a user interface selection mode. When the contact is lifted off the screen, application dock  5946  remains displayed over the maps user interface, in FIG.  5 H 4 , because dock-display criteria have been met (e.g., because the contact had traveled a sufficient distance away from the edge of the display (e.g., passed a dock-display threshold position located between the bottom edge of the screen and threshold position  5948 )). If dock-display criteria had not been met (e.g., the contact is lifted off the screen before moving past the dock-display threshold position), the dock will retract toward the bottom edge of the screen and cease to be displayed after the lift-off of the contact. 
     FIGS.  5 H 5 - 5 H 8  illustrate an example embodiment where the electronic device displays an application dock and then navigates to an application-switcher user interface because the invoking input is a medium-length drag gesture (e.g., meeting dock-display criteria and a first set of user-interface-navigation criteria (e.g., application-switcher-display criteria), where the dock-display criteria and the first set of user-interface-navigation criteria are based on one or more movement parameters of the input (e.g., the speed, acceleration, distance, current or final position, and/or direction of the input), and, optionally, based on movement parameters and characteristics (e.g., displayed size, location, appearance states, etc.) of user interface objects (e.g., the cards) that are currently displayed, e.g., in the manner illustrated in  FIGS. 16A-16D ). FIG.  5 H 5  illustrates the interactive map user interface. After the dock-display and user interface selection process is activated by movement  5952  of contact  5950  upwards from the bottom edge of the screen, in FIG.  5 H 5 , application dock  5946  is dragged onto the screen over the map user interface (e.g., in the manner illustrated in FIGS.  5 H 1 - 5 H 3 ), in FIG.  5 H 6 , by the continued movement  5952  of contact  5950 . The device then enters into the user interface selection mode (e.g., displays a transitional user interface) when the upward movement of contact  5950  continues past threshold position  5948 , in FIG.  5 H 7 . The user interface for the map application transforms into card  5954  (e.g., an application view), which is dynamically resized in correlation with movement of the contact  5950  (e.g., in the manner described in FIGS.  5 A 1 - 5 A 6 ,  5 A 19 - 5 A 21 ). Second card  5956 , representing a previously displayed application user interface, begins to enter the display from the left, indicating to the user that the device is navigating towards an application-switcher user interface. After liftoff of the contact  5950 , the device navigates to (e.g., displays) an application-switcher user interface, in FIG.  5 H 8 , because the contact had crossed positional threshold  5948 , but not positional threshold  5958  above the positional threshold  5948  (e.g., meeting the dock display criteria and the first set of user-interface-navigation criteria (e.g., application-switcher-display criteria), but not a second set of user-interface-navigation criteria (e.g., home-display criteria), where the dock-display criteria, the first set of user-interface-navigation criteria and the second set of user-interface-navigation criteria are based on one or more movement parameters of the input (e.g., the speed, acceleration, distance, current or final position, and/or direction of the input), and, optionally, based on movement parameters and characteristics (e.g., displayed size, location, appearance states, etc.) of user interface objects (e.g., the cards) that are currently displayed, e.g., in the manner illustrated in  FIGS. 16A-16D ). Application dock  5946  remains displayed over the application-switcher user interface, in FIG.  5 H 8 , in accordance with some embodiments. The configurations of the transitional user interface and the application-switcher user interface shown in FIG.  5 H 8  are illustrative for some embodiments. Other configurations of the transitional user interface and the application-switcher user interface, and other animated transition from the transitional user interface to the application-switcher user interface are possible, such as those illustrated in FIGS.  5 A 5 - 5 A 9 ,  5 A 25 - 5 A 28 , and  5 F 6 - 5 F 8 , in accordance with some embodiments. 
     FIGS.  5 H 9 - 5 H 12  illustrate an example embodiment where the electronic device displays an application dock and then navigates to a home screen user interface because the invoking input is a long drag gesture (e.g., meeting dock-display criteria and a second set of user-interface-navigation criteria (e.g., home-display criteria), where the dock-display criteria and the second set of user-interface-navigation criteria are based on one or more movement parameters of the input (e.g., the speed, acceleration, distance, current or final position, and/or direction of the input), and, optionally, based on movement parameters and characteristics (e.g., displayed size, location, appearance states, etc.) of user interface objects (e.g., the cards) that are currently displayed, e.g., in the manner illustrated in  FIGS. 16A-16D ). FIG.  5 H 9  illustrates the interactive map user interface. After the dock-display and user interface selection process is activated by movement of contact  5968  upwards from the bottom of the screen, in FIG.  5 H 9 , application dock  5946  is dragged onto the screen and the transitional user interface is displayed showing cards  5954  and  5956  (e.g., in the manner illustrated in FIGS.  5 H 1 - 5 H 3  and  5 H 6 - 5 H 7 ), in FIG.  5 H 10 , by the continued movement  5970  of contact  5968  past positional threshold  5948 . After contact  5968  passes second positional threshold  5958 , second card  5956  disappears and a home screen fades-in from behind card  5954 , which continues to shrink with continued upwards movement of contact  5968 , in FIG.  5 H 11 , indicating to the user that the device is now navigating towards a home screen user interface. After liftoff of the contact  5968 , the device navigates to (e.g., displays) a home screen user interface, in FIG.  5 H 12 , because the contact had crossed second positional threshold  5958  (e.g., the second set of user-interface-navigation criteria are met). Application dock  5946  remains displayed over the home screen user interface, in FIG.  5 H 12 , in accordance with some embodiments. The configuration of the transitional user interface shown in FIG.  5 H 11  is illustrative for some embodiments. Other configurations of the transitional user interface and other animated transition from the transitional user interface to the home screen user interface are possible, such as those illustrated in FIGS.  5 A 21 - 5 A 25 , in accordance with some embodiments. 
     In the embodiments illustrated in FIGS.  5 H 1 - 5 H 12 , the starting position of the contact is in the peripheral portion of the bottom edge of the screen. The dock is displayed first in response to upward movement of the contact, before the device enters the transitional user interface in response to continued upward movement of the contact past positional threshold  5948 . In some embodiments, the device behaves in the manner illustrated in FIGS.  5 H 1 - 5 H 12 , irrespective of the starting positions (e.g., peripheral portions or the center portion) of the contact along the bottom edge of the screen. In other embodiments, the device behaves in the manner illustrated in FIGS.  5 H 1 - 5 H 12  when the starting position of the contact is in the peripheral portion of the bottom edge of the screen; and when the starting position of the contact is in the center portion of the bottom edge of the display (as illustrated in FIGS.  5 H 13 - 5 H 17 ), the device does not display the dock first and directly enters the navigation user interface, instead. 
     FIGS.  5 H 13 - 5 H 17  illustrate an example embodiment where the electronic device displays a transitional user interface, without first displaying the application dock, because the invoking input starts from a center portion of the bottom edge of the display (as opposed to a peripheral portion of the bottom edge of the display) (e.g., dock-display criteria are not met, and user-interface-navigation criteria used when dock is not displayed first in response to the input are met, where the dock-display criteria and the user-interface-navigation criteria are based on one or more movement parameters of the input (e.g., the speed, acceleration, distance, current or final position, and/or direction of the input), and, optionally, based on movement parameters and characteristics (e.g., displayed size, location, appearance states, etc.) of user interface objects (e.g., the cards) that are currently displayed, e.g., in the manner illustrated in  FIGS. 16A-16D ). FIG.  5 H 13  illustrates the interactive map user interface. After the user interface selection process is activated by movement of contact  5972  travelling upwards from the bottom edge of the screen, in FIG.  5 H 13 , the interactive map user interface is replaced by (e.g., transitions into) card  5954  that represents the interactive map user interface in FIG.  5 H 14 . Because movement of contact  5972  started from a center portion of the bottom edge of the display, the dock is not displayed and the transitional user interface is activated earlier (e.g., as shown in FIG.  5 H 15 ) (e.g., when a third set of user-interface-navigation criteria are met (e.g., application-switcher-display criteria that are used when dock is not displayed first in response to the input), where the third set of user-interface-navigation criteria are based on one or more movement parameters of the input (e.g., the speed, acceleration, distance, current or final position, and/or direction of the input), and, optionally, based on movement parameters and characteristics (e.g., displayed size, location, appearance states, etc.) of user interface objects (e.g., the cards) that are currently displayed, e.g., in the manner illustrated in  FIGS. 16A-16D ), e.g., before contact  5972  reaches positional threshold  5948  (e.g., a threshold in the first set of user interface-navigation criteria (e.g., application-switcher-display criteria that are used when dock is displayed first in response to the input)), which was required to enter the transitional user interface when the dock was first displayed (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.  5 H 1 - 5 H 4 ,  5 H 5 - 5 H 8 , and  5 H 9 - 5 H 12 ). As the input moves upwards on the screen, in FIGS.  5 H 14 - 5 H 16 , card  5954  shrinks dynamically, revealing the home screen underneath, which includes application dock  5946 , from behind the transitional user interface with card  5954  in FIG.  5 H 16 . After liftoff of the contact  5972 , the device navigates to (e.g., displays) a home screen user interface, in FIG.  5 H 17 , because the contact had crossed second positional threshold  5976  (e.g., meeting a fourth set of user-interface-navigation criteria (e.g., home-display criteria that are used when dock is not displayed first in response to the input), where the fourth set of user-interface-navigation criteria are based on one or more movement parameters of the input (e.g., the speed, acceleration, distance, current or final position, and/or direction of the input), and, optionally, based on movement parameters and characteristics (e.g., displayed size, location, appearance states, etc.) of user interface objects (e.g., the cards) that are currently displayed, e.g., in the manner illustrated in  FIGS. 16A-16D )), which is closer to the bottom of the display than positional threshold  5958  (e.g., a threshold in the second set of user interface-navigation criteria (e.g., home-display criteria that are used when dock is displayed first in response to the input)), which was required to navigate home when the dock was displayed prior to entering the transitional user interface, as illustrated in FIGS.  5 H 5 - 5 H 8  and  5 H 9 - 5 H 12 . 
     FIGS.  5 H 18 - 5 H 21  illustrate an example embodiment where the electronic device enters a transitional user interface earlier (with a lower positional threshold than positional threshold  5948 ) because the dock was already displayed (e.g., due to a prior short drag gesture as shown in FIGS.  5 H 1 - 5 H 4 ), regardless of the starting position of the contact along the bottom edge of the screen. FIG.  5 H 18  illustrates the interactive map user interface. After the user interface selection process is activated by movement of contact  5978  travelling upwards from the bottom edge of the screen, in FIG.  5 H 18 , the interactive map user interface is replaced by (e.g., transitions into) card  5954  that represents the interactive map user interface in FIG.  5 H 19 . Because dock  5946  was already displayed over the interactive map user interface when the input began, the transitional user interface is activated earlier (e.g., as shown in FIG.  5 H 20 ) (e.g., when a fifth set of user-interface-navigation criteria are met (e.g., application-switcher-display criteria that are used when dock is already displayed before the input is started), where the fifth set of user-interface-navigation criteria are based on one or more movement parameters of the input (e.g., the speed, acceleration, distance, current or final position, and/or direction of the input), and, optionally, based on movement parameters and characteristics (e.g., displayed size, location, appearance states, etc.) of user interface objects (e.g., the cards) that are currently displayed, e.g., in the manner illustrated in  FIGS. 16A-16D )), e.g., before contact  5978  reaches positional threshold  5948  (e.g., a threshold in the first set of user interface-navigation criteria (e.g., application-switcher-display criteria that are used when dock is displayed first in response to the input)), which was required to enter the transitional user interface when the dock was first displayed (e.g., as illustrated in FIGS.  5 H 1 - 5 H 4 ,  5 H 5 - 5 H 8 , and  5 H 9 - 5 H 12 . As the input moves upwards on the screen, in FIGS.  5 H 19 - 5 H 20 , card  5954  shrinks dynamically in accordance with the position of the contact on the screen. After liftoff of the contact  5978 , the device navigates to (e.g., displays) an application-switcher user interface, in FIG.  5 H 21 , because the contact had not crossed second positional threshold associated with navigation to the home screen (e.g., a threshold in a sixth set of user-interface-navigation criteria (e.g., home-display criteria that are used when dock is already displayed before the input is started) are not met, where the sixth set of user-interface-navigation criteria are based on one or more movement parameters of the input (e.g., the speed, acceleration, distance, current or final position, and/or direction of the input), and, optionally, based on movement parameters and characteristics (e.g., displayed size, location, appearance states, etc.) of user interface objects (e.g., the cards) that are currently displayed, e.g., in the manner illustrated in  FIGS. 16A-16D )). Application dock  5946  remains displayed over the application-switcher user interface, in FIG.  5 H 21 , in accordance with some embodiments. Although the contact  5980  is shown to start on a peripheral portion of the bottom edge of the screen in FIG.  5 H 18 , in some embodiments, the device enters the transitional user interface with a lower positional threshold if the dock is already displayed, regardless of the starting position of the input on the bottom edge of the display. 
     FIGS.  5 H 22 - 5 H 24  illustrate an example embodiment where the electronic device navigates to a control panel user interface in response to an edge-swipe gesture from the top edge of the display (e.g., when the contact is detected over an upper right corner region of the display where indicators of some controls in the control panel are displayed). FIG.  5 H 22  illustrates the interactive map user interface. A downward swipe gesture, including movement of contact  5982 , from the right side of the top edge of the display, in FIG.  5 H 22 , drags control panel  5986  onto the screen over the interactive map user interface, rather than displaying an application dock or entering a transitional navigation state, in FIG.  5 H 23 , because the input began from the top edge of the display (e.g., control-panel-display criteria are met), rather than the bottom edge of the display (e.g., dock-display criteria are not met). Simultaneously, the interactive map user interface begins to blur out of focus behind the control panel  5986 . After liftoff of the contact, the device displays control panel  5986  over the blurred interactive map user interface, in FIG.  5 H 24 , because the input met the relevant display criteria for displaying the control panel  5986 . In some embodiments, the downward edge swipe gesture from the top edge of the display brings down a coversheet user interface (e.g., including stored notifications, current time, etc.) that is distinct from the control panel, if the downward edge swipe gesture is started from the center portion of the top edge of the display, rather than the peripheral portion (e.g., right side) of the top edge of the display. 
     FIGS.  5 H 25 - 5 H 27  illustrate an example embodiment where an input results in navigation to a previously displayed user interface, rather than an application-switcher user interface, home screen, or control panel, because the input moves substantially horizontally from the bottom edge of the display (e.g., the input is an arc swipe that started from the bottom edge of the screen). FIG.  5 H 25  illustrates the interactive map user interface. A sideways swipe gesture, including movement  5990  of contact  5988  to the right, in FIG.  5 H 25 , drags the interactive map user interface (e.g., application view  5954  of the interactive map user interface) off of the display to the right, while simultaneously pulling an email user interface (e.g., application view  5956  of an email user interface) onto the display from the left, in FIGS.  5 H 26 - 5 H 27 . The input appears to push interactive map card  5954  back into the display and then slide it off of the right-hand side, while dragging email card  5956  onto the display from the left-hand side of the screen. The cards appear to be moving over the home screen, which is blurred in the background. In contrast to FIGS.  5 H 1 - 5 H 4 ,  5 H 5 - 5 H 8 , and  5 H 9 - 5 H 12 , movement of contact  5988  does not invoke display of the application dock because the horizontal component of the movement is much greater than the vertical component of movement. In some embodiments, as shown in FIG.  5 H 26 , the dock  5946  is dragged to the right along with card  5954  (e.g., the dock  5946  is treated as part of the currently displayed application user interface at the time when the rightward arc swipe gesture by contact  5988  was detected.). In some embodiments, the dock remains at its original location on the screen when cards  5956  and  5954  are dragged across the screen by the arc swipe gesture; and when lift-off of the contact is detected, the dock appears overlaid on the e-mail user interface in FIG.  5 H 27 . 
     Although the dock-display criteria and various user interface navigation criteria used with respect to the examples shown in FIGS.  5 H 1 - 5 H 27  are positional thresholds. In some embodiments, other movement-based criteria can be used for dock-display and user interface navigation. Additional details of the criteria and thresholds that can be used are described with respect to  FIGS. 16A-16D and 17A-17C , and other embodiments described herein, and are not repeated in the interest of brevity. 
       FIGS. 17A-17C  illustrate example thresholds for navigating between different user interface, e.g., an application user interface, a previous application user interface, a home screen user interface, and an application-switcher user interface. The thresholds illustrated in  FIGS. 17A-17C  are example of thresholds used in conjunction with methods  600 ,  700 ,  800 ,  1000 ,  1050 ,  1600 ,  1700 ,  1800 , and  1900  for navigating between user interfaces. 
       FIG. 17A  illustrates a series of example velocity thresholds having horizontal (V x ) and vertical (V y ) components on the display. The intersection of the boundaries defines eight sectors (e.g., sectors I-VIII), each associated with a target state for a particular user interface. That is, while in a transitional user interface enabling a user to navigate to any of a plurality of user interfaces (e.g., an application user interface, a next/previous application user interface, a home screen user interface, or an application-switcher user interface), the device assigns a target state user interface based on at least the velocity of the input. When the velocity of the input falls within a particular sector, as defined in  FIG. 17A , the device assigns the user interface associated with the sector as the target state, as long as the input satisfies all other criteria (e.g., positional criteria) required for selection of that target state. In some embodiments, the thresholds are used in conjunction with methods  600 ,  700 ,  800 ,  1000 ,  1050 ,  1600 ,  1700 ,  1800 , and  1900  for navigating between user interfaces. 
     For example, when the y-velocity of an input is greater than threshold  1702 , the input is in sector I which is associated with selection of a home screen user interface as the target state. Similarly, inputs with velocities within sector II are associated with selection of a home screen user interface target state. Inputs with velocities within sectors III, IV, and V are associated with selection of an application-switcher user interface target state. Inputs with velocities within sectors VI and VII are associated with selection of a next or previous application user interface target state. Finally, inputs with velocities within sectors VIII are associated with selection of the current application user interface (e.g., the application user interface displayed before the device entered the transitional user interface) target state. 
       FIG. 17A  also illustrates that threshold velocities are, optionally, dynamic. For example, the range of velocity threshold  1710 , defining sector V associated with an application-switcher user interface target state, expands from a minimal range of threshold values  1710 - a  to a maximal range of threshold values  1710 - b  when a contact lingers with minimal velocity in sector V. Similarly, velocity thresholds  1704  and  1706 , providing boundaries between selecting a next/previous application user interface and a home state user interface as the target state optionally dynamically varies, e.g., from boundary  1704 - c  to  1704 - b , to allow a less vertically moving input be associated with selection of a home screen user interface as the target state, or to allow a more vertically moving input to be associated with selection of a next/previous application user interface as the target state. Depending upon the designs of a particular system, any threshold is, optionally dynamic, for example by applying method  1800  of dynamically adjusting threshold values. 
       FIG. 17B  illustrates a series of example positional thresholds on the display of a device. In some embodiments, the thresholds are used in conjunction with methods  600 ,  700 ,  800 ,  1000 ,  1050 ,  1600 ,  1700 ,  1800 , and  1900  for navigating between user interfaces. In some embodiments, position thresholds as illustrated in  FIG. 17B  work in conjunction with velocity thresholds as illustrated in  FIG. 17A . In some embodiments, satisfaction of a particular position threshold optionally overrides satisfaction of a corresponding velocity threshold. For example, satisfaction of 1st y-position threshold  1716  in  FIG. 17B  overrides a corresponding velocity threshold in  FIG. 17A , and associates the input with selection of a home screen user interface target state. 
       FIG. 17C  illustrates an example implementation of a dynamic velocity threshold, in accordance with some embodiments. At time T−3, contact velocity  1730  is greater than dynamic velocity threshold  1710 -D (which divides selection of a home screen user interface and an application-switcher user interface in  FIG. 17A ) and the input is therefore associated with selection of a home screen (HS) user interface target state. As contact velocity  1730  slows around time T, the velocity drops below dynamic velocity threshold  1710 -D, satisfying the criteria for selecting an application-switcher (AS) user interface target state. In order to favor selection of the application-switcher user interface as the final user interface, dynamic velocity threshold  1710 -D increases over time as contact velocity  1730  continues to be below the threshold. Thus, for example, even though contact velocity  1730  at time T+5 is greater than contact velocity at time T−3, because dynamic velocity threshold  1710 -D has increased, the input still satisfies selection of application-switcher criteria. However, when dynamic velocity threshold  1710 -D reaches threshold maximum  1710 - b , the device stops increasing the threshold value, despite contact velocity  1730  still being less than the threshold. Once contact velocity  1730  exceeds dynamic velocity threshold  1730 -D at time T+6, the device begins reducing dynamic velocity threshold  1710 -D, no longer favoring selection of the application-switcher user interface as the final target state. While the variable thresholds discussed above are velocity thresholds, a similar principle is, optionally, applied in other types of thresholds such as position thresholds, pressure thresholds, distance thresholds. Similarly, while the variable thresholds are discussed above with reference to determining whether to select a home screen or application switcher user interface, variable thresholds that operate in the manner described above could be applied to a wide variety of user interface interactions (e.g., determining whether to navigate back to a prior user interface or stay on the current user interface in response to an edge swipe gesture, determining whether to delete an item or not in response to a swipe gesture, determining whether or not to display an expanded preview of a content item based on whether an input has an intensity above a predetermined intensity threshold, whether or not to display a control panel user interface in response to an edge swipe gesture, etc.) 
       FIGS. 6A-6L  are flow diagrams illustrating a method  600  of navigating between an application user interface, an application-switcher user interface, and a home screen user interface, in accordance with some embodiments. The method  600  is performed at an electronic device (e.g., device  300 ,  FIG. 3 , or portable multifunction device  100 ,  FIG. 1A ) with a display and a touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the electronic device includes one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the touch-sensitive surface and the display are integrated into a touch-sensitive display. In some embodiments, the display is a touch-screen display and the touch-sensitive surface is on or integrated with the display. In some embodiments, the display is separate from the touch-sensitive surface. Some operations in method  600  are, optionally, combined and/or the order of some operations is, optionally, changed. 
     Method  600  relates to transitioning from an application user interface to either the application-switcher user interface or the home screen user interface in response to a swipe gesture. Specifically, the device displays a preview of an application-switcher user interface including multiple application views during an initial portion of the swipe gesture (e.g., an upward swipe gesture that starts from the bottom edge of the touch-screen), and after termination of the gesture is detected, depending on whether application-switcher-display criteria are met or home-display criteria are met, the device ultimately displays either the application-switcher user interface or the home screen user interface. Displaying the preview of the application-switcher user interface in response to an initial portion of a swipe gesture, and allowing the user to either to go to application-switcher user interface or the home screen depending on whether certain preset conditions are met enhance the operability of the device and make the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by providing information about the internal state of the device through the multiple application views, helping the user achieve an intended result by providing the required inputs, and reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device), which, additionally, reduce power usage and improve the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     Method  600  is performed at a device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a touch-screen display that serves both as the display and the touch-sensitive surface). In some embodiments, the device does not have a home button (e.g., a mechanical button, a virtual button, a solid state button, etc.) that, when activated, is configured to dismiss a currently displayed user interface and replace the currently displayed user interface with a home screen that includes a plurality of application launch icons for a plurality of applications installed on the device. The device displays ( 602 ) a first user interface of a first application (e.g., a user interface of an application that has a corresponding application launch icon in the plurality of application launch icons on the home screen) on the display. This is illustrated, for example, in FIGS.  5 A 1  (web browsing user interface) and FIG.  5 A 19  (email user interface). 
     While displaying the first user interface on the display, the device detects ( 604 ) a first portion of an input by a first contact, including detecting the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, detecting the first portion of the input includes detecting the first contact at an initial touch-down location that is within a predefined region of the device that is proximate to the edge of the display (e.g., an edge region that includes a predefined portion (e.g., 20 pixels wide) of the display near the bottom edge of the device and, optionally, a portion of the bottom edge of the display outside of the display). In some embodiments, detecting the first portion of the input further includes detecting initial movement of the first contact (e.g., horizontal movement or arc movement) that transforms the first user interface. This is illustrated, for example, in FIG.  5 A 2 , where device  100  detects movement  5006  of contact  5004  initiated at the bottom edge of touch screen  112 , and in FIG.  5 A 19 , where device  100  detects movement  5042  of contact  5040  initiated at the bottom edge of touch screen  112 . 
     After detecting the first portion of the input by the first contact (e.g., after the initial touch-down of the first contact, or after the first user interface has been transformed by an initial movement of the first contact), the device detects ( 606 ) a second portion of the input by the first contact, including detecting first movement of the first contact across the touch-sensitive surface in a first direction (e.g., upward). The device displays ( 608 ), during the first movement of the first contact across the touch-sensitive surface, a plurality of application views (e.g., reduced scale images of the application user interface) that including a first application view that corresponds to the first user interface of the first application (e.g., a snapshot or live view of a current state of the first application) and a second application view that corresponds to a second user interface of a second application that is different from the first application (e.g., a snapshot or live view of a current state of the second application) (e.g., the second user interface is a user interface of a recently open application). In some embodiments, recently open applications refer to applications that are deactivated with retained state information, such that when a recently open application is brought to the foreground or reactivated, it will resume functioning from its retained state. In contrast, a closed application refers to an application that is deactivated without a retained state, and when the closed application is opened or reactivated, it starts from a default start state. This is illustrated, for example, in FIGS.  5 A 2 - 5 A 6  and  5 A 19 - 5 A 21 . In FIGS.  5 A 2 - 5 A 6 , device  100  detects movement  5006  of contact  5004  from position  5004 - a  in FIG.  5 A 2  to position  5004 - e  in FIG.  5 A 6  and, in response, displays web browsing application view  5010  (corresponding to the web browsing user interface displayed in FIG.  5 A 1 ), messaging application view  5014  (corresponding to a recently open messaging application), and control panel view  5016  (corresponding to a control panel user interface for the device). In FIGS.  5 A 19 - 5 A 21 , device  100  detects movement  5042  of contact  5040  from position  5040 - a  in FIG.  5 A 19  to position  5040 - c  in FIG.  5 A 21  and, in response, displays email application view  5022  (corresponding to the email user interface displayed in FIG.  5 A 19 ), web browsing application view  5010  (corresponding to a recently open web browsing application), and control panel view  5016  (corresponding to a control panel user interface for the device). 
     While displaying the plurality of application views, the device detects ( 610 ) a third portion of the input by the first contact, including detecting liftoff of the first contact from the touch-sensitive surface after detecting the first movement by the first contact. This is illustrated, for example, in FIGS.  5 A 6 - 5 A 7 , where contact  5004  pauses and is then lifted-off the screen, and  5 A 21 - 5 A 23 , where contact  5040  continues to move upward until it is lifted-off the screen during the upward movement. 
     In response to detecting the third portion of the input by the first contact (e.g., the portion of the input that includes liftoff of the first contact after the first movement by the first contact) ( 612 ): in accordance with a determination that application-switcher-display criteria are met (e.g., based on a predefined movement parameter of the second portion of the input, or based on a predefined movement parameter of the first application view (e.g., either actual movement or projected movement)), wherein application-switcher-display criteria require that the second portion of the input or the first application view meets a first movement condition (e.g., a first condition regarding the contact&#39;s speed, acceleration, position, or a combination of one or more of the above, or a first condition regarding a derived movement parameter of the first application view that is based on one or more of the above and one or more additional properties characterizing the state of the current user interface and/or the movements of one or more objects contained therein, etc.) in order for the application-switcher-display criteria to be met, the device displays an application-switcher user interface that includes a plurality of representations of applications (e.g., application launch icons, reduced scale images of application user interfaces, etc.) for selectively activating one of a plurality of applications represented in the application-switcher user interface (e.g., selection of a respective application-selection object re-activates the corresponding application to a state immediate prior to the suspension of the application). In some embodiments, the representations of applications are ordered based on a recency of use of the applications to which they correspond (e.g., with representations of more recently used apps displayed before/above representations of less recently used apps). In some embodiments, the application-switcher user interface includes at least a portion of a control panel user interface. This is illustrated, for example, in FIGS.  5 A 7 - 5 A 8  where lift off of contact  5004  results in display of application views  5012  (web browsing),  5014  (messaging), and  5022  (email) in an application-switcher user interface because the second portion of the input met a first movement condition where the contact was not moving when lifted-off the screen and/or web browsing application view  5010  met a first movement condition where it was larger than 30% of the area of the full screen. 
     In response to detecting the third portion of the input by the first contact (e.g., the portion of the input that includes liftoff of the first contact after the first movement by the first contact) ( 612 ): in accordance with a determination that home-display criteria are met (e.g., based on a predefined movement parameter of the second portion of the input, or based on a predefined movement parameter of the first application view (e.g., either actual movement or projected movement)), wherein the home-display criteria require that the second portion of the input or the first application view meets a second movement condition that is different from the first movement condition (e.g., a second condition regarding the contact&#39;s speed, acceleration, position, or a combination of one or more of the above, or a second condition regarding a derived movement parameter of the first application view that is based on one or more of the above and one or more additional properties characterizing the state of the current user interface and/or movements of one or more objects contained therein, etc.) in order for the home-display criteria to be met, displaying a home screen user interface (that is distinct from the application-switcher user interface and) that includes a plurality of application launch icons that correspond to a plurality of applications (e.g., including the plurality of recently open applications and, optionally, one or more additional applications that are closed without retained state information, such that when activated, the applications are started from their default starting states)). This is illustrated, for example, in FIGS.  5 A 22 - 5 A 24  where lift-off of contact  5040  results in display of a home screen user interface in FIG.  5 A 24  because the second portion of the input met a second movement condition where the contact was moving at a rate greater than a threshold speed and/or email application view  5022  met a second movement condition where it was projected to have an area smaller than 30% of the area of the full screen. 
     In some embodiments, the first movement condition requires ( 614 ) that a first movement parameter of the first movement by the first contact (e.g., an absolute value or a change in position, speed, acceleration, and/or intensity of the first contact, or a combination of multiple factors, such as time, position, speed, intensity of contact, etc. during the first movement) meets a first threshold (e.g., a predefined time threshold for detecting a pause (or alternatively, absence of a pause) in the first movement of the first contact, a predefined position threshold for distinguishing a long swipe versus a short swipe, a predefined speed threshold for distinguishing a fast swipe versus a slow swipe, a predefined acceleration threshold for detecting a deceleration (or alternatively, absence of a deceleration) during the first movement of the first contact, a predefined acceleration threshold for detecting an acceleration (or alternatively, absence of an acceleration) during the first movement of the first contact, a predefined intensity threshold for detecting a press input (or alternatively, absence of a press input) during the first movement of the first contact). This is illustrated, for example, in FIGS.  5 A 7 - 5 A 8  where lift off of contact  5004  results in display of application views  5012  (web browsing),  5014  (messaging), and  5022  (email) in an application-switcher user interface because the second portion of the input met a first movement condition requiring a pause in the movement of contact  5004 , illustrated in FIG.  5 A 6 , prior to lift-off in FIG.  5 A 7 . Allowing the user to go to the application-switcher user interface based on whether a movement parameter of the first movement by the first contact meets certain preset conditions enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, the second movement condition requires ( 616 ) that the first movement parameter of the first movement (e.g., an absolute value or a change in position, speed, acceleration, and/or intensity of the first contact, or a combination of multiple factors, such as time, position, speed, intensity of contact, etc. during the first movement) meets a second threshold that is greater than the first threshold (e.g., a predefined time threshold for detecting a pause (or alternatively, absence of a pause) in the first movement of the first contact, a predefined position threshold for distinguishing a long swipe versus a short swipe, a predefined speed threshold for distinguishing a fast swipe versus a slow swipe, a predefined acceleration threshold for detecting a deceleration (or alternatively, absence of a deceleration) during the first movement of the first contact, a predefined acceleration threshold for detecting an acceleration (or alternatively, absence of an acceleration) during the first movement of the first contact, a predefined intensity threshold for detecting a press input (or alternatively, absence of a press input) during the first movement of the first contact). In some embodiments, the second movement condition requires that the first movement parameter of the first movement meets a third threshold that is lesser than the first threshold. This is illustrated, for example, in FIGS.  5 A 22 - 5 A 24  where lift-off of contact  5040  results in display of a home screen user interface in FIG.  5 A 24  because the second portion of the input met a second movement condition where the contact was moving at a rate greater than a second threshold speed greater than a first threshold speed required to meet application-switcher-display criteria. Allowing the user to go to the home screen user interface based on whether a movement parameter of the first movement by the first contact meets certain preset conditions that are different from the conditions for displaying the application-switcher user interface enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, the first movement condition includes ( 618 ) a criterion that is met when the first movement by the first contact corresponds to movement that is above a first movement threshold (e.g., movement of a focus selector by a first distance or movement of a representative portion of a user interface element such as a representation of the application by the first distance) (e.g., a vertical movement of the contact by a half of the screen height from the bottom edge of the touch-screen, or an amount of vertical movement of the contact that causes no more than 30% reduction in size of the card representing the first user interface) and the second movement condition includes ( 618 ) a criterion that is met when the first movement by the first contact corresponds to movement that is above a second movement threshold that is greater than the first movement threshold (e.g., movement of the focus selector by a second distance that is greater than the first distance or movement of a representative portion of a user interface element such as a representation of the application by the second distance) (e.g., a vertical movement of the contact by three fourths of the screen height from the bottom edge of the touch-screen, or an amount of vertical movement of the contact that causes more than 30% reduction in size of the card representing the first user interface). For example, a medium length upward swipe from the bottom edge of the touch-screen leads to display of the application-switcher user interface after lift-off of the contact, and a long upward swipe from the bottom edge of the touch-screen leads to display of the home screen after lift-off of the contact. This is illustrated, for example, in FIGS.  5 A 2 - 5 A 6  and  5 A 19 - 5 A 21 . In FIGS.  5 A 2 - 5 A 6 , movement  5006  of contact  5004  passes a first movement threshold, required to meet application-switcher-display criteria, but not a second movement threshold, required to meet home-display criteria. In contrast, movement  5042  of contact  5040 , in FIGS.  5 A 19 - 5 A 21 , is much longer, passing both the first movement threshold and the second movement threshold. Allowing the user to go to either the home screen or the application-switcher user interface based on whether the same movement parameter of the first movement by the first contact meets different thresholds enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device, and allowing the transition to the home screen and the application-switcher user interface to be continuous and reversible), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, the first movement condition includes ( 620 ) a criterion that is met when the first movement by the first contact corresponds to a first range of movement between an upper movement threshold and a lower movement threshold of the first range of movement (e.g., movement of a focus selector by a distance that is greater than the lower movement threshold and less than the upper movement threshold of the first range or movement of a representative portion of a user interface element such as a representation of the application by a distance that is greater than the lower movement threshold and less than the upper movement threshold of the first range) (e.g., a vertical movement of the contact by a half of the screen height from the bottom edge of the touch-screen, or an amount of vertical movement of the contact that causes no more than 30% reduction in size of the card representing the first user interface) and the second movement condition includes ( 620 ) a criterion that is met when the first movement by the first contact corresponds to either a second range of movement or a third range of movement. The second range of movement is between an upper movement threshold and a lower movement threshold of the second range of movement, wherein the second range of movement is below the first range of movement and the second range of movement does not overlap with the first range of movement (e.g., movement of a focus selector by a distance that is greater than the lower movement threshold and less than the upper movement threshold of the second range or movement of a representative portion of a user interface element such as a representation of the application by a distance that is greater than the lower movement threshold and less than the upper movement threshold of the second range) (e.g., a vertical movement of the contact by ⅓ of screen height from the bottom edge of touch-screen with at least a threshold speed before lift-off of the contact). For example, a short upward swipe from the bottom edge of the touch-screen also leads to display of the home screen after lift-off of the first contact, in addition to the long upward swipe from the bottom edge of the touch-screen. In some embodiments, if the movement is below the lower movement threshold of the second range of movement, the device continues to display the user interface for the first application on the display without displaying the displaying a home screen user interface or the application-switcher user interface. The third range of movement is between an upper movement threshold and a lower movement threshold of the third range of movement, wherein third range of movement is above the first range of movement and the third range of movement does not overlap with the first range of movement (e.g., movement of a focus selector by a distance that is greater than the lower movement threshold and less than the upper movement threshold of the third range or movement of a representative portion of a user interface element such as a representation of the application by a distance that is greater than the lower movement threshold and less than the upper movement threshold of the third range). In some embodiments, the upper value of the third range of movement is a furthest extent of movement on the device (e.g., an edge of the display or an edge of the touch-sensitive surface). This would be illustrated in FIGS.  5 A 2 - 5 A 7  and  5 A 19 - 5 A 21  if the navigation results were reversed, e.g., if lift-off of contact  5004 , in FIG.  5 A 7 , after a shorter movement  5006 , resulted in display of a home screen user interface (as shown in FIG.  5 A 24 ) and lift-off of contact  5040  in FIG.  5 A 23 , after an intermediate length movement  5043  resulted in display of a plurality of application views (e.g., as shown in FIG.  5 A 8 ). Allowing the user to go to either the home screen or the application-switcher user interface based on the value range that the movement parameter of the first movement by the first contact falls within, and putting the value range for the application-switcher user interface between the value ranges for the home screen user interface enhance the operability of the device and make the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device, and allowing the user to transition to the home screen during multiple stages of the swipe gesture), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, the first movement-condition includes ( 622 ) a criterion that is met when the first movement by the first contact corresponds to movement that is greater than a fourth movement threshold (e.g., movement of a focus selector by a fourth distance) (e.g., a vertical movement of the contact by a half of the screen height from the bottom edge of the touch-screen, or an amount of vertical movement of the contact that causes no more than 30% reduction in size of the card representing the first user interface) and the second movement condition includes ( 622 ) a criterion that is met when the first movement by the first contact corresponds to movement that is greater than a fifth movement threshold that is less than the fourth movement threshold (e.g., movement of the focus selector by a fifth distance that is less than the fourth distance) (e.g., a vertical movement of the contact by ⅓ of screen height from the bottom edge of touch-screen with at least a threshold speed before lift-off of the contact). For example, a short upward swipe from the bottom edge of the touch-screen leads to the display of the home screen after lift-off of the first contact, and a medium length upward swipe from the bottom edge of the touch-screen leads to the display of the application-switcher user interface after the lift-off of the first contact. This would be illustrated in FIGS.  5 A 2 - 5 A 7  and  5 A 19 - 5 A 21  if the navigation results were reversed, e.g., if lift-off of contact  5004  in FIG.  5 A 7 , after a shorter movement  5006 , resulted in display of a home screen user interface (as shown in FIG.  5 A 24 ) and lift-off of contact  5040  in FIG.  5 A 23 , after a longer movement  5043  (e.g., where there are only two movement thresholds, rather than three movement thresholds), resulted in display of a plurality of application views (e.g., as shown in FIG.  5 A 8 ). Allowing the user to go to either the home screen or the application-switcher user interface based on whether the same movement parameter of the first movement by the first contact meets different thresholds enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device, and allowing the transition to the home screen and the application-switcher user interface to be continuous and reversible), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, the first movement-condition includes ( 624 ) a criterion that is met when a predefined parameter (e.g., a projected position/size based on position and size of the first application view upon lift-off of the first contact) of the first application view is in a first value range (e.g., a projected position of the first application view 150 ms after lift-off of the first contact is within a first region on the display (e.g., above one quarter of the screen height above the bottom edge of the screen and below one eighth of the screen height below the top edge of the screen), or a projected size of the first application view 150 ms after lift-off of the first contact is more than 30% of the size of the first user interface) and the second contact movement condition includes ( 624 ) a criterion that is met when the predefined parameter of the first application view is in a second value range different from the first value range (e.g., a projected position of the first application view 150 ms after lift-off of the first contact is within a second region (e.g., above seven eighth of the screen height above the bottom edge of the screen, or a projected size of the first application view 150 ms after lift-off of the first contact is less than 30% of the size of the first user interface)). For example, after the application views are displayed, the position and size of the first application view changes in accordance with the movement of the first contact, and thereby acquire positions and speed of its own. After lift-off of the first contact, the projected position and/or size of the first application view is used to determine whether the application-switcher-display criteria are met or whether the home-display criteria are met. This is illustrated, for example, in FIGS.  5 A 6 - 5 A 8  and  5 A 22 - 5 A 24 . Lift-off of contact  5004  in FIG.  5 A 7  causes the device to display an application-switcher user interface because the projected position of the card is greater than 30% of the size of the full screen, since movement of the contact was paused, at a state where the application view was greater than 30% of the size of the full screen, when lift-off occurred). In contrast, lift-off of contact  5040  in FIG.  5 A 23 , where the contact is traveling upwards with movement  5042 , results in a projected size and position as shown by outline  5044 . Since outline  5044  is smaller than 30% of the area of the full screen, the device displays a home screen user interface in FIG.  5 A 24 . Allowing the user to go to either the home screen or the application-switcher user interface based on whether a predefined parameter of the first application view meets certain preset conditions enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by providing information regarding the internal state of the device through the parameter of the first application view, reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device, and allowing the transition to the home screen and the application-switcher user interface to be continuous and reversible), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, the first movement condition includes ( 626 ) a criterion that is met when the first movement by the first contact includes a predefined pause of the first contact, and the second movement condition includes ( 626 ) a criterion that is met when the first movement by the first contact does not include the predefined pause of the first contact. For example, during the upward movement of the first contact from the bottom edge of the touch-screen, after the multiple application views are displayed, if the first contact slows down by more than a threshold amount, or if the first contact maintains its position for more than a threshold amount of time, the device displays the application-switcher user interface after lift-off of the first contact; otherwise, if the predefined pause is not detected before lift-off of the first contact, the device displays the home screen user interface after lift-off of the first contact. This is illustrated, for example, in FIGS.  5 A 6 - 5 A 8  and  5 A 22 - 5 A 24 . Contact  5004  is paused prior to lift-off in FIG.  5 A 7 —resulting in display of an application-switcher user interface in FIG.  5 A 8 —while contact  5040  continues to travel upwards with movement  5042  prior to lift-off in FIG.  5 A 23 —resulting in display of a home screen user interface in FIG.  5 A 24 . Allowing the user to go to either the home screen or the application-switcher user interface based on whether a predefined pause is detected during the first movement of the first contact enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, the first movement condition requires ( 628 ) that, after the predefined pause of the first contact is detected during the first movement, less than a threshold amount of movement of the first contact is detected before the lift-off of the first contact is detected; and the second movement condition includes ( 628 ) a criterion that is met when, after the predefined pause of the first contact is detected, more than the threshold amount of movement of the first contact is detected before the lift-off of the first contact is detected. For example, during the upward movement of the first contact from the bottom edge of the touch-screen, after the multiple application views are displayed, if the first contact slows down by more than a threshold amount, or if the first contact maintains its position for more than a threshold amount of time, the condition for detecting the predefined pause is met. If lift-off of the first contact is detected with less than a threshold amount of movement after the pause, the device displays the application-switcher user interface after the lift-off of the first contact; otherwise, if the first contact continues to move upward, and more than the threshold amount of movement is detected after the pause and before the lift-off of the first contact, the device displays the home screen user interface after lift-off of the first contact. This would be illustrated if after contact  5004  pauses in FIG.  5 A 6 , and prior to lift-off of contact  5004  in FIG.  5 A 7 , upward movement  5006  of contact  5004  were continued and lift-off resulted in device  100  displaying a home screen user interface, rather than an application-switcher user interface, in FIG.  5 A 8 . Allowing the user to go to either the home screen or the application-switcher user interface based on whether a predefined pause is detected during the first movement of the first contact and then allowing the user to defeat the preset condition with additional movement enhance the operability of the device and make the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device, and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, the first movement condition includes ( 630 ) a criterion that is met when a characteristic movement speed of the first contact during the first movement is below a threshold speed (e.g., one eighth of the screen height per second on lift-off of the first contact), and the second movement condition includes ( 630 ) a criterion that is met when the characteristic movement speed of the first contact during the first movement is above the threshold speed. In some embodiments, the characteristic speed of the first contact is the upward speed immediately prior to lift-off of the first contact. In some embodiments, the characteristic speed of the first contact is the average upward speed during a predefined time window (e.g., 20 ms) before lift-off of the first contact. For example, during the upward movement of the first contact, if the upward speed of the first contact immediate prior to lift-off of the first contact is below a first threshold speed (e.g., ⅛ screen height per second), the device displays the application-switcher user interface, and if the upward speed of the first contact immediately prior to lift-off of the first contact is above the first threshold speed, the device displays the home screen user interface after lift-off of the first contact. This would be illustrated in FIGS.  5 A 2 - 5 A 8  and  5 A 19 - 5 A 24  if it is assumed that movement  5006  of contact  5004  is slow—resulting in display of an application-switcher user interface upon lift-off in FIG.  5 A 8 —and movement  5042  of contact  5040  is fast—resulting in display of a home screen user interface upon lift-off in FIG.  5 A 24 . Allowing the user to go to either the home screen or the application-switcher user interface based on whether a slow swipe is detected or a fast swipe is detected enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, the first movement condition requires ( 632 ) that, the first contact makes less than a threshold amount of movement after meeting the criterion that is met when the characteristic movement speed of the first contact is below the threshold speed; and the second movement condition includes ( 632 ) a criterion that is met when, the first contact makes more than the threshold amount of movement after meeting the criterion that is met when the characteristic movement speed of the first contact is below the threshold speed. For example, during the upward movement of the first contact from the bottom edge of the touch-screen, after the multiple application views are displayed, and the characteristic movement speed of the first contact is below a threshold speed (e.g., ⅛ of screen height per second), if the first contact continues to move upward by more than a threshold distance, the device displays the home screen after lift-off of the first contact. If the device does not move by more than the threshold distance after the criterion on the slow speed is met, the device displays the application-switcher user interface after lift-off of the first contact. This would be illustrated by FIGS.  5 A 19 - 5 A 24  if it is assumed that the speed of movement  5042  of contact  5040  between positions  5040 - a  and  5040 - b  was below the threshold speed (which would cause the device to navigate to an application-switcher user interface upon lift-off) and the speed of movement  5042  of contact  5040  between positions  5040 - b  and  5040 - d  was above the threshold speed (defeating the slow speed of movement  5042  between positions  5040 - a  and  5040 - b ), resulting in display of a home screen user interface, in FIG.  5 A 24 , upon lift-off of contact  5040 . Allowing the user to go to either the home screen or the application-switcher user interface based on whether a slow swipe is detected or a fast swipe is detected and then allowing the user to defeat the preset condition with additional movement enhance the operability of the device and make the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device, and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, the first movement condition includes ( 634 ) a criterion that is met when a threshold amount of deceleration of the first contact is detected during the first movement, and the second movement condition includes ( 634 ) a criterion that is met when the threshold amount of deceleration of the first contact is not detected during the first movement. For example, during the upward movement of the first contact from the bottom edge of the touch-screen, after the multiple application views are displayed, if the first contact slows down by more than a threshold amount within a threshold amount of time, the device displays the application-switcher user interface after lift-off of the first contact; otherwise, if the required amount of deceleration is not detected before lift-off of the first contact, the device displays the home screen user interface after lift-off of the first contact. This is illustrated in FIGS.  5 A 2 - 5 A 8  and  5 A 19 - 5 A 24 , where movement  5006  of contact  5004  is decelerated to a pause prior to lift-off, resulting in display of an application-switcher user interface in FIG.  5 A 8  upon lift-off, while movement  5042  of contact  5040  is not decelerated prior to lift-off, resulting in display of a home screen user interface in FIG.  5 A 24 . Allowing the user to go to either the home screen or the application-switcher user interface based on whether a threshold amount of deceleration is detected during the first movement of the first contact enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, the first movement condition requires ( 636 ) that, after the threshold amount of deceleration of the first contact is detected, less than a threshold amount of movement of the first contact is detected before lift-off of the first contact is detected, and the second movement condition includes ( 636 ) a criterion that is met when, after the threshold amount of deceleration of the first contact is detected, more than the threshold amount of movement of the first contact is detected before lift-off of the first contact is detected. For example, during the upward movement of the first contact from the bottom edge of the touch-screen, after the multiple application views are displayed, if the first contact slows down by more than a threshold amount within a threshold amount of time, the condition for detecting the required deceleration is met. If lift-off of the first contact is detected with less than a threshold amount of movement after the deceleration, the device displays the application-switcher user interface after lift-off of the first contact; otherwise, if the first contact continues to move upward, and more than the threshold amount of movement detected after the required deceleration and before lift-off of the first contact, the device displays the home screen user interface after lift-off of the first contact. This would be illustrated if after contact  5004  decelerates to a pause in FIG.  5 A 6 , and prior to lift-off of contact  5004  in FIG.  5 A 7 , upward movement  5006  of contact  5004  were continued past a threshold amount and lift-off resulted in device  100  displaying a home screen user interface, rather than an application-switcher user interface, in FIG.  5 A 8 . Allowing the user to go to either the home screen or the application-switcher user interface based on whether a threshold amount of deceleration is detected during the first movement of the first contact and then allowing the user to defeat the preset condition with additional movement enhance the operability of the device and make the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device, and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, the first movement condition includes ( 638 ) a criterion that is met when a characteristic intensity of the first contact does not exceed a predefined threshold intensity during the first movement after the plurality of application views are displayed, and the second movement condition includes ( 638 ) a criterion that is met when the characteristic intensity of the first contact exceeds the predefined threshold intensity during the first movement after the plurality of application views are displayed. For example, during the upward movement of the first contact from the bottom edge of the touch-screen, after the multiple application views are displayed, if a press input by the first contact is detected, the device displays the home screen user interface after lift-off of the first contact; otherwise, if the press input is not detected before lift-off of the first contact, the device displays the application-switcher user interface after lift-off of the first contact. This would be illustrated in FIGS.  5 A 2 - 5 A 8  and  5 A 19 - 5 A 24  if it is assumed that a characteristic intensity of contact  5004  did not exceed a predefined intensity threshold, resulting in display of an application-switcher user interface upon lift-off, in FIG.  5 A 8 , and a characteristic intensity of contact  5040  did exceed the predefined intensity threshold, resulting in display of a home screen user interface upon lift-off, in FIG.  5 A 24 . Allowing the user to go to either the home screen or the application-switcher user interface based on whether a press input is detected during the first movement of the first contact enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device, and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, the first movement condition includes ( 640 ) a criterion that is met when a characteristic intensity of the first contact exceeds a predefined threshold intensity during the first movement after the plurality of application views are displayed, and the second movement condition includes ( 640 ) a criterion that is met when the characteristic intensity of the first contact does not exceed the predefined threshold intensity during the first movement after the plurality of application views are displayed. For example, during the upward movement of the first contact from the bottom edge of the touch-screen, after the multiple application views are displayed, if a press input by the first contact is detected, the device displays the application-switcher user interface after lift-off of the first contact; otherwise, if the press input is not detected before lift-off of the first contact, the device displays the home screen user interface after lift-off of the first contact. This would be illustrated in FIGS.  5 A 2 - 5 A 8  and  5 A 19 - 5 A 24  if it is assumed that a characteristic intensity of contact  5004  exceeded a predefined intensity threshold, resulting in display of an application-switcher user interface upon lift-off, in FIG.  5 A 8 , and a characteristic intensity of contact  5040  did not exceed the predefined intensity threshold, resulting in display of a home screen user interface upon lift-off, in FIG.  5 A 24 . Allowing the user to go to either the home screen or the application-switcher user interface based on whether a press input is detected during the first movement of the first contact enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device, and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, the first contact movement condition requires ( 642 ) that, after the characteristic intensity of the first contact exceeds the predefined threshold intensity, the first contact makes less than a threshold amount of movement before lift-off of the first contact, and the second contact movement condition includes ( 642 ) a criterion that is met when, after the characteristic intensity of the first contact exceeds the predefined threshold intensity, the first contact makes more than the threshold amount of movement before lift-off of the first contact. For example, during the upward movement of the first contact from the bottom edge of the touch-screen, after the multiple application views are displayed, if intensity of the first contact exceeds the predefined intensity threshold, the criterion for detecting the required press input is met. If lift-off of the first contact is detected with less than a threshold amount of movement after the press input, the device displays the application-switcher user interface after lift-off of the first contact; otherwise, if the first contact continues to move upward, and more than the threshold amount of movement detected after the press input and before lift-off of the first contact, the device displays the home screen user interface after lift-off of the first contact. This would be illustrated by FIGS.  5 A 19 - 5 A 24  if a characteristic intensity of contact  5040  exceeded a predefined intensity threshold at position  5040 - b , which would otherwise direct display of an application-switcher user interface upon lift-off, but because contact  5040  continued to move upwards to position  5040 - e  prior to lift-off, the device displays a home screen user interface in FIG.  5 A 24  after lift-off. Allowing the user to go to either the home screen or the application-switcher user interface based on whether a press input is detected during the first movement of the first contact and then allowing the user to defeat the present condition with additional movement enhance the operability of the device and make the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device, and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, the plurality of application views are displayed ( 644 ) in a first configuration before the application-switcher-display criteria are met (e.g., by the second portion of the input or the first application view). For example, immediately after the upward movement of the first contact is started from the bottom edge of the touch-screen, the first user interface is reduced in size and morphed into a reduced-scale image of the first user interface, and the reduced-scale image of the first user interface continues to shrink in size and move upward with the first contact, as the first contact continues to move upward. Reduced-scale image of at least one other open application is displayed next to the reduced-scale image of the first user interface, and changes its position and size in accordance with the changes in the position and size of the reduced-scale image of the first user interface. Further, displaying the application-switcher user interface includes displaying ( 644 ) the plurality of application views in a second configuration that is different from the first configuration. For example, before the lift-off of the first contact is detected, the plurality of application views are displayed side by side in the same z-layer, and do not overlap with one another. After the lift-off of the first contact is detected, the plurality of application views fly into a stack each being slightly offset from the application view above it. In some embodiments, the plurality of application views change their relative positions (e.g., into the stacked configuration) upon satisfaction of the application-switcher-display criteria, before lift-off of the first contact is detected. In some embodiments, the plurality of application views change their relative positions again once the home-display criteria are met (e.g., in some embodiments, the application-switcher-display criteria are no longer met, if the home-display criteria are met (e.g., with continued upward movement of the first contact)). This is illustrated in FIGS.  5 A 6 - 5 A 8  where application views  5014 ,  5010 , and  5018  are displayed in a co-planar fashion prior to lift-off of contact  5004 , in FIG.  5 A 6 , and in a stacked orientation after lift-off of contact  5004 , in in FIG.  5 A 8 . Displaying the application views in different configurations before and after the application-switcher-display criteria are met enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by providing visual feedback regarding the internal state of the device, helping the user to achieve a desired outcome with required inputs, and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, the touch-sensitive surface is integrated with the display in a touch-screen display, and the first movement of the first contact is detected ( 646 ) across portions of the touch-screen display on which the first user interface was displayed before the detection of the first contact. For example, the first movement of the first contact is not across a touch-sensitive solid-state home button, or a mechanical button, or a stationary or repositionable virtual home button that is overlaid on the first user interface. This is illustrated, for example, in FIGS.  5 A 2 - 5 A 7 , where movement  5006  of contact  5004  is on touch screen  112 . Allowing the user to display the home-screen user interface and the application-switcher user interface by providing a gesture on the touch-screen that displays the first user interface (as opposed to a physical, solid state, or virtual home button) enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by reducing visual clutter, providing visual feedback directly below finger contacts, and thereby reducing use mistakes and helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). Not requiring a physical or solid state button will, in some circumstances, reduce power usage and manufacturing and maintenance costs of the device (e.g., by eliminating the required hardware and a mechanical fatigue on the required hardware). 
     In some embodiments, displaying the plurality of application views includes ( 648 ) dynamically changing an appearance of the plurality of application views in accordance with a current value of a movement parameter (e.g., position and/or speed) of the first contact during the first movement. This is illustrated, for example, in FIGS.  5 A 20 - 5 A 21 , where application views  5010  and  5022 , and control panel view  5016 , decrease in size and move upward on the screen in response to upward movement  5042  of contact  5040  from position  5040 - b , in FIG.  5 A 20 , to position  5040 - c , in FIG.  5 A 21 . Dynamically changing the appearance of the application views in accordance with the current value of the movement parameter of the first contact enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by providing real-time visual feedback regarding the internal state of the device, helping the user to achieve a desired outcome with required inputs, and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, dynamically changing the appearance of the plurality of application views in accordance with the current value of the movement parameter of the first contact during the first movement includes reducing ( 650 ) respective sizes of the plurality of application views in accordance with a current vertical distance between a focus selector (e.g., the first contact) and a predefined reference position (e.g., bottom center of the touch-screen) on the display. This is illustrated, for example, in FIGS.  5 A 20 - 5 A 21 , where application views  5010  and  5022 , and control panel view  5016  decrease in size and move upward on the screen in response to upward movement  5042  of contact  5040  from position  5040 - b , in FIG.  5 A 20 , to position  5040 - c , in FIG.  5 A 21 . Dynamically reducing the sizes of the application views in accordance with the current vertical distance of the first contact enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by providing real-time visual feedback regarding the internal state of the device, providing smooth transition between the application-switcher user interface and the home screen user interface, helping the user to achieve a desired outcome with required inputs, and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, the device ceases ( 652 ) to display the plurality of application views in accordance with a determination that the respective size of the first application view that corresponds to the first user interface is reduced to below a threshold size (e.g., 30% of the original size of the first user interface). In some embodiments, the device displays an animation showing the plurality of application views moving toward and merge into the application launch icons of the respective applications that are represented by the plurality of application views. This is illustrated, for example, in FIGS.  5 A 21 - 5 A 22  where device  100  ceases to display application view  5010  and control panel view  5016  upon movement  5042  of contact  5040  from position  5040 - c , in FIG.  5 A 21 , to position  5040 - d , in FIG.  5 A 22 , because email application view  5022  decreases in size below a predefined threshold size. Ceasing to display the preview of the application-switcher user interface including the multiple application views when the size of the first application view is reduced below a threshold size and the conditions for displaying the home screen user interface is met enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by providing real-time visual feedback regarding the internal state of the device, helping the user to achieve a desired outcome with required inputs, and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, the first application view is an image of the first user interface (e.g., a snapshot of the first user interface) and the method includes dynamically changing ( 654 ) a size of the first application view in accordance with a current position of the first application view on the display (e.g., reducing the size of the first application view when the first application view moves upward toward the top of the display). This is illustrated, for example, in FIGS.  5 A 20 - 5 A 21 , where application views  5010  and  5022 , and control panel view  5016  decrease in size and move upward on the screen in response to upward movement  5042  of contact  5040  from position  5040 - b , in FIG.  5 A 20 , to position  5040 - c , in FIG.  5 A 21 . Dynamically changing the size of the application views in accordance with the current position of the first application view enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by providing real-time visual feedback regarding the internal state of the device, helping the user to achieve a desired outcome with required inputs, and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, the device changes ( 656 ) the current position of the first application view in accordance with the first movement of the first contact. This is illustrated in FIGS.  5 A 52 - 5 A 55 , where the vertical and horizontal position of messaging application view  5014  are dynamically changed with movement of contact  5070  from position  5070 - a  through  5070 - b . Dynamically changing the size of the application views in accordance with the current position of the first contact enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by providing real-time visual feedback regarding the internal state of the device, helping the user to achieve a desired outcome with required inputs, and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, dynamically changing the size of the first application view includes continuing ( 658 ) to change the size of the first application view in accordance with movement of the first application view after lift-off of the first contact is detected. For example, when the input is an upward flick gesture, card representing the first user interface is “thrown” upward, and continues to shrink in size as it moves toward the top of the display. This is illustrated, for example, in FIGS.  5 A 55 - 5 A 56  where lift-off of contact  5070 , while traveling downward according to movement  5072 , causes messaging application view  5014  to continue to increase in size until it reaches full screen size, at which time it is replaced by display of the messaging user interface in FIG.  5 A 56 . Dynamically changing the size of the application views in accordance with the current position of the first application view and after lift-off of the first contact enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by providing real-time visual feedback regarding the internal state of the device, improving continuity of the visual feedback before and after termination of the input, helping the user to achieve a desired outcome with required inputs, and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, displaying the plurality of application views includes: in accordance with a determination that the application-switcher-display criteria are not met (e.g., before lift-off of the first contact has been detected, or after lift-off of the first contact has been detected), displaying ( 660 ) the first application view without displaying the second application view (and any other application views among the plurality of application views); and, in accordance with a determination that the application-switcher-display criteria are met (e.g., before lift-off of the first contact has been detected, or after lift-off of the first contact has been detected), displaying ( 660 ) the first application view with the second application view (and, optionally, other applications views among the plurality of application views). For example, initially, when first contact moves upward from the bottom edge of the display, only the card for the first user interface is visible on the display. As the first contact continues to move up on the touch-screen, and reaches a threshold vertical position on the touch-screen or is paused on the touch-screen, such that the application-switcher-display criteria are met, the card for the last displayed application and the control panel view are displayed (e.g., shifted in from the two sides of the display (e.g., left side and right side, or left side and bottom side)). This is illustrated, for example, in FIG.  5 A 2 - 5 A 6  where, prior to meeting application-switcher-display criteria, device  100  displays only web browsing application view  5010  in FIGS.  5 A 2 - 5 A 5  but, in response to the input meeting application-switcher-display criteria, the device displays application view  5014  and control panel view  5016  from the left-hand and right-hand sides of the screen in FIG.  5 A 6 . Displaying the first application view without the other application views when application-switcher-display criteria are not met, and displaying multiple application views when the application-switcher-display criteria are met enhance the operability of the device and make the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by providing real-time visual feedback regarding the internal state of the device, improving continuity of the visual feedback before and after the application-switcher-display criteria are met, helping the user to achieve a desired outcome with required inputs, and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that home-display criteria are met (e.g., before lift-off of the first contact has been detected, or after lift-off of the first contact has been detected), the device ceases ( 662 ) to display the second application view of the plurality of application views while maintaining display of the first application view (e.g., when the home-display criteria are met, the device continues to display only the first application view, and ceases to display other application views and the control panel view on the display). In some embodiments, when the home-display criteria are met (e.g., based on position, speed, acceleration, deceleration, pause, etc. of the first contact or a predefined portion of the first application view), the two side cards fade away, and only the center card representing the first user interface remains displayed and continues to move upward toward the top of the display. This is illustrated in FIGS.  5 A 21 - 5 A 22  where, prior to meeting home-display criteria, device  100  displays application views  5010  and  5022 , and control panel view  5016 , in FIG.  5 A 21 , but, in response to the input meeting home-display criteria, the device ceases to display application view  5010  and control panel view  5016  in FIG.  5 A 22 . Displaying multiple application views before the home-display criteria are met and ceasing to display multiple application views after the home-display criteria are met enhance the operability of the device and make the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by providing real-time visual feedback regarding the internal state of the device, improving continuity of the visual feedback before and after the application-switcher-display criteria are met, helping the user to achieve a desired outcome with required inputs, and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the home-display criteria are met, the device displays ( 664 ) an animated transition in which the first application view overlaid on the home screen user interface is transformed into a first application launch icon on the home screen user interface that corresponds to the first application. This is illustrated in FIGS.  5 A 22 - 5 A 25  where, in response to lift-off of contact  5040  when the input meets home-display criteria, email application view  5022  decreases in size and transitions into email launch icon  418  in FIG.  5 A 25 . Displaying an animated transition showing the first application view overlaid on the home screen to the home screen user interface when the home-display criteria are met enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by providing real-time visual feedback regarding the internal state of the device, improving continuity of the visual feedback before and after the home-display criteria are met, helping the user to achieve a desired outcome with required inputs, and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, displaying the plurality of application views includes, during the first movement of the first contact (e.g., the upward movement from the bottom edge of the touch-screen), when the application-switcher-display criteria are met, displaying ( 666 ) a first plurality of intermediate states between displaying the first application view and displaying the plurality of application views (e.g., the other application views gradually fade in or slide in from the sides of the display); and during the first movement of the first contact (e.g., the upward movement from the bottom edge of the touch-screen), after the application-switcher criteria are met and when the home-display criteria are met, displaying ( 666 ) a second plurality of intermediate states between displaying the plurality of application views and displaying the first application view (e.g., the other application views gradually fade out or slide out to the sides of the display). This would be illustrated by FIGS.  5 A 19 - 5 A 22  if application view  5010  and control panel view  5016  slid onto the screen between FIGS.  5 A 19  and  5 A 20  (e.g., upon meeting application-switcher-display criteria) and then slid off of the screen between FIGS.  5 A 21  and  5 A 22  (e.g., after no longer meeting application-switcher-display criteria). Displaying a plurality of intermediate states transitioning into the multiple application views when the application-switcher-display criteria are met, and displaying another plurality of intermediates transitioning into the single application view when the home-display criteria are met enhance the operability of the device and make the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by providing real-time visual feedback regarding the internal state of the device, improving continuity of the visual feedback before and after the application-switcher-display criteria are met, helping the user to achieve a desired outcome with required inputs, and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, during the first movement of the first contact (e.g., the upward movement from the bottom edge of the touch screen), the device displays ( 668 ) a third plurality of intermediate states between displaying the plurality of application views and displaying the home-screen user interface, wherein the plurality of application views are concurrently displayed with the home-screen user interface during the plurality of intermediate states (e.g., the application views are overlaid on the home-screen user interface). For example, the home-screen user interface is displayed in a layer below the plurality of application views, and the plurality of application views become smaller and/or more translucent as the first contact moves toward the top of the display, while the home screen user interface becomes increasingly clear and bright/saturated as the first contact moves toward the top of the display. This is illustrated in FIGS.  5 A 20 - 5 A 21  where application views  5010  and  5022 , and control panel view  5016 , are displayed over a blurred home screen user interface. The application views decrease in size and the home screen user interface becomes clearer upon upward movement  5042  of contact  5040  from position  5040 - b , in FIG.  5 A 20 , to position  5040 - c , in FIG.  5 A 21 . Displaying a plurality of intermediate states between the multiple application views and the home screen user interface enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by providing real-time visual feedback regarding the internal state of the device, improving continuity of the visual feedback, helping the user to achieve a desired outcome with required inputs, and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, at a first point in time, the first contact completes a first portion of the first movement, at a second point in time, the first contact completes a second portion of the first movement following the first portion of the first movement, at a third point in time, the first contact completes a third portion of the first movement that reverses the second portion of the first movement. In accordance with the first portion of the first movement, the application-switcher-display criteria would be met ( 670 ) if lift-off of the first contact is detected at the first point in time. In accordance with the first portion and the second portion of the first movement, the home-display criteria would be met ( 670 ) if lift-off of the first contact is detected at the second point in time. In accordance with the first portion, the second portion, and the third portion of the first movement, the application-switcher-display criteria would be met ( 670 ) if lift-off of the first contact is detected at the third point in time. For example, in some embodiments, before the first contact drags the first application view to a threshold position on the touch-screen, the plurality of application views are displayed, and lift-off of the first contact will cause the application-switcher user interface to be displayed; however, the if the first contact continues to move upward to beyond the threshold position, the plurality of application views cease to be displayed, and the home screen would be displayed if lift-off of the first contact is detected at this point; and if the first contact then reverses the movement direction, the plurality of application views are redisplayed, and if lift-off of the first contact is detected at this point. In some embodiments, the user interface is smoothly animated during the first movement, so that even though different operations would be performed depending on which portion of the input the input is detected, the change in the appearance of the user interface during the input are continuous and the visual indications that the different operations will be performed on liftoff of the contact gradually transition as the contact moves on the touch-sensitive surface. Providing visual changes in the user interface that are fluid, continuous, and reversible and forgoing the use of discrete and non-reversible states for performing user interface operations enhance the operability of the device and make the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by providing real-time visual feedback regarding the internal state of the device, improving continuity of the visual feedback, helping the user to achieve a desired outcome with required inputs, and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, the display includes a first protruding portion and a second protruding portion that is separated by a predefined cutout area that does not display content. Displaying the first user interface includes: displaying ( 672 ) a first portion of the first user interface in the first protruding portion of the display, displaying ( 672 ) a second portion of the first user interface in the second protruding portion of the display, and forgoing displaying ( 672 ) a third portion of the first user interface that is between the first portion of the first user interface and the second portion of the first user interface. Displaying the plurality of application views including the first application view includes displaying ( 672 ) an image of the first user interface as the first application view, wherein the third portion of the first user interface is included in the image between the first and second portions of the first user interface. For example, when the first application is in full screen mode, a portion of the application user interface falls within a cutout region along one edge (e.g., a location of one or more hardware components that extend into the display). The representation of the first application in the application-switcher user interface is a card with rounded corners, and do not have the protruding “ears” in the upper left and upper right corners, and includes content that was within the cutout region and therefore not visible when the first application was in the full-screen mode of operation. This is illustrated, for example, in FIGS.  5 A 2 - 5 A 3  where the portion of the web browsing user interface obscured by the portion of device  100  housing optical sensors  164  and speaker  111  in FIG.  5 A 2  is revealed in web browsing application view  5010  in FIG.  5 A 3 . Displaying additional content of the user interface that is previously obscured (e.g., due to presence of physical obstacles) when displaying the multiple application views enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by providing real-time visual feedback regarding the internal state of the device, and providing additional information without cluttering the display), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, the first user interface is a full-screen user interface of the first application ( 674 ) (e.g., user interface in a theater mode of a media player application, or user interface in a navigation mode of a navigation application). Displaying additional content of a full-screen user interface that is previously obscured (e.g., due to presence of physical obstacles) when displaying the multiple application views enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by providing real-time visual feedback regarding the internal state of the device, and providing additional information without cluttering the display), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, the device displays ( 676 ) system information within at least one of the first and second protruding portions, wherein the system information is overlaid on at least one of the first portion of the first user interface or the second portion of the first user interface. This is illustrated, for example, in FIG.  5 A 1  where time indicator  404  and status indicator  402  are displayed in protruding areas of touch screen  112 . Displaying system information in predefined regions of the display that is an extension of the rest of the display enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by utilizing available display space to display information that is separate from the underlying user interface, without interfering with the utilization of display space by a currently displayed application, and helping the user to see the system status of the device without additional inputs), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, the device displays ( 678 ) additional system information (e.g., mobile carrier name, Bluetooth connectivity indicator, do not disturb mode indicator, orientation lock indicator, airplane mode indicator, etc.) concurrently with the plurality of application views, wherein the additional system information was not displayed concurrently with the first user interface before the plurality of application views are displayed. In some embodiments, the system information ceases to be displayed if the first user interface for the first application is redisplayed, so that the user can temporarily display the additional system information by swiping up slightly on the touch-sensitive surface and swiping downward or lifting off to redisplay the first user interface for the first application. This is illustrated in FIGS.  5 A 2  and  5 A 8 , where expanded status bar  5008  is displayed in the application-switcher user interface in FIG.  5 A 8 , but not in web browsing user interface in FIG.  5 A 2 . Displaying additional system information when displaying the multiple application views enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by providing the system status of the device with a simple gesture, and without unduly cluttering the display when such additional status information is not needed), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, the device concurrently displays ( 680 ) a control panel view that corresponds to a control panel user interface of the device with the plurality of application views, wherein the control panel user interface includes a plurality of control affordances corresponding to a plurality of different control functions of the device (e.g., different types of network connections, display properties, media playback, peripheral device functions, etc.). This is illustrated, for example, in FIG.  5 A 6 , where control panel view  5016  is displayed with application views  5010  and  5014  prior to lift-off of contact  5004 . Displaying a control panel view along with other application views enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by providing guidance on how to easily access key control functions of the device, and reducing the number of inputs needed to access the control panel user interface), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, in response to detecting the third portion of the input by the first contact, in accordance with a determination that the application-switcher-display criteria are met, the device displays ( 682 ) at least a portion of the control panel user interface in the application-switcher user interface. In some embodiments, the plurality of application views are displayed concurrently with the control panel view. This is illustrated, for example, in FIG.  5 A 8 , where control panel view  5016  is displayed with application views  5010 ,  5014 , and  5022  in the application-switcher user interface. Displaying the control panel user interface along with other recently open applications in the application-switcher user interface enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by providing easy access to key control functions of the device, and reducing the number of inputs needed to access the control panel user interface), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, the plurality of application views are displayed ( 684 ) side by side (e.g., at a first distance above the bottom edge of the display) and the control panel view is displayed ( 684 ) in a first direction relative to the plurality of application views (e.g., the first row of the control panel user interface is shown below the plurality of application views that are arranged side by side (e.g., the first row of the control panel user interface is displayed at a second distance above the bottom edge of the display that is smaller than the first distance)). In some embodiments, an upward swipe on the control panel view causes the whole control panel to be displayed. Displaying the control panel user interface along with other recently open applications in the application-switcher user interface and displaying the application views and the control panel user interface in different parts of the display enhance the operability of the device and make the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by providing easy access to key control functions of the device, reducing the number of inputs needed to access the control panel user interface, and reducing user mistakes when interacting with/operating the device to access the control panel or a recently open application), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, the control panel view includes ( 686 ) a first plurality of controls (e.g., WiFi connection control, Bluetooth connection control, Airplane mode control, etc.) that are activatable by a contact (e.g., via a tap input or press input) when the control panel view is displayed in the application-switcher user interface to perform corresponding control operations at the device. Making one or more controls in the control panel view activatable while the control panel view is displayed in the application-switcher user interface enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by providing easy access to key control functions of the device, and reducing the number of inputs needed to access the control panel user interface), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, the first application view and the second application view are displayed ( 688 ) in an arrangement along a first path (e.g., side by side or arranged in a stack extending along the first path, optionally at a first distance above the bottom edge of the display) and the control panel view and the first application view are displayed ( 688 ) along the first path (e.g., side by side or arranged in a stack extending along the first path). For example, a reduced-scale image of the control panel user interface is displayed as a “card” along with the reduced-scale images of the first user interface and the second user interface, with the reduced-scale image of the first user interface being the middle “card” between the reduced-scale images of the control panel user interface and the second use interface. This is illustrated, for example, in FIG.  5 A 6 , where control panel view  5016  is displayed with application views  5010  and  5014  prior to lift-off of contact  5004 . Displaying the control panel user interface along with other recently open applications in the application-switcher user interface and displaying the application views and the control panel user interface in the same path enhance the operability of the device and make the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by providing easy access to key control functions of the device, reducing the number of inputs needed to access the control panel user interface, and providing visual consistency of the user interface thereby reducing user mistakes when interacting with/operating the device), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, the device detects ( 690 ) an application-switching request to switching from a currently displayed application to a respective application that is not currently displayed (e.g., while displaying the first user interface of the first application, detecting a gesture that meets the home-display criteria, displaying the home screen in response to the gesture, and after the home screen is displayed, detecting an input to launch a second application. In another example, while displaying the second application, detecting another gesture that meets the application-switcher-display criteria, displaying the application-switcher user interface in response to the gesture, and while displaying the application-switcher user interface, detecting user selection of an application view corresponding to a third application, etc.). In response to detecting the application-switching request, the device displays ( 690 ) a user interface of the respective application and, in accordance with a determination that gesture-prompt-display criteria are met, the device displays ( 690 ) a first visual prompt regarding a gesture that meets either one of the application-switcher-display criteria and the home-display criteria (e.g., a textual prompt such as “swipe up from bottom edge to display the home screen” or “application-switcher”, or an animation showing a required gesture for displaying the application-switcher user interface or the home screen.), while in accordance with a determination that the gesture-prompt-display criteria are not met, the device forgoes display ( 690 ) of the first visual prompt. Displaying a visual prompt regarding the home-display gesture or the application-switcher-display gesture when displaying a transition to a new application user interface enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to achieve a desired outcome with required inputs, and reducing user mistakes when interacting with/operating the device to access the home screen or the application-switcher user interface), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, the gesture-prompt-display criteria include ( 692 ) a criterion that is met when the device has recently completed an upgrade. For example, the gesture prompt is displayed the first time the device is turned on after an upgrade. In some embodiments, the upgrade is an upgrade that changed the application-switcher and home-display criteria to require a swipe from an edge of the display to go home or display an application-switcher user interface. In some embodiments, the criterion is met when the device has completed an upgrade within a predetermined time threshold and the user has not yet performed a gesture that meets the application-switching or home-display criteria. Displaying a visual prompt regarding the home-display gesture or the application-switcher-display gesture when the device has had a recent upgrade enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to achieve a desired outcome with required inputs, and reducing user mistakes when interacting with/operating the device to access the home screen or the application-switcher user interface), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, the device increments ( 694 ) a counter each time that the first visual prompt is displayed, wherein the gesture-prompt-display criteria require that a current value of the counter does not exceed a predefined threshold value in order for the gesture-prompt-display criteria to be met (e.g., the gesture hint is displayed a single time or a predetermined number of times). Displaying a visual prompt regarding the home-display gesture or the application-switcher-display gesture only for a set number of times enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to achieve a desired outcome with required inputs and reducing user mistakes when interacting with/operating the device, without unduly interfering with the user&#39;s normal usage of the device), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, displaying the first visual prompt includes displaying ( 696 ) a home affordance (e.g., near a bottom edge of the touch-screen) with a first appearance (e.g., enlarged, animated, blinking, pulsating, etc.) and forgoing display of the first visual prompt includes displaying ( 696 ) the home affordance with a second appearance that is different from the first appearance (e.g., the second appearance is the normal appearance of the home affordance, not enlarged, not animated, and not distracting to the user). In some embodiments, the home affordance is displayed at a location on the touch-sensitive display (e.g., a bottom edge of the touch-sensitive display) that indicates a portion of the touch-sensitive display that is configured to receive an input for going home or displaying the application-switcher user interface. In some embodiments, the home affordance is displayed in the second appearance throughout the user interface to indicate a location on the touch-sensitive display (e.g., a bottom edge of the touch-sensitive display) that indicates a portion of the touch-sensitive display that is configured to receive an input for going home or displaying the application-switcher user interface. Visually changing an appearance of the home affordance as a visual prompt regarding the home-display gesture or the application-switcher-display gesture enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to achieve a desired outcome with required inputs, and reducing user mistakes when interacting with/operating the device, without unduly interfering with the user&#39;s normal usage of the device and distracting the user from a task at hand), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, the device disables ( 698 ) at least a subset of functionalities of the respective application (and, optionally, the operating system of the device) while displaying the first visual prompt. For example, after an upgrade, the first time that an application is opened, the application user interface is covered with a dark layer overlaid with a textual and/or graphical prompt regarding the gesture for displaying the application-switcher user interface and/or the home screen, and the user interface does not respond to touch-inputs while the textual and/or graphical prompt is displayed. Disabling some functionalities when providing the visual prompt regarding the home-display gesture or the application-switcher-display gesture enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by helping to focus the user&#39;s attention on the new feature of the device, helping the user to learn how to display the application-switcher user interface and/or the home screen with required inputs, and reducing user mistakes when interacting with/operating the device), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that prompt-removal criteria are met, wherein the prompt-removal criteria include a criterion that is met when a threshold amount of time has elapsed since initial display of the first visual prompt, the device ceases ( 699 ) to display the first visual prompt and the device enables ( 699 ) the subset of functionalities of the respective application that have been disabled. In some embodiments, the disabled functions of the respective application are enabled when the user performs a required gesture (e.g., the upward swipe from the bottom edge of the display) at least once. Ceasing to display the visual prompt and re-enabling the disabled functionalities after a period of time enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by helping to focus the user&#39;s attention on the new feature of the device, helping the user to learn how to display the application-switcher user interface and/or the home screen with required inputs, without unduly interfering with the user&#39;s normal usage of the device), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     It should be understood that the particular order in which the operations in  FIGS. 6A-6L  have been described is merely an example and is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations could be performed. One of ordinary skill in the art would recognize various ways to reorder the operations described herein. Additionally, it should be noted that details of other processes described herein with respect to other methods described herein (e.g., methods  700 ,  800 ,  900 ,  1000 ,  1050 ,  1100 ,  1200 ,  1300 ,  1400 ,  1500 ,  1600 ,  1800 , and  1900 ) are also applicable in an analogous manner to method  600  described above with respect to  FIGS. 6A-6L . For example, the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, application views, control panels, controls, position thresholds, directional conditions, navigation criteria, movement parameters, thresholds, determinations, focus selectors, and/or animations described above with reference to method  600  optionally have one or more of the characteristics of the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, application views, control panels, controls, position thresholds, directional conditions, navigation criteria, movement parameters, thresholds, determinations, focus selectors, and/or animations described herein with reference to other methods described herein (e.g., methods  700 ,  800 ,  900 ,  1000 ,  1050 ,  1100 ,  1200 ,  1300 ,  1400 ,  1500 ,  1600 ,  1800 , and  1900 ). For brevity, these details are not repeated here. 
     The operations in the information processing methods described above are, optionally implemented by running one or more functional modules in information processing apparatus such as general purpose processors (e.g., as described above with respect to  FIGS. 1A and 3 ) or application specific chips. 
     The operations described above with reference to  FIGS. 6A-6L  are, optionally, implemented by components depicted in  FIGS. 1A-1B . For example, detection operation and drag operation are, optionally, implemented by event sorter  170 , event recognizer  180 , and event handler  190 . Event monitor  171  in event sorter  170  detects a contact on touch-sensitive display  112 , and event dispatcher module  174  delivers the event information to application  136 - 1 . A respective event recognizer  180  of application  136 - 1  compares the event information to respective event definitions  186 , and determines whether a first contact at a first location on the touch-sensitive surface (or whether rotation of the device) corresponds to a predefined event or sub-event, such as selection of an object on a user interface, or rotation of the device from one orientation to another. When a respective predefined event or sub-event is detected, event recognizer  180  activates an event handler  190  associated with the detection of the event or sub-event. Event handler  190  optionally uses or calls data updater  176  or object updater  177  to update the application internal state  192 . In some embodiments, event handler  190  accesses a respective GUI updater  178  to update what is displayed by the application. Similarly, it would be clear to a person having ordinary skill in the art how other processes can be implemented based on the components depicted in  FIGS. 1A-1B . 
       FIGS. 7A-7F  are flow diagrams illustrating a method  700  of navigating to a home screen user interface or a recently open application in response to a navigation gesture, in accordance with some embodiments. The method  700  is performed at an electronic device (e.g., device  300 ,  FIG. 3 , or portable multifunction device  100 ,  FIG. 1A ) with a display and a touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the electronic device includes one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the touch-sensitive surface and the display are integrated into a touch-sensitive display. In some embodiments, the display is a touch-screen display and the touch-sensitive surface is on or integrated with the display. In some embodiments, the display is separate from the touch-sensitive surface. Some operations in method  700  are, optionally, combined and/or the order of some operations is, optionally, changed. 
     Method  700  relates to transitioning from display of a first application to display of a second application or the home screen user interface in response to a swipe gesture that meets different directional conditions. Allowing the user to either to go to another application (e.g., a last displayed application) or the home screen depending on whether certain preset directional conditions are met enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     Method  700  is performed at a device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a touch-screen display that serves both as the display and the touch-sensitive surface) In some embodiments, the device does not have a home button (e.g., a mechanical button, a virtual button, a solid state button, etc.) that, when activated, is configured to dismiss a currently displayed user interface and replace the currently displayed user interface with a home screen that includes a plurality of application launch icons for a plurality of applications installed on the device). The device displays ( 702 ) a first user interface of a first application on the display (the first user interface is distinct from an application-switcher user interface or a home screen user interface). While displaying the first user interface of the first application on the display, the device detects ( 704 ) an input by a first contact, including detecting the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface, detecting first movement of the first contact across the touch-sensitive surface, and detecting liftoff of the first contact at an end of the first movement (e.g., detecting the first contact at an initial touch-down location that is within a predefined region of the device in proximity to the edge of the display (e.g., an edge region that includes a predefined portion (e.g., 20 pixel wide) of the display near the bottom edge of the device and optionally, a portion of the bottom edge of the display outside of the display)) (e.g., detecting the first portion of the input further includes detecting initial movement of the first contact (e.g., horizontal movement, arc movement, or vertical movement of the first contact across the touch-sensitive surface)) (e.g., detecting the first portion of the input further includes detecting liftoff of the first contact after the horizontal movement, arc movement, or vertical movement). In response to detecting the input by the first contact: in accordance with a determination that the input meets last-application-display criteria, wherein the last-application-display criteria require that the first movement meets a first directional condition (e.g., is, rightward, and substantially horizontal without any reverse movement) in order for the last-application-display criteria to be met (e.g., the last-application-display criteria require that the first movement is substantially horizontal relative to the bottom edge of the display and moving rightward immediately before lift-off of the first contact), the device displays ( 706 ) a second user interface of a second application that is distinct from the first application (e.g., the second application is the last application that the user had interacted with before having switched to the first application), the second user interface of the second application is displayed without first displaying the home screen user interface or the application-switcher user interface; and in accordance with a determination that the input meets home-display criteria, wherein the home-display criteria require that the first movement meets a second directional condition that is distinct from the first directional condition in order for the home-display criteria to be met (e.g., the home display criteria require that the first movement is substantially vertical relative to the bottom edge of the display and moving away from the bottom edge of the display immediately before lift-off of the first contact), the device displays a home screen user interface that includes a plurality of application launch icons that correspond to a plurality of applications installed on the device In some embodiments, the home screen user interface is displayed without displaying the second user interface of the second application. This is illustrated, for example, in FIGS.  5 A 19 - 5 A 25 , where an upward swipe gesture by contact  5040  that started from the bottom edge of the touch-screen causes display of the home screen user interface after the termination of the swipe gesture; and in FIGS.  5 A 34 - 5 A 36 , where a rightward swipe gesture by contact  5052  that started from the bottom edge of the display causes display of a recently displayed application (e.g., a web browser application) after the termination of the swipe gesture. 
     In some embodiments, the first contact is detected ( 708 ) within a predefined edge region of the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., detecting the first contact at an initial touch-down location that is within a predefined region of the device in proximity to the bottom edge of the display), and an initial portion of the first movement includes movement in a vertical direction (e.g., upward) and movement in a horizontal direction (e.g., rightward) relative to a predefined edge (e.g., bottom edge) of the touch-sensitive surface. This is illustrated, for example, in FIGS.  5 A 34 - 5 A 36 , where the rightward swipe gesture by contact  5052  includes an initial vertical upward component along with the horizontal rightward component. In some embodiments, the movement of contact  5040  in FIGS.  5 A 29 - 5 A 25  does not have to be completely vertical, and can include a small horizontal component along with the vertical component in order to cause display of the home screen user interface, as long as the movement of contact  5040  does not cause the position of card  5022  (e.g., actual or projected) to end up outside a predefined central region of the display (e.g., between 30 degrees and 150 degrees angle above the bottom edge of the touch-screen). In some embodiments, the initial portion of the first movement includes the movement in the vertical direction followed by the movement in the horizontal direction. In some embodiments, the initial portion of the first movement includes the movement in the vertical direction concurrent with the movement in the horizontal direction. Requiring an arc swipe gesture (e.g., a gesture with an initial portion of the first movement includes movement in a vertical direction and movement in a horizontal direction relative to a predefined edge of the touch-sensitive surface) that starts from a predefined region of the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., from a bottom edge region of the touch-sensitive surface) to go to either another application (e.g., a last displayed application) or the home screen enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by avoiding accidentally activating an operation, thereby reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device), which, additionally, reduce power usage and improve the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, in response to detecting the input by the first contact: in accordance with a determination that the input meets application-switcher-display criteria that are distinct from the home-display criteria and the last-application-display criteria, wherein the application-switcher-display criteria require that the first movement meets the second directional condition (e.g., first movement is upward) in order for the application-switcher-display criteria to be met, the device displays ( 710 ) an application-switcher user interface that includes a first application view that corresponds to the first user interface of the first application (e.g., a snapshot or live view of a current state of the first application) and a second application view that corresponds to a second user interface of a second application that is different from the first application (e.g., a snapshot or live view of a current state of the second application) (e.g., the second user interface is a user interface of a recently open application). This is illustrated, for example, in FIGS.  5 A 1 - 5 A 8 , where an upward swipe gesture by contact  5004  from the bottom edge of the touch-screen causes the application-switcher user interface to be displayed after the termination of the swipe gesture. In some embodiments, the application-switcher user interface includes the application views of three or more application views that correspond to different recently open applications. In some embodiments, recently open applications refer to applications with retained state information, such that when a recently open application is brought to the foreground and reactivated, it will resume functioning from its retained state. In contrast, a closed application does not have a retained state, and when the closed application is opened, it starts from a default start state. In some embodiments, the recently open applications are stored in an application stack in accordance with the order by which they were last displayed/accessed, e.g., with the currently displayed application at the top application in the application stack. In some embodiments, a representation of a control panel user interface is displayed on top of the application stack. Allowing the user to either to go to the home screen or the application-switcher user interface when the gesture meets the same directional condition enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device, and allowing the user to adjust an input to go to different user interfaces based on criteria other than direction of the input), which, additionally, reduce power usage and improve the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, the application-switcher-display criteria include ( 712 ) a first criterion that is met when the first movement includes a predefined pause (e.g., a reduction in speed of the first contact by a threshold amount within a threshold amount of time, or a reduction in speed of the first contact below a threshold speed while moving upward from the bottom edge) and the first contact makes less than a first threshold amount of movement after the predefined pause (e.g., lift-off of the first contact occurs immediately after the pause is detected). This is illustrated, for example, in FIGS.  5 A 1 - 5 A 8 , where the application-switcher user interface is displayed in response to an upward swipe gesture by contact  5004  that started from the bottom edge of the touch-screen; and in some embodiments, a predefined pause is required in the upward movement of contact  5004  in order for the upward swipe gesture to meet the application-switcher-display criteria and cause the device to display the application-switcher user interface after the termination of the swipe gesture. In some embodiments, if the first contact continues to move upward after the pause, the device displays the home screen user interface after lift-off of the first contact. When the gesture meets the same directional condition, allowing the user to either to go to the home screen or the application-switcher user interface based on whether a predefined pause is detected during the movement of the contact enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device, and allowing the user to adjust an input to go to different user interfaces based on criteria other than direction of the input), which, additionally, reduce power usage and improve the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, the application-switcher-display criteria include ( 714 ) a second criterion that is met when a predefined movement parameter of the first movement is in a first value range (e.g., the average or final speed of the first contact is less than a first threshold speed, and/or the final vertical position of the first contact is between one eighth of the screen height and three quarters of the screen height from the bottom edge of the display). The home-display criteria include a third criterion that is met when the predefined movement parameter of the first movement is in a second value range that is different from the first value range (e.g., the average or final speed of the first contact is greater than the first threshold speed, and/or the final vertical position below one eighth of the screen height or above three quarters of the screen height from the bottom edge of the display). For example, in some embodiments, a fast upward swipe causes the home screen to be displayed, while a slow upward swipe causes the application-switcher user interface to be displayed. In some embodiments, a short upward swipe and a long upward swipe cause the home screen displayed, while a medium length upward swipe causes the application-switcher user interface to be displayed. This is illustrated, for example, in  FIGS. 5A - 5 A 8 , where the application-switcher user interface is displayed in response to an upward swipe gesture by contact  5004  that started from the bottom edge of the touch-screen, and in FIGS.  5 A 19 - 5 A 25 , where the home screen user interface is displayed in response to an upward swipe gesture by contact  5046  that started from the bottom edge of the touch-screen; and in some embodiments, the device displays the application-switcher user interface when the lift-off of contact  5004  is detected within a medium height range of the display, and displays the home screen user interface when the lift-off of contact  5046  is detected below the medium height range or above the medium height range of the display. When the gesture meets the same directional condition, allowing the user to either to go to the home screen or the application-switcher user interface based on whether a predefined movement parameter of the input is in a first range or a second range enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device, and allowing the user to adjust an input to go to different user interfaces based on criteria other than direction of the input), which, additionally, reduce power usage and improve the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, the application-switcher-display criteria include ( 716 ) a criterion that is met when lateral movement and vertical movement of the first contact during the first movement (e.g., speed and curvature of the first movement) meet a first requirement (e.g., the first requirement is met when a ratio between the characteristic vertical speed (e.g., average speed or speed upon lift-off) and the characteristic horizontal speed (e.g., average speed or speed upon lift-off) of the first contact is within a first value range (e.g., greater than 0.7)). The last-application-display criteria include a criterion that is met when the lateral movement and the vertical movement of the first contact during the first movement meet a second requirement that is different from the first requirement (e.g., the second requirement is met when a ratio between the characteristic vertical speed and the characteristic horizontal speed of the first contact is within a second value range (e.g., less than or equal to 0.7)). For example, a swipe gesture in a direction that is more than a 30 degree angle above the bottom edge of the touch-screen leads to display of the application-switcher user interface, while a swipe gesture in a direction that is less than a 30 degree angle above the bottom edge of the touch-screen leads to display of a previous application (e.g., the second user interface of the second application). In some embodiments, an up-and-right arc swipe gesture that includes a downward movement immediately before lift-off of the first contact causes display of the previous application if the direction of the movement before lift-off is less than a 30 degree angle below the bottom edge of the display; and the device redisplays the first user interface, if the movement before lift-off is more than a 30 degree angle below the bottom edge of the display. This is illustrated, for example, in FIGS.  5 A 1 - 5 A 8 , where the application-switcher user interface is displayed in response to an upward swipe gesture by contact  5004  that started from the bottom edge of the touch-screen, and in FIGS.  5 A 34 - 5 A 36 , where a recently open application is displayed in response to a rightward swipe gesture by contact  5052  that also has an upward component that started from the bottom edge of the touch-screen; and in some embodiments, the device displays the application-switcher user interface when a ratio between the characteristic vertical speed of contact  5052  and the characteristic horizontal speed of contact  5052  is less than or equal to 0.7, and displays the recently open application when the ratio is greater than 0.7 for example. lift-off of contact  5046  is detected below the medium height range or above the medium height range of the display. Allowing the user to either to go to the last application or the application-switcher user interface based on relative curvature of the movement and/or speed of the movement in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device, and allowing the user to adjust an input to go to different user interfaces after the input has been started), which, additionally, reduce power usage and improve the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, before displaying the application-switcher user interface, the device displays ( 718 ) the first application view (e.g., among a plurality of application views including the second application view for the second application) in accordance with a determination that the first movement meets the second directional condition (e.g., the first movement includes upward movement). The device moves the first application view in accordance with movement of the first movement of the first contact (e.g., the first application view is dragged across the display in accordance with the first movement of the first contact). This is illustrated, for example, in FIGS.  5 A 2 - 5 A 5 , where first application view (e.g., card  5010 ) is displayed in response to the upward movement of contact  5004 . In some embodiments, concurrently with the first application view, the device displays a second application view corresponding to the second application and a control panel view corresponding to a control panel user interface. This is illustrated, for example, in FIGS.  5 A 6 , where, in response to detecting the upward movement of contact  5004 , a second application view (e.g., card  5014 ) and control panel view (e.g., card  5016 ) are displayed concurrently with the first application view (e.g., card  5012 ) before the application-switcher user interface is displayed in FIGS.  5 A 7  and  5 A 8 . In some embodiments, when the upward movement of the first contact continues, the application views and the control panel view shrink in accordance with the current positions of the application views and the control panel view; and when the home-display criteria are met, an animation is displayed showing the application views move toward and morph into their respective application icons on the home screen user interface. Displaying the first application view and moving the first application view in accordance with the movement of the contact before the application-switcher-display criteria are met enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by providing real-time information about the internal state of the device, and helping the user to achieve a desired outcome with the required inputs, and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, the application-switcher-display criteria include ( 720 ) a criterion that is met when a predefined projected position of the first application view (e.g., projected position of the bottom center of the first application view) after lift-off of the first contact (e.g., the projected position is calculated in accordance with speed and position of the first application view at lift-off of the first contact) is in a first predefined region of the display (e.g., a line linking the initial position of the first application view and the projected position of the first application view 150 ms after lift-off of the first contact is greater than 30 degrees and less than 150 degrees above the bottom edge of the display). The last-application-display criteria include a criterion that is met when the predefined projected position of the first application view after lift-off of the first contact is in a second predefined region of the display that is distinct from the first predefined region (e.g., a line linking the initial position of the first application view and the projected position of the first application view 150 ms after lift-off of the first contact is greater than 150 degrees above the bottom edge of the display (e.g., the projected position is in the lower right portion of the display)). For example, the first contact drags the first application view in accordance with the first contact&#39;s speed and trajectory before lift-off of the first contact, and the first application view acquires different starting positions and different starting momenta at the lift-off of the first contact depending on the differences in speed and trajectory during the different types of movement that were made by the first contact. Therefore, in some embodiments, the projected position of the first application view depends on both the final position and the final speed of the first application view at lift-off of the first contact, and optionally, momentum accumulated during the course of the movement of the first contact. Therefore, in some embodiments, different movement patterns of the first contact optionally leads to display of the application-switcher user interface, or the previous application, depending on the projected position of the first application view. This is illustrated, for example, in FIGS.  5 A 1 - 5 A 8 , where the application-switcher user interface is displayed after lift-off of contact  5004 ; and in some embodiments, the application-switcher user interface is displayed in accordance with a determination that the projected position of card  5010  is within a first predefined region on the display (e.g., a line linking the initial position of card  5010  and the projected position of card  5010  150 ms after lift-off of contact  5004  is greater than 30 degrees and less than 150 degrees above the bottom edge of the display). This is further illustrated, for example, in FIGS.  5 A 34 - 5 A 36 , where a recently open application (e.g., the web browser application) is displayed after lift-off of contact  5052 ; and in some embodiments, the recently open application is displayed in accordance with a determination that the projected position of card  5022  is within a second predefined region on the display (e.g., a line linking the initial position of the card  5022  and the projected position of card  5022  150 ms after lift-off of the contact  5052  is greater than 150 degrees above the bottom edge of the display (e.g., the projected position is in the lower right portion of the display). Displaying either the last application or the application-switcher user interface based on a projected position of the first application view after lift-off of the contact enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by taking into account of the cumulated momentum and position and speed of the first application view at lift-off of the first contact, thereby providing a more responsive user interface and less stringent requirement for achieving a desired outcome), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, in response to detecting the input by the first contact: in accordance with a determination that the input meets control-panel-display criteria, wherein the control-panel-display criteria include a criterion that is met when the first movement meets a third directional condition that is different from the first directional condition and the second directional condition (e.g., the third directional condition requires the first movement to be leftward, and substantially horizontal without any reverse movement) in order for the third directional condition to be met, the device displays ( 722 ) a control panel user interface that includes a plurality of controls that correspond to a plurality of system functions of the device (e.g., a control panel user interface with controls for network connections, display brightness, audio playback, peripheral devices, etc.). This is illustrated, for example, in FIGS.  5 A 58 - 5 A 60 , where, in response to a leftward swipe gesture by contact  5074  that started from the bottom edge of the touch-screen, the control panel user interface is displayed after lift-off of contact  5074 . Displaying the control panel user interface, or the home screen user interface, or the last application based on the swipe gesture meeting different directional conditions enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by reducing the number of steps needed to achieve a desired outcome, and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, the control-panel-display criteria include ( 724 ) a criterion that is met when the predefined projected position of the first application view (e.g., projected position of the bottom center of the first application view) after lift-off of the first contact (e.g., the projected position is calculated in accordance with speed and position of the first application view at lift-off of the first contact) is in a third predefined region of the display that is distinct from the first predefined region and the second predefined region (e.g., a line linking the initial position of the first application view and the projected position of the first application view 150 ms after lift-off of the first contact is less than 30 degrees above the bottom edge of the display (e.g., the projected position is in the lower left portion of the display)). Displaying the control panel user interface, or the home screen user interface, or the last application based on the projected position of the first application view being within different predefined regions on the display enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by taking into account of the cumulated momentum and position and speed of the first application view at lift-off of the first contact, thereby providing a more responsive user interface and less stringent requirement for achieving a desired outcome), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, while displaying the second user interface of the second application in response to detecting the input by the first contact, the device detects ( 726 ) a second input by a second contact, including detecting the second contact on the touch-sensitive surface, detecting second movement of the second contact across the touch-sensitive surface, and detecting liftoff of the second contact at an end of the second movement. In response to detecting the second input: in accordance with a determination that the second input meets the last-application-display criteria, the device redisplays the first user interface or displays a third user interface of a third application that is distinct from the first application and the second application. This is illustrated, for example, in FIGS.  5 A 40 - 5 A 45 , two consecutive rightward swipe gestures in the bottom edge region causes the device to switch from a currently displayed application (e.g., the web browser application) to a last displayed application (e.g., the email application in FIG.  5 A 43 ), and then to another application (e.g., the messages application in FIG.  5 A 45 ) that is displayed before the last displayed application. In some embodiments, if the second rightward swipe gesture is detected after a threshold amount of time of the first rightward swipe gesture, the application stack is resorted, and the initially displayed application (e.g., the web browser application) is redisplayed in response to the second rightward swipe gesture. In some embodiments, in response to multiple consecutive horizontal swipes near the bottom edge of the touch-screen, the device displays the next applications in the application stack one by one. Switching to a different user interface in an application stack in response to a swipe gesture that meets the last-application-display criteria enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by reducing the number of steps needed to achieve a desired outcome), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that resorting criteria are met, wherein the resorting criteria include a criterion that is met when a threshold amount of time has elapsed between detection of the second contact and lift-off of the first contact, the first user interface is redisplayed ( 728 ) in response to the second input. For example, after the application stack is resorted, the second application becomes the top application, and the first application is below the second application in the application stack, so when the last-application-display criteria are met by the second input, the first application is redisplayed. In accordance with a determination that the resorting criteria are not met, the third user interface is displayed in response to the second input. For example, when the application stack is not resorted, the first application remains the top application, and the second application is below the first application in the application stack, so when the last-application-display criteria are met by the second input, a third application that is below the second application in the application stack is displayed. This is illustrated, for example, in FIGS.  5 A 40 - 5 A 45 , two consecutive rightward swipe gestures in the bottom edge region causes the device to switch from a currently displayed application (e.g., the web browser application) to a last displayed application (e.g., the email application in FIG.  5 A 43 ), and then to another application (e.g., the messages application in FIG.  5 A 45 ) that is displayed before the last displayed application. In some embodiments, if the second rightward swipe gesture is detected after a threshold amount of time of the first rightward swipe gesture, the application stack is resorted, and the initially displayed application (e.g., the web browser application) is redisplayed in response to the second rightward swipe gesture. Allowing resorting of the applications in the application stack during multiple consecutive swipe gestures enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by reducing the number of steps needed to return to a previous user interface of the user&#39;s choice based on whether a pause is detected between two consecutive swipe gestures), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments. in response to detecting the second input: in accordance with a determination that the second movement meets a third directional condition that is a reverse of the first directional condition (e.g., the second movement is leftward, and substantially horizontal without any reversal movement): in accordance with a determination that the resorting criteria are met, the device displays ( 730 ) a control panel user interface that includes a plurality of controls that correspond to a plurality of system functions of the device (e.g., a control panel user interface with controls for network connections, display brightness, audio playback, peripheral devices, etc.). For example, when the application stack is resorted, the second application becomes the top application in the application stack; and when a reverse horizontal swipe is detected, the control panel user interface is displayed. In response to detecting the second input and in accordance with a determination that the second movement meets the third directional condition that is a reverse of the first directional condition, in accordance with a determination that the resorting criteria are not met, the device redisplays the first user interface. For example, when the application stack is not resorted, the second application remains below the first application in the application stack; and when a reverse swipe is detected, the first user interface is redisplayed. This is illustrated, for example, in FIGS.  5 A 43 - 5 A 48 , where an initial rightward swipe by contact  5064  causes the device to switch from the email application to the messages application (e.g., in FIG.  5 A 53 - 5 A 55 ), and a leftward swipe by contact  5065  following the initial rightward swipe by contact  5064  causes the device to return to the email application (e.g., in FIGS.  5 A 46 - 5 A 48 ). This is further illustrated, for example, in FIGS.  5 A 49 - 5 A 51  and  5 A 57 - 5 A 59 , where an initial rightward swipe by contact  5069  causes the device to switch from the email application to the messages application, and a leftward swipe by contact  5074  causes the device to switch from the message application to the control panel user interface. Allowing resorting of the applications in the application stack during multiple consecutive swipe gestures, and displaying different user interfaces based on whether a pause has been detected between two consecutive swipe gestures enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by reducing the number of steps needed to return to a previous user interface or to go to the control panel user interface), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, in response to detecting the first movement by the first contact: the device concurrently displays ( 732 ) at least a portion of the first user interface and a portion of the second user interface in a first display layer during at least a portion of the first movement of the first contact; and the device displays the home screen user interface in a second display layer that is below the first display layer. For example, in response to a rightward swipe input or an up-and-right arc swipe near the bottom edge of the touch-screen, the first user interface shifts rightward, and the second user interface slides in from the left. In some embodiments, a portion of the home screen user interface is visible between a gap between the first user interface and the second user interface, as the first user interface and the second user interface slide rightward on the display in accordance with the movement of the first contact across the touch-sensitive surface. This is illustrated, for example, in FIGS.  5 A 35  and  5 A 41 , where home screen user interface is displayed in a layer underlying card  5010  and  5022 . Displaying the home screen user interface as a background layer below two application user interfaces enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by providing visual feedback to inform the user of the internal state of the device, and reducing user mistakes when operating the device), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, while displaying the second user interface of the second application in response to detecting the input by the first contact, the device detects ( 734 ) a third input by a third contact, including detecting the third contact on the touch-sensitive surface, detecting third movement of the third contact across the touch-sensitive surface, and detecting liftoff of the third contact at an end of the third movement. In response to detecting the third input: in accordance with a determination that the first user interface is of a first orientation (e.g., portrait orientation) and the second user interface is of a second orientation (e.g., landscape orientation) that is different from the first orientation, and that the third movement meet modified-last-application-display criteria, wherein the modified-last-application-display criteria require that the third movement meets either the first directional condition or a reversed second directional condition (e.g., the third input is either a rightward, horizontal swipe near the bottom edge of the display, or a downward swipe near the left edge of the display that corresponds to a swipe along an edge of the touch-sensitive display that corresponds to a bottom of the application in the landscape orientation)) in order for the modified-last-application-display criteria to be met: the device displays a user interface for a respective application that is below the second application in an application stack of the device. For example, when a change in user interface orientation in detected when the user is swiping through the stack of open applications, the device allows the user to continue to use swipes in the same direction to switch to the next applications in the application stack, or use a swipe that is a “true” rightward swipe in relation to the orientation of the currently displayed user interface to switch to the next application in the application stack. Allowing the last-application-display criteria to be met based on multiple alternative directional conditions when there is a switch of user interface orientation during an application-switching process enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by reducing the number of steps needed to return to a previous user interface of the user&#39;s choice, and allowing the user to achieve a desired outcome with required inputs in a faster or more convenient manner), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, in response to detecting the third input: in accordance with a determination that the first user interface is of the first orientation (e.g., portrait orientation) and the second user interface is of the second orientation (e.g., landscape orientation) that is different from the first orientation, and that the third movement meet modified-home-display criteria, wherein the modified-home-display criteria require that the third movement meet either the first directional condition or the second directional condition (e.g., the third input is either a rightward, horizontal swipe across the middle of the display (e.g., a swipe that starts from an edge that corresponds to a bottom of the application in the landscape orientation), or an upward swipe from the bottom edge of the display) in order for the modified-home-display criteria to be met: the device displays ( 736 ) the home screen user interface. For example, when a change in user interface orientation in detected when the user is swiping through the stack of open applications, the device allows the user to swipe “up” to go to the home screen both relative to the orientation of the first user interface and relative to the orientation of the currently displayed user interface. Allowing the home-display criteria to be met based on multiple alternative directional conditions when there is a switch of user interface orientation during an application-switching process enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by reducing the number of steps needed to return to the home screen, and allowing the user to achieve a desired outcome with required inputs in a faster or more convenient manner), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, the device forgoes ( 738 ) applying the modified-last-application-display criteria and the modified-home-display criteria to the third input in accordance with a determination that the third input is detected after a threshold amount of time of termination of the first input. For example, the modified-last-application-display criteria and the modified-home-display criteria are only temporarily used for a short period of time after the change in user interface orientation is detected. After the short period of time, the “bottom edge” of the display is redefined based on the orientation of the currently displayed user interface, and the first directional condition in the last-application-display criteria and the second directional condition in the home-display criteria are based on the newly defined “bottom edge”. Making the alternative directional conditions only temporary after there is a switch of user interface orientation during an application-switching process enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by making the user interface response more consistent and reducing user mistakes when operating the device), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     It should be understood that the particular order in which the operations in  FIGS. 7A-7F  have been described is merely an example and is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations could be performed. One of ordinary skill in the art would recognize various ways to reorder the operations described herein. Additionally, it should be noted that details of other processes described herein with respect to other methods described herein (e.g., methods  600 ,  800 ,  900 ,  1000 ,  1050 ,  1100 ,  1200 ,  1300 ,  1400 ,  1500 ,  1600 ,  1800 , and  1900 ) are also applicable in an analogous manner to method  700  described above with respect to  FIGS. 7A-7F . For example, the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, application views, control panels, controls, position thresholds, directional conditions, navigation criteria, movement parameters, thresholds, determinations, focus selectors, and/or animations described above with reference to method  700  optionally have one or more of the characteristics of the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, application views, control panels, controls, position thresholds, directional conditions, navigation criteria, movement parameters, thresholds, determinations, focus selectors, and/or animations described herein with reference to other methods described herein (e.g., methods  600 ,  800 ,  900 ,  1000 ,  1050 ,  1100 ,  1200 ,  1300 ,  1400 ,  1500 ,  1600 ,  1800 , and  1900 ). For brevity, these details are not repeated here. 
     The operations in the information processing methods described above are, optionally implemented by running one or more functional modules in information processing apparatus such as general purpose processors (e.g., as described above with respect to  FIGS. 1A and 3 ) or application specific chips. 
     The operations described above with reference to  FIGS. 7A-7F  are, optionally, implemented by components depicted in  FIGS. 1A-1B . For example, detection operation  704  and display operation  706  are, optionally, implemented by event sorter  170 , event recognizer  180 , and event handler  190 . Event monitor  171  in event sorter  170  detects a contact on touch-sensitive display  112 , and event dispatcher module  174  delivers the event information to application  136 - 1 . A respective event recognizer  180  of application  136 - 1  compares the event information to respective event definitions  186 , and determines whether a first contact at a first location on the touch-sensitive surface (or whether rotation of the device) corresponds to a predefined event or sub-event, such as selection of an object on a user interface, or rotation of the device from one orientation to another. When a respective predefined event or sub-event is detected, event recognizer  180  activates an event handler  190  associated with the detection of the event or sub-event. Event handler  190  optionally uses or calls data updater  176  or object updater  177  to update the application internal state  192 . In some embodiments, event handler  190  accesses a respective GUI updater  178  to update what is displayed by the application. Similarly, it would be clear to a person having ordinary skill in the art how other processes can be implemented based on the components depicted in  FIGS. 1A-1B . 
       FIGS. 8A-8E  are flow diagrams illustrating a method  800  of navigating to a control panel user interface or a recently open application in response to a navigation gesture, in accordance with some embodiments. The method  800  is performed at an electronic device (e.g., device  300 ,  FIG. 3 , or portable multifunction device  100 ,  FIG. 1A ) with a display and a touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the electronic device includes one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the touch-sensitive surface and the display are integrated into a touch-sensitive display. In some embodiments, the display is a touch-screen display and the touch-sensitive surface is on or integrated with the display. In some embodiments, the display is separate from the touch-sensitive surface. Some operations in method  800  are, optionally, combined and/or the order of some operations is, optionally, changed. 
     Method  800  relates to transitioning from display of a first application to display of a second application or the control panel user interface in response to a swipe gesture that meets different directional conditions and the edge-swipe criteria. In addition, the device performs an operation within the application if the swipe gesture does not meet the edge-swipe criteria. Allowing the user to either to go to another application (e.g., a last displayed application) or the control panel user interface, or to perform an operation within the application depending on whether certain preset directional conditions and edge-swipe criteria are met enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     Method  800  is performed at a device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a touch-screen display that serves both as the display and the touch-sensitive surface). In some embodiments, the device does not have a home button (e.g., a mechanical button, a virtual button, a solid state button, etc.) that, when activated, is configured to dismiss a currently displayed user interface and replace the currently displayed user interface with a home screen that includes a plurality of application launch icons for a plurality of applications installed on the device. The device displays ( 802 ) a first user interface of a first application on the display (the first user interface is distinct from an application-switcher user interface or a home screen user interface). While displaying the first user interface of the first application on the display, the device detects ( 804 ) an input by a first contact, including detecting the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface, detecting first movement of the first contact across the touch-sensitive surface, and detecting liftoff of the first contact at an end of the first movement (e.g., detecting the first contact at an initial touch-down location that is within a predefined region of the device in proximity to the edge of the display (e.g., an edge region that includes a predefined small portion (e.g., 20 pixel wide) of the display near the bottom edge of the device and optionally, a portion of the bottom edge of the display outside of the display)) (e.g., detecting initial movement of the first contact (e.g., horizontal movement, arc movement, or vertical movement of the first contact across the touch-sensitive surface)) (e.g., detecting liftoff of the first contact after the horizontal movement, arc movement, or vertical movement). In response to detecting the input by the first contact: in accordance with a determination that the input meets edge-swipe criteria (e.g., the edge swipe criteria require that the first movement is within a predefined edge region that is proximate to a bottom edge of the display) and that the first movement meets a first directional condition (e.g., the first directional condition requires that the first movement is substantially horizontal relative to the bottom edge of the display and moving rightward immediately before lift-off of the first contact), the device displays ( 806 ) a second user interface of a second application that is distinct from the first application (e.g., the first user interface of the first application ceases to be displayed on the display); in accordance with a determination that the input meets the edge-swipe criteria and that the first movement meets a second directional condition that is distinct from the first directional condition (e.g., the second directional condition requires that the first movement is substantially horizontal relative to the bottom edge of the display and moving leftward immediately before lift-off of the first contact), the device displays a control panel user interface that includes a plurality of controls that correspond to a plurality of system functions of the device (e.g., a control panel user interface with controls for network connections, display brightness, audio playback, peripheral devices, etc.). In some embodiments, the control panel user interface is overlaid on the first user interface of the first application. In response to detecting the input by the third contact and in accordance with a determination that the input does not meet the edge-swipe criteria: the device forgoes displaying the second user interface of the second application; the device forgoes displaying the control panel user interface; and the device performs a function within the first application in accordance with the first movement of the first contact (e.g., scrolling the first user interface, or dragging an object within the first user interface, or revealing a hidden object in the first user interface, switching to a new user interface within the first application, etc., with the movement of the first contact). This is illustrated, for example, in FIGS.  5 A 34 - 5 A 36 , where a rightward swipe in the bottom edge region of the touch-screen by contact  5052  causes a current displayed application (e.g., user interface of the email application) to switch to a last displayed application (e.g., a web browser application). This is further illustrated in FIGS.  5 A 31 - 5 A 36 , where a swipe gesture across email preview  5049 - e  causes the corresponding email and email preview to marked as read, for example. This is further illustrated in FIGS.  5 A 57 - 5 A 59 , where a leftward swipe in the bottom edge region of the touch-screen by contact  5074  causes a control panel user interface to be overlaid on top of a currently displayed application (e.g., user interface of a messages application), for example. 
     In some embodiments, performing a function within the first application in accordance with the first movement of the first contact includes ( 808 ): in accordance with a determination that the first movement is in a first direction, performing a first function (e.g., the first function is scrolling upward, when the first movement is in an upward direction; or the first function is archiving or deleting a message, when the first movement is a rightward swipe on the message); and in accordance with a determination that the first movement is in a second direction that is distinct from the first function, performing a second function that is distinct from the second function (e.g., the second function is scrolling downward, when the first movement is in a downward direction; or the second function is marking the message as unread or displaying a menu of selectable options related to the message, when the first movement is a leftward swipe on the message). This is illustrated, for example, in FIGS.  5 A 31 - 5 A 36 , where a rightward swipe gesture across email preview  5049 - e  causes the corresponding email and email preview to marked as read, for example. A different function would be performed (e.g., deletion) if the swipe gesture were leftward. Performing different operations within the application depending on the direction of the swipe gesture enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by providing additional functions without cluttering up the display with additional controls, and reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, the edge swipe criteria require ( 810 ) that, prior to the first movement of the first contact that meet either the first directional condition or the second directional condition: the first contact is detected within a predefined edge region of the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., detecting the first contact at an initial touch-down location that is within a predefined region of the device in proximity to the bottom edge of the display); and an initial movement of the first contact meets a third directional condition that is different from the first directional condition and the second directional condition (e.g., the third directional condition requires that the first contact moves upward (e.g., moving upward beyond the predefined edge region of the touch-sensitive surface) after being detected in the predefined edge region of the touch-sensitive surface) in order for the edge swipe criteria to be met. This is further illustrated in FIGS.  5 A 34 - 5 A 35  and  5 A 58 - 5 A 59 , where the swipe gestures by contacts  5060  and  5074  include a upward component in addition to the leftward or rightward component, for example. In some embodiments, the edge swipe criteria are met when the device detects an upward swipe that starts from the bottom edge of the touch-screen and continues leftward or rightward across the touch-screen before liftoff of the first contact (e.g., the movement of the first contact forming the first half of an arc). In some embodiments, the edge swipe criteria are met when the device detects an upward swipe that starts from the bottom edge region of the touch-screen and continues leftward or rightward across the touch-screen, and then returns to the bottom edge region of the touch-screen before lift-off of the first contact (e.g., the movement of the first contact forming an arc). Requiring an initial portion of the swipe gesture to meet a third directional condition for the swipe gesture to meet edge-swipe criteria, and then meet the first or second directional condition to display either a last application or the control panel user interface enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by avoiding accidentally triggering the display of the last application or the control panel user interface, and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, the edge swipe criteria include ( 812 ) a criterion that is met when the first contact reaches a first threshold position on the touch-sensitive surface during the first movement (e.g., an upward movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to an upward movement of a focus selector on the display by one quarter of the height of the display). For example, in some embodiments, the edge swipe criteria are met when the first contact slowly moves upward (with or without simultaneous lateral movement) from the bottom edge of the touch-screen to at least one quarter of the height of the touch-screen from the bottom edge and then lift-off with or without an upward speed. This is illustrated, for example, in FIGS.  5 A 37 - 5 A 39 , where navigation to a last application or the control panel user interface did not occur, and the currently displayed user interface remains displayed at the end of the gesture by contact  5056  because contact  5056  did not reach a threshold position on the touch-screen  112  and there was not enough lateral speed to meet other alternative criteria for displaying the last application or the control panel user interface. Requiring an initial portion of the swipe gesture to reach a threshold position for the swipe gesture to meet edge-swipe criteria, and then meet the first or second directional condition to display either a last application or the control panel user interface enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by avoiding accidentally triggering the display of the last application or the control panel user interface, and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, the device displays ( 814 ) a first application view that corresponds to the first user interface (e.g., displaying a reduced scale image of the first user interface as a card overlaid on a background user interface (e.g., a home screen user interface)) in response to detecting an initial portion of the first movement of the first contact. The device changes a characteristic position of the first application view (e.g., the bottom center of the card that represents the first user interface) in accordance with the initial portion of the first movement of the first contact (e.g., dynamically adjusting an overall size of the card and an overall position of the card in accordance with the vertical location of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., the overall size and position of the card is adjusted based on a number of factors, one of which is the position and velocity of the contact)). This is illustrated, for example, in FIGS.  5 A 34 - 5 A 35 , where card  5022  is a reduced scale image of the currently displayed user interface of the email application, and the device changes the position and size of card  5022  in accordance with the movement of contact  5052 . Displaying a first application view and dynamically changing the appearance of the first application view during an initial portion of the swipe gesture enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by providing information about the internal state of the device, helping the user to achieve a desired outcome with required inputs, and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, the edge swipe criteria include ( 816 ) a criterion that is met when a projected position of the first application view after liftoff of the first contact reaches a second threshold position on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., the projected position of the card representing the first user interface at 150 ms after liftoff of the first contact is at least one quarter of the height of the display above the bottom edge of the display). For example, in some embodiments, after lift-off of the first contact is detected, the device calculates a projected position of the card that has been dragged by the first contact upward 150 ms into the future using a characteristic speed of the contact (or a characteristic speed of the card itself). If the projected position of the card at 150 ms after lift-off of the first contact is above one quarter of the display height from the bottom edge of the display, the edge swipe criteria are considered met. This is illustrated, for example, in FIG.  5 A 34 - 5 A 36 , where projected position of card  5022  after lift-off of contact  5052  meets predefined threshold position, and in some embodiments, switching to the browser application is completed after lift-off of contact  5052  is detected based on the projected position of card  5022 . Allowing the edge-swipe criteria to be met based on a projected position of the first application view enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by taking into account cumulated momentum of the first application view, and the final position and speed of the first application view at lift-off of the contact, thereby providing a more responsive user interface), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, the edge swipe criteria include ( 818 ) a criterion that is met when a movement speed of the first application view (or a representative portion of the first application view such as a bottom edge, a top edge, a center or some other portion of the first application view) in a first direction (e.g., horizontal speed) at lift-off of the first contact exceeds a first threshold speed (e.g., a threshold horizontal speed that is dynamically calculated based on the vertical speed of the first user interface object) on the display (e.g., the upward speed and/or the sideway speed of the card representing the first user interface at lift-off of the first contact each meet a respective threshold speed requirement). This is illustrated, for example, in FIG.  5 A 34 - 5 A 36 , where velocity of card  5022  at lift-off of contact  5052  meets predefined threshold speed, and in some embodiments, switching to the browser application is completed after lift-off of contact  5052  is detected based on the velocity of card  5022  at lift-off of contact  5052 . In some embodiments, upon detecting lift-off of the first contact, the device determines a current velocity of the card representing the first user interface. If the horizontal speed of the card is sufficiently great relative to the upward speed of the card, and the upward speed of the card does not exceed a predefined threshold speed (e.g., the card will end up in a lower side region of the display according to projection calculated based on the card&#39;s speed at lift-off of the contact), the edge swipe criteria are considered met. Allowing the edge-swipe criteria to be met based on a movement speed of the first application view at lift-off of the first contact enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by taking into account cumulated momentum of the first application view at lift-off of the contact, thereby providing a more responsive user interface), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, the device displays ( 820 ) a second application view that corresponds to the second user interface (e.g., displaying a reduced scale image of the second user interface as a card overlaid on a background user interface (e.g., a home screen user interface)) in response to detecting the initial portion of the first movement of the first contact. The device changes a representative portion of the second user interface object (e.g., a bottom edge, a top edge, a center or some other portion of the second user interface object) in accordance with the initial portion of the first movement of the first contact (e.g., dynamically adjusting an overall size of the card and an overall position of the card in accordance with the vertical location of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., the overall size and position of the card is adjusted based on a number of factors, one of which is the position and velocity of the contact)). This is illustrated, for example, in FIGS.  5 A 40 - 5 A 41 , where the location and size of card  5022  (e.g., a reduced scale representation of a user interface of the email application) changes in accordance with the movement of contact  5060 , as do the location and size of card  5010  (e.g., a reduced scale representation of a user interface of the web browser application). Displaying multiple application views during the initial portion of the swipe gesture and changing the appearance of the multiple application views based on the initial portion of the swipe gesture enhance the operability of the device and make the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by providing information regarding the internal state of the device, helping the user to achieve a desired outcome with required inputs, and reducing user mistakes when operating the device), which, additionally, reduce power usage and improve the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, the edge swipe criteria include ( 822 ) a criterion that is met when a characteristic speed of the first contact in a second direction (e.g., an upward speed of the contact immediately prior to lift-off of the first contact) does not exceed a second threshold speed. For example, in some embodiments, the edge swipe criteria are met when the swipe gesture by the first contact is not a quick upward swipe. This is illustrated, for example, in FIG.  5 A 34 - 5 A 36 , where a characteristic upward speed of contact  5052  does not exceed a predefined threshold speed (e.g., the swipe is not a fast upward swipe), and in some embodiments, switching to the browser application is completed after lift-off of contact  5052  is detected based on the characteristic upward speed of contact  5052  being less than the threshold speed. Requiring that the characteristic speed of the first contact in the second direction does not exceed a predefined threshold speed enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by reserving the gesture with fast speed for other functions (e.g., display the application-switcher user interface or the home screen), and reducing user mistakes when operating the device), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, the edge swipe criteria include ( 824 ) a criterion that is met when a characteristic speed of the first contact in the first direction (e.g., a sideway speed of the contact immediately prior to lift-off of the first contact) exceeds a third threshold speed. For example, in some embodiments, the edge swipe criteria are met when the swipe gesture by the first contact is a quick sideway swipe. This is illustrated, for example, in FIG.  5 A 34 - 5 A 36 , where a characteristic rightward speed of contact  5052  meets predefined threshold speed (e.g., the swipe is a fast rightward swipe), and in some embodiments, switching to the browser application is completed after lift-off of contact  5052  is detected based on the characteristic rightward speed of contact  5052 . Allowing the edge swipe criteria to be met when the characteristic speed of the first contact exceeds a predefined threshold speed enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by reducing the number of steps required to achieve a desired outcome, and providing a faster and easier way to achieve a desired outcome), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, in response to detecting the input by the first contact: in accordance with a determination that the first movement of the first contact includes a pause (e.g., as indicated by a reduction of upward speed to below a threshold speed during the first movement that includes less than a threshold amount of movement for at least a threshold amount of time) before the first contact reaches a threshold position on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., corresponding to a position of a focus selector at three quarters of the display height above the bottom edge of the display), the device displays ( 826 ) an application-switcher user interface (e.g., also referred to as a multitasking user interface) that includes a representation of the first user interface and respective representations of one or more other open applications (e.g., a multitasking user interface that includes a plurality of cards that are reduced scale images of the last seen user interfaces of different open applications). This is illustrated, for example, in FIGS.  5 A 1 - 5 A 8 , where the application-switcher user interface is displayed after the upward swipe gesture by contact  5004 , and in some embodiments, the application-switcher user interface is displayed because the upward movement of contact  5004  included a predefined pause. Displaying an application-switcher user interface when a pause is detected before the first contact reaches a threshold position on the touch-sensitive surface enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by reducing the number of steps required to achieve a desired outcome), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, while displaying the second user interface of the second application in response to the input by the first contact (e.g., displaying the user interface of a last active application in an open application stack in response to a rightward edge swipe), the device detects ( 828 ) a second input by a second contact, including detecting the second contact on the touch-sensitive surface, detecting second movement of the second contact across the touch-sensitive surface, and detecting liftoff of the second contact at an end of the second movement, wherein the second input meets the edge-swipe criteria. In response to detecting the second input by the second contact that meets the edge-swipe criteria: in accordance with a determination that the second movement meets the second directional condition (e.g., the second contact moves leftward across the touch-screen): in accordance with a determination that the second input is detected more than a threshold amount of time after termination of the input by the first contact (e.g., the second contact is detected more than a threshold amount of time after the liftoff of the first contact), the device displays the control panel user interface that includes a plurality of controls that correspond to a plurality of system functions of the device. This is illustrated, for example, in FIGS.  5 A 57 - 5 A 59 , where after a threshold amount of time has elapsed since a previous rightward edge swipe gesture has caused switching from the email application to the messages application (e.g., in FIG.  5 A 48 - 5 A 51 ), the application stack is resorted, and a leftward edge swipe gesture by contact  5074  causes the messages application to switch to the control panel user interface. For example, after a pause between the first input and the second input, the open application stack is resorted and the second application is moved to the top of the stack above the first application, and the device replaces display of the second user interface of the second application with the control panel user interface in response to the second put. In response to detecting the second input by the second contact that meets the second directional condition and in accordance with a determination that the second movement meets the second directional condition, in accordance with a determination that the second input is detected no more than the threshold amount of time after the termination of the input by the first contact (e.g., the second contact is detected less than the threshold amount of time after the liftoff of the first contact), the device redisplays the first user interface of the first application. For example, if there is not a sufficient amount of pause between the first input and the second input, the open application stack is not resorted, and the first application remains at the top of the stack above the second application, and the device replaces display of the second user interface of the second application with the first user interface of the first application in response to the second input. This is illustrated, for example, in FIGS.  5 A 43 - 5 A 48 , where after a rightward edge swipe gesture by contact  5064  that caused the device to switch from the email application to the messages application, a leftward edge swipe gesture by contact  5065  is detected before the threshold amount of time has elapsed. In response to the leftward edge swipe gesture by contact  5065 , the device switches back to the email application because the application stack has not been resorted. Allowing resorting of the application stack during multiple consecutive edge swipe gestures that meet the first or second directional conditions enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by reducing the number of steps required to achieve a desired outcome, and providing a faster and easier way to achieve a desired outcome), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, in response to detecting the input by the first contact: in accordance with a determination that the input meets home-display criteria, wherein the home-display criteria require that the first movement meets a third directional condition (e.g., the first movement is upward) that is different from the first directional condition and the second directional condition, and that the first movement meets fast-swipe criteria (e.g., the movement speed of the first contact is greater than a first threshold speed), the device displays ( 830 ) a home screen user interface (distinct from the control panel user interface) that includes a plurality of application launch icons that correspond to a plurality of applications installed on the device. In some embodiments, the home screen user interface is displayed without displaying the second user interface of the second application. This is illustrated, for example, in FIGS.  5 A 19 - 5 A 25 , where an upward swipe gesture by contact  5040  causes the display of the home screen user interface, and in some embodiments, the device displays the home screen user interface because the upward movement speed of contact  5040  is greater than a threshold speed, for example. Displaying the home screen user interface when a gesture meets third directional condition and fast-swipe criteria enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by reducing the number of steps required to achieve a desired outcome, and providing a faster and easier way to achieve a desired outcome), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, in response to detecting the input by the first contact: in accordance with a determination that the input meets application-switcher-display criteria, wherein the application-switcher-display criteria require that the first movement meets a third directional condition (e.g., the first movement is upward) that is different from the first directional condition and the second directional condition, and that the input meets slow-swipe criteria (e.g., the movement speed of the first contact is less than the first threshold speed), the device displays ( 832 ) an application-switcher user interface includes a plurality of representations of applications (e.g., application launch icons, reduced scale images of application user interfaces, etc.) for selectively activating one of a plurality of recently open applications (e.g., selection of a respective application-selection object re-activates the corresponding recently open application to a state immediate prior to the suspension of the application). In some embodiments, the representations of applications are ordered based on a recency of use of the applications to which they correspond (e.g., with representations of more recently used apps displayed before/above representations of less recently used apps). In some embodiments, the application-switcher user interface includes at least a portion of a control panel user interface. This is illustrated in  FIGS. 5A - 5 A 8 , where an upward swipe gesture by contact  5004  causes the display of the application-switcher user interface, and in some embodiments, the device displays the application-switcher user interface because the upward movement speed of contact  5004  is less than a threshold speed. Displaying the application-switcher user interface when a gesture meets third directional condition and slow-swipe criteria enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by reducing the number of steps required to achieve a desired outcome), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, at least a respective portion of the control panel user interface is ( 834 ) at least partly translucent. While displaying a respective user interface on the display, the device detects an edge swipe gesture that meets control-panel-display criteria (e.g., an upward swipe the meets the edge-swipe criteria and includes a movement that meets the second directional condition; or an upward swipe from the bottom edge of the touch-screen that causes display of an application-switcher user interface (e.g., a stack of cards including cards representing a last open application, a currently open application, and the control panel user interface) or a preview of the application-switcher user interface (e.g., side-by-side cards representing a last open application, a currently open application, and the control panel user interface) over the home screen user interface). In response to detecting the edge swipe gesture that meets the control-panel-display criteria, the device displays the control panel user interface, including: in accordance with a determination that the control panel interface was invoked via an edge swipe gesture that started while a respective application was displayed on the display (e.g., the respective user interface is a user interface of the respective application), displaying the control panel user interface displayed over the respective application, where an appearance of the respective application affects an appearance of the respective portion of the control panel user interface that is at least partly translucent (e.g., shapes and/or colors of user interface objects in the respective application change the appearance of the translucent portions of the control panel user interface); and in accordance with a determination that the control panel user interface was invoked while a system user interface was displayed on the display (e.g., the system user interface is an application-switcher user interface or the home screen user interface), displaying the control panel user interface displayed over the system user interface, wherein the system user interface corresponds to multiple applications and an appearance of the system user interface affects the appearance of the respective portion of the control panel user interface that is at least partly translucent (e.g., shapes and/or colors of user interface objects in the respective application change the appearance of the translucent portions of the control panel user interface). This is illustrated, for example, in FIGS.  5 A 58 - 5 A 59 , where the appearance of control panel user interface is affected by the underlying application user interface (e.g., card  5016  and control panel user interface allow features of the user interface of the messages application to show through). In FIG.  5 A 77 , the appearance of the control panel user interface is affected by the appearance of the underlying home screen user interface. Displaying a translucent control panel user interface whose appearance changes based on the user interface underneath enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., providing information about the internal state of the device, helping the user to achieve a desired outcome with required inputs, and reducing user mistakes when operating the device), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     It should be understood that the particular order in which the operations in  FIGS. 8A-8E  have been described is merely an example and is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations could be performed. One of ordinary skill in the art would recognize various ways to reorder the operations described herein. Additionally, it should be noted that details of other processes described herein with respect to other methods described herein (e.g., methods  600 ,  700 ,  900 ,  1000 ,  1050 ,  1100 ,  1200 ,  1300 ,  1400 ,  1500 ,  1600 ,  1800 , and  1900 ) are also applicable in an analogous manner to method  800  described above with respect to  FIGS. 8A-8E . For example, the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, application views, control panels, controls, position thresholds, directional conditions, navigation criteria, movement parameters, thresholds, determinations, focus selectors, and/or animations described above with reference to method  800  optionally have one or more of the characteristics of the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, application views, control panels, controls, position thresholds, directional conditions, navigation criteria, movement parameters, thresholds, determinations, focus selectors, and/or animations described herein with reference to other methods described herein (e.g., methods  600 ,  700 ,  800 ,  900 ,  1000 ,  1050 ,  1100 ,  1200 ,  1300 ,  1400 ,  1500 ,  1600 ,  1800 , and  1900 ). For brevity, these details are not repeated here. 
     The operations in the information processing methods described above are, optionally implemented by running one or more functional modules in information processing apparatus such as general purpose processors (e.g., as described above with respect to  FIGS. 1A and 3 ) or application specific chips. 
     The operations described above with reference to  FIGS. 8A-8E  are, optionally, implemented by components depicted in  FIGS. 1A-1B . For example, detection operation  804  and performing operation  806  are, optionally, implemented by event sorter  170 , event recognizer  180 , and event handler  190 . Event monitor  171  in event sorter  170  detects a contact on touch-sensitive display  112 , and event dispatcher module  174  delivers the event information to application  136 - 1 . A respective event recognizer  180  of application  136 - 1  compares the event information to respective event definitions  186 , and determines whether a first contact at a first location on the touch-sensitive surface (or whether rotation of the device) corresponds to a predefined event or sub-event, such as selection of an object on a user interface, or rotation of the device from one orientation to another. When a respective predefined event or sub-event is detected, event recognizer  180  activates an event handler  190  associated with the detection of the event or sub-event. Event handler  190  optionally uses or calls data updater  176  or object updater  177  to update the application internal state  192 . In some embodiments, event handler  190  accesses a respective GUI updater  178  to update what is displayed by the application. Similarly, it would be clear to a person having ordinary skill in the art how other processes can be implemented based on the components depicted in  FIGS. 1A-1B . 
       FIGS. 9A-9D  are flow diagrams illustrating a method  900  of limiting operation of a navigation gesture, in accordance with some embodiments. The method  900  is performed at an electronic device (e.g., device  300 ,  FIG. 3 , or portable multifunction device  100 ,  FIG. 1A ) with a display and a touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the electronic device includes one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the touch-sensitive surface and the display are integrated into a touch-sensitive display. In some embodiments, the display is a touch-screen display and the touch-sensitive surface is on or integrated with the display. In some embodiments, the display is separate from the touch-sensitive surface. Some operations in method  900  are, optionally, combined and/or the order of some operations is, optionally, changed. 
     Method  900  relates to limiting operation of a navigation gesture when the navigation gesture is detected while a currently displayed application is operating in a protected state (e.g., in a full-screen display mode, or in a mode that unintended interruption is highly undesirable). Specifically, when a navigation gesture is detected and the currently displayed application is determined to be protected, the device forgoes switching to a new user interface (e.g., a system user interface such as the home screen user interface or the application-switcher user interface, a control panel user interface, or a user interface of a recently open application) in response to the navigation gesture, and the device switches to the new user interface in response to the navigation gesture if the currently displayed application is not protected. Limiting the operation of the navigation gesture when a currently application is determined to be protected enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by reducing unintended disruptions to the user&#39;s usage of the device, and reducing user mistakes when operating the device), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     Method  900  is performed at a device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a touch-screen display that serves both as the display and the touch-sensitive surface). In some embodiments, the device does not have a home button (e.g., a mechanical button, a virtual button, a solid state button, etc.) that, when activated, is configured to dismiss a currently displayed user interface and replace the currently displayed user interface with a home screen that includes a plurality of application launch icons for a plurality of applications installed on the device. The device displays ( 902 ) a first user interface of a first application on the display. While displaying the first user interface of the first application, the device detects ( 904 ) a first input by a first contact on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., detecting a vertical edge swipe gesture by the first contact) that meets navigation-gesture criteria, wherein the navigation-gesture criteria require that the first input includes a movement of the first contact across the touch-sensitive surface that crosses a boundary of a predefined edge region of the touch-sensitive surface (in a first predefined direction (e.g., upward)) in order for the navigation-gesture criteria to be met. In response to detecting the first input by the first contact that meets the navigation-gesture criteria: in accordance with a determination that the first application is not protected (e.g., the application is not operating a full screen mode, or the application is not currently in a mode which should not be suddenly interrupted, such as a gaming application that is not in an active gaming mode, or a maps application that that is not in a navigation mode, etc.), the device ceases ( 906 ) to display the first user interface of the first application and displays a respective other user interface (e.g., a home screen user interface, an application switcher user interface, a user interface of another application, or a control panel user interface) on the display. In some embodiments, the respective other user interface is selected based on characteristics of the swipe input, as described herein with respect to the methods  600 ,  700 ,  800 ,  1000 ,  1050 ,  1100 ,  1200 ,  1300 ,  1400 ,  1500 ,  1600 ,  1800 , and  1900 . In response to detecting the first input by the first contact that meets the navigation-gesture criteria, in accordance with a determination that the first application is protected (e.g., the application is operating in a full screen mode, or the application is currently in a mode which should not be suddenly interrupted, such as a gaming application that is in an active gaming mode, or a maps application that is in a navigation mode, etc.), the device maintains display of the first user interface of the first application without displaying the respective other user interface (e.g., the device activates a home-gesture verification mode that will cause display of the home screen user interface only if a verification input is detected while the device is in the home-gesture verification mode). This is illustrated in FIGS.  5 B 1 - 5 B 3 , where when the media player application is not protected, a navigation gesture (e.g., upward swipe from the bottom edge of the display that meets home-display criteria) causes the device to switch to displaying the home screen; in FIGS.  5 B 5 - 5 B 7 , where when the media player application is in full-screen playback mode and is protected, the navigation gesture does not cause display of the home screen, for example. This is also illustrated in FIGS.  5 B 11 - 5 B 13 , where when the maps applications is in the interactive map display mode and is not protected, a navigation gesture causes the device to switch to the home screen user interface; and in FIGS.  5 B 17 - 5 B 19 , when the maps application is in navigation mode, a navigation gesture cause the home affordance to be displayed, but maintains display of the navigation user interface. In some embodiments, a similar process is used by the device to determine whether or not to display an application switcher in response to a swipe input that starts from an edge of the device and moves onto the device from the edge of the device (e.g., as described in greater detail with reference to method  600  or to switch between different applications or a control panel user interface in response to a swipe input that moves along an edge of the device (e.g., as described in greater detail with reference to method  700  and  800 . For example, when a swipe input that corresponds to displaying a respective user interface (e.g., an application switcher, a different application, or a control panel) is detected, if the application is not protected, then the respective user interface is displayed, but if the application is protected, then the respective user interface is not displayed and, optionally, an affordance is displayed instead, and if the swipe input is detected again while the affordance is displayed (e.g., before it hides automatically after a predetermined period of time), then the respective user interface is displayed. 
     In some embodiments, the navigation-gesture criteria are ( 908 ) home-gesture criteria. The respective other user interface is a home screen user interface (e.g., a gesture that meets the home-gesture criteria (e.g., a quick upward swipe from the bottom edge of the touch-screen, or a long upward swipe that starts from the bottom of the touch-screen and ends above three quarters of the screen height from the bottom edge of the touch-screen) causes dismissal of the currently displayed user interface and display of the home screen user interface after termination of the gesture). This is illustrated in FIGS.  5 B 1 - 5 B 7 , and FIGS.  5 B 11 - 5 B 14  and  5 B 17 - 5 B 19 , for example. Limiting navigation to the home screen in response to a navigation gesture when the currently displayed application is protected enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by reducing unintended disruptions to the user&#39;s usage of the device, and reducing user mistakes when operating the device), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, the navigation-gesture criteria are ( 910 ) application-switcher-gesture criteria. The respective other user interface is an application-switcher user interface (e.g., a gesture that meets the application-switcher-gesture criteria (e.g., a slow upward swipe from the bottom edge of the touch-screen, an upward swipe that starts from the bottom edge of the touch-screen and includes a required pause before termination of the gesture, an intermediate-length upward swipe that starts from the bottom edge of the touch-screen and ends below three quarters of the screen height from the bottom edge of the touch-screen) causes display of an application-switcher user interface that includes representations (e.g., reduced scale images) of user interfaces of multiple recently open applications). Limiting navigation to the application-switcher user interface in response to a navigation gesture when the currently displayed application is protected enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by reducing unintended disruptions to the user&#39;s usage of the device, and reducing user mistakes when operating the device), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, the navigation-gesture criteria are ( 912 ) application-switching-gesture criteria. The respective other user interface is another application (e.g., a gesture that meets the application-switching-gesture criteria (e.g., a horizontal swipe within the bottom edge region of the touch-screen in a first predefined direction (e.g., rightward)) causes the currently displayed application to be switched to a last opened application before the currently displayed application). Limiting navigation to another application (e.g., the last displayed application) in response to a navigation gesture when the currently displayed application is protected enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by reducing unintended disruptions to the user&#39;s usage of the device, and reducing user mistakes when operating the device), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, the navigation-gesture criteria are ( 914 ) control-panel-gesture criteria. The respective other user interface is a control panel user interface (e.g., a gesture that meets control-panel-gesture criteria (e.g., a horizontal swipe within the bottom edge region of the touch-screen in a second predefined direction (e.g., leftward)) causes the currently displayed application to be switched to a control panel user interface that includes controls for different system functions, such as the controls for network connections, media playback, display settings, audio settings, etc.). Limiting navigation to the control panel user interface in response to a navigation gesture when the currently displayed application is protected enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by reducing unintended disruptions to the user&#39;s usage of the device, and reducing user mistakes when operating the device), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, the first application is determined ( 916 ) to be protected when an input that meets the navigation-gesture criteria also meets respective criteria for triggering a function provided by the first user interface of the first application. For example, if an upward swipe from the bottom edge is designed to bring up an application-specific control panel (e.g., a hidden tool bar) during gameplay in a gaming application, detection of such a gesture does not cause dismissal of the current user interface or display of the home screen. In another example, if the upward swipe from the bottom edge is designed to bring up a selection panel (e.g., related content selection panel) while a media-player application is in a full-screen media playback mode, detection of such a gesture does not cause dismissal of the current user interface or display of the home screen. This is illustrated in FIGS.  5 B 1 - 5 B 7 , and FIGS.  5 B 11 - 5 B 14 , for example, where the upward swipe from bottom edge is used to trigger display of control region  5320  in the media player application. Limiting navigation to another user interface in response to a navigation gesture when the navigation gesture also meets the criteria for triggering other functions within the currently displayed application enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by reducing unintended disruptions to the user&#39;s usage of the device, and reducing user mistakes when operating the device), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, the first application is determined ( 918 ) to be protected when the first application is operating in one of a plurality of predefined protected modes (e.g., full screen playback mode (e.g., when a movie is played in a theater mode), active gaming mode (e.g., when game is within an active gaming session, as opposed to in the setup stage, in a paused state, or in the result displaying stage), fast touch-interaction mode (e.g., when in a timed touch-based game, or in combative or competitive portion of a game)). This is illustrated, for example, in FIGS.  5 B 5 - 5 B 7  where the media player is operating in full-screen media playback mode, and in FIGS.  5 B 17 - 5 B 19 , where the maps application is operating in the navigation mode. Limiting navigation to another user interface in response to a navigation gesture when the currently displayed application is in a predefined protected mode enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by reducing unintended disruptions to the user&#39;s usage of the device, and reducing user mistakes when operating the device), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, in response to detecting the first input by the first contact that meets the navigation-gesture criteria: in accordance with a determination that the first application is protected, the device displays ( 920 ) an affordance overlaid on the first user interface of the first application (e.g., displaying a home affordance in the predefined edge region of the touch-screen) to indicate that a confirmation input that meets the navigation-gesture criteria is required to dismiss the first application that is determined to be protected and display the respective other user interface (e.g., a home screen user interface, an application switcher user interface, a user interface of another application, or a control panel user interface). This is illustrated, for example, in FIGS.  5 B 5 - 5 B 7 , where home affordance  5322  is displayed in response to the navigation gesture by contact  5318 . This is also illustrated in FIGS.  5 B 17 - 5 B 19 , where home affordance  5002  is displayed in response to the navigation gesture by contact  5352 . In some embodiments, when the affordance is overlaid on the first user interface, the device disambiguates between inputs that cause the device to navigate to: an application switcher user interface, a recent application, a control panel user interface, and a home screen user interface based on one or more of the steps in methods  600 ,  700 ,  800 ,  1000 , and  1600 . Displaying a visual hint for confirmation after navigation to another user interface is limited due to protection of the currently displayed application enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by reducing unintended disruptions to the user&#39;s usage of the device, and reducing user mistakes when operating the device), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, in response to detecting the first input by the first contact that meets the navigation-gesture criteria: in accordance with a determination that the first application is protected, the device performs ( 922 ) a function (e.g., displaying a hidden tool bar from the bottom edge of the touch-screen, or effecting a game move (e.g., a sword swing)) in the first application in accordance with the first input. In some embodiments, the function that is performed in the first application is performed in conjunction with displaying the affordance overlaid on the first user interface of the first application. This is illustrated, for example, in FIGS.  5 B 5 - 5 B 7 , where home affordance  5322  and control region  5320  are displayed in response to the navigation gesture by contact  5318 . Performing an operation with the currently displayed application in response to the navigation gesture after navigation to another user interface is limited due to protection of the currently displayed application enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by reducing the number of steps needed to achieve a desired outcome, reducing unintended disruptions to the user&#39;s usage of the device, and reducing user mistakes when operating the device), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, the first application is determined ( 924 ) to be protected and display of the first user interface of the first application is maintained in response to detecting the first input by the first contact. After forgoing displaying the respective other user interface (e.g., a home screen user interface, an application switcher user interface, a user interface of another application, or a control panel user interface) in response to detecting the first input by the first contact, and while maintaining display of the first user interface of the first application, the device detects a second input by a second contact on the touch-sensitive surface that meets the navigation-gesture criteria (e.g., a second upward swipe gesture by a second contact that starts from the bottom edge of the touch screen). In response to detecting the second input by the second contact on the touch-sensitive surface that meets the navigation-gesture criteria: in accordance with a determination that the second input is detected within confirmation time threshold of the first input (e.g., while the home affordance has not faded away from the display), the device ceases to display the first user interface of the first application and displaying the respective other user interface (e.g., a home screen user interface, an application switcher user interface, a user interface of another application, or a control panel user interface) on the display. This is illustrated, for example, in FIGS.  5 B 7 - 5 B 10 , where a second navigation gesture by contact  5324  detected within the threshold amount of time since the first navigation gesture by contact  5318  causes display of the home screen user interface. This is further illustrated in FIGS.  5 B 19 , and  5 B 23 - 5 B 25 , where a second navigation gesture by contact  5358  within a threshold amount of time of the first navigation gesture by contact  5352  causes display of the home screen user interface. In some embodiments, if the second input by the second contact is not detected within the confirmation time threshold of the first input, the second input is treated as an initial upward wipe, and triggers the same heuristic that is used to test the first input. In other word, if the application is determined to be a protected application, the device does not dismiss the current user interface and does not display of the home screen user interface; and if the application is determined not to be a protected application, the device ceases to display the current user interface and displays the home screen user interface. In some embodiments, in response to the second input, the device first reduces a size of the first user interface of the first application and then displays representations of additional applications and subsequently ceases to display the first user interface of the first application when the end of the second input is detected. Navigating to a new user interface in response to a second navigation gesture after navigation to the user interface was limited the first time due to protection of the currently displayed application enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by reducing unintended disruptions to the user&#39;s usage of the device, and reducing user mistakes when operating the device), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, while displaying the first user interface of the first application on the display, the device detects ( 926 ) a third input by a third contact on the touch-sensitive surface that meets the navigation-gesture criteria. In response to detecting the third input: in accordance with a determination that the third input by the third contact meets enhanced-navigation-gesture criteria, wherein enhanced-navigation-gesture criteria require a movement of the third contact across the touch-sensitive surface that crosses the boundary of the predefined edge region of the touch-sensitive surface (in a first predefined direction (e.g., upward)) and one or more additional conditions in order for the enhanced-navigation-gesture criteria to be met, the device ceases to display the first user interface of the first application and displays the respective other user interface (e.g., a home screen user interface, an application switcher user interface, a user interface of another application, or a control panel user interface), irrespective of whether the first application is determined to be protected. In response to detecting the third input: in accordance with a determination that the third input by the third contact does not meet the enhanced-navigation-gesture criteria and the application is protected, the device maintains display the first user interface of the first application; and in accordance with a determination that the third input by the third contact does not meet the enhanced-navigation-gesture criteria and the application is not protected, the device ceases to display the first user interface of the first application and displaying the respective other user interface (e.g., a home screen user interface, an application switcher user interface, a user interface of another application, or a control panel user interface). This is illustrated, for example, in FIGS.  5 B 1 - 5 B 9 , and FIGS.  5 B 11 - 5 B 13 ,  5 B 17 - 5 B 19 ,  5 B 26 - 5 B 29 , and FIGS.  5 B 30 - 5 B 33 . In some embodiments, two consecutive short swipes that are in the bottom edge region of the touch-screen also dismiss the current user interface and display the home screen, irrespective of whether the application is determined to be a protected application or not. In some embodiments, a similar process is used by the device to determine whether or not to display an application switcher in response to a swipe input that starts from an edge of the device and moves onto the device from the edge of the device (e.g., as described in greater detail with reference to method  600 ) or to switch between different applications or a control panel user interface in response to a swipe input that moves along an edge of the device (e.g., as described in greater detail with reference to method  700  and  800 ). For example, when an swipe input that corresponds to displaying a respective user interface (e.g., an application switcher, a different application, or a control panel) is detected and the application is protected, if the swipe input meets the enhanced-navigation-gesture criteria, then the respective user interface is displayed, but if the swipe input does not meet the enhanced-navigation-gesture criteria, then the respective user interface is not displayed and, optionally, an affordance is displayed instead. Allowing the user to navigating to a new user interface by providing an enhanced navigation gesture even when the currently displayed application is protected enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by reducing unintended disruptions to the user&#39;s usage of the device, and reducing user mistakes when operating the device), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, the enhanced-navigation-gesture criteria include ( 928 ) a criterion that is met when a characteristic intensity of the third contact exceeds a first intensity threshold (e.g., a light press intensity threshold IT L ) before the movement of the third contact across the boundary of the predefined edge region of the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., the enhanced-navigation-gesture criteria are met by a press-input by the third contact in the bottom edge region of the touch-screen, followed by an upward swipe by the third contact). This is illustrated in FIGS.  5 B 30 - 5 B 33 , for example. Allowing the user to navigating to a new user interface by providing an enhanced navigation gesture with a press input even when the currently displayed application is protected enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by reducing unintended disruptions to the user&#39;s usage of the device, and reducing user mistakes when operating the device), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, the enhanced-navigation-gesture criteria include ( 930 ) a criterion that is met when a characteristic intensity of the third contact during the movement of the third contact exceeds a second intensity threshold (e.g., a light press intensity threshold IT L  or a threshold intensity that is lower than IT L  and greater than the detection intensity threshold IT 0 )(e.g., the enhanced-navigation-gesture criteria are met by an upward swipe with force that starts from the bottom edge of the touch-screen). Allowing the user to navigating to a new user interface by providing an enhanced-navigation-gesture with increased intensity during the gesture even when the currently displayed application is protected enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by reducing unintended disruptions to the user&#39;s usage of the device, and reducing user mistakes when operating the device), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, the enhanced-navigation-gesture criteria include ( 932 ) a criterion that is met when the third contact is maintained within the predefined edge region with less than a threshold amount of movement for more than a first threshold amount of time (e.g., a long-press time threshold) before making the movement across the boundary of the predefined edge region of the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., the enhanced-navigation-gesture criteria are met by a touch-hold input in the bottom edge region of the touch-screen, followed by an upward swipe). This is illustrated in FIGS.  5 B 26 - 5 B 29 , for example. Allowing the user to navigating to a new user interface by providing an enhanced-navigation-gesture with an initial touch-hold input even when the currently displayed application is protected enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by reducing unintended disruptions to the user&#39;s usage of the device, and reducing user mistakes when operating the device), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, the device displays ( 934 ) an indication (e.g., a home affordance) overlaid on the first user interface in response to detecting that the third contact is maintained within the predefined edge region with less than the threshold amount of movement for more than the first threshold amount of time. Displaying a visual indication when an enhanced navigation gesture is detected to override the protection of the currently displayed application enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by providing information regarding the internal state of the device, helping the user to achieve a desired outcome with required inputs, and reducing user mistakes when operating the device), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, the enhanced-navigation-gesture criteria include ( 936 ) a criterion that is met when the movement of third contact is paused after an initial movement of the third contact for more than a threshold amount of time (e.g., a long-press time threshold) before being completed with a final movement across the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., the enhanced-navigation-gesture criteria are met by an upward swipe that starts from the bottom edge region of the touch-screen and that includes an initial upward movement of the third contact across the touch-screen, followed by a pause of the third contact on the touch-screen, followed by a final upward movement of the third contact across the touch-screen). In some embodiments, the device displays an indication (e.g., a home affordance) overlaid on the first user interface in response to detecting that the movement of the third contact is paused after an initial movement of the third contact for more than a threshold amount of time. Allowing the user to navigating to a new user interface by providing an enhanced navigation gesture with pause followed by final movement even when the currently displayed application is protected enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by reducing unintended disruptions to the user&#39;s usage of the device, and reducing user mistakes when operating the device), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, the control panel user interface is displayed in response to other types of inputs. For example, the device detects a press input by a contact in the predefined bottom edge region of the touch-sensitive surface followed by an upward swipe; in response to detecting such a swipe input, the device displays the control panel user interface instead of the home screen user interface after the lift-off of the contact. 
     In some embodiments, swiping up from the central region of the bottom edge causes the control panel user interface to be displayed, and swiping up from the side regions of the bottom edge causes the application-switcher user interface or the home screen to be displayed after the lift-off of the contact. 
     In some embodiments, a plurality of system status indicators are displayed in a predefined region of the display (e.g., in the upper right corner of the display), and tapping on the status indicators causes the control panel user interface to be displayed. 
     In some embodiments, swiping rightward from the left edge of the display causes the previous application to be displayed; and swiping leftward from the right edge of the display causes the control panel user interface to be displayed. 
     In some embodiments, swiping from the top edge of the display bring down a status bar, and tapping on the status bar causes the control panel user interface to be displayed. 
     It should be understood that the particular order in which the operations in  FIGS. 9A-9D  have been described is merely an example and is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations could be performed. One of ordinary skill in the art would recognize various ways to reorder the operations described herein. Additionally, it should be noted that details of other processes described herein with respect to other methods described herein (e.g., methods  600 ,  700 ,  800 ,  1000 ,  1050 ,  1100 ,  1200 ,  1300 ,  1400 ,  1500 ,  1600 ,  1800 , and  1900 ) are also applicable in an analogous manner to method  900  described above with respect to  FIGS. 9A-9D . For example, the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, application views, control panels, controls, position thresholds, directional conditions, navigation criteria, movement parameters, thresholds, determinations, focus selectors, and/or animations described above with reference to method  900  optionally have one or more of the characteristics of the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, application views, control panels, controls, position thresholds, directional conditions, navigation criteria, movement parameters, thresholds, determinations, focus selectors, and/or animations described herein with reference to other methods described herein (e.g., methods  600 ,  700 ,  800 ,  1000 ,  1050 ,  1100 ,  1200 ,  1300 ,  1400 ,  1500 ,  1600 ,  1800 , and  1900 ). For brevity, these details are not repeated here. 
     The operations in the information processing methods described above are, optionally implemented by running one or more functional modules in information processing apparatus such as general purpose processors (e.g., as described above with respect to  FIGS. 1A and 3 ) or application specific chips. 
     The operations described above with reference to  FIGS. 9A-9D  are, optionally, implemented by components depicted in  FIGS. 1A-1B . For example, detection operation  904  and maintain operation  906  are, optionally, implemented by event sorter  170 , event recognizer  180 , and event handler  190 . Event monitor  171  in event sorter  170  detects a contact on touch-sensitive display  112 , and event dispatcher module  174  delivers the event information to application  136 - 1 . A respective event recognizer  180  of application  136 - 1  compares the event information to respective event definitions  186 , and determines whether a first contact at a first location on the touch-sensitive surface (or whether rotation of the device) corresponds to a predefined event or sub-event, such as selection of an object on a user interface, or rotation of the device from one orientation to another. When a respective predefined event or sub-event is detected, event recognizer  180  activates an event handler  190  associated with the detection of the event or sub-event. Event handler  190  optionally uses or calls data updater  176  or object updater  177  to update the application internal state  192 . In some embodiments, event handler  190  accesses a respective GUI updater  178  to update what is displayed by the application. Similarly, it would be clear to a person having ordinary skill in the art how other processes can be implemented based on the components depicted in  FIGS. 1A-1B . 
       FIG. 10A  is a flow diagram illustrating a method  1000  of navigating between user interfaces, in accordance with some embodiments. The method  1000  is performed at an electronic device (e.g., device  300 ,  FIG. 3 , or portable multifunction device  100 ,  FIG. 1A ) with a display and a touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the electronic device includes one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the touch-sensitive surface and the display are integrated into a touch-sensitive display. In some embodiments, the display is a touch-screen display and the touch-sensitive surface is on or integrated with the display. In some embodiments, the display is separate from the touch-sensitive surface. Some operations in method  1000  are, optionally, combined and/or the order of some operations is, optionally, changed. 
     Method  1000  relates to navigating between user interfaces in response to a swipe gesture that meets different movement conditions. Allowing the user to navigate (i) to the home screen, (ii) to the application displayed on the screen immediately prior to a user interface that was displayed when the swipe gesture began, (iii) to a control panel user interface, (iv) to an application switching user interface, or (v) back to the user interface that was displayed when the swipe gesture began depending on whether certain preset movement conditions are met enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     Method  1000  is performed at a device having a touch-screen display and displaying a user interface for an application on the touch-screen display. After the device detects a contact at the bottom edge of the touch-screen display (e.g., contact  5004 ,  5040 ,  5052 ,  5056 ,  5060 ,  5064 ,  5065 ,  5069 ,  5070 ,  5074 ,  5950 ,  5968 ,  5972 ,  5980 , and  5988  in FIGS.  5 A 2 ,  5 A 19 ,  5 A 34 ,  5 A 37 ,  5 A 40 ,  5 A 43 ,  5 A 46 ,  5 A 49 ,  5 A 52 ,  5 A 57 ,  5 H 5 ,  5 H 9 ,  5 H 13 ,  5 H 18 , and  5 H 25  respectively), the device replaces the user interface for the application with a corresponding application view (e.g., application views  5010 ,  5022 ,  5022 ,  5010 ,  5010 ,  5022 ,  5014 ,  5022 ,  5014 , and  5954  in FIGS.  5 A 3 ,  5 A 20 ,  5 A 35 ,  5 A 38 ,  5 A 41 ,  5 A 44 ,  5 A 47 ,  5 A 50 ,  5 A 53 ,  5 H 7 ,  5 H 10 ,  5 H 14 ,  5 H 19 , and  5 H 26  respectively). Method  1000  is then used to determine which user interface the device navigates to upon lift-off of the contact. 
     The device monitors ( 1002 ) the position and velocity of the application view (e.g., at the bottom center of the application view) and provides visual feedback, e.g., indicating how the device will navigate upon lift-off of the contact. The position and velocity of the application view corresponds to the position and velocity of the contact. For example, as illustrated in FIG.  5 A 5 , device  100  monitors the position and velocity of application view  5010 . Because the instantaneous velocity of application view  5010  meets home-display criteria, the device displays application view  5010  without displaying an application view for any other recently open application, indicating that the device will navigate to the home screen user interface upon immediate lift-off of the contact. In contrast, as illustrated in FIG.  5 A 6 , because application view  5010  has paused at a position that meets application-switcher-display criteria, rather than home-display criteria, the device additionally displays a portion of application view  5014 , corresponding to a recently open application, and a portion of control panel view  5016 , corresponding to a control panel, indicating that the device will navigate to an application-switcher user interface upon immediate lift-off of the contact. 
     The device detects ( 1004 ) lift-off of the contact from the touch screen display (e.g., liftoff of contact  5004 ,  5040 ,  5052 ,  5056 ,  5060 ,  5064 ,  5065 ,  5069 ,  5070 ,  5074 ,  5950 ,  5968 ,  5972 ,  5980 , and  5988  in FIGS.  5 A 7 ,  5 A 24 ,  5 A 36 ,  5 A 39 ,  5 A 42 ,  5 A 45 ,  5 A 48 ,  5 A 51 ,  5 A 56 ,  5 A 59 ,  5 H 8 ,  5 H 12 ,  5 H 17 ,  5 H 21 , and  5 H 27  respectively). Alternatively, if the device does not detect lift-off of the contact from the touch screen display, the device returns to monitoring ( 1002 ) the position and velocity of the application view and providing visual feedback. 
     In response to detecting lift-off, the device calculates ( 1006 ) the projected position and size of the application view, e.g., assuming that it will continue to move in the same direction for a period of time. In some embodiments, the projected position and size of the application view is calculated as if the application view has momentum based on its instantaneous velocity at the moment of contact lift-off. In some embodiments, the projected position and/or size of the application view is calculated as if the application view would continue to move at its instantaneous velocity at the moment of lift-off for a predetermined time (e.g., 150 ms). In some embodiments, the projected position and size of the application view is calculated as if the application view would continue to move with decreasing velocity at the moment of lift-off, e.g., as if slowed by a frictional coefficient. For example, upon lift-off of contact  5004  in FIG.  5 A 7 , device  100  calculates that the projected position and size of application view  5010  is the same as the position and/or size of the application view in FIG.  5 A 6  because contact  5004  has no instantaneous velocity at lift-off. In contrast, upon lift-off of contact  5040  in FIG.  5 A 23 , device  100  calculates that the projected position and size of application view  5022  is higher on the screen and smaller than that shown in FIG.  5 A 22  because the application view had upward velocity corresponding to movement  5042  at the moment contact  5040  was lifted-off the screen. The projected position and size of application view is shown as outline  5044  in FIG.  5 A 23 . 
     The device determines ( 1008 ) whether the calculated size of the application view meets a predetermined threshold value. In some embodiments, the threshold value is a maximum size, e.g., such that the device determines whether the projected size of the application view is below the threshold size (e.g., 30% of the full size of the screen). 
     In accordance with a determination that the calculated size of the application view meets the predetermined threshold value, the device displays ( 1010 ) a home screen user interface. For example, upon determining that the size of outline  5044  is less than 30% of the full size of the screen in FIG.  5 A 23 , device  100  displays a home screen user interface in FIG.  5 A 24 . 
     In accordance with a determination that the calculated size of the application view does not meet the predetermined threshold value, the device forgoes displaying a home screen user interface. For example, upon determining that the projected size of application view  5010  is greater than 30% of the full size of the screen in FIG.  5 A 6 , device  100  does not display a home screen user interface in FIG.  5 A 7 . 
     After determining that the calculated size of the application view does not meet a predetermined threshold value, the device determines ( 1012 ) whether the calculated position of the application view (e.g., the position of the middle of the bottom edge of the application view) meets a first predetermined threshold value. In some embodiments, the threshold value is a predetermined distance between the center of the bottom edge of the screen and the center of the bottom edge of the projected position of the application view, e.g., such that the device determines whether the distance between the projected center of the bottom edge of the application view and the center of the bottom of the screen is greater than the threshold distance (e.g., a distance equal to ¼ of the height of the screen). For example, because the projected sizes of application view  5022  in FIG.  5 A 35 , upon lift-off of contact  5052  in FIG.  5 A 36 , and application view  5010  in FIG.  5 A 38 , upon lift-off of contact  5056  in FIG.  5 A 39 , are greater than 30% of the total size of the screen, device determines whether the projected positions of application view  5022  ( yes ) and application view  5010  (no) are a distance greater than ¼ of the screen height away from the center of the bottom edge of the screen. 
     In accordance with a determination that the calculated position of the application view meets the predetermined threshold value, the device determines ( 1014 ) the direction the application view was traveling prior to lift off of the contact. For example, because device  100  determined that the projected position of application view  5022  in FIG.  5 A 35 , upon lift-off of contact  5052  in FIG.  5 A 36 , is a distance greater than ¼ of the screen height away from the center of the bottom edge of the screen, the device determines the direction application view  5022  was traveling prior to lift-off (e.g., sideways or left to right). In some embodiments, the direction the application view is traveling is based on an angle relative to the bottom edge of the screen. For example, in one embodiment, an application view traveling in a direction that has an angle of greater than 30 degrees above the bottom edge of the screen is determined to be traveling upwards, an application view traveling in a direction that has an angle of greater than 30 degrees below the bottom edge of the screen is determined to be traveling downward, and an application view travelling in a direction that has an angle of less than 30 degrees from (e.g., above or below) the bottom edge of the screen is determined to be traveling sideways. 
     In accordance with a determination that the application view was traveling upwards prior to contact lift-off (e.g., in a direction having an angle of greater than 30 degrees above the bottom edge of the screen), the device determines ( 1016 ) whether the velocity of the application view, at the moment contact lift-off is detected, meets a first predetermined velocity threshold (e.g., a velocity of at least ⅛ the length of the screen height per second at contact lift-off). For example, had device  100  determined that the projected size of application view  5022  did not meet the predetermined size threshold (e.g., was greater than 30% of the total size of the screen) upon lift-off of contact  5040  in FIG.  5 A 23 , the device would have determined whether the velocity of application view  5022  was at least ⅛ the length of the screen height per second at lift-off because it was traveling at a direction with an angle of greater than 30 degrees above the bottom edge of the screen when contact  5040  was lifted-off. 
     In accordance with a determination that the velocity of the application view met the first predetermined velocity threshold, the device displays ( 1010 ) a home screen user interface. For example, had device  100  determined that the projected size of application view  5022  did not meet the predetermined size threshold (e.g., was greater than 30% of the total size of the screen), but met the first predetermined velocity threshold (e.g., was travelling at a velocity of at least ⅛ the length of the screen height per second) upon lift-off of contact  5040  in FIG.  5 A 23 , device  100  would have displayed a home screen user interface, as illustrated in FIG.  5 A 24 . 
     In accordance with a determination that the velocity of the application view did not meet the first predetermined velocity threshold, the device displays ( 1018 ) an application-switcher user interface. For example, had device  100  determined that the projected size of application view  5022  did not meet the predetermined size threshold (e.g., was greater than 30% of the total size of the screen), and did not meet the first predetermined velocity threshold (e.g., was travelling at a velocity of less than ⅛ the length of the screen height per second) upon lift-off of contact  5040  in FIG.  5 A 23 , device  100  would have displayed an application-switcher user interface, as illustrated in FIG.  5 A 8 . 
     In accordance with a determination that the application view was traveling sideways prior to contact lift-off (e.g., in a direction having an angle of less than 30 degrees above or below the bottom edge of the screen), the device determines ( 1020 ) whether the application view was traveling right to left or left to right. In some embodiments, the determining ( 1020 ) whether the application view was traveling right to left or left to right is the same as the determining ( 1014 ) the direction the application view was traveling prior to lift off of the contact (e.g., rather than determining that the application view is traveling sideways, the device determines that the application view is traveling right to left or left to right, such that steps  1014  and  1020  are a single step). For example, device  100  determines that application view  5022  is traveling left to right because the center of the bottom edge of application view  5022 , in FIG.  5 A 35 , is traveling rightwards at an angle less than 30 degrees above the bottom of the screen when contact  5052  is lifted-off, in FIG.  5 A 36 . 
     In accordance with a determination that the application view was traveling left to right prior to contact lift-off, the device displays ( 1022 ) a user interface for the recently open application having a retained state in the application stack immediately below the retained state of the application associated with the user interface displayed on the screen prior to first detecting the contact at the bottom edge of the touch screen display. For example, in response to detecting lift-off of contact  5052 , which was directing email application view  5022  in a left to right direction in FIG.  5 A 35  prior to lift-off, device  100  displays a web browsing user interface in FIG.  5 A 36  because web browsing application view  5010  was immediately behind email application view  5022  in the stack, as illustrated in FIG.  5 A 29 . 
     In accordance with a determination that the application view was traveling right to left prior to contact lift-off, the device displays ( 1024 ) a control panel user interface. In some embodiments, where the contact is moving in a right to left direction in a fashion that would otherwise satisfy the criteria for navigating to the control panel user interface, the device does not display movement of an application view corresponding to the user interface that was displayed immediately prior to detecting the contact at the bottom edge of the screen but, rather, displays movement of an application view corresponding to the control panel user interface from the right hand side of the screen (e.g., as if sliding over the user interface displayed immediately prior to detecting the contact at the bottom edge of the screen). For example, in response to detecting lift-off of contact  5074 , which was traveling in a right to left direction in FIG.  5 A 58  prior to lift-off, device  100  displays a control panel user interface in FIG.  5 A 59 . 
     In some embodiments, where the order of retained states of the recently open applications in the application stack has not yet been updated following navigation to a different user interface (e.g., where a time threshold for reordering cards in the stack was not met prior to the detection of another contact at the bottom edge of the screen), lift-off of a contact directing movement of an application view in the right to left direction causes the device to display a user interface for the recently open application having a retained state in the application stack immediately above the retained state of the application associated with the user interface displayed on the screen prior to first detecting the contact at the bottom edge of the touch screen display. For example, because contact  5065  was detected in FIG.  5 A 46  within a time threshold TT 1  after lift-off of prior contact  5064 , the order of retained application states in the application stack was not reordered to reflect navigation from the email user interface in FIG.  5 A 43  to the messaging user interface in FIG.  5 A 45 . As a result, lift-off of contact  5065 , directing movement of messaging application view  5014  in a right to left direction in FIG.  5 A 47  and FIG.  5 A 48 , causes device  100  to display an email user interface in FIG.  5 A 48 , rather than a control panel user interface, because email application view  5010  was immediately above messaging application view  5014  in the application stack. 
     In accordance with a determination that the application view was traveling downwards prior to contact lift-off (e.g., in a direction having an angle of greater than 30 degrees below the bottom edge of the screen), the device redisplays ( 1026 ) the application user interface that was displayed prior to first detecting the contact at the bottom edge of the touch-screen display. For example, in response to detecting lift-off of contact  5070 , when messaging application view  5014  was traveling downwards in FIG.  5 A 55 , device  100  displays a messaging user interface in FIG.  5 A 56  because the messaging user interface was displayed on the screen when contact  5070  was first detected in FIG.  5 A 52 . 
     In accordance with a determination that the calculated position of the application view does not meet the first predetermined threshold value, the device determines ( 1028 ) whether any other application views are visible on the display. 
     In accordance with a determination that no other application views are visible on the display, the device redisplays ( 1026 ) the application user interface that was displayed prior to first detecting the contact at the bottom edge of the touch-screen display. For example, in response to detecting lift-off of contact  5056 , where the projected size of web browsing application view  5010  is greater than 30% of the full size of the screen and the projected position of web browsing application view  5010  is closer to the center of the bottom edge of the screen than ¼ the length of the screen height in FIG.  5 A 38 , device  100  displays web browsing user interface in FIG.  5 A 39  because no other application views were visible, in FIG.  5 A 38 , when lift-off of contact  5056  was detected. 
     In accordance with a determination that other application views are visible on the display, the device determines ( 1030 ) whether the calculated position of the application view (e.g., the position of the middle of the bottom edge of the application view) meets a second predetermined threshold value (e.g., that is smaller than the first predetermined threshold that the device determined was not met). In some embodiments, the second threshold value is a predetermined distance between the center of the bottom edge of the screen and the center of the bottom edge of the projected position of the application view, e.g., such that the device determines whether the distance between the projected center of the bottom edge of the application and the center of the bottom of the screen is greater than the second threshold distance (e.g., a distance equal to 1/16 of the height of the screen). For example, in response to detecting lift-off of contact  5004  in FIG.  5 A 7 , where the projected size of web browsing application view  5010  is greater than 30% of the full size of the screen and the projected position of web browsing application view  5010  is closer to the center of the bottom edge of the screen than ¼ the length of the screen height, device  100  determines whether the second predetermined distance threshold is met because messaging application view  5014  and control panel view  5016  are partially visible in FIG.  5 A 6 . 
     In accordance with a determination that the calculated position of the application view does not meet the second predetermined threshold value, the device redisplays ( 1026 ) the application user interface that was displayed prior to first detecting the contact at the bottom edge of the touch-screen display. For example, if the projected position of email application view  5022  did not meet either the first predetermined distance threshold or the second predetermined distance threshold upon lift-off of contact  5052  in FIG.  5 A 35 , device would redisplay the email user interface, as illustrated in FIG.  5 A 33 , because the email user interface was displayed when contact  5052  was first detected in FIG.  5 A 34 . 
     In accordance with a determination that the calculated position of the application view meets the second predetermined threshold value, the device determines ( 1032 ) whether the projected position of the application view (e.g., the position of the center of the bottom edge of the card) is below the bottom edge of the screen. For example, in response to detecting lift-off of contact  5004  in FIG.  5 A 7 —where the projected size of web browsing application view  5010  is greater than 30% of the full size of the screen, the distance between the projected position of web browsing application view  5010  and the center of the bottom edge of the screen is between 1/16 and ¼ the length of the screen height, and application view  5014  and control panel view  5016  are also visible—device  100  determines whether the projected position of web browsing application view  5010  is below the bottom edge of the screen. 
     In accordance with a determination that the projected position of the application view is below the bottom edge of the screen, the device redisplays ( 1026 ) the application user interface that was displayed prior to first detecting the contact at the bottom edge of the touch-screen display. For example, if contact  5004  would have moved downwards prior to lift-off in FIG.  5 A 6 , with sufficient speed such that the projected position of application view  5010  would have been below the bottom edge of the screen, device  100  would have redisplayed the web browsing user interface, as illustrated in FIG.  5 A 1 , because the web browsing user interface was displayed when contact  5004  was first detected in FIG.  5 A 2 . 
     In accordance with a determination that the projected position of the application view is not below the bottom edge of the screen, the device displays ( 1034 ) an application-switcher user interface. In some embodiments, display of the application-switcher user interface includes animation of a smooth transition where an application view for the control panel slides on top (e.g., from the right-hand side of the screen) of the application view corresponding to the user interface displayed when the contact was first detected at the bottom edge of the screen and application views corresponding to other user interfaces with retained states in the application stack slide below (e.g., from the left-hand side of the screen) of the application view corresponding to the user interface displayed when the contact was first detected at the bottom edge of the screen. For example, in response to lift-off of contact  5004 —where the projected position of web browsing application view  5010  is determined to be above the bottom edge of the screen-device  100  displays an application-switcher user interface in FIG.  5 A 8 , including animation of a transition where control panel view  5016  slides over, and application views  5014  (messaging) and  5022  (email) slide under, web browsing application view  5010  in FIG.  5 A 7 . 
     It should be understood that the particular order in which the operations in  FIG. 10A  have been described is merely an example and is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations could be performed. One of ordinary skill in the art would recognize various ways to reorder the operations described herein. Additionally, it should be noted that details of other processes described herein with respect to other methods described herein (e.g., methods  600 ,  700 ,  800 ,  900 ,  1050 ,  1100 ,  1200 ,  1300 ,  1400 ,  1500 ,  1600 ,  1800 , and  1900 ) are also applicable in an analogous manner to method  1000  described above with respect to  FIG. 10A . For example, the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, application views, control panels, controls, position thresholds, directional conditions, navigation criteria, movement parameters, thresholds, determinations, focus selectors, and/or animations described above with reference to method  1000  optionally have one or more of the characteristics of the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, application views, control panels, controls, position thresholds, directional conditions, navigation criteria, movement parameters, thresholds, determinations, focus selectors, and/or animations described herein with reference to other methods described herein (e.g., methods  600 ,  700 ,  800 ,  900 ,  1050 ,  1050 ,  1200 ,  1300 ,  1400 ,  1500 ,  1600 ,  1800 , and  1900 ). For brevity, these details are not repeated here. 
     The operations in the information processing methods described above are, optionally implemented by running one or more functional modules in information processing apparatus such as general purpose processors (e.g., as described above with respect to  FIGS. 1A and 3 ) or application specific chips. 
     The operations described above with reference to  FIG. 10A  are, optionally, implemented by components depicted in  FIGS. 1A-1B . For example, detection operations and performing operations are, optionally, implemented by event sorter  170 , event recognizer  180 , and event handler  190 . Event monitor  171  in event sorter  170  detects a contact on touch-sensitive display  112 , and event dispatcher module  174  delivers the event information to application  136 - 1 . A respective event recognizer  180  of application  136 - 1  compares the event information to respective event definitions  186 , and determines whether a first contact at a first location on the touch-sensitive surface (or whether rotation of the device) corresponds to a predefined event or sub-event, such as selection of an object on a user interface, or rotation of the device from one orientation to another. When a respective predefined event or sub-event is detected, event recognizer  180  activates an event handler  190  associated with the detection of the event or sub-event. Event handler  190  optionally uses or calls data updater  176  or object updater  177  to update the application internal state  192 . In some embodiments, event handler  190  accesses a respective GUI updater  178  to update what is displayed by the application. Similarly, it would be clear to a person having ordinary skill in the art how other processes can be implemented based on the components depicted in  FIGS. 1A-1B . 
       FIG. 10B  is a flow diagram illustrating a method  1050  of providing visual feedback when navigating between user interfaces, in accordance with some embodiments. The method  1050  is performed at an electronic device (e.g., device  300 ,  FIG. 3 , or portable multifunction device  100 ,  FIG. 1A ) with a display and a touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the electronic device includes one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the touch-sensitive surface and the display are integrated into a touch-sensitive display. In some embodiments, the display is a touch-screen display and the touch-sensitive surface is on or integrated with the display. In some embodiments, the display is separate from the touch-sensitive surface. Some operations in method  1050  are, optionally, combined and/or the order of some operations is, optionally, changed. 
     Method  1050  relates to providing visual feedback while navigating between user interfaces in response to a swipe gesture that meets different movement conditions. Specifically, the device displays a preview of an application-switcher user interface including multiple application views, while navigating between user interfaces, when the input directing navigation would satisfy criteria for navigating to the application-switcher user interface upon immediate lift-off of a contact that is part of the input. Displaying the preview of the application-switcher user interface when the swipe gesture would cause navigation to the application-switcher user interface enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by providing information about the internal state of the device through the multiple application views, helping the user achieve an intended result by providing the required inputs, and reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device), which, additionally, reduce power usage and improve the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     Method  1050  is performed at a device having a touch-screen display and displaying a user interface for an application on the touch-screen display. After the device detects a contact at the bottom edge of the touch-screen display (e.g., contact  5004 ,  5040 ,  5052 ,  5056 ,  5060 ,  5064 ,  5065 ,  5069 ,  5070 ,  5074 ,  5950 ,  5968 ,  5972 ,  5980 , and  5988 in FIGS.  5 A 2 ,  5 A 19 ,  5 A 34 ,  5 A 37 ,  5 A 40 ,  5 A 43 ,  5 A 46 ,  5 A 49 ,  5 A 52 ,  5 A 57 ,  5 H 5 ,  5 H 9 ,  5 H 13 ,  5 H 18 , and  5 H 25  respectively), the device replaces the user interface for the application with a corresponding application view (e.g., application views  5010 ,  5022 ,  5022 ,  5010 ,  5010 ,  5022 ,  5014 ,  5022 ,  5014 , and  5954  in FIGS.  5 A 3 ,  5 A 20 ,  5 A 35 ,  5 A 38 ,  5 A 41 ,  5 A 44 ,  5 A 47 ,  5 A 50 ,  5 A 53 ,  5 H 7 ,  5 H 10 ,  5 H 14 ,  5 H 19 , and  5 H 26 ). Method  1050  is then used to provide visual feedback indicating when criteria for navigating to the application-switcher user interface has been met. 
     While displaying a single application view, corresponding to the user interface displayed when the contact at the bottom edge of the screen was first detected, the device starts ( 1052 ) an internal counter that triggers display of application views corresponding to user interfaces of applications with retained state information in the application stack upon reaching a predetermined temporal threshold (e.g., 133 ms or 8 frame refreshes at a frequency of 60 frames per second). 
     The device determines ( 1054 ) whether the velocity of the application view exceeds a first predetermined threshold velocity (e.g., 2% of the vertical height of the screen per second). In some embodiments, the velocity of the application view is the rate of change in the distance between the center of the bottom edge of the application view and the center of the bottom of the screen. In some embodiments, the velocity of the application view is the rate of change of the vertical position (e.g., a vertical velocity vector) of the center of the bottom edge of the application view. In some embodiments, the velocity of the application view is the rate of change in the position of the center of the bottom edge of the application view, e.g., in any direction. 
     In accordance with a determination that the velocity of the application view exceeds the first predetermined threshold velocity, the device resets ( 1052 ) the counter. For example, device  100  determines that the velocity of application view  5010  in FIG.  5 A 3  exceeds the predetermined threshold velocity and resets the counter, preventing display of other application views in FIG.  5 A 4 . 
     In accordance with a determination that the velocity of the application view does not exceed the first predetermined threshold velocity, the device determines ( 1056 ) whether the size of the application view is below a second predetermined size threshold (e.g., 30% of the size of the full screen). 
     In accordance with a determination that the size of the application view is below the second predetermined size threshold velocity, the device resets ( 1052 ) the counter. For example, device  100  determines that the size of email application view  5022  is less than 30% of the size of the full screen in FIG.  5 A 22  and resents the counter, preventing display of other application views in FIG.  5 A 23 . 
     In accordance with a determination that the size of the application view is not below the second predetermined size threshold velocity, the device determines ( 1058 ) whether the horizontal movement of the application view exceed a second predetermined threshold velocity. In some embodiments, the horizontal velocity of the application view is the rate of change in the position of the center of the bottom edge of the application view. In some embodiments, the second predetermined threshold velocity varies based upon the size of the application view, e.g., the second predetermined threshold velocity is 3% of the screen width per second when the size of the application view is at least 98% of the size of the full screen and 33% of the screen width per second when the size of the application view is less than 98% of the size of the full screen. 
     In accordance with a determination that the horizontal velocity of the application view exceeds the second predetermined threshold velocity, the device sets ( 1060 ) the counter to the temporal threshold. For example, device  100  determines that the horizontal velocity of email application view  5022  exceeds 3% of the screen width per second upon movement  5054  of contact  5052  in FIG.  5 A 34  and sets the counter to the temporal threshold, enabling display of web browsing application view  5010  in FIG.  5 A 35 . 
     In accordance with a determination that the horizontal velocity of the application view does not exceed the second predetermined threshold velocity, the device increments ( 1062 ) the counter. 
     After determining whether the horizontal movement of the application view exceeds the second predetermined threshold velocity, the device determines ( 1064 ) whether the counter has reached the temporal threshold. 
     In accordance with a determination that the counter has reached the temporal threshold (e.g., upon setting the counter to the temporal threshold or incrementing the counter until the threshold is reached), the device displays ( 1066 ) one or more other application views corresponding to user interfaces of applications with retained state information in the application stack (e.g., an application view for a recently open application, an application view for a control panel, or both). For example, device  100  determines that the counter has reached the temporal threshold upon increment of the counter between FIGS.  5 A 5  and  5 A 6  and, in response, displays portions of messaging application view  5014  and control panel view  5016  along with web browsing application view in FIG.  5 A 6 , indicating that lift-off of contact  5004  will result in navigation to the application-switcher user interface, as illustrated in FIGS.  5 A 7 - 5 A 8 . Similarly, device  100  determines that the counter has reached the temporal threshold upon setting the counter to the temporal threshold, upon horizontal movement  5054  of contact  5052  in FIG.  5 A 34  and, in response, displays a portion of web browsing application view  5010  along with email application view  5022  in FIG.  5 A 35 . Likewise, device  100  determines that the counter has reached the temporal threshold upon setting the counter to the temporal threshold, upon horizontal movement  5076  of contact  5074  in FIG.  5 A 57  and, in response, displays a portion of control panel view  5016  in FIG.  5 A 58 . 
     After displaying the one or more other application views corresponding to user interfaces of applications with retained state information in the application stack, the device continues to monitor ( 1068 ) the size, position, and/or velocity of the application view corresponding to the user interface displayed when the contact was first detected at the bottom edge of the screen. 
     While monitoring the size, position, and/or velocity of the application view corresponding to the user interface displayed when the contact was first detected at the bottom edge of the screen, the device determines ( 1070 ) whether the size of the application view is below a third predetermined size threshold (e.g., 30% of the size of the full screen). 
     In accordance with a determination that the size of the application view is below the third predetermined size threshold, the device terminates ( 1072 ) display of the one or more other application views corresponding to user interfaces of applications with retained state information in the application stack, and resets ( 1052 ) the counter. For example, while monitoring the position of email application view  5022  in FIG.  5 A 21 , device  100  determines that the size of the application view becomes less than 30% of the size of the full screen and, in response, terminates display of web browsing application view  5010  and control panel view  5016  in FIG.  5 A 22 , indicating that lift-off of contact  5040  will result in navigation to a home user interface, as illustrated in FIGS.  5 A 23 - 5 A 24 . In some embodiments, a metric related to the size of the application view (e.g., a position or velocity) is monitored and display of the other application views is terminated upon a determination that a threshold relating to the other metric (e.g., a position threshold or velocity threshold) has been met. 
     In accordance with a determination that the size of the application view is below the third predetermined size threshold, the device continues to monitor ( 1068 ) the size, position, and/or velocity of the application view corresponding to the user interface displayed when the contact was first detected at the bottom edge of the screen. 
     In accordance with a determination that the counter has not reached the temporal threshold, the device continues to monitor ( 1074 ) the size, position, and/or velocity of the application view corresponding to the user interface displayed when the contact was first detected at the bottom edge of the screen, until the counter is either reset ( 1052 ) or reaches the temporal threshold. 
     It should be understood that the particular order in which the operations in  FIG. 10B  have been described is merely an example and is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations could be performed. One of ordinary skill in the art would recognize various ways to reorder the operations described herein. Additionally, it should be noted that details of other processes described herein with respect to other methods described herein (e.g., methods  600 ,  700 ,  800 ,  900 ,  1000 ,  1100 ,  1200 ,  1300 ,  1400 ,  1500 ,  1600 ,  1800 , and  1900 ) are also applicable in an analogous manner to method  1050  described above with respect to  FIG. 10B . For example, the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, application views, control panels, controls, position thresholds, directional conditions, navigation criteria, movement parameters, thresholds, determinations, focus selectors, and/or animations described above with reference to method  1050  optionally have one or more of the characteristics of the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, application views, control panels, controls, position thresholds, directional conditions, navigation criteria, movement parameters, thresholds, determinations, focus selectors, and/or animations described herein with reference to other methods described herein (e.g., methods  600 ,  700 ,  800 ,  900 ,  1000 ,  1100 ,  1200 ,  1300 ,  1400 ,  1500 ,  1600 ,  1800 , and  1900 ). For brevity, these details are not repeated here. 
     The operations in the information processing methods described above are, optionally implemented by running one or more functional modules in information processing apparatus such as general purpose processors (e.g., as described above with respect to  FIGS. 1A and 3 ) or application specific chips. 
     The operations described above with reference to  FIG. 10B  are, optionally, implemented by components depicted in  FIGS. 1A-1B . For example, detection operations and performing operations are, optionally, implemented by event sorter  170 , event recognizer  180 , and event handler  190 . Event monitor  171  in event sorter  170  detects a contact on touch-sensitive display  112 , and event dispatcher module  174  delivers the event information to application  136 - 1 . A respective event recognizer  180  of application  136 - 1  compares the event information to respective event definitions  186 , and determines whether a first contact at a first location on the touch-sensitive surface (or whether rotation of the device) corresponds to a predefined event or sub-event, such as selection of an object on a user interface, or rotation of the device from one orientation to another. When a respective predefined event or sub-event is detected, event recognizer  180  activates an event handler  190  associated with the detection of the event or sub-event. Event handler  190  optionally uses or calls data updater  176  or object updater  177  to update the application internal state  192 . In some embodiments, event handler  190  accesses a respective GUI updater  178  to update what is displayed by the application. Similarly, it would be clear to a person having ordinary skill in the art how other processes can be implemented based on the components depicted in  FIGS. 1A-1B . 
       FIGS. 11A-11E  are flow diagrams illustrating a method  1100  of displaying a control panel user interface and, in response to different inputs, displaying an expanded region of the control panel user interface or activating a control, in accordance with some embodiments. The method  1100  is performed at an electronic device (e.g., device  300 ,  FIG. 3 , or portable multifunction device  100 ,  FIG. 1A ) with a display and a touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the electronic device includes one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the touch-sensitive surface and the display are integrated into a touch-sensitive display. In some embodiments, the display is a touch-screen display and the touch-sensitive surface is on or integrated with the display. In some embodiments, the display is separate from the touch-sensitive surface. Some operations in method  1100  are, optionally, combined and/or the order of some operations is, optionally, changed. 
     Method  1100  relates to a heuristic for determining whether to activate a first control in a device&#39;s control panel interface, to activate a second control in the control panel interface, or to expand a control region in the control panel interface to reveal additional controls in accordance with variations in detected inputs. Specifically, if a detected input is of a first type (e.g., a tap gesture), then the device activates whichever control corresponds to the location of the input. However, if the detected input is of a second type (e.g., a press gesture that exceeds an intensity threshold or a long press gesture), then instead of activating a corresponding control, the device expands a corresponding control region to reveal additional controls that were not displayed before the expansion. Providing additional controls or activating a currently selected control based on characteristics of a single input enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by reducing the number of inputs needed to display additional controls, and thereby providing additional functionality and control functions without cluttering the UI with additional displayed controls) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     Method  1100  is performed at a device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a touch-screen display that serves both as the display and the touch-sensitive surface). The device displays ( 1102 ) a control panel user interface (e.g., control panel user interface  5518 , FIG.  5 C 13 ), wherein the control panel user interface includes a first control region (e.g., connectivity module  5540 , FIG.  5 C 13 ), and the first control region includes a first control for controlling a first function of the device (e.g., Wi-Fi icon  5546 , FIG.  5 C 13 ) and a second control for controlling a second function of the device (e.g., Bluetooth icon  5548 , FIG.  5 C 13 ). In some embodiments, the control panel user interface further includes one or more additional control regions (e.g., audio control  5622 , orientation lock icon  5624 , Do Not Disturb icon  5626 , AirPlay icon  5628 , brightness control  5630 , volume control  5632 , and one or more user-configurable control affordances, including: flashlight icon  5600 , timer icon  5602 , calculator icon  5604 , and camera icon  5606 , FIG.  5 D 1 ) each of which includes a respective plurality of controls for controlling corresponding functions of the device. The device detects ( 1104 ) a first input by a first contact on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a press gesture by contact  5532 , FIG.  5 C 14 ). In some embodiments, the first input by the first contact is detected at a location on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to the first control region (e.g., connectivity module  5540 , FIG.  5 C 14 ). The device, in response to detecting the first input by the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface (including detecting the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface and detecting that the first contact is maintained at its initial touch location with less than a threshold amount of movement before lift-off of the contact is detected (e.g., the first contact is a stationary contact)) ( 1106 ): in accordance with a determination that the first input meets control-region-expansion criteria, wherein the control-region-expansion criteria require that an intensity of the first contact exceeds a first intensity threshold (e.g., the first input is a press input within the first control region) in order for the control-region-expansion criteria to be met, replaces display of the first control region (e.g., connectivity module  5540 , FIG.  5 C 14 ) with display of an expanded first control region (e.g., expanded connectivity module  5550 , FIG.  5 C 15 ), wherein the expanded first control region includes the first control (e.g., Wi-Fi icon  5546 , FIG.  5 C 15 ), the second control (e.g., Bluetooth icon  5548 , FIG.  5 C 15 ), and one or more additional controls that are not included in the first control region (e.g., AirDrop icon  5552  and Personal Hotspot icon  5554 , FIG.  5 C 15 ). In some embodiments, the controls displayed in the expanded control region include controls that are related to the first control and the second control (e.g., the first control is a playback control, the second control is a volume control, and the additional controls include a playlist selection control, an audio routing control, a fast forward control, etc.). In some embodiments, the control-region-expansion criteria are met by a touch-hold input (e.g., a long press input) by the first contact (e.g., a long press input by contact  5532 , FIG.  5 C 14 ). In accordance with a determination that the first input meets first-control-activation criteria, wherein the first-control-activation criteria require that the first contact is detected at a first location on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to the first control in the first control region (e.g., the first input is a tap on the first control, such as a tap gesture by contact  5556  on Wi-Fi icon  5546 , FIG.  5 C 21 ) and do not require that intensity of the first contact exceeds the first intensity threshold in order for the first-control-activation criteria to be met (e.g., the first control activation criteria are capable of being satisfied when the intensity of the first contact does not exceed the first intensity threshold), the device activates the first control for controlling the first function of the device (e.g., toggles the Wi-Fi control from ON to OFF and changes the appearance of Wi-Fi icon  5546  (e.g., from dark to light), as shown in FIGS.  5 C 21 - 5 C 22 ). In some embodiments, the first-control-activation criteria are satisfied with a hard, quick, tap that is still registered as a “tap” by a tap gesture recognizer, and the first-control-activation criteria do not always require that the intensity of the contact remain below a particular intensity threshold in order for the first-control activation criteria to be satisfied. In accordance with a determination that the first input meets second-control-activation criteria, wherein the second-control-activation criteria require that the first contact is detected at a second location on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to the second control in the first control region (e.g., the first input is a tap on the second control, such as a tap gesture by contact  5558  on Bluetooth icon  5548 , FIG.  5 C 23 ) and do not require that intensity of the first contact exceeds the first intensity threshold in order for the second-control-activation criteria to be met (e.g., the second control activation criteria are capable of being satisfied when the intensity of the first contact does not exceed the first intensity threshold), the device activates the second control for controlling the second function of the device (e.g., toggles the Bluetooth control from OFF to ON and changes the appearance of Bluetooth icon  5548  (e.g., from light to dark), as shown in FIGS.  5 C 23 - 5 C 24 ). In some embodiments, the second-control-activation criteria are satisfied with a hard, quick, tap that is still registered as a “tap” by a tap gesture recognizer, and the second-control-activation criteria do not always require that the intensity of the contact remain below a particular intensity threshold in order for the second-control activation criteria to be satisfied. In some embodiments, the device generates a first tactile output when the control-region-expansion criteria are met by the first input, and the device generates a second tactile output when the first-control-activation criteria and/or the second-control-activation criteria are met by the first input, where the first tactile output and the second tactile output have different tactile output properties. In some embodiments (e.g., for devices that do not detect multiple levels of intensity variations in a contact), the control-region-expansion criteria are met by a touch-hold input by the first contact. 
     In some embodiments, in response to detecting the first input by the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface ( 1108 ): in accordance with a determination that the first input meets the first-control-activation criteria, the device changes an appearance of the first control without changing an appearance of the second control (e.g., when a tap input is detected on the first control, the device changes the toggle state of the first control (e.g., toggles the first control from ON to OFF) without making any change to the second control) (e.g., toggles the Wi-Fi control from ON to OFF and changes the appearance of Wi-Fi icon  5546  (e.g., from dark to light), without making any change to Bluetooth icon  5548 , as shown in FIGS.  5 C 21 - 5 C 22 ); and in accordance with a determination that the first input meets the second-control-activation criteria, changing the appearance of the second control without changing the appearance of the first control (e.g., when a tap input is detected on the second control, the device changes the toggle state of the second control (e.g., toggles the control from OFF to ON) without making any change to the first control) (e.g., toggles the Bluetooth control from OFF to ON and changes the appearance of Bluetooth icon  5548  (e.g., from light to dark), without making any change to Wi-Fi icon  5546 , as shown in FIGS.  5 C 23 - 5 C 24 ). Changing an appearance of a control in response to the control being activated without making any changes to the appearance of other controls provides improved feedback which enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by allowing the user to see which control has been activated, and thereby helping the user to achieve an intended outcome with the required inputs) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, in response to detecting the first input by the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface ( 1110 ): in accordance with a determination that the first input meets first expansion-hint criteria, wherein the first expansion-hint criteria require that a location of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface corresponds to a portion of the first control region, the device displays visual feedback (e.g., an animation) that includes dynamically changing an appearance of the first control region in accordance with a change in an intensity parameter (e.g., intensity or rate of change in intensity) of the first contact (e.g., as shown in FIG.  5 C 14 ) (e.g., when the intensity of the contact changes, the appearance of the first control region and/or the appearance of the control panel user interface outside the first control region are dynamically changed in accordance with a magnitude of the changes in the intensity of the first contact, and/or in accordance with a rate by which the intensity of the first contact changes). In some embodiments, the first visual effect is a “springy” animation (e.g., an animation that oscillates back and forth in a virtual z-direction by an amount that is based on the detected intensity of the first contact or the rate of change of the intensity of the first contact). The first visual effect indicates that if the intensity of the first contact continues to increase and exceeds the first intensity threshold, the first control region will be expanded (e.g., “popped open”) to display additional controls. In some embodiments, the first visual effect includes dynamically changing a size of the first control region in accordance with the change in the intensity parameter of the first contact (e.g., increasing the size with increasing intensity of the first contact). In some embodiments, the first visual effect includes dynamically deemphasizing portions of the control panel user interface outside of the first control region in accordance with the change in the intensity parameter of the first contact (e.g., increasing an amount of blurring and darkening applied to the portions of the control panel user interface outside of the first control region with increasing intensity of the first contact). In some embodiments, the visual feedback indicating that the first control region is sensitive to intensity-based inputs is displayed even when the input does not trigger an intensity-based operation (e.g., displaying an expanded control region). For example, the visual feedback is displayed in accordance with a determination that the first input meets first expansion-hint criteria, wherein the first expansion-hint criteria require that a location of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface corresponds to an unoccupied portion of the first control region (e.g., a region that is not occupied by any controls) and the first expansion-hint criteria do not require that an intensity of the first contact exceed the first intensity threshold in order for the first expansion-hint criteria to be met. In some embodiments, the visual feedback is displayed whether a location of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface corresponds to an unoccupied portion of the first control region (e.g., as shown in FIG.  5 C 25 ) or a location of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface corresponds to location of a control in the first control region (e.g., as shown in FIG.  5 C 14 ). Dynamically changing an appearance of a control region in accordance with a change in intensity of a corresponding contact provides improved feedback which enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by indicating that the control region is sensitive to intensity-based inputs, and thereby helping the user to achieve an intended outcome with the required inputs) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, in response to detecting the first input by the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface ( 1112 ): in accordance with a determination that the first input meets second expansion-hint criteria, wherein the second expansion-hint criteria require that a location of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface corresponds to a second control region distinct from the first control region or a third control that is located outside of the first control region (e.g., as shown in FIG.  5 D 36 ), and wherein the second expanded hint-display criteria do not require that an intensity of the first contact exceed the first intensity threshold, displaying a second visual effect (e.g., an animation) that dynamically changes in accordance with a change in an intensity parameter (e.g., intensity or rate of change in intensity) of the first contact (e.g., when the intensity of the contact changes, the appearance of the third control or the second control region, and/or the appearance of the control panel user interface outside the third control or the second control region, are dynamically changed in accordance with a magnitude of the changes in the intensity of the first contact, and/or in accordance with a rate by which the intensity of the first contact changes). In some embodiments, the second visual effect is a “springy” animation (e.g., an animation that oscillates back and forth in a virtual z-direction by an amount that is based on the detected intensity of the first contact or the rate of change of the intensity of the first contact). The second visual effect indicates that if the intensity of the first contact continues to increase and exceeds the first intensity threshold, the third control or the second control region will be expanded (e.g., “popped open”) to display an expanded third control with additional control options, or an expanded second control region with additional controls (e.g., as shown in FIGS.  5 D 36 - 5 D 42 ). In some embodiments, the second visual effect includes dynamically changing a size of the third control or the second control region in accordance with the change in the intensity parameter of the first contact (e.g., increasing the size with increasing intensity of the first contact). In some embodiments, the second visual effect includes dynamically deemphasizing portions of the control panel user interface outside of the third control or the second control region in accordance with the change in the intensity parameter of the first contact (e.g., increasing an amount of blurring and darkening applied to the portions of the control panel user interface outside of the first control region with increasing intensity of the first contact). Dynamically changing an appearance of a control region in accordance with a change in intensity of a corresponding contact provides improved feedback which enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by indicating that the control region is sensitive to intensity-based inputs, and thereby helping the user to achieve an intended outcome with the required inputs) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, the control-region-expansion criteria do not require ( 1114 ) that the first contact be detected at a location on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to an unoccupied portion of the first control region (e.g., regions that are not currently occupied by any controls), in order for the control-region-expansion criteria to be met. In some embodiments, the first contact is detected at the first location (or the second location) on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., the first contact is detected on the first control (or the second control)), and the control-region-expansion criteria are met by the first input by the first contact at the first location (or the second location) on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., as shown in FIGS.  5 C 14 - 5 C 15 ). In some embodiments, the first contact is detected at a location on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to an unoccupied portion of the first control region; and the control-region-expansion criteria are met by the first input by the first contact at the location on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to the unoccupied portion of the first control region (e.g., as shown in FIGS.  5 C 25 - 5 C 26 ). Allowing the user to expand the control region by contacting any area of the control region enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device by not limiting which areas can be contacted for expansion and helping the user to achieve an intended outcome with the required inputs) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, while the expanded first control region is displayed, the device detects ( 1116 ) a second input, including detecting a second contact at a location on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to the expanded first control region (e.g., a press input on an expandable control icon (e.g., Wi-Fi icon  5546 , FIG.  5 C 30 ) of the expanded first control region (e.g., expanded connectivity module  5550 , FIG.  5 C 30 ) by contact  5564 , FIG.  5 C 30 ). In some embodiments, the second input is detected after the contact lifts off of the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the second input is performed by the same contact that performed the first input (e.g., the first input includes an increase in intensity of the contact while over the first control region, and the second input includes, after the expanded first control region has been displayed, movement of the same contact over a respective control in the expanded control region and a confirmation input performed by the contact to activate the respective control in the expanded control region, where the confirmation input includes an increase in intensity of the contact while the contact is over the respective control, a pause in movement of the contact while the contact is over the respective control, or a liftoff of the contact while the contact is over the respective control). In response to detecting the second input by the second contact on the touch-sensitive surface (including detecting the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface and detecting that the first contact is maintained at its initial touch location with less than a threshold amount of movement before lift-off of the contact is detected (e.g., the first contact is a stationary contact)): in accordance with a determination that the second input meets enhanced-control-display criteria, wherein the enhanced-control-display criteria require that an intensity of the second contact exceeds the first intensity threshold (e.g., the second input is a press input within the expanded first control region (e.g., on one of the controls in the expanded first control region), such as a press input on an expandable control icon (e.g., Wi-Fi icon  5546 , FIG.  5 C 30 ) by contact  5564 ) in order for the enhanced-control-display criteria to be met, the device replaces display of a respective control (e.g., a toggle control, such as Wi-Fi icon  5546 , FIG.  5 C 30 ) in the expanded first control region with display of a first enhanced control (e.g., a slider control or a menu of control options, such as enhanced Wi-Fi control  5566 , FIG.  5 C 31 ) corresponding to the respective control. In accordance with a determination that the second input meets third-control-activation-criteria, wherein the third-control-activation criteria require that the second contact is detected at a third location on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to the first control in the expanded first control region (e.g., the second input is a tap on the first control, such as a tap gesture by contact  5570  on Wi-Fi icon  5546 , FIG.  5 C 35 ) and do not require that intensity of the second contact exceeds the first intensity threshold in order for the third-control-activation criteria to be met (e.g., the third control activation criteria are capable of being satisfied when the intensity of the second contact does not exceed the first intensity threshold), the device activates the first control for controlling the first function of the device (e.g., toggles the Wi-Fi control from ON to OFF (and changes the status of the Wi-Fi control from “AppleWiFi” to “Off”) and changes the appearance of Wi-Fi icon  5546  (e.g., from dark to light), as shown in FIGS.  5 C 35 - 5 C 36 ). In some embodiments, the third-control-activation criteria are satisfied with a hard, quick, tap that is still registered as a “tap” by a tap gesture recognizer, and the third-control-activation criteria do not always require that the intensity of the contact remain below a particular intensity threshold in order for the third-control activation criteria to be satisfied. In accordance with a determination that the second input meets fourth-control-activation criteria, wherein the fourth-control-activation criteria require that the second contact is detected at a fourth location on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to the second control in the expanded first control region (e.g., the second input is a tap on the second control, such as a tap gesture by contact  5572  on Bluetooth icon  5548 , FIG.  5 C 37 ) and do not require that intensity of the second contact exceeds the first intensity threshold in order for the fourth-control-activation criteria to be met (e.g., the fourth control activation criteria are capable of being satisfied when the intensity of the second contact does not exceed the first intensity threshold), the device activates the second control for controlling the second function of the device (e.g., toggles the Bluetooth control from ON to OFF (and changes the status of the Bluetooth control from “On” to “Off”) and changes the appearance of Bluetooth icon  5548  (e.g., from dark to light), as shown in FIGS.  5 C 37 - 5 C 38 ). In some embodiments, the fourth-control-activation criteria are satisfied with a hard, quick, tap that is still registered as a “tap” by a tap gesture recognizer, and the fourth-control-activation criteria do not always require that the intensity of the contact remain below a particular intensity threshold in order for the fourth-control activation criteria to be satisfied. In some embodiments, the device generates a third tactile output when the enhanced-control-display criteria are met by the second input, and the device generates a fourth tactile output when the third-control-activation criteria and/or the fourth-control-activation criteria are met by the second input, where the third tactile output and the fourth tactile output have different tactile output properties. Replacing the display of a selected control with an enhanced control while in the expanded control region or activating a control in the expanded control region based on characteristics of a single input enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device and by providing additional functionality and control functions without cluttering the UI with additional displayed controls) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, the respective control is ( 1118 ) the first control (e.g., the second input is a press input at the third location on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to a location of the first control in the expanded first control region, and the first control is expanded into a slider control or a menu of control options in response to the press input by the second contact), and the method includes: maintaining the second contact on touch-sensitive surface while displaying the first enhanced control (e.g., a slider control or a menu of control options) corresponding to the first control in the expanded first control region; detecting a third input by the second contact, including detecting movement of the second contact across the touch-sensitive surface to the fourth location on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to the second control in the expanded first control region, and detecting an increase in an intensity of the second contact that exceeds the first intensity threshold while the second contact is detected at the fourth location; and in response to detecting the third input by the second contact: in accordance with a determination that the third input meets the enhanced-control-display criteria (e.g., the third input is a press input on the second control within the expanded first control region), replacing display of the second control (e.g., a toggle control) in the expanded first control region with display of a second enhanced control (e.g., a slider control or a menu of control options) corresponding to the second control. In some embodiments, the device ceases to display the enhanced first control and restores display of the first control when the second contact moves away from the third location on the touch-sensitive surface. Replacing the display of a selected control with an enhanced control while in the expanded control region enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device and by providing additional functionality and control functions without cluttering the UI with additional displayed controls) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, prior to displaying the expanded first control region, the first control is ( 1120 ) displayed in a first state in the first control region (e.g., the first control is initially in an OFF state) (e.g., Wi-Fi icon  5546  is initially in an OFF state in FIG.  5 C 13 ). While the first control is displayed in the expanded first control region (e.g., in expanded connectivity module  5550 , FIG.  5 C 17 ), the second input changes a current state of the first control to a second state, distinct from the first state (e.g., the second input is a tap input on the first control and toggles the first control to the ON state) (e.g., tap gesture by contact  5534  toggles the Wi-Fi control from Off to ON, FIGS.  5 C 17 - 5 C 18 ). The method includes: while displaying the first control in the second state in the expanded first control region, detecting a fourth input that meets expansion-dismissal criteria (e.g., the expansion-dismissal criteria are met by a tap input outside of the expanded first control region, such as a tap gesture by contact  5536 , FIG.  5 C 19 ); and in response to detecting the fourth input that meets the expansion-dismissal criteria: the device replaces display of the first expanded control region with display of the first control region, wherein the first control is displayed in the second state in the first control region (e.g., on dismissal of the expanded first control region, the change in appearance of any controls in the expanded first control region is preserved in the first control region (e.g., airplane indicator is still orange, Wi-Fi indicator is still filled in, etc.), as shown in FIGS.  5 C 19 - 5 C 20 ). Preserving changes to the state of a control after a transition from an expanded view to a non-expanded view of the control region provides improved feedback which enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by allowing the user to keep track of changes to control elements, thereby helping the user to achieve an intended outcome and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, in response to detecting the first input by the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface ( 1122 ): in accordance with a determination that the first input meets the control-region-expansion criteria, the device applies a first visual change to a portion of the control panel user interface outside of the first control region (e.g., without applying the first visual change to the first control region or the expanded first control region) (e.g., when a press input is detected on the first control region (e.g., on the first control, on the second control, or on an unoccupied portion of the first control region), the appearance of the control panel user interface outside the first control region is altered (e.g., blurred and darkened), e.g., to focus the user&#39;s attention on the expanded first control region) (e.g., as shown in FIG.  5 C 14 ). In response to detecting the second input by the second contact on the touch-sensitive surface: in accordance with a determination that the second input meets the enhanced-control-display criteria, applying a second visual change to a portion of the expanded first control region outside of the first enhanced control (e.g., without applying the second visual change to the first enhanced control) (e.g., when a press input is detected on the first control within the expanded first control region, the appearance of the expanded first control region outside the first enhanced control is altered (e.g., blurred and darkened), e.g., to focus the user&#39;s attention on the enhanced first control) (e.g., as shown in FIGS.  5 C 31 ,  5 C 43 ,  5 C 44 , and  5 C 45 ). In some embodiments, before the enhanced-control-display criteria are met by the second input, when the intensity of the second contact changes, the appearance of the first control and/or the appearance of the expanded first control region outside the first control are dynamically changed in accordance with a magnitude of the changes in the intensity of the second contact, and/or in accordance with a rate by which the intensity of the first contact changes (e.g., as shown in FIGS.  5 C 30  and  5 C 42 ). Applying a visual change to areas outside of expanded and enhanced control regions provides improved feedback by allowing the user to have a more focused view of the control regions that are currently expanded or enhanced, which enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to achieve an intended outcome with the required inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, in response to detecting the first input, the device displays ( 1124 ) an animation of the first control region that has a magnitude that is determined based on an intensity of the first input (e.g., as shown in FIG.  5 C 21  compared to FIG.  5 C 23 ). In some embodiments, the animation of the first control region occurs even when the first input does not meet the control-region-expansion criteria (e.g., when the first input meets the first-control-activation criteria or the second-control-activation criteria, as shown in FIGS.  5 C 21  and  5 C 23 ). For example, the first control region moves in a simulated z direction by an amount that is based on the intensity of the first input as a hint that the first control region is sensitive to intensity-based inputs. Displaying an animation of a control region in accordance with a change in intensity of a corresponding contact provides improved feedback which enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by making the device appear more responsive to user input and helping the user to achieve an intended outcome with the required inputs) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     It should be understood that the particular order in which the operations in  FIGS. 11A-11E  have been described is merely an example and is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations could be performed. One of ordinary skill in the art would recognize various ways to reorder the operations described herein. Additionally, it should be noted that details of other processes described herein with respect to other methods described herein (e.g., methods  600 ,  700 ,  800 ,  900 ,  1000 ,  1050 ,  1200 ,  1300 ,  1400 ,  1500 ,  1600 ,  1800 , and  1900 ) are also applicable in an analogous manner to method  1100  described above with respect to  FIGS. 11A-11E . For example, the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, application views, control panels, controls, position thresholds, directional conditions, navigation criteria, movement parameters, thresholds, determinations, focus selectors, and/or animations described above with reference to method  1100  optionally have one or more of the characteristics of the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, position thresholds, application views, control panels, controls, directional conditions, navigation criteria, movement parameters, thresholds, determinations, focus selectors, and/or animations described herein with reference to other methods described herein (e.g., methods  600 ,  700 ,  800 ,  900 ,  1000 ,  1050 ,  1200 ,  1300 ,  1400 ,  1500 ,  1600 ,  1800 , and  1900 ). For brevity, these details are not repeated here. 
     The operations in the information processing methods described above are, optionally implemented by running one or more functional modules in information processing apparatus such as general purpose processors (e.g., as described above with respect to  FIGS. 1A and 3 ) or application specific chips. 
     The operations described above with reference to  FIGS. 11A-11E  are, optionally, implemented by components depicted in  FIGS. 1A-1B . For example, display operation  1102 , detection operation  1104 , and replace/activate operation  1106  are, optionally, implemented by event sorter  170 , event recognizer  180 , and event handler  190 . Event monitor  171  in event sorter  170  detects a contact on touch-sensitive display  112 , and event dispatcher module  174  delivers the event information to application  136 - 1 . A respective event recognizer  180  of application  136 - 1  compares the event information to respective event definitions  186 , and determines whether a first contact at a first location on the touch-sensitive surface (or whether rotation of the device) corresponds to a predefined event or sub-event, such as selection of an object on a user interface, or rotation of the device from one orientation to another. When a respective predefined event or sub-event is detected, event recognizer  180  activates an event handler  190  associated with the detection of the event or sub-event. Event handler  190  optionally uses or calls data updater  176  or object updater  177  to update the application internal state  192 . In some embodiments, event handler  190  accesses a respective GUI updater  178  to update what is displayed by the application. Similarly, it would be clear to a person having ordinary skill in the art how other processes can be implemented based on the components depicted in  FIGS. 1A-1B . 
       FIGS. 12A-12I  are flow diagrams illustrating a method  1200  of displaying and editing a control panel user interface, in accordance with some embodiments. The method  1200  is performed at an electronic device (e.g., device  300 ,  FIG. 3 , or portable multifunction device  100 ,  FIG. 1A ) with a display and a touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the electronic device includes one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the touch-sensitive surface and the display are integrated into a touch-sensitive display. In some embodiments, the display is a touch-screen display and the touch-sensitive surface is on or integrated with the display. In some embodiments, the display is separate from the touch-sensitive surface. Some operations in method  1200  are, optionally, combined and/or the order of some operations is, optionally, changed. 
     Method  1200  relates to providing options for a user to manage which control functions appear in a control panel user interface of a device. Specifically, the device displays the control panel user interface in a first configuration setting which includes a subset of selected control affordances. After displaying the control panel user interface and in response to a user input, the device displays a control panel settings interface which displays representations of the selected control affordances, as well as representations of unselected control affordances (e.g., control affordances that were not displayed in the first configuration of the control panel user interface). In response to detecting user selection of an unselected control affordance (e.g., a user input that changes the selection state for a control affordance from unselected to selected), and in further response to another user input for once again opening up the control panel user interface, the device displays the control panel user interface in a second configuration which includes the recently selected control affordance. Allowing the user to select which control affordances appear in the control panel user interface provides a customizable user interface that allows the user to decide which controls can be easily accessible. Providing customizable control accessibility enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by providing easy access to key control functions of the device and by helping the user to achieve an intended outcome with fewer required inputs, and thereby reducing the number of inputs needed to interact with desired controls) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     Method  1200  is performed at an electronic device with a display and a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a touch-screen display that serves both as the display and the touch-sensitive surface). The device displays ( 1202 ) a first user interface (e.g., the home screen user interface, a lock screen user interface, a wake screen user interface, a user interface that displays missed notifications, an application user interface, a mini widget screen user interface) on the display (e.g., lock screen user interface  5502  in FIG.  5 C 1 , home screen user interface  5512  in FIG.  5 C 4 , application user interface  5520  in FIG.  5 C 7 , or multitasking user interface  5526  in FIG.  5 C 10 ). While displaying the first user interface, the device detects ( 1204 ) a first input (e.g., as shown in FIGS.  5 C 2 ,  5 C 5 ,  5 C 8 , and  5 C 11 ). In response to detecting the first input, the device displays ( 1206 ) a control panel user interface in a first configuration (e.g., control panel user interface  5518 , FIG.  5 D 1 ). As used herein, the configuration of the control panel user interface refers to the number, type, and arrangement of controls in the control panel user interface, and not to the value, setting, or state of a given control. The control panel user interface in the first configuration includes a first set of control affordances in a first region of the control panel user interface (e.g., a customizable region that is distinct from a preconfigured, non-customizable region of the control panel user interface) that correspond to respective functions of the device (e.g., the first set of control affordances includes a control module for controlling a set of peripherals of the device, a WiFi control affordance for controlling a WiFi connection of the device, a brightness slider for controlling brightness of the display, a control module for controlling media playback on the device, application launch icons for a set of frequently used applications, including a camera app, a flashlight app, a calculator app, etc.), and a first subset of the first set of control affordances are not user-configurable (e.g., control affordances such as airplane mode icon  5542 , cellular data icon  5544 , Wi-Fi icon  5546 , Bluetooth icon  5548 , audio control  5622 , orientation lock icon  5624 , Do Not Disturb icon  5626 , AirPlay icon  5628 , brightness control  5630 , and volume control  5632  of control panel user interface  5518  in FIG.  5 D 1  are not user-configurable) and a second subset of the first set of control affordances are user-configurable (e.g., control affordances such as flashlight icon  5600 , timer icon  5602 , calculator icon  5604 , and camera icon  5606  of control panel user interface  5518  in FIG.  5 D 1  are user-configurable). In some embodiments, the control panel user interface in a given configuration is overlaid on top of the first user interface, fully or partially obscuring the first user interface (e.g., a blurred version or other versions of the first user interface with an altered appearance). after displaying the control panel user interface in the first configuration (e.g., after dismissing the control panel user interface with the first configuration and returning to the home screen user interface), the device detects ( 1208 ) a second input (e.g., detecting selection of application launch icon for a settings application on the home screen, such as a tap gesture by contact  5642  on settings icon  446  in FIG.  5 D 4 ). In response to detecting the second input (and optionally, additional inputs to navigate to the desired settings user interface), the device displays ( 1210 ) a control panel settings user interface (e.g., control panel settings user interface  5648 , FIG.  5 D 7 ) (and ceases to display the home screen user interface), wherein the control panel settings user interface (concurrently) displays: representations of the second subset of the first set of control affordances in a selected state (e.g., flashlight module, timer module, calculator module, and camera module in control panel settings user interface  5648 , FIG.  5 D 7 ) without displaying the first subset of the first set of control affordances in the selected state; and representations of a second set of control affordances, distinct from the first set of control affordances, in an unselected state (e.g., Home module and accessibility module in control panel settings user interface  5648 , FIG.  5 D 7 ), wherein control affordances that correspond to representations of the second set of control affordances are not included (e.g., not displayed) in the control panel user interface in the first configuration (e.g., control panel user interface  5518  in FIG.  5 D 1 ). In some embodiments, the second subset of control affordances (that are user-configurable) are displayed in a first list of control affordances that are currently selected for display in the control panel user interface (e.g., in the “Selected Modules” list of FIG.  5 D 7 ), where the first list is editable and the first subset of controls are not included in the editable first list (e.g., representations of the first subset of control affordances are included in a non-editable list that is distinct from the first list). In some embodiments, each representation of a control affordance in the second subset of control affordances has a corresponding toggle selection control set to the “ON” state. In some embodiments, the first subset of the first set of control affordances are not displayed in the control panel settings user interface (e.g., as shown in FIG.  5 D 7 ). In some embodiments, the first subset of the first set of control affordances are displayed in the control panel settings user interface, but their selection states are not editable (e.g., their corresponding toggle selection controls are grayed out, or they do not have corresponding toggle selection controls). In some embodiments, the representations of the second set of control affordances are included in a second list of control affordances that are not currently included in the control panel user interface (e.g., in the “More Modules” list of FIG.  5 D 7 ) but are available to be included in the configurable portion(s) of the control panel user interface. In some embodiments, each representation of a control affordance in the second set of control affordances has a corresponding toggle selection control in the “OFF” state. While displaying the control panel settings user interface, the device detects ( 1212 ) one or more configuration inputs, including detecting a third input that changes a selection state for a representation of a first control affordance (e.g., Home module, FIG.  5 D 8 ) in the second set of control affordances from the unselected state to the selected state (e.g., such as a tap gesture by contact  5650  on the “+” selection control for the Home module, FIG.  5 D 8 ) (e.g., the third input drags the representation of the first control affordance from the second list to the first list, or toggles the selection control corresponding to the representation of the first control affordance from the “OFF” state to the “ON” state). After detecting the third input that changes the selection state for the representation of the first control affordance from the unselected state to the selected state, the device detects ( 1214 ) a fourth input (e.g., such as a tap gesture by contact  5652  on the “Done” icon of control panel settings user interface  5648 , FIG.  5 D 10 ). In response to detecting the fourth input, the device displays ( 1216 ) (e.g., in accordance with a determination that the selection state of the first control affordance has been changed from the unselected state to the selected state in the control panel settings user interface) the control panel user interface in a second configuration (e.g., control panel user interface  5518  in FIG.  5 D 11 ) that is distinct from the first configuration (e.g., control panel user interface  5518  in FIG.  5 D 1 ), wherein the control panel user interface in the second configuration includes the first control affordance (e.g., control panel user interface  5518  in FIG.  5 D 11  includes Home icon  5608 ) (and any other control affordances of the first set of control affordances that are also in the selected state in the control panel settings user interface) in the first region of the control panel user interface. 
     In some embodiments, detecting the one or more configuration inputs includes ( 1218 ) detecting a fifth input that changes the selection state for a representation of a second control affordance in the second subset of the first set of control affordances from the selected state to the unselected state (e.g., an input dragging the representation of the second control affordance from the first list to the second list, or an input that changes the toggle selection control corresponding to the representation of the second control affordance from the “ON” state to the “OFF” state), and displaying the control panel user interface in the second configuration includes excluding the second control affordance from the control panel user interface in the second configuration (e.g., in accordance with a determination that the selection state of the second control affordance has been changed from the selected state to the unselected state in the control panel settings user interface). Allowing the user to select which control affordances appear in the control panel user interface provides a customizable user interface that allows the user to decide which controls can be easily accessible and enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by providing easy access to key control functions of the device and by helping the user to achieve an intended outcome with fewer required inputs, and thereby reducing the number of inputs needed to interact with desired controls) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, the control panel user interface in the first configuration displays ( 1220 ) a third control affordance and a fourth control affordance of the first set of control affordances in a first order (e.g., as shown in FIG.  5 D 12 ) in accordance with an order of the representations of the first set of control affordances in the control panel settings user interface (e.g., the order of the first set of control affordances in the first list before the one or more configuration inputs are detected), detecting the one or more configuration inputs includes detecting a sixth input that reorders representations of the third control affordance and the fourth control affordance in the control panel settings user interface (e.g., as shown in FIGS.  5 D 24 - 5 D 25 ), and displaying the control panel user interface in the second configuration includes displays the third control affordance and the fourth control affordance in a second order that is different from the first order (e.g., as shown in FIG.  5 D 27 , where Apple TV remote icon  5612  has been moved) (e.g., in accordance with a current order of the representations of the control affordances that are currently included in the first list). In some embodiments, some of the first set of control affordances are fixed in position, and the device does not move representations of these fixed control affordances from the first list to the second list, or reorder the representations of these fixed control affordances relative to other control affordances in the first list. In some embodiments, the device allows the user to reorder the fixed control affordances among themselves, e.g., within the first row of the configurable region of the control panel user interface. Allowing the user to rearrange the order of control affordances in the control panel user interface provides a customizable user interface that enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by providing easy access to key control functions of the device and by helping the user to achieve an intended outcome with fewer required inputs, and thereby reducing the number of inputs needed to interact with desired controls) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, the control panel user interface (e.g., the control panel user interface with the first configuration) displays ( 1222 ) an accessibility control affordance (e.g., accessibility icon  5610 , FIG.  5 D 27 ), and the method includes: while displaying the accessibility control affordance in the control panel user interface, detecting an input associated with the accessibility control affordance, including detecting a contact on the touch-sensitive surface at a location that corresponds to the accessibility control affordance (e.g., such as a press gesture by contact  5670 , FIG.  5 D 28 ); in response to detecting the input associated with the accessibility control affordance: in accordance with a determination that control-expansion criteria are met by the input associated with the accessibility control affordance (e.g., the control-expansion criteria require that a change in intensity of the contact in the input associated with the accessibility control affordance exceeds a first intensity threshold (e.g., the control-expansion criteria are met by a press input that meets intensity activation criteria (e.g., a press input by a contact with a characteristic intensity that is above the light press intensity threshold IT L ), as shown in FIGS.  5 D 28 - 5 D 29 ) or that the contact in the input associated with the accessibility control affordance is maintained for at least a threshold amount of time (e.g., the control-expansion criteria are met by a long-press input by the contact) in order for the control-expansion criteria to be met), displaying a plurality of selectable control options that corresponds to the accessibility control affordance (e.g., displaying an expanded menu that includes selectable options that correspond to a plurality of accessibility control functions, such as a contrast enhancement function, a noise cancelation function, a magnification function, etc., as shown in FIG.  5 D 29 ). In some embodiments, the device selects one or more of the plurality of selectable control options in response to one or more selection inputs received from the user (e.g., as shown in FIGS.  5 D 30 - 5 D 31 ). In some embodiments, only one of the selectable control options can be selected at any time, and a new selection of one selectable control option cancels the selection of an existing selection of another selectable control option. In accordance with a determination that control-toggle criteria are met by the input associated with the accessibility control affordance (e.g., such as a tap gesture by contact  5678 , FIG.  5 D 34 ) wherein the control-toggle criteria require that one of a plurality of selectable options corresponding to the accessibility control affordance is currently selected when the input associated with the accessibility control affordance is detected in order for the control-toggle criteria to be met (e.g., this condition is met when the option for the contrast enhancement function is currently selected or when the option for the reduce white point function is currently selected, as shown in FIG.  5 D 32 ), toggling a control function that corresponds to the currently selected control option (e.g., if the contrast enhancement function is the currently selected option, the contrast enhancement function is toggled on or off by the tap input on the accessibility control affordance, depending on whether the contrast enhancement function is currently on or off). In the example of FIGS.  5 D 31 - 5 D 35 , the reduce white point function is currently selected and the tap input by contact  5678  in FIG.  5 D 34  toggles the reduce white point function off. In some embodiments, the control-toggle criteria do not require that a change in intensity of the contact in the input associated with the accessibility control affordance exceeds the first intensity threshold or that the contact in the input associated with the accessibility control affordance is maintained for at least the threshold amount of time in order for the control-toggle criteria to be met (e.g., the control-toggle criteria are met by a tap input by the contact, when one of the selectable options corresponding to the accessibility control affordance is currently selected). In some embodiments, if none of the plurality of selectable options that correspond to the accessibility control affordance is currently selected, tapping on the accessibility control affordance does not toggle any control function. In some embodiments, if none of the plurality of selectable options that correspond to the accessibility control affordance is currently selected, tapping on the accessibility control affordance causes the plurality of selectable options to be displayed, so that the user can select one or more of the selectable options. In some embodiments, if more than one of the plurality of selectable options that correspond to the accessibility control affordance are currently selected, tapping on the accessibility control affordance causes the plurality of selectable options to be displayed. In some embodiments, if more than one of the plurality of selectable options that correspond to the accessibility control affordance are currently selected, tapping on the accessibility control affordance toggles the most recently selected option among the currently selected options. Allowing the user to expand a control affordance (to display additional controls and/or information) or to toggle a control function based on variations in the detected input enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by providing additional functions without cluttering up the display with additional controls, reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device, and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, the control panel user interface (e.g., the control panel user interface with the first configuration) displays ( 1224 ) a TV remote control affordance (e.g., Apple TV remote icon  5612 , FIG.  5 D 36 ). While displaying the TV remote control affordance in the control panel user interface, the device detects an input associated with the TV remote control affordance, including detecting a contact on the touch-sensitive surface at a location that corresponds to the TV remote control affordance. In response to detecting the input associated with the TV remote control affordance: in accordance with a determination that control-expansion criteria are met by the input associated with the TV remote control affordance (e.g., the control-expansion criteria require that a change in intensity of the contact in the input associated with the TV remote control affordance exceeds a first intensity threshold (e.g., the control-expansion criteria are met by a press input that meets intensity activation criteria (e.g., a press input by a contact with a characteristic intensity that is above the light press intensity threshold IT L ), such as a press gesture by contact  5688  as shown in FIGS.  5 D 36  and  5 D 42 ) or that the contact in the input associated with the TV remote control affordance is maintained for at least a threshold amount of time (e.g., the control-expansion criteria are met by a long-press input by the contact) in order for the control-expansion criteria to be met), the device displays a navigation region for navigating a focus selector in accordance with movement of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., displaying a trackpad that navigates a focus selector around a locally or remotely displayed user interface in accordance with movement of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., within the displayed trackpad on a touchscreen display)) (e.g., as shown in FIG.  5 D 42 ). In some embodiments, the navigation region that is displayed on the display of the electronic device (e.g., a mobile telephony device or a tablet device) is also displayed (e.g., replicated) on a remote display device (e.g., a television set, or a computer monitor) that is coupled to the electronic device through a networking device (e.g., a media console, a set-top box, a router, etc.). In some embodiments, the navigation region that is displayed on the display of the electronic device is mapped to a user interface (e.g., a user interface with a navigable menu and various control affordances, e.g., for selecting media programs and controlling playback of the media programs) that is concurrently displayed on the remote display device, such that a location of the focus selector at the electronic device corresponds to a location in the user interface displayed at the remote display device, and an input detected in the navigation region displayed at the electronic device is treated as an input directed to a corresponding region in the user interface displayed at the remote display device. In accordance with a determination that function-activation criteria are met by the input associated with the TV remote control affordance (e.g., the function-activation criteria do not require that a change in intensity of the contact in the input associated with the TV remote control affordance exceeds the first intensity threshold or that the contact in the input associated with the TV remote control affordance is maintained for at least the threshold amount of time in order for the function-activation criteria to be met (e.g., the function-activation criteria are met by a tap input by the contact)), the device displays a user interface of an application that corresponds to the TV remote control affordance (e.g., launching the TV remote application that optionally includes a navigation region for navigating the focus selector and/or one or more virtual buttons that simulate functionality of buttons on a hardware remote for the locally or remotely displayed user interface). Allowing the user to expand a control affordance (to display a navigation region for navigating around a locally or remotely displayed device) or to activate a control function based on variations in the detected input enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, the control panel user interface (e.g., the control panel user interface with the first configuration) displays ( 1226 ) a text-size control affordance (e.g., type size icon  5614 , FIG.  5 D 36 ). While displaying the text-size control affordance in the control panel user interface, the device detects an input associated with the text-size control affordance that meets control-expansion criteria (including detecting a contact on the touch-sensitive surface at a location that corresponds to the text-size control affordance, and that a change in intensity of the contact in the input associated with the text-size control affordance exceeds a first intensity threshold (e.g., such as a press gesture by contact  5682 , FIG.  5 D 36 ) (e.g., the control-expansion criteria are met by a press input that meets intensity activation criteria (e.g., a press input by a contact with a characteristic intensity that is above the light press intensity threshold IT L )) or that the contact in the input associated with the text-size control affordance is maintained for at least a threshold amount of time (e.g., the control-expansion criteria are met by a long-press input by the contact). In response to detecting the input associated with the text-size control affordance that meets the control-expansion criteria: in accordance with a determination that an associated toggle control function (e.g., the toggle function of the accessibility control affordance) of the text-size control affordance is in a first state (e.g., the accessibility control is in an “OFF” state), displaying a first set of selectable options corresponding to the text-size control affordance (e.g., as shown in FIG.  5 D 38 ) (e.g., displaying a first number of text sizes ranging from a first minimum size to a first maximum size (e.g., 8 pt, 10 pt, 12 pt, 16 pt, 20 pt, and 24 pt)). In accordance with a determination that the associated toggle control function (e.g., the toggle function of the accessibility control affordance) of the text-size control affordance is in a second state (e.g., the accessibility control is in an “ON” state), displaying a second set of selectable options corresponding to the text-size control affordance that are distinct from the first set of selectable options (e.g., as shown in FIG.  5 D 39 ) (e.g., displaying a partially overlapping set of selectable options that are biased toward the top half of the first set of selectable options) (e.g., displaying a second number of text sizes ranging from a second minimum size to a second maximum size (e.g., 12 pt, 16 pt, 24 pt, 36 pt, and 48 pt)). For example, when the accessibility control is turned on, the set of text sizes that is provided is mainly focused on assisting the user to see the text (and hence sizes are larger and gaps between sizes are wider) and when the accessibility control is turned off, the set of text sizes that is provided is mainly focused on allowing the user to choose an aesthetically pleasing visual appearance for the text (and hence the sizes are not very large, and the gaps between sizes are finer). Expanding a text-size control affordance to display a first set of selectable options corresponding to text size if the accessibility control is OFF and displaying a second set of selectable options corresponding to text size if the accessibility control is ON enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by providing customized options to help the user choose an aesthetically pleasing visual appearance for the text or assisting the user to see the text, reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device, and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, the control panel user interface (e.g., the control panel user interface with the first configuration) displays ( 1228 ) a low power mode control affordance (e.g., low power mode icon  5616 , FIG.  5 D 12 ). While displaying the low power mode control affordance in the control panel user interface, the device detects an input associated with the low power mode control affordance, including detecting a contact on the touch-sensitive surface at a location that corresponds to the low power mode control affordance. In response to detecting the input associated with the low power mode control affordance: in accordance with a determination that the input associated with the low power mode control affordance meets control-expansion criteria (e.g., in accordance with a determination that a change in intensity of the contact in the input associated with the low power mode control affordance exceeds a first intensity threshold (e.g., the control-expansion criteria are met by a press input that meets intensity activation criteria (e.g., a press input by a contact with a characteristic intensity that is above the light press intensity threshold IT L )) or that the contact in the input associated with the low power mode control affordance is maintained for at least a threshold amount of time (e.g., the control-expansion criteria are met by a long-press input by the contact)), the device displays a respective settings user interface for controlling a power mode of the electronic device (e.g., launching the settings application and displaying the settings page for the low power mode in the settings application). The lower power mode temporarily reduces power consumption until the phone is fully charged or connected to a charger. In some embodiments, when the low power mode is on, certain functions of the device (e.g., voice-activated digital assistant, background application refresh, automatic downloads, and certain visual effects) are reduced or turned off. In some embodiments, the settings user interface for the low power mode includes a toggle control for turning the low power mode on and off. In some embodiments, the settings user interface for the low power mode displays a list of applications with their corresponding power consumption statistics. In some embodiments, the list of applications also each includes a toggle control for turning off the corresponding application when the low power mode is turned on. In accordance with a determination that the input associated with the low power mode control affordance meets control-toggle criteria (e.g., the control-toggle criteria are met by a tap input by the contact), the device toggles a state of the power mode of the electronic device (e.g., the low power mode is toggled on or off by the tap input on the low power control affordance, depending on whether the low power mode is currently on or off). In some embodiments, the low power mode control affordance is a toggle control and the toggle state of the toggle control corresponds to the ON/OFF state of the low power mode. Allowing the user to expand a control affordance (to display additional controls and/or information) or to toggle a control function based on variations in the detected input enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by providing additional functions without cluttering up the display with additional controls, reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device, and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, the control panel user interface (e.g., the control panel user interface with the first configuration) displays ( 1230 ) a car mode control affordance (e.g., CarPlay icon  5618 , FIG.  5 D 12 ). When the car mode control affordance is in a first state (e.g., toggled OFF), a first set of functions are provided on a lock screen user interface of the electronic device (e.g., the first set of functions is a subset, less than all, of the functions that would be available on the device when the device is unlocked). The first set of functions is a restricted set of functions that is made available on the lock screen due to privacy concerns for the user. When the car mode control affordance is in a second state (e.g., toggled ON), a second set of functions are provided on the lock screen user interface of the electronic device, wherein the second set of functions include the first set of functions and one or more additional functions that are not available on the lock screen user interface when the car mode control affordance is in the first state. In some embodiments, a tap input on the car mode control affordance launches the settings application and displays a car mode settings page, or launches a third-party car-mode application and displays a user interface of the third-party car-mode application for controlling audio connections between the device and a vehicle. In some embodiments, the first set of functions that are available on the lock screen user interface when the car mode is off include limited application functions that are restricted due to privacy protection for the user (e.g., limited ability to view full content and to perform destructive, irreversible actions (e.g., deletion of information, etc.)). In some embodiments, the second set of functions that are available on the lock screen user interface when the car mode is on include limited application functions that are aimed to reduce distractions to the driver during vehicle navigation (e.g., limited text messaging functions (e.g., voice-based outgoing messages only), limited user interface navigation using touch inputs (e.g., text entry is disabled, and only voice commands are used for user interface navigation), and certain applications with heavy visual content and extensive interactions (e.g., web browsing, etc.) are disabled, etc.). The second set of functions represents a further restriction on the first set of functions based on the modes of interaction (e.g., input and output modes), rather than the availability of content and the types of ultimate tasks (e.g., sending a message, learning the content of a received message, learning the content of a calendar event, performing a search, starting map navigation to a destination, etc.) that can be accomplished. In some embodiments, the second set of functions also include additional functionalities that are available to better facilitate the user in using the device under the additional restrictions on the modes of interaction, such as hands-free menu navigation, auto-activation of dictation and narration for text messaging, etc. Providing a first set of functions on a lock screen user interface when a car mode control affordance is OFF and providing a second set of functions on the lock screen user interface when the car mode control affordance is ON enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to better use the device under driving conditions and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, the control panel user interface (e.g., the control panel user interface with the first configuration) displays ( 1232 ) a Do Not Disturb mode control affordance (e.g., Do Not Disturb icon  5626 , FIG.  5 D 36 ). While displaying the Do Not Disturb mode control affordance in the control panel user interface, the device detects an input associated with the Do Not Disturb mode control affordance, including detecting a contact on the touch-sensitive surface at a location that corresponds to the Do Not Disturb mode control affordance. In response to detecting the input associated with the Do Not Disturb mode control affordance: in accordance with a determination that the input associated with the Do Not Disturb mode control affordance meets control-expansion criteria (e.g., such as a press gesture by contact  5680  in FIGS.  5 D 36 - 5 D 37 ) (e.g., in accordance with a determination that a change in intensity of the contact in the input associated with the Do Not Disturb mode control affordance exceeds a first intensity threshold (e.g., the control-expansion criteria are met by a press input that meets intensity activation criteria (e.g., a press input by a contact with a characteristic intensity that is above the light press intensity threshold IT L )) or that the contact in the input associated with the Do Not Disturb mode control affordance is maintained for at least a threshold amount of time (e.g., the control-expansion criteria are met by a long-press input by the contact)), the device displays a plurality of selectable options (e.g., in a zoomed view of the control affordance) that correspond to a Do Not Disturb mode of the electronic device (e.g., enhanced Do Not Disturb control  5690 , FIG.  5 D 37 ) (e.g., the plurality of selectable options include options that specify different amounts of time that the “Do Not Disturb” function are to be turned on (or off), and an option that specifies a location-based criterion for turning on (or off) the “Do Not Disturb” mode (e.g., “Turn on Do Not Disturb mode until I leave this location” or “Turn off Do Not Disturb mode until I arrive at the Office”)). In accordance with a determination that the input associated with the Do Not Disturb mode control affordance meets control-toggle criteria (e.g., the control-toggle criteria are met by a tap input by the contact), the device toggles a state of the Do Not Disturb mode of the electronic device (e.g., the Do Not Disturb mode is toggled on or off by the tap input on the Do Not Disturb control affordance, depending on whether the Do Not Disturb mode is currently on or off). In some embodiments, the Do Not Disturb mode control affordance is a toggle control and the toggle state of the toggle control corresponds to the ON/OFF state of the Do Not Disturb mode. Allowing the user to expand a control affordance (to display additional controls and/or information) or to toggle a control function based on variations in the detected input enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by providing additional functions without cluttering up the display with additional controls, reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device, and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, the control panel user interface (e.g., the control panel user interface with the first configuration) displays ( 1234 ) a WiFi connection control affordance (e.g., Wi-Fi icon  5546 , FIG.  5 C 29 ). While displaying the WiFi connection control affordance in the control panel user interface (or in an expanded control region, as shown in FIG.  5 C 29 ), detecting an input associated with the WiFi connection control affordance, including detecting a contact on the touch-sensitive surface at a location that corresponds to the WiFi connection control affordance. In response to detecting the input associated with the WiFi connection control affordance: in accordance with a determination that the input associated with the WiFi connection control affordance meets control-expansion criteria (e.g., such as a press input by contact  5564 , FIGS.  5 C 30 - 5 C 31 ) (e.g., in accordance with a determination that a change in intensity of the contact in the input associated with the WiFi connection control affordance exceeds a first intensity threshold (e.g., the control-expansion criteria are met by a press input that meets intensity activation criteria (e.g., a press input by a contact with a characteristic intensity that is above the light press intensity threshold IT L )) or that the contact in the input associated with the WiFi connection control affordance is maintained for at least a threshold amount of time (e.g., the control-expansion criteria are met by a long-press input by the contact)), the device displays a plurality of selectable options (e.g., enhanced Wi-Fi control  5566 , FIG.  5 C 31 ) (e.g., in a zoomed view of the control affordance) that correspond to a WiFi connection of the electronic device (e.g., including options corresponding to different WiFi networks that are detected by the device, options to disconnect from a currently connected WiFi network based on a scheduled time (e.g., connect to this network after 5 pm) and/or based on a location-based criterion (e.g., “leave this network when I leave this location”), and an option to open the WiFi settings page in a settings application, or to launch a third-party application for controlling the WiFi settings). In accordance with a determination that the input associated with the WiFi connection control affordance meets control-toggle criteria (e.g., such as a tap input by contact  5570 , FIG.  5 C 35 ) (e.g., the control-toggle criteria are met by a tap input by the contact), the device toggles a state of the WiFi connection of the electronic device (e.g., WiFi connection is toggled on or off by the tap input on the WiFi connection control affordance, depending on whether WiFi connection is currently on or off) (e.g., as shown in FIGS.  5 C 35 - 5 C 36 ). In some embodiments, the WiFi connection control affordance is a toggle control and the toggle state of the toggle control corresponds to the ON/OFF state of WiFi connection at the electronic device. In some embodiments, toggling the state of the WiFi connection includes turning WiFi capabilities of the device on/off. In some embodiments, toggling the state of the WiFi connection includes disconnecting from currently connected WiFi access points/networks without turning WiFi capabilities of the device off and, optionally, setting a time based or location based criteria for attempting to reconnect to nearby WiFi access points/networks. Allowing the user to expand a control affordance (to display additional controls and/or information) or to toggle a control function based on variations in the detected input enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by providing additional functions without cluttering up the display with additional controls, reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device, and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, the control panel user interface (e.g., the control panel user interface with the first configuration) displays ( 1236 ) a Bluetooth connection control affordance (e.g., Bluetooth icon  5548 , FIG.  5 C 41 ), While displaying the Bluetooth connection control affordance in the control panel user interface (or in an expanded control region, as shown in FIG.  5 C 41 ), the device detects an input associated with the Bluetooth connection control affordance, including detecting a contact on the touch-sensitive surface at a location that corresponds to the Bluetooth connection control affordance. In response to detecting the input associated with the Bluetooth connection control affordance: in accordance with a determination that the input associated with the Bluetooth connection control affordance meets control-expansion criteria (e.g., such as a press input by contact  5576  in FIGS.  5 C 42 - 5 C 43 ) (e.g., in accordance with a determination that a change in intensity of the contact in the input associated with the Bluetooth connection control affordance exceeds a first intensity threshold (e.g., the control-expansion criteria are met by a press input that meets intensity activation criteria (e.g., a press input by a contact with a characteristic intensity that is above the light press intensity threshold IT L )) or that the contact in the input associated with the Bluetooth connection control affordance is maintained for at least a threshold amount of time (e.g., the control-expansion criteria are met by a long-press input by the contact)), the device displays a plurality of selectable options (e.g., in enhanced Bluetooth control  5580 , FIG.  5 C 43 ) (e.g., in a zoomed view of the control affordance) that correspond to a Bluetooth connection of the electronic device (e.g., including options corresponding to different Bluetooth devices that are detected by the device, options to disconnect from a currently connected Bluetooth based on a scheduled time (e.g., “connect to this device after 5 pm”) and/or based on a location-based criterion (e.g., “disconnect this device when I leave this location”), and an option to open the Bluetooth settings page in a settings application, or to launch a third-party application for controlling the Bluetooth settings). In accordance with a determination that the input associated with the Bluetooth connection control affordance meets control-toggle criteria (e.g., such as a tap input by contact  5572 , FIG.  5 C 37 ) (e.g., the control-toggle criteria are met by a tap input by the contact), the device toggles a state of the Bluetooth connection of the electronic device (e.g., as shown in FIGS.  5 C 37 - 5 C 38 ) (e.g., Bluetooth connection is toggled on or off by the tap input on the Bluetooth connection control affordance, depending on whether Bluetooth connection is currently on or off). In some embodiments, the Bluetooth connection control affordance is a toggle control and the toggle state of the toggle control corresponds to the ON/OFF state of Bluetooth connection at the electronic device. In some embodiments, when the Bluetooth control affordance is toggled by a tap input, if a wireless device is currently connected to the device via a Bluetooth connection (e.g., the Bluetooth control affordance is currently in the “ON” state), the device generates an alert to the user, such as “Bluetooth device currently connected, do you want to leave Bluetooth on?” or “Bluetooth device currently connected, are you sure you want to turn off Bluetooth?” In some embodiments, if no additional input changing the previously received toggle input within a threshold amount of time, the device turns off Bluetooth on the device. In some embodiments, toggling the state of the Bluetooth connection includes turning Bluetooth capabilities of the device on/off. In some embodiments toggling the state of the Bluetooth connection includes disconnecting from currently connected Bluetooth devices without turning Bluetooth capabilities of the device off and, optionally, setting a time based or location based criteria for attempting to reconnect to nearby Bluetooth devices that have been paired to the device. Allowing the user to expand a control affordance (to display additional controls and/or information) or to toggle a control function based on variations in the detected input enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by providing additional functions without cluttering up the display with additional controls, reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device, and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, the control panel user interface (e.g., the control panel user interface with the first configuration) displays ( 1238 ) an airplane mode control affordance (e.g., airplane mode icon  5542 , FIG.  5 D 1 ) that, when activated by an input that meets control toggle criteria (e.g., a tap input) toggles an ON/OFF state of an airplane mode of the electronic device. While the airplane mode is off at a first time (e.g., the airplane mode control affordance is in the OFF state), the device detects a first input associated with the airplane mode control affordance that turns on the airplane mode using the airplane mode control affordance. In response to detecting the first input associated with the airplane mode control affordance that turns on the airplane mode, the device turns on the airplane mode, including disabling a first set of network connections that are associated with the airplane mode (e.g., the first set of network connections include a default set of network connections (e.g., telephony, WiFi, and Bluetooth), or a previously stored, customized set of network connections (e.g., telephony only). While the airplane mode is on as a result of the first input associated with the airplane mode control affordance, the device detects one or more modification inputs that selectively enable a first subset of the first set of network connections (e.g., the user enables the WiFi connection manually using the WiFi connection control affordance in the control panel user interface). After detecting the one or more modification inputs (and while the airplane mode is turned on as a result of the first input associated with the airplane mode control affordance), the device detects a second input associated with the airplane mode control affordance that turns off the airplane mode. In response to detecting the second input associated with the airplane mode control affordance, the device turns off the airplane mode, including enabling a second subset of the first set of network connections that are distinct from the first subset of the first set of network connections (e.g., the telephony and Bluetooth connections are re-enabled, while the WiFi connection is already enabled). While the airplane mode is off at a second time as a result of the second input associated with the airplane mode control affordance, the device detects a third input associated with the airplane mode control affordance that turns on the airplane mode using the airplane mode control affordance. In response to detecting the third input associated with the airplane mode control affordance that turns on the airplane mode, the device turns on the airplane mode, including disabling the second subset of the first set of network connections without disabling the first subset of the first set of network connections (e.g., telephony and Bluetooth connections are disabled, and the WiFi connection stays enabled). In some embodiments, the control user interface includes an airplane mode control affordance that controls the enabled and disabled states of two or more types of network connections (e.g., WiFi, cellular, Bluetooth, etc.). Specifically, when the airplane mode is turned on, the two or more types of network connections are disabled by default; and when the airplane mode is turned off, the two or more types of network connections are enabled again. In some embodiments, the device also provides separate control affordances for controlling the enabled and disabled states of individual types of network connections (e.g., a WiFi control affordance for toggling the WiFi connection on and off, and a separate Bluetooth control affordance for toggling the Bluetooth connection on and off). In some embodiments, when the airplane mode is first turned on, all the connections that are controlled by the airplane mode are turned off (e.g., cellular connection, WiFi connection, Bluetooth connection, etc. are all turned off). If some of the connections controlled by the airplane mode also have separate control affordances, the appearance of those control affordances change to indicate that their corresponding connections have been turned off. While the airplane mode is turned on, if the device detects subsequent inputs that toggles one or more of the individual control affordances for connections that that are also controlled by the airplane mode, the device changes the connection states of those individual control affordances according to the subsequent inputs. When the airplane mode is turned on later, the current states of the connections that are controlled by the airplane mode are stored, such that, the next time that the airplane mode is turned on again, the connection states of the connections that are controlled by the airplane mode are set in accordance with the stored states of the connections. For example, if the user turns on the airplane mode, the device sets the states of the WiFi and Bluetooth connections to the last stored states for WiFi and Bluetooth (e.g., Bluetooth OFF and WiFi ON). While the airplane mode is on, the device detects user inputs to toggle the WiFi control affordance from ON to OFF and toggle the Bluetooth from OFF to ON. While the Bluetooth is ON and the WiFi is OFF, the device detects an input that turns off the airplane mode. In some circumstances, the user subsequently changes the toggle states of WiFi and Bluetooth in any number of configurations when the airplane mode is OFF. When the airplane mode is turned on again, regardless of the current states of the WiFi and Bluetooth control affordances, the device sets the states of the WiFi and Bluetooth connections to the stored states (e.g., Bluetooth ON and WiFi OFF). In some embodiments, when airplane mode is activated, the disconnection of WiFi and Bluetooth from paired devices (and/or the disabling of WiFi and Bluetooth) is momentarily delayed (e.g., for 1-15 seconds) to see if the user re-enables WiFi or Bluetooth. This delay ensures that peripherals that are closely linked to the functioning of the device (e.g., wirelessly connected headphones, or a wirelessly connected stylus) do not have to reconnect to the device if the user activates airplane mode and then selects WiFi and/or Bluetooth to be active during airplane mode. Storing the states of connections that are controlled by airplane mode and restoring the stored states of the connections the next time airplane mode is turned on enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, the control panel user interface (e.g., the control panel user interface with the first configuration) displays ( 1240 ) a screen recording control affordance. While displaying the screen recording control affordance in the control panel user interface, the device detects an input associated with the screen recording control affordance, including detecting a contact on the touch-sensitive surface at a location that corresponds to the screen recording control affordance. In response to detecting the input associated with the screen recording control affordance: in accordance with a determination that the input associated with the screen recording control affordance meets control-expansion criteria (e.g., in accordance with a determination that a change in intensity of the contact in the input associated with the screen recording control affordance exceeds a first intensity threshold (e.g., the control-expansion criteria are met by a press input that meets intensity activation criteria (e.g., a press input by a contact with a characteristic intensity that is above the light press intensity threshold IT L )) or that the contact in the input associated with the screen recording control affordance is maintained for at least a threshold amount of time (e.g., the control-expansion criteria are met by a long-press input by the contact)), the device displays a plurality of selectable options (e.g., in a zoomed view of the control affordance) that correspond to a screen recording function of the electronic device (e.g., including options for turning on/off screen recording, displaying a picture-in-picture view during screen recording, turning on/off the microphone during screen recording, selecting a location to store recorded content, selecting an app or service to use to broadcast recorded content, etc.). In accordance with a determination that the input associated with the screen recording control affordance meets control-toggle criteria (e.g., the control-toggle criteria are met by a tap input by the contact), toggling a start/stop state of the screen recording function of the electronic device (e.g., Screen recording is toggled on or off by the tap input on the screen recording control affordance, depending on whether screen recording is currently on or off). In some embodiments, the screen recording control affordance is a toggle control and the toggle state of the toggle control corresponds to the start/stop state of screen recording at the electronic device. Allowing the user to expand a control affordance (to display additional controls and/or information) or to toggle a control function based on variations in the detected input enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by providing additional functions without cluttering up the display with additional controls, reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device, and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, the control panel user interface (e.g., the control panel user interface with the first configuration) displays ( 1242 ) a hearing aid control affordance (e.g., hearing aid icon  5620 , FIG.  5 D 36 ). While displaying the hearing aid control affordance in the control panel user interface, the device detects an input associated with the hearing aid control affordance, including detecting a contact on the touch-sensitive surface at a location that corresponds to the hearing aid control affordance. In response to detecting the input associated with the hearing aid control affordance: in accordance with a determination that the input associated with the hearing aid control affordance meets control-expansion criteria (e.g., such as a press gesture by contact  5684 , FIGS.  5 D 36  and  5 D 40 ) (e.g., in accordance with a determination that a change in intensity of the contact in the input associated with the hearing aid control affordance exceeds a first intensity threshold (e.g., the control-expansion criteria are met by a press input that meets intensity activation criteria (e.g., a press input by a contact with a characteristic intensity that is above the light press intensity threshold IT L )) or that the contact in the input associated with the hearing aid control affordance is maintained for at least a threshold amount of time (e.g., the control-expansion criteria are met by a long-press input by the contact)), the device displays a plurality of selectable options (e.g., in enhanced hearing aid control  5694 , FIG.  5 D 40 ) (e.g., in a zoomed view of the control affordance) that correspond to a hearing aid function of the electronic device (e.g., including individual volume controls for each hearing aid, individual base/treble controls, battery indicators for each hearing aid, a left preset control, and a right preset control, etc.). In accordance with a determination that the input associated with the hearing aid control affordance meets control-toggle criteria (e.g., the control-toggle criteria are met by a tap input by the contact), toggling a state of a hearing aid device that is coupled to the electronic device (e.g., the hearing aid device is turned on or off). In some embodiments, the hearing aid control affordance is a toggle control and the toggle state of the toggle control corresponds to the ON/OFF state of the hearing aid device. Allowing the user to expand a control affordance (to display additional controls and/or information) or to toggle a control function based on variations in the detected input enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by providing additional functions without cluttering up the display with additional controls, reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device, and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     It should be understood that the particular order in which the operations in  FIGS. 12A-12I  have been described is merely an example and is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations could be performed. One of ordinary skill in the art would recognize various ways to reorder the operations described herein. Additionally, it should be noted that details of other processes described herein with respect to other methods described herein (e.g., methods  600 ,  700 ,  800 ,  900 ,  1000 ,  1050 ,  1100 ,  1300 ,  1400 ,  1500 ,  1600 ,  1800 , and  1900 ) are also applicable in an analogous manner to method  1200  described above with respect to  FIGS. 12A-12I . For example, the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, application views, control panels, controls, position thresholds, directional conditions, navigation criteria, movement parameters, thresholds, determinations, focus selectors, and/or animations described above with reference to method  1200  optionally have one or more of the characteristics of the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, application views, control panels, controls, position thresholds, directional conditions, navigation criteria, movement parameters, thresholds, determinations, focus selectors, and/or animations described herein with reference to other methods described herein (e.g., methods  600 ,  700 ,  800 ,  900 ,  1000 ,  1050 ,  1100 ,  1300 ,  1400 ,  1500 ,  1600 ,  1800 , and  1900 ). For brevity, these details are not repeated here. 
     The operations in the information processing methods described above are, optionally implemented by running one or more functional modules in information processing apparatus such as general purpose processors (e.g., as described above with respect to  FIGS. 1A and 3 ) or application specific chips. 
     The operations described above with reference to  FIGS. 12A-12I  are, optionally, implemented by components depicted in  FIGS. 1A-1B . For example, display operation  1202 , detection operation  1104 , display operation  1206 , detection operation  1208 , display operation  1210 , detection operations  1212  and  1214 , and display operation  1216  are, optionally, implemented by event sorter  170 , event recognizer  180 , and event handler  190 . Event monitor  171  in event sorter  170  detects a contact on touch-sensitive display  112 , and event dispatcher module  174  delivers the event information to application  136 - 1 . A respective event recognizer  180  of application  136 - 1  compares the event information to respective event definitions  186 , and determines whether a first contact at a first location on the touch-sensitive surface (or whether rotation of the device) corresponds to a predefined event or sub-event, such as selection of an object on a user interface, or rotation of the device from one orientation to another. When a respective predefined event or sub-event is detected, event recognizer  180  activates an event handler  190  associated with the detection of the event or sub-event. Event handler  190  optionally uses or calls data updater  176  or object updater  177  to update the application internal state  192 . In some embodiments, event handler  190  accesses a respective GUI updater  178  to update what is displayed by the application. Similarly, it would be clear to a person having ordinary skill in the art how other processes can be implemented based on the components depicted in  FIGS. 1A-1B . 
       FIGS. 13A-13D  are flow diagrams illustrating a method  1300  of displaying a control panel user interface with a slider control and, in response to different inputs on the slider control, changing the position of the slider or toggling the control function, in accordance with some embodiments. The method  1300  is performed at an electronic device (e.g., device  300 ,  FIG. 3 , or portable multifunction device  100 ,  FIG. 1A ) with a display and a touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the electronic device includes one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the touch-sensitive surface and the display are integrated into a touch-sensitive display. In some embodiments, the display is a touch-screen display and the touch-sensitive surface is on or integrated with the display. In some embodiments, the display is separate from the touch-sensitive surface. Some operations in method  1300  are, optionally, combined and/or the order of some operations is, optionally, changed. 
     Method  1300  relates to adjusting a control value for a slider control or toggling the control function that corresponds to the slider control in response to an input that meets different conditions. Allowing the user adjust a control value or to toggle a control function based on variations in the detected input enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     Method  1300  is performed at an electronic device with a display and a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a touch-screen display that serves both as the display and the touch-sensitive surface). The device displays ( 1302 ) a first user interface (e.g., a control panel user interface, such as control panel user interface  5518 , FIG.  5 E 1 ) that includes a slider control (e.g., a volume slider control, such as volume control  5632  in FIG.  5 E 1 , a brightness slider control, such as brightness control  5630  in FIG.  5 E 1 , etc.) on the display, wherein the slider control includes: respective indications of a plurality of control values for a control function that corresponds to the slider control (e.g., the mute/unmute function corresponds to the volume slider control, the flashlight on/off function corresponds to a flashlight brightness control, a timer on/off function corresponds to a timer control, etc.) including a maximum value, a minimum value, and one or more intermediate values between the maximum and minimum values (e.g., the values are ordered based on numerical values, or based on positions along the slider control), and an indicator that marks a currently selected control value among the plurality of control values (e.g., a linear slider control includes a linear track that represents a continuous range of values (or a sequence of discrete values marked by markers) between a maximum value and a minimum value, and a moveable indicator that is moveable along the linear track to select a control value by its position on the linear track; a radial slider control includes a circular range around a fixed center that represents a continuous range of values (or a sequence of discrete values marked by markers) between a maximum value and a minimum value (e.g., marked by the same location or slightly offset positions), and a rotatable indicator that is rotated around the fixed center of the circular range to select a control value by its position around the circular range). While displaying the slider control, the device detects ( 1304 ) an input by a contact, including detecting the contact on the touch-sensitive surface at a location that corresponds to the slider control in the first user interface (e.g., on brightness control  5630  in control panel user interface  5518 , FIG.  5 E 2 ). In response to detecting the input by the contact ( 1306 ): in accordance with a determination that the input meets control-adjustment criteria, wherein the control-adjustment criteria require that more than a threshold amount of movement of the contact across the touch-sensitive surface is detected in order for the control-adjustment criteria to be met (e.g., the control-adjustment criteria are met by a drag input on the indicator of the slider control, either immediately upon touch-down of the contact, or after a touch-hold time threshold has expired), the device changes a position of the indicator to indicate an update to the currently selected control value among the plurality of control values in accordance with the movement of the contact (e.g., as shown in FIGS.  5 E 2 - 5 E 3 ). In accordance with a determination that the input meets slider-toggle criteria, wherein the slider-toggle criteria require that lift-off of the contact is detected with less than the threshold amount of movement of the contact across the touch-sensitive surface in order for the slider-toggle criteria to be met (e.g., the slider-toggle criteria are met by a tap input on the slider control), the device toggles the control function that corresponds to the slider control (e.g., as shown in FIGS.  5 E 4 - 5 E 5  and in FIGS.  5 E 6 - 5 E 7 ) (e.g., the control function is toggled on while observing the currently selected control value, or the control function is toggled on with a default control value (e.g., a median, or maximum, or minimum value)). 
     In some embodiments, toggling the control function that corresponds to the slider control includes ( 1308 ) toggling the currently selected control value between the maximum value and the minimum value of the plurality of control values (e.g., toggling a volume control on and off corresponds changing the volume from maximum volume to minimum volume). Allowing the user to toggle the control function between the maximum value and the minimum value of the control values enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, toggling the control function that corresponds to the slider control includes ( 1310 ) toggling between two states without changing the currently selected control value (e.g., toggling a flashlight on and off does not change a currently selected brightness value for the flashlight when the flashlight is turned on again). For example, toggling a Night Shift function on and off does not change a currently selected brightness value for the device, as shown in FIGS.  5 E 4 - 5 E 7 . Allowing the user to toggle between two states without changing the currently selected control value enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, the slider control is ( 1312 ) a volume control (e.g., volume control  5632 , FIG.  5 E 23 ), the currently selected control value is a currently selected volume value in a range of volume values (e.g., a continuous range) between a maximum volume and a minimum volume (e.g., as shown in FIG.  5 E 23 ), and toggling the control function that corresponds to the slider control includes toggling the volume between an ON state (e.g., unmute) and an OFF state (e.g., mute) (e.g., as shown in FIGS.  5 E 24 - 5 E 27 ). Allowing the user to toggle the volume between an ON state and an OFF state enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, the slider control is ( 1314 ) a volume control that separately controls volume for a first type of audio output (e.g., volume for regular audio output, such as media content) and volume for a second type of audio output (e.g., volume for a ringer audio output, such as the telephone ringer, audio alerts, etc.), displaying the slider control includes displaying a first plurality of volume values for the first type of audio output (e.g., in a volume slider for regular audio output) and a first indicator that indicates a currently selected volume value for the first type of audio output, and toggling the control function that corresponds to the slider control includes toggling display of the first plurality of volume values for the first type of audio output and the first indicator to display of a second plurality of volume values for the second type of audio output and a second indicator that indicates a currently selected volume value for the second type of audio output. For example, when displaying the first plurality of volume values for the first type of audio output in a first volume slider for the first type of audio output (e.g., regular audio output), an icon representing a second volume slider for the second type of audio output (e.g., ringer audio output) is concurrently displayed with the first volume slider for the first type of audio output (e.g., as shown in FIG.  5 E 15 ). When a tap input is detected on the first volume slider (or on the icon representing the second type of audio input, as shown in FIG.  5 E 16 ), the first volume slider transforms into an icon representing the first volume slider, and the icon representing the second volume slider transforms into the second volume slider for the second type of audio output (e.g., as shown in FIGS.  5 E 17 - 5 E 18 ). Allowing the user to toggle between controlling the volume for a first type of audio output and a second type of audio output enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by providing additional functions without cluttering up the display with additional controls, reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device, and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, the slider control is ( 1316 ) a brightness control (e.g., brightness control  5630 , FIG.  5 E 3 ), the currently selected control value is a currently selected brightness value in a range of brightness values (e.g., a continuous range) between a maximum brightness and a brightness, and toggling the control function that corresponds to the slider control includes toggling between a first brightness mode (e.g., a nightshift on mode) and a second brightness mode (e.g., a nightshift off mode) (e.g., as shown in FIGS.  5 E 4 - 5 E 7 ). Allowing the user to toggle the control function between a first brightness mode and a second brightness mode enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, in response to detecting the input by the contact ( 1318 ): in accordance with a determination that the input meets control-expansion criteria (e.g., the control-expansion criteria require that an increase in a characteristic intensity of the contact exceeds a first intensity threshold (e.g., the control-expansion criteria are met by a press input that meet intensity activation criteria (e.g., a press input by a contact with a characteristic intensity that is above the light press intensity threshold IT L )) or that less than a threshold amount of movement of the contact is detected before a threshold amount of time has elapsed since detection of the contact at the location that corresponds to slider control (e.g., the control-expansion criteria are met by a long press input by the contact) in order for the control-expansion criteria to be met), the device displays a zoom view of the control affordance including the brightness control with the range of brightness values and a toggle control for adjusting other display settings (e.g., night shift and/or true tone settings that adjust the color reproduction of the display) (e.g., as shown in FIGS.  5 E 8 - 5 E 9 ). In some embodiments, the zoom view of the control affordance also includes a toggle control for another pair of brightness modes (e.g., true tone on/off modes, as shown in FIG.  5 E 9 ). In some embodiments, upon lift-off of the contact, if more than a threshold amount of movement is detected on the brightness slider control, the device ceases to display the zoom view after lift-off of the contact is detected; and if less than a threshold amount of movement is detected before lift-off of the contact, the device maintains display of the zoom view after lift-off of the contact is detected (e.g., as shown in FIG.  5 E 10 , where display of the zoom view is maintained after lift-off of the contact is detected). Allowing the user to expand a control affordance (to display additional controls and/or information) or to toggle a control function based on variations in the detected input enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by providing additional functions without cluttering up the display with additional controls, reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device, and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, the slider control is ( 1320 ) concurrently displayed with an indicator with an appearance that corresponds to a current toggle state of the control function (e.g., as shown in brightness control  5630  in FIGS.  5 E 4 - 5 E 7 ) (e.g., the brightness slider is concurrently displayed with an icon that shows the current toggle state for the nightshift control, or the current toggle state of the Do Not Disturb function). The device changes the appearance of the indicator in accordance with a change in a toggle state of the control function (e.g. the icon that is concurrently displayed with the brightness slider changes from a gray crescent moon to a blue crescent moon when the nightshift control function is toggled on) (e.g., the icon that is concurrently displayed with the brightness slider changes from a regular sun icon to a sun icon with a crescent moon when the nightshift control function is toggled on, as shown in FIGS.  5 E 4 - 5 E 5 ). In some embodiments, the change in appearance of the indicator occurs both when the control function is toggled by a tap input on the control slider (e.g., on brightness control  5630 , FIG.  5 E 4 ), and when the control function is toggled by a tap input on the toggle control within the expanded view of the slider control (e.g., within expanded brightness control  5808 , FIG.  5 E 10 ). Changing an appearance of a control in accordance with a change in a toggle state of the control function enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by allowing the user to see the current toggle state of the control function, thereby helping the user to achieve an intended outcome with the required inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, displaying the slider control in the first user interface includes ( 1322 ): in accordance with a determination that the first user interface is a user interface in a landscape-display state, displaying the slider control with a first vertical length (e.g., as shown in FIG.  5 E 39 ); and in accordance with a determination that the first user interface is a user interface in a portrait-display state, displaying the slider control with a second vertical length that is shorter than the first vertical length (e.g., as shown in FIG.  5 E 38 ). For example, when the slider control is displayed in a control panel user interface in the portrait-display state, the slider control is displayed below another control module and is shorter; and when the slider control is displayed in the control panel user interface in the landscape-display state, the slider control is displayed without another control module above it, and is taller. The same set of control values are distributed on the long version and the short version of the slider control. Displaying the slider control with a first vertical length in a landscape-display state and displaying the slider control with a second vertical length in a portrait-display state enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by providing a taller version of the slider control when space allows, thereby helping the user to achieve an intended outcome with the required inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, the slider control is ( 1324 ) a timer, the currently selected control value is a current amount of time remaining for the timer, and displaying the slider control includes: in accordance with a determination that a toggle state of the timer is a first state (e.g., the “running” state), continuously changing the position of the indicator to indicate an update to the current amount of time remaining for the timer in accordance with passage of time; and in accordance with a determination that the toggle state of the timer is a second state (e.g., the “paused” state or “stopped” state), maintaining the position of the indicator with passage of time; and changing the position of the indicator to indicate an update to the currently selected control value in accordance with the movement of the contact includes: in accordance with a determination that a toggle state of the timer is the first state (e.g., the “running” state), overriding the update to the current amount of time remaining for the timer in accordance with passage of time when changing the position of the indicator in accordance with the movement of the contact; and in accordance with a determination that the toggle state of the timer is the second state (e.g., the “paused” state or “stopped” state), changing the position of the indicator from the currently selected control value in accordance with the movement of the contact. Changing the position of the indicator in a timer slider control when the timer is in a “running” state or in accordance with a user input enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by allowing the user to see the amount of time remaining for the timer in accordance with passage of time and allowing the user to override the amount of time remaining for the timer with a user input, thereby helping the user to achieve an intended outcome with the required inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, prior to displaying the first user interface (e.g., the control panel user interface), the device displays ( 1326 ) a second user interface (e.g., user interface  5840  of a messaging application, FIG.  5 E 28 ) (e.g., the home screen user interface, a user interface of an open application, etc.) on the display, wherein the second user interface has a first appearance (e.g., having content with a first contrast level, a first text size, a first brightness level, a first overall tint (e.g., a blue tint), a first color scheme, etc.). The device displays the first user interface (e.g., control panel user interface  5518 , FIG.  5 E 29 ) that includes the slider control overlaid on the second user interface (e.g., as shown in FIG.  5 E 29 ). In some embodiments, the second user interface is completely blocked by the first user interface (e.g., as shown in FIG.  5 E 29 ). In some embodiments, the first user interface is semi-transparent, and some visual features of the second user interface is, optionally, visible through the semi-transparent first user interface. In some embodiments, the first user interface is a platter that is smaller than the size of the second user interface, and portions of the second user interface are visible around the first user interface. In some embodiments, the visual properties of the first user interface are generated based on the visual properties of the second user interface below the first user interface. In some embodiments, the second user interface is processed to have a different appearance (e.g., blurred, darkened, de-saturated, etc.) before the first user interface is overlaid on top of the second user interface. In response to changing the position of the indicator that corresponds to the slider control: the device reveals at least a portion of the second user interface that was overlaid by the first user interface (e.g., as shown in FIG.  5 E 33 ), and the device changes an appearance of at least the revealed portion of the second user interface (e.g., with different text size due to a change in the enhanced type size control  5692 , as shown in FIGS.  5 E 33 - 5 E 35 ) (e.g., with alterations from the first appearance, such as with a different contrast level due to changes in the contrast value in the accessibility control, with a different text size due to a change in the text size slider in the accessibility control, with a different brightness level due to a change in the brightness slider control, with a different tint due to a change in the toggle state of the nightshift control or true tone control) in accordance with the changes in the position of the indicator, while maintaining display of a portion, less than all, of the first user interface that includes the slider control. In some embodiments, a portion of the first user interface is removed to reveal the second user interface with the altered appearance from below. In some embodiments, the first user interface is shifted to reveal the second user interface with the altered appearance from below. In some embodiments, if a blurred background or mask has been inserted between the first user interface and the second user interface, the blurred background or mask is removed to reveal the second user interface with the altered appearance. In some embodiments, the portion of the second user interface that is revealed is magnified. Revealing at least a portion of a user interface and changing an appearance of the revealed portion of the user interface in accordance with the changes in the position of the indicator of the slider control enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by allowing the user to see how the changes in position of the indicator affect the appearance of the user interface, thereby helping the user to achieve an intended outcome with the required inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, in response to detecting the input by the contact, when the input meets control-adjustment criteria ( 1328 ): in accordance with a determination that the input is an input on a control that alters the appearance of user interfaces displayed on the device (e.g., brightness, font size, display zoom, etc.), the device ceases to display a respective portion of the first user interface (e.g., to reveal at least a portion of the second user interface that was overlaid by the first user interface) in conjunction with changing a position of the indicator to indicate an update to the currently selected control value among the plurality of control values in accordance with the movement of the contact (e.g., as shown in FIGS.  5 E 33 - 5 E 35 ); and in accordance with a determination that the input is an input on a control that does not alter the appearance of user interfaces displayed on the device, the device maintains display of the respective portion of the first user interface (e.g., forgoing revealing the portion of the second user interface that was overlaid by the first user interface) in conjunction with changing a position of the indicator to indicate an update to the currently selected control value among the plurality of control values in accordance with the movement of the contact. For example, when the slider control is a volume control, changing the volume value or toggling volume on and off does not have any impact on the appearance of the user interface underneath the control panel user interface. In such a scenario, the control panel user interface is updated without revealing the underlying portions of the second user interface. Revealing at least a portion of a user interface and changing an appearance of the revealed portion of the user interface in accordance with the changes in the position of the indicator of the slider control only when the control would alter the appearance of the user interface enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by allowing the user to see how the changes in position of the indicator affect the appearance of the user interface, thereby helping the user to achieve an intended outcome with the required inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     It should be understood that the particular order in which the operations in  FIGS. 13A-13D  have been described is merely an example and is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations could be performed. One of ordinary skill in the art would recognize various ways to reorder the operations described herein. Additionally, it should be noted that details of other processes described herein with respect to other methods described herein (e.g., methods  600 ,  700 ,  800 ,  900 ,  1000 ,  1050 ,  1100 ,  1200 ,  1400 ,  1500 ,  1600 ,  1800 , and  1900 ) are also applicable in an analogous manner to method  1300  described above with respect to  FIGS. 13A-13D . For example, the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, application views, control panels, controls, position thresholds, directional conditions, navigation criteria, movement parameters, thresholds, determinations focus selectors, and/or animations described above with reference to method  1300  optionally have one or more of the characteristics of the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, application views, control panels, controls, position thresholds, directional conditions, navigation criteria, movement parameters, thresholds, determinations, focus selectors, and/or animations described herein with reference to other methods described herein (e.g., methods  600 ,  700 ,  800 ,  900 ,  1000 ,  1050 ,  1100 ,  1200 ,  1400 ,  1500 ,  1600 ,  1800 , and  1900 ). For brevity, these details are not repeated here. 
     The operations in the information processing methods described above are, optionally implemented by running one or more functional modules in information processing apparatus such as general purpose processors (e.g., as described above with respect to  FIGS. 1A and 3 ) or application specific chips. 
     The operations described above with reference to  FIGS. 13A-13D  are, optionally, implemented by components depicted in  FIGS. 1A-1B . For example, display operation  1302 , detection operation  1304 , and change/toggle operation  1306  are, optionally, implemented by event sorter  170 , event recognizer  180 , and event handler  190 . Event monitor  171  in event sorter  170  detects a contact on touch-sensitive display  112 , and event dispatcher module  174  delivers the event information to application  136 - 1 . A respective event recognizer  180  of application  136 - 1  compares the event information to respective event definitions  186 , and determines whether a first contact at a first location on the touch-sensitive surface (or whether rotation of the device) corresponds to a predefined event or sub-event, such as selection of an object on a user interface, or rotation of the device from one orientation to another. When a respective predefined event or sub-event is detected, event recognizer  180  activates an event handler  190  associated with the detection of the event or sub-event. Event handler  190  optionally uses or calls data updater  176  or object updater  177  to update the application internal state  192 . In some embodiments, event handler  190  accesses a respective GUI updater  178  to update what is displayed by the application. Similarly, it would be clear to a person having ordinary skill in the art how other processes can be implemented based on the components depicted in  FIGS. 1A-1B . 
       FIGS. 14A-14E  are flow diagrams illustrating a method  1400  of displaying a dock or displaying a control panel (e.g., instead of or in addition to the dock), in accordance with some embodiments. The method  1400  is performed at an electronic device (e.g., device  300 ,  FIG. 3 , or portable multifunction device  100 ,  FIG. 1A ) with a display and a touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the electronic device includes one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the touch-sensitive surface and the display are integrated into a touch-sensitive display. In some embodiments, the display is a touch-screen display and the touch-sensitive surface is on or integrated with the display. In some embodiments, the display is separate from the touch-sensitive surface. Some operations in method  1400  are, optionally, combined and/or the order of some operations is, optionally, changed. 
     Method  1400  relates to determining whether to display a dock or to display a control panel (e.g., instead of or in addition to the dock) in response to a sequence of one or more edge-swipe gestures based on whether the sequence of one or more edge-swipe gestures meets respective criteria. For example, in some embodiments, the device displays the dock in response to a first upward swipe gesture from the bottom edge of the device, and the device displays the control panel in response to a second upward swipe from the bottom edge of the device after the dock is displayed. In some embodiments, the dock is displayed in response to a short upward swipe from the bottom edge of the device, and the control panel is displayed in response to a long upward swipe from the bottom edge of the device (and optionally the dock is displayed during the upward swipe). Allowing the user to display a dock or to display a control panel instead of or in addition to the dock in response to a sequence of one or more edge-swipe gestures depending on whether certain criteria are met enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by providing easy access to key control functions of the device, by helping the user to achieve an intended outcome with fewer required inputs, and by providing additional control options without cluttering the user interface with additional displayed controls), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     Method  1400  is performed at an electronic device with a display and a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a device with a touch-screen display that serves both as the display and the touch-sensitive surface). The device displays ( 1402 ), on the display, a first user interface (e.g., user interface  5850 , FIG.  5 F 1 ) that includes one or more applications (e.g., the first user interface is a user interface of an application, such as user interface  5850  in FIG.  5 F 1 , or a split user interface that includes user interfaces of two or more applications) displayed without displaying a dock (e.g., an application dock for selecting an application launch icon from a plurality of application launch icons to switch from displaying the first user interface to displaying a user interface of another application, or to add the user interface of another application to the first user interface in a split screen format on the display). While displaying the first user interface, the device detects ( 1404 ) a sequence of one or more inputs that includes detecting movement of a contact from an edge of the device onto the device (e.g., detecting touch-down of the contact at an edge of the touch-screen, and detecting movement of the contact from the edge of the touch-screen onto the touch-screen) (e.g., contact  5852  in FIGS.  5 F 2 - 5 F 8 ) (e.g., contact  5880  in FIGS.  5 F 11 - 5 F 13  and contact  5882  in FIGS.  5 F 15 - 5 F 18 ). In response to detecting the sequence of one or more inputs ( 1406 ): in accordance with a determination that the sequence of one or more inputs meets dock-display criteria, the device displays the dock overlaid on the first user interface without displaying a control panel (e.g., a control panel user interface with activatable controls, a control panel view corresponding to a control panel user interface, or a control panel object with activatable controls that is overlaid on top of another currently displayed user interface), as shown in FIGS.  5 F 2 - 5 F 5  and also shown in FIGS.  5 F 11 - 5 F 14 . In some embodiments, in response to detecting the sequence of one or more inputs: in accordance with a determination that the sequence of one or more inputs does not meet the dock-display criteria, the device maintains display of the first user interface without displaying the dock. In some embodiments, in response to detecting the sequence of one or more inputs: the device displays a portion of the dock in response to the sequence of one or more inputs; and in accordance with a determination that the sequence of one or more inputs does not meet the dock-display criteria (e.g., the movement of a respective contact, in the sequence of one or more inputs, is less than the first distance threshold upon liftoff of the respective contact), the device ceases to display the portion of the dock (e.g., the portion of the dock will cease to be displayed (e.g., retracted) when the termination of the sequence of one or more inputs is detected without having met the dock-display criteria). In accordance with a determination that the sequence of one or more inputs meets control-panel-display criteria, the device displays the control panel (e.g., as shown in FIGS.  5 F 6 - 5 F 8 , as shown in FIGS.  5 F 15 - 5 F 18 , and as shown in FIGS.  5 F 20 - 5 F 22 ). In some embodiments, in response to detecting the sequence of one or more inputs: in accordance with a determination that the sequence of one or more inputs does not meet the control-panel-display criteria, the device maintains display of the first user interface (e.g., with or without concurrent display of the dock) without displaying the control panel. 
     In some embodiments, the sequence of one or more inputs includes ( 1408 ) movement of a respective contact from the edge of the device onto the device, and the respective contact is continuously detected throughout the sequence of one or more inputs (e.g., the sequence of one or more inputs is a single swipe input by the respective contact that starts from an edge of the touch-screen and continues onto the touch-screen) (e.g., the single swipe input by contact  5852  in FIGS.  5 F 2 - 5 F 8 ). In some embodiments, the dock-display criteria include a criterion that is met when the movement of the respective contact is greater than a first distance threshold (e.g., the dock-display criteria are met when the single long swipe input includes upward or arc movement of the respective contact beyond a quarter of the screen height from the bottom edge of the touch screen, or more than half of the height of the dock from the bottom edge of the touch screen), as shown in FIGS.  5 F 2 - 5 F 5 ; and the control-panel-display criteria include a criterion that is met when the movement of the respective contact is greater than a second distance threshold that is greater than the first distance threshold (e.g., the control-panel-display criteria are met when the single long swipe input includes upward or arc movement of the respective contact beyond a third of the screen height from the bottom edge of the touch screen, or more than the height of the dock from the bottom edge of the touch screen), as shown in FIGS.  5 F 6 - 5 F 8 . Displaying the dock when a first distance threshold is met and displaying the control panel when a second distance threshold is met enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by providing easy access to key control functions of the device, by helping the user to achieve an intended outcome with fewer required inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device, and by providing additional control options without cluttering the user interface with additional displayed controls) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, the dock-display criteria include ( 1410 ) a criterion that is met when the sequence of one or more inputs includes movement of a first contact from the edge of the device onto the device (e.g., the dock-display criteria are met when the first contact moves upward for more than the first threshold distance from the bottom edge of the touch screen, optionally without detecting movement of a second contact from the edge of the device onto the device), as shown in FIGS.  5 F 11 - 5 F 14 ; and the control-panel-display criteria include a criterion that is met when the sequence of one or more inputs includes movement of an initial contact (e.g., the first contact, such as contact  5880  in FIGS.  5 F 11 - 5 F 14 ) from the edge of the device onto the device (e.g., more than the first threshold distance) followed by movement of a second contact (e.g., such as contact  5882  in FIGS.  5 F 15 - 5 F 18 ) (e.g., different from the initial contact (e.g., the first contact)) from the edge of the device onto the device (e.g., the control-panel display criteria are met when two consecutive upward or arc swipe inputs by separate contacts are detected). In some embodiments, the control-panel-display criteria are met after detecting liftoff of the first contact from the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., liftoff of contact  5880 - c  in FIG.  5 F 13 ) and after detecting movement of the second contact from the edge of the device onto the device (e.g., contact  5882  in FIGS.  5 F 15 - 5 F 17 ). In some embodiments, the control-panel-display criteria require that the two consecutive upward swipes by the two separate contacts to be in the same direction (e.g., upward) in order for the control-panel-display criteria to be met. Displaying the dock in response to a first upward swipe and displaying the control panel in response to a second upward swipe enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, the control-panel-display criteria include ( 1412 ) a criterion that is met when the movement of the second contact is detected while displaying the dock on the display (e.g., before the dock has been dismissed or otherwise ceases to be displayed), as shown in FIGS.  5 F 14 - 5 F 18 . Displaying the control panel in response to a second upward swipe (while the dock is displayed) enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, while the dock is overlaid on the first user interface without concurrent display of the control panel (e.g., after the dock is displayed in response to a sequence of one or more inputs that met the dock-display criteria and that did not meet the control-panel-display criteria) (e.g., as shown in FIG.  5 F 14 ), the device detects ( 1414 ) a subsequent input that includes movement of a second contact from the edge of the device onto the device (e.g., a subsequent upward or arc swipe input by another contact that is distinct from the contact of the sequence of one or more inputs) (e.g., contact  5882  in FIGS.  5 F 15 - 5 F 17 ) (e.g., contact  5884  in FIGS.  5 F 20 - 5 F 22 ); and in response to detecting the subsequent input, the device displays the control panel (e.g., after ceasing to display the dock, as shown in FIG.  5 F 22 , or concurrently with the display of the dock, as shown in FIG.  5 F 18 ). Displaying the control panel in response to a subsequent upward swipe (while the dock is displayed) enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, the dock-display criteria include ( 1416 ) a criterion that is met by an initial portion of the sequence of one or more inputs that meets the control panel-display criteria (e.g., the dock-display criteria are met by the initial upward movement of a contact during a single long upward swipe that meets the control-panel-display criteria, as shown in FIGS.  5 F 2 - 5 F 5 , and the dock-display criteria are also met by a first upward swipe of a sequence of two consecutive upward swipes that meets the control-panel-display criteria, as shown in FIGS.  5 F 11 - 5 F 14 ); and the dock is displayed in response to the initial portion of the sequence of one or more inputs. Displaying the dock in response to the initial portion of the upward swipe provides improved feedback, enhances the operability of the device, and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, in response to detecting the sequence of one or more inputs: in accordance with a determination that the dock is currently displayed and that the control panel (e.g., a control panel user interface with activatable controls, a control panel view corresponding to a control panel user interface, or a control panel object with activatable controls that is overlaid on another currently displayed user interface) is to be displayed (e.g., when the dock is already displayed in response to an initial portion of the sequence of one or more inputs that met the dock-display criteria, and the control-panel-display criteria are met by the sequence of one or more inputs), the device ceases ( 1418 ) to display the dock when displaying the control panel (e.g., a control panel user interface with activatable controls, a control panel view corresponding to a control panel user interface, or a control panel object with activatable controls that is overlaid on another currently displayed user interface) (e.g., as shown in FIG.  5 F 8 ) (e.g., as shown in FIG.  5 F 22 ). In some embodiments, the control panel user interface or control panel object slides upward from the bottom edge of the touch-screen in a display layer that is overlaid on top of the display layer of the dock, and the dock (e.g., along with all other content in the display layer of the dock) is obscured (e.g., masked or severely blurred), as shown in FIG.  5 F 22 . Ceasing to display the dock when displaying the control panel enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by allowing the user to focus on the control panel control options without cluttering the user interface with additional displayed controls, by reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, in response to detecting the sequence of one or more inputs: in accordance with a determination that the dock is currently displayed and that the control panel is to be displayed (e.g., when the dock is already displayed in response to an initial portion of the sequence of one or more inputs that met the dock-display criteria, and the control-panel-display criteria are met by the sequence of one or more inputs), the device maintains ( 1420 ) display of the dock when displaying the control panel (e.g., a control panel user interface with activatable controls, a control panel view corresponding to a control panel user interface, or a control panel object with activatable controls) (e.g., as shown in FIG.  5 F 9 ) (e.g., as shown in FIG.  5 F 23 ) (e.g., as shown in FIG.  5 F 24 ). In some embodiments, the control panel user interface or the control panel object slides upward from the bottom edge of the touch-screen in a display layer that is behind the display layer of the dock, and eventually the controls in the control panel are displayed above the dock on the display, as shown in FIG.  5 F 23 . In some embodiments, the control panel object is an extension of the dock from the bottom edge of the dock, and as the control panel object is dragged upward, the control panel object pushes the dock upward on the display along with the control panel object (e.g., as shown in FIG.  5 F 24 ) (and optionally, the first user interface is blurred underneath the dock and the control panel object). Maintaining display of the dock when displaying the control panel enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by providing both control options of the dock with control options of the control panel, by reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, displaying the control panel includes ( 1422 ): displaying the control panel along with a plurality of application views in an application-switcher user interface (e.g., as shown in FIG.  5 F 8 ). In some embodiments, the application-switcher user interface (e.g., application-switcher user interface  5856 , FIG.  5 F 8 ) is a grid of application views (e.g., application view  5851 , application view  5858 , application view  5860 , and application view  5862 ), or a stack of application views (e.g., an application view is a reduced scale image of the user interface of a corresponding application that is displayed last before the application is closed with retained state information). In some embodiments, the application-switcher user interface only includes application views corresponding to applications that are closed with retained state information, and selection of an application view in the application-switcher user interface causes the application corresponding to the selected application view to be opened to the last state that was saved prior to closing the application (e.g., as described above with respect to FIG.  5 F 9 ). In contrast to the applications that were closed with retained state information, an application that was closed without retained state information is not represented in the application-switcher user interface by an application view, and launching the application (e.g., by selecting the corresponding application launch icon in the home screen user interface or in the dock) causes the application to be displayed from a default state (e.g., from a default starting user interface of the application). In some embodiments, the control panel (e.g., control panel view  5886 , FIG.  5 F 8 ) is represented in the application-switcher user interface by a control panel view that is a reduced scale image of the control panel user interface. In some embodiments, the control panel view is live and the controls contained therein are activatable by touch inputs. In some embodiments, a touch input (e.g., a tap input) detected on the control panel view in the application-switcher user interface causes the display of the application-switcher user interface to be replaced by the control panel user interface. Displaying the control panel in an application-switcher user interface enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by providing the user with additional control options, by reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, the device displays ( 1424 ) an animated transition of the application-switcher user interface replacing display of the first user interface, while maintaining display of the dock (e.g., the dock remains on the display and the application-switcher user interface (including the plurality of application views and the control panel view) slides in upward from the bottom of the display, behind the dock, to cover the first user interface), as shown in FIGS.  5 F 16 - 5 F 18 . Displaying an animated transition of the application-switcher user interface replacing display of the first user interface provides improved feedback, enhances the operability of the device, and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by providing visual feedback to the user, thereby helping the user to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, the device displays ( 1426 ) an animated transition of the application-switcher user interface replacing display of the first user interface and the dock. For example, in some embodiments, the dock and the first user interface fade away and the application-switcher user interface is overlaid on top of the faded dock and the first user interface, as shown in FIGS.  5 F 6 - 5 F 8 . In some embodiments, the dock is faded more than the first user interface. Displaying an animated transition of the application-switcher user interface replacing display of the first user interface and the dock provides improved feedback, enhances the operability of the device, and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by providing visual feedback to the user, thereby helping the user to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, while displaying the application-switcher user interface, the device detects ( 1428 ) a second sequence of one or more inputs that meets application-closing criteria (e.g., including detecting a sequence of one or more inputs by one or more contacts on the touch-sensitive surface at a location that corresponds to a first application view (e.g., an icon or reduced scale image of a last-displayed user interface a first application) of the plurality of application views) (e.g., as shown in FIGS.  5 F 30 ,  5 F 32 , and  5 F 35 ); and in response to detecting the second sequence of one or more inputs that meets the application-closing criteria, the device ceases to display a first application view of the plurality of application views in the application-switcher user interface (e.g., while maintaining display of other application views of the plurality of application views in the application-switcher user interface) (e.g., as shown in FIGS.  5 F 30 - 5 F 31 , FIGS.  5 F 32 - 5 F 33 , and FIGS.  5 F 35 - 5 F 36 ). Allowing the user to close application views in the application-switcher user interface provides a customizable user interface that allows the user to decide which applications can be easily accessible and enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by providing easy access to key control functions of the device and by helping the user to achieve an intended outcome with fewer required inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, detecting the second sequence of one or more inputs that meets the application-closing criteria includes ( 1430 ): detecting a first input that activates an application-closing mode of the application-switcher user interface (e.g., as shown in FIGS.  5 F 26 - 5 F 28 ), and detecting a second input that selects the first application view among the plurality of application views while the application-closing mode of the application-switcher user interface is activated (e.g., as shown in FIGS.  5 F 30  and  5 F 32 ); and the method includes: in response to detecting the first input that activates the application-closing mode of the application-switcher user interface, displaying a first visual change in the application-switcher user interface to indicate that the application-closing mode has been activated (e.g., as shown in FIG.  5 F 28 ). For example, in some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that an input by a third contact meets long press criteria (e.g., contact  5890  in FIGS.  5 F 26 - 5 F 28 ), wherein the long press criteria require that the third contact is maintained on the touch-sensitive surface with less than a threshold amount of movement for more than a threshold amount of time (e.g., a long press time threshold, time T) in order for the long press criteria to be met, the device displays a respective deletion affordance (e.g., “x” in the upper left corner of the application view) over each application view of the plurality of application views, as shown in FIG.  5 F 28 . After the deletion affordances are displayed, the device detects a tap input on the deletion affordance for the first application view (e.g., a tap input by contact  5892 , FIG.  5 F 30 ), and the first application view is removed from the application-switcher user interface and the retained state information for the first application is deleted, as shown in FIG.  5 F 31 . In some embodiments, the first visual change in the application-switcher user interface includes displaying the application views with an increased transparency level to indicate that the application-closing mode has been activated. In some embodiments, an upward swipe or flick input on the first application view (e.g., either by the third contact or by a different contact that is detected after the lift-off of the third contact) while the application-closing mode remains activated (e.g., while the deletion affordances are displayed or while the application views are displayed with the increased transparency level) causes the first application view to be removed from the application-switcher user interface and the retained state information for the first application to be deleted (e.g., as shown in FIGS.  5 F 32 - 5 F 33 ). In some embodiments, a tap input detected outside of the plurality of application views (e.g., in an unoccupied region above the plurality of application views) causes the application-closing mode to be deactivated, and a subsequent selection of an application view launches the corresponding application, and replaces the display of the application-switcher user interface with the last-displayed user interface of the selected application (or the control panel user interface if the control panel view was selected instead of an application view). Displaying a visual change to indicate the application-closing mode has been activated provides improved visual feedback, enhances the operability of the device, and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by providing visual feedback to the user, thereby helping the user to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, detecting the second sequence of one or more inputs that meets the application-closing criteria includes ( 1432 ) detecting movement of a respective contact in the second sequence of one or more inputs across the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., an upward swipe or upward flick) at a location that corresponds to the first application view of the plurality of application views (e.g., contact  5894  in FIG.  5 F 32  and contact  5896  in FIG.  5 F 35 ). Allowing the user to close application views in the application-switcher user interface provides a customizable user interface that allows the user to decide which applications can be easily accessible and enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by providing easy access to key control functions of the device and by helping the user to achieve an intended outcome with fewer required inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, the dock is ( 1434 ) displayed overlaid on the first user interface in accordance with a determination that the sequence of one or more inputs meets the dock-display criteria and that the first user interface is not protected (e.g., the first user interface corresponds to an application operating in an unprotected mode, such as an interactive content display mode, as opposed to a full-screen content display mode for a media player application, an active gaming mode of a gaming application, or a navigation mode of a maps application) when the sequence of one or more inputs is detected; and the method includes: in response to detecting the sequence of one or more inputs: in accordance with a determination that the sequence of one or more inputs meets the dock-display criteria and that the first user interface is protected (e.g., the first user interface corresponds to an application operating in a full screen content display mode, or an application that is currently in a mode which should not be suddenly interrupted, such as a gaming application that is in an active gaming mode, or a maps application that is in a navigation mode, etc.), maintaining display of the first user interface without displaying the dock. For example, in some embodiments, the device activates a verification mode in which the dock is displayed when a verification input is detected. In some embodiments, in response to the sequence of one or more inputs that meet the dock-display criteria, an affordance is displayed instead, and if another sequence of one or more inputs that meet the dock-display criteria is detected while the affordance is displayed (e.g., before the affordance hides automatically after a predetermined period of time with no user interaction), then the dock is displayed (e.g., as explained in more detail with respect to FIGS.  5 B 1 - 5 B 33  and  FIGS. 9A-9D ). Limiting the operation of the swipe gesture when a currently-displayed application is determined to be protected enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by reducing unintended disruptions to the user&#39;s usage of the device and reducing user mistakes when operating the device), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, the dock (e.g., dock  5854 , FIG.  5 F 5 ) includes ( 1436 ) a plurality of application launch icons including at least one of: (1) a first application-launch icon that is moved, by a user, from a home screen user interface of the device to the dock (e.g., an application launch icon that is dragged by the user from the home screen and dropped onto the dock), (2) a second application launch icon for a recently open application on the device (e.g., an application that is just closed by the user), and (3) a third application launch icon for an application that is recommended by the device based on predetermined criteria (e.g., a recently used applications on another device associated with the device (e.g., connected to the same WiFi network, or connected to each other via Bluetooth, etc.)). For example, in some embodiments, the dock includes application launch icons for the N (e.g., three) most recently open applications used on the device, M (e.g., four) favorite applications specified by the user, one or more recently used applications on a related device (e.g., in an automatic hand-off between the devices), and/or a combination of favorite applications, recently open applications, and/or suggested applications. In some embodiments, the recent applications are separated from the rest of application launch icons in the dock by a vertical divider. In some embodiments, the recent applications simply include three most recent applications. In some embodiments, the recent applications include three most recent applications that are not already included in the dock. In some embodiments, the default dock contains a preset number of application launch icons (e.g., messages, web browser, media player, email, and file-storage applications). In some embodiments, in addition to application launch icons, other affordances, such as folder icons, web clippings, and document icons can also be dragged from the home screen user interface or other user interfaces (e.g., a drive or network storage space) and dropped into the dock. In some embodiments, the method includes adding affordances (e.g., application launch icon, folders, web clippings, documents, etc.) to the dock. When adding affordances, the dock gets longer in length until it reaches the maximum length of the display, and then the dock gets shorter in height (and icons decrease in size) to accommodate more icons. In some embodiments, the method includes deleting affordances from the dock. When deleting affordances, the dock gets taller in height (and icons increase in size) as icons are removed from the dock; and once icons are of a standard size, the dock gets shorter in length. In some embodiments, the dock remains displayed when the device is rotated (e.g., from the landscape orientation to the portrait orientation, or vice versa). In some embodiments, the dock disappears when an application is launched from the dock or from the home screen on which the dock is displayed. In some embodiments, the dock is dismissed in response to a downward swipe gesture over the dock (e.g., a separate input from the sequence of one or more inputs). In some embodiments, the dock is dismissed upon touchdown of a contact anywhere in the first user interface, or in response to a user interaction with the first user interface (e.g., by an input separate from the sequence of one or more inputs). In some embodiments, the dock is dismissed in response to a downward swipe gesture that moves past the dock (e.g., similar to a downward swipe gesture past an onscreen keyboard to dismiss the keyboard in a messaging application). Providing a plurality of application launch icons in the dock provides a customizable dock that allows the user to decide which applications can be easily accessible and enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by providing easy access to key control functions of the device and by helping the user to achieve an intended outcome with fewer required inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, while displaying the control panel (e.g., a control panel user interface or a control panel object with activatable controls), wherein the control panel includes one or more selectable controls, the device detects ( 1438 ) an input by a fourth contact, including detecting the fourth contact on the touch-sensitive surface at a location on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to a first selectable control of the one or more selectable controls. In some embodiments, the control panel includes one or more control regions, each of which includes a respective plurality of controls for controlling corresponding functions of the device. In some embodiments, the control panel includes one or more additional controls that are not included in the one or more control region. In response to detecting the input by the fourth contact: in accordance with a determination that the input by the fourth contact meets enhanced-control-display criteria (e.g., a long press or a deep press), the device replaces display of the first selectable control (e.g., a control icon) with display of a first enhanced control corresponding to the first selectable control (e.g., a zoom view of the control icon) (e.g., as explained in more detail with respect to FIGS.  5 C 1 - 5 C 45  and  FIGS. 11A-11E ). In some embodiments, the enhanced-control-display criteria include a criterion that is met when the fourth contact is maintained on the touch-sensitive surface with less than a threshold amount of movement for at least a threshold amount of time (e.g., a long press time threshold) (e.g., the enhanced-control-display criteria are met by a long press input by the fourth contact). In some embodiments, the enhanced-control-display criteria include a criterion that is met when an intensity of the fourth contact increases above a predefined intensity threshold (e.g., a light press intensity threshold IT L ). For example, in some embodiments, the enhanced-control-display criteria are met by a press input by the fourth contact. In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the input by the fourth contact does not meet enhanced-control-display criteria, display of the first selectable control is maintained without displaying the first enhanced control corresponding to the first selectable control. In some embodiments, in response to detecting the input by the fourth contact, in accordance with a determination that the input by the fourth contact meets control-activation criteria, the device activates the first selectable control (e.g., for controlling a corresponding function of the device) (e.g., as shown in FIG.  5 F 9 ). In some embodiments, the control-activation criteria are capable of being satisfied when the fourth contact is maintained on the touch-sensitive surface for less than the threshold amount of time (e.g., less than a long press time threshold). In some embodiments, the control-activation criteria are capable of being satisfied when the intensity of the fourth contact does not exceed the predefined intensity threshold. In some embodiments, the control-activation criteria are satisfied with a hard, quick tap that is still registered as a “tap” by a tap gesture recognizer, and the control-activation criteria do not always require that the intensity of the contact remain below a particular intensity threshold in order for the control-activation criteria to be satisfied. Providing additional controls in the enhanced control (or optionally, activating a currently selected control) enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by reducing the number of inputs needed to display additional controls, and thereby providing additional functionality and control functions without cluttering the UI with additional displayed controls) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, the device detects ( 1440 ) a request to display a cover sheet user interface (e.g., detecting the request includes detecting a downward swipe from the top edge of the touch-screen (e.g., while the first user interface is displayed (e.g., with or without the dock and/or control panel), as shown in FIG.  5 F 38 ), or detecting an input to wake the device from a display-off state (e.g., after a transition from displaying the first user interface in a display-on state to turning off the display in a display-off state, the device detects an input (e.g., lifting of the device, or a press input on a power button of the device) to transition back to the display-on state), as shown in FIG.  5 F 42 ). In some embodiments, the cover sheet user interface (e.g., cover sheet user interface  5900 , FIG.  5 F 39 ) is used to present recent information received and/or generated by applications installed on the device (e.g., providing ways to retain sets of notifications, clear sets of notifications, display missed notifications, display previously cleared notifications in a notification history, access information from an active mode of an application using a banner that is displayed in user interfaces other than the application user interface, and access additional user interfaces, both upon transitioning to the display-on state and subsequently during normal usage of the device). In some embodiments, the cover sheet user interface is a user interface that is immediately displayed when the device transitions from a screen-off state to a screen-on state (e.g., as shown in FIGS.  5 F 42 - 5 F 43 ) (e.g., upon waking the device from a sleep state and/or while the device is in a locked state) and the cover sheet user interface is available to be redisplayed (e.g., to allow a user to view notifications, access a mini application user interface and/or access a control panel user interface) after the device is unlocked. In response to detecting the request to display the cover sheet user interface, the device displays the cover sheet user interface (e.g., as shown in FIG.  5 F 39  and FIG.  5 F 43 ). While displaying the cover sheet user interface, the device detects an input by a fifth contact, including detecting movement of the fifth contact from the edge of the device onto the device (e.g., detecting touch-down of the fifth contact at an edge of the touch-screen, and detecting movement of the fifth contact from the edge of the touch-screen onto the touch-screen) (e.g., as shown in FIG.  5 F 40  and FIG.  5 F 44 ). In response to detecting the input by the fifth contact: in accordance with a determination that the request to display the cover sheet user interface was detected when the device was in a display-off state (e.g., when the request to display the cover sheet user interface is for waking the device and the cover sheet user interface serves as a wake screen user interface, as shown in FIGS.  5 F 42 - 5 F 43 ), the device displays the control panel (e.g., overlaid on the cover sheet user interface) (e.g., as shown in FIG.  5 F 44 - 5 F 45 ). In some embodiments, when the cover sheet user interface serves as a wake screen user interface, pressing the power button dismisses the cover sheet user interface and returns the device to the display-off state (e.g., a locked state or a sleep state). In accordance with a determination that the request to display the cover sheet user interface was detected when the device was displaying a respective user interface (e.g., the user interface of an application, or a home screen user interface) (e.g., as shown in FIGS.  5 F 38 - 5 F 39 ), the device replaces display of the cover sheet user interface with display of the respective user interface (e.g., as shown in FIGS.  5 F 40 - 5 F 41 ). In some embodiments, when the cover sheet user interface serves as a cover sheet to conceal an application user interface or home screen user interface, the first upward swipe from the bottom edge of the device dismisses the cover sheet user interface and reveals the user interface that was displayed prior to displaying the cover sheet user interface (e.g., as shown in FIGS.  5 F 38 - 5 F 41 ). In some embodiments, after the cover sheet user interface is dismissed by the first upward swipe, a second upward swipe brings up the dock over the application user interface and a third upward swipe brings up the control panel (or a long swipe brings up the dock and the control panel user interface (e.g., as explained above in FIGS.  5 F 1 - 5 F 24 ). Displaying the control panel (e.g., overlaid on the cover sheet user interface) or dismissing the cover sheet user interface depending on whether the cover sheet user interface serves as a wake screen user interface or is concealing an application user interface enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to achieve an intended outcome with fewer required inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device, and by providing additional control options without cluttering the user interface with additional displayed controls) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     It should be understood that the particular order in which the operations in  FIGS. 14A-14E  have been described is merely an example and is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations could be performed. One of ordinary skill in the art would recognize various ways to reorder the operations described herein. Additionally, it should be noted that details of other processes described herein with respect to other methods described herein (e.g., methods  600 ,  700 ,  800 ,  900 ,  1000 ,  1050 ,  1100 ,  1200 ,  1300 ,  1400 ,  1500 ,  1600 ,  1800 , and  1900 ) are also applicable in an analogous manner to method  1400  described above with respect to  FIGS. 14A-14E . For example, the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, application views, control panels, controls, position thresholds, directional conditions, navigation criteria, movement parameters, thresholds, determinations, focus selectors, and/or animations described above with reference to method  1400  optionally have one or more of the characteristics of the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, application views, control panels, controls, position thresholds, directional conditions, navigation criteria, movement parameters, thresholds, determinations, focus selectors, and/or animations described herein with reference to other methods described herein (e.g., methods  600 ,  700 ,  800 ,  900 ,  1000 ,  1050 ,  1100 ,  1200 ,  1300 ,  1400 ,  1500 ,  1600 ,  1800 , and  1900 ). For brevity, these details are not repeated here. 
     The operations in the information processing methods described above are, optionally implemented by running one or more functional modules in information processing apparatus such as general purpose processors (e.g., as described above with respect to  FIGS. 1A and 3 ) or application specific chips. 
     The operations described above with reference to  FIGS. 14A-14E  are, optionally, implemented by components depicted in  FIGS. 1A-1B . For example, display operation  1402 , detection operation  1404 , and display operation  1406  are, optionally, implemented by event sorter  170 , event recognizer  180 , and event handler  190 . Event monitor  171  in event sorter  170  detects a contact on touch-sensitive display  112 , and event dispatcher module  174  delivers the event information to application  136 - 1 . A respective event recognizer  180  of application  136 - 1  compares the event information to respective event definitions  186 , and determines whether a first contact at a first location on the touch-sensitive surface (or whether rotation of the device) corresponds to a predefined event or sub-event, such as selection of an object on a user interface, or rotation of the device from one orientation to another. When a respective predefined event or sub-event is detected, event recognizer  180  activates an event handler  190  associated with the detection of the event or sub-event. Event handler  190  optionally uses or calls data updater  176  or object updater  177  to update the application internal state  192 . In some embodiments, event handler  190  accesses a respective GUI updater  178  to update what is displayed by the application. Similarly, it would be clear to a person having ordinary skill in the art how other processes can be implemented based on the components depicted in  FIGS. 1A-1B . 
       FIGS. 15A-15C  are flow diagrams illustrating method  1500  of navigating to a control panel user interface from a different user interface in accordance with some embodiments. Method  1500  is performed at an electronic device (e.g., device  300 ,  FIG. 3 , or portable multifunction device  100 ,  FIG. 1A ) with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the display is a touch-screen display and the touch-sensitive surface is on or integrated with the display. In some embodiments, the display is separate from the touch-sensitive surface. Some operations in method  1500  are, optionally, combined and/or the order of some operations is, optionally, changed. 
     As described below, method  1500  provides an intuitive way to navigate to a control panel user interface from a different user interface. The method reduces the number, extent, and/or nature of the inputs from a user when navigating to a control panel user interface from a different user interface, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated electronic devices, enabling a user to navigate to a control panel user interface from a different user interface faster and more efficiently conserves power and increases the time between battery charges. 
     Method  1500  relates to transitioning from display of a first application to display of the control panel or notifications user interface in response to a swipe gesture from the top edge of the screen based on the region of the edge where the input originated. Swipe gestures from the bottom edge of the device transition display of a first application to display of a second application, the home screen, or an application-switching user interface based on different directional conditions and edge-swipe criteria. In addition, activation of the control panel user interface includes expansion of the status bar, providing the user with additional information about the current status of the device. 
     In some embodiments, method  1500  is performed at an electronic device with a touch-sensitive display (e.g., a touch-screen display that serves both as the display and the touch-sensitive surface). In some embodiments, the device does not have a home button (e.g., a mechanical button, a virtual button, a solid state button, etc.) that, when activated, is configured to dismiss a currently displayed user interface and replace the currently displayed user interface with a home screen that includes a plurality of application launch icons for a plurality of applications installed on the device. In some embodiments, the device has a home button (e.g., a mechanical button, a virtual button, a solid state button, etc.) 
     The device detects ( 1502 ) a first swipe gesture in a respective direction (e.g., down from the top of the device relative to the orientation of the display) from a first edge of the touch-sensitive display (e.g., contacts  5910 ,  5926 ,  5938 , and  5982  having movements  5912 ,  5928 ,  5940 , and  5984  illustrated in FIGS.  5 G 1 ,  5 G 7 ,  5 G 15 , and  5 H 22  respectively). In some embodiments, detecting the swipe gesture includes detecting a first contact at an initial touch-down location that is within a predefined region of the device that is proximate to the edge of the display (e.g., an edge region that includes a predefined portion (e.g., 20 pixels wide) of the display near the top edge of the device and, optionally, a portion of the top edge of the display outside of the display). In some embodiments, detecting the swipe gesture includes detecting initial movement of a first contact, e.g., vertical movement away from the edge of the display. In some embodiments, the device is displaying a first user interface of a first application on the display when the swipe gesture is first detected. 
     In response to detecting the first swipe gesture from the first edge of the touch-sensitive display ( 1504 ), in accordance with a determination that a respective portion of the first swipe gesture (e.g., a beginning of the detected swipe gesture) occurs at a first portion of the first edge of the touch-sensitive display (e.g., the right or left side of the top edge of the device, relative to the current orientation of the display), the device displays a plurality of controls for adjusting settings of the touch-sensitive display (e.g., a control panel user interface with controls for network connections, display brightness, audio playback, peripheral devices, etc.). For example, because the swipe gestures in FIGS.  5 G 1 ,  5 G 15 , and  5 H 22  were initiated from the right side of the top edge of the display, the downward motions of contacts  5910 ,  5938 , and  5984  in FIGS.  5 G 2 - 5 G 3 ,  5 G 16 - 5 G 17 , and  5 H 22 - 5 H 23  cause the device to display control panel  5914  and  5986 , respectively. In some embodiments, the control panel user interface is overlaid on the first user interface of the first application (e.g., the home screen is visible, but blurred, behind control panel  5914  in FIG.  5 G 4 , the lock screen is visible, but blurred, behind control panel  5914  in FIG.  5 G 17 , and the interactive map user interface is visible, but blurred, behind control panel  5986  in FIG.  5 H 24 ). 
     In response to detecting the first swipe gesture from the first edge of the touch-sensitive display ( 1504 ), in accordance with a determination that the respective portion of the first swipe gesture (e.g., the beginning of the detected swipe gesture) occurs at a second portion of the first edge of the touch-sensitive display, the device displays a plurality of recently received notifications. For example, because the swipe gesture in FIG.  5 G 17  was initiated in the center of the top edge of the display, as opposed to the right side of the top of the display, the downward motion of contact  5926  in FIGS.  5 G 8 - 5 G 9  cause the device to display notifications  5932 . 
     Allowing the user to navigate between the control panel, notifications, another application (e.g., a last displayed application), home, or application-switcher user interfaces depending on whether certain preset directional conditions and edge-swipe criteria are met enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, the first portion of the first edge of the touch-sensitive display is smaller ( 1506 ) than the second portion of the first edge of the touch-sensitive display. For example, when displaying a user interface of the device, only a portion of the right half of the top of the screen, relative to the orientation of the display (e.g., landscape or portrait), is associated with activation of control panel (e.g., only the area of the top edge of the display to the right of boundary  5930 , illustrated in FIG.  5 G 7 , is associated with activation of control panel), while the rest of the top of the screen, relative to the orientation of the display, is associated with activation of notifications (e.g., the area of the top edge of the display to the left of boundary  5930 , illustrated in FIG.  5 G 7 , is associated with activation of notifications). This is why the swipe gestures initiated in FIGS.  5 G 1  and  5 G 15 , starting to the right of boundary  5930  as illustrated in FIG.  5 G 7 , result in the display of control panel  5914 , while the swipe gesture initiated in FIG.  5 G 7 , starting to the left of boundary  5930 , results in the display of notifications  5932 . 
     Allowing the user to navigate to the notification user interface based on whether the swipe gesture initiated from a larger area on the top of the screen, rather than a smaller area of the edge corresponding to navigation to the control panel user interface, enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by reducing inadvertent navigation to the control panel user interface and reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, prior to detecting the first swipe gesture, one or more status indicators (e.g., or more of cell signal, airplane mode, LTE status, UMTS status, edge status, GPRS status, Wi-Fi-status, Bluetooth status, battery status, location services, alarm, display orientation lock, call forwarding status, network activity, syncing, hotspot status, or do not disturb) are displayed within the first portion of the first edge of the touch-sensitive display (e.g., status bar  402  illustrated in FIGS.  5 G 1  and  5 G 7 , and  5 G 15 ). In response to detecting the first swipe gesture from the first edge of the touch-sensitive display, in accordance with a determination that a respective portion of the first swipe gesture (e.g., a beginning of the detected swipe gesture) occurs at the first portion of the first edge of the touch-sensitive display, the device changes ( 1508 ) a position of the one or more status indicators (e.g., dynamically) according to the movement of the first swipe gesture from the edge of the touch sensitive display (e.g., the one or more status indicators move down from the edge of the screen proportional to movement of the gesture away from the edge of the screen). For example, in response to the swipe gesture down from the right side of the top edge of the display, status bar  402  moves down and expands in FIG.  5 G 2 , because the gesture initiated right of boundary  5930  is associated with activating control panel, but not in FIG.  5 G 8 , because the gesture initiated left of boundary  5930  is not associated with navigating to notifications, rather than control panel. 
     Displaying information about the status of the electronic device more prominently upon detecting an input associated with (e.g., that causes) display of a control panel user interface enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by providing visual feedback regarding the current status of the device when the user has indicated a desire to navigate to a user interface where the controls are, optionally, changed and by providing particular information to the user when they are most likely to want that information, while saving prominent display space during other times), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, the one or more status indicators (e.g., status bar  402 ) displayed prior to detecting the first swipe gesture includes ( 1510 ) at least a first status indicator and a second status indicator and, wherein changing a position of the one or more status indicators includes adding display of at least a third status indicator to the one or more displayed status indicators (e.g., as the gesture pulls down control panel from the top left corner of the device, the status bar drops down from the edge of the device and expands to display additional status information). For example, status bar  402  includes indicators for battery level, WiFi connectivity, and cellular network connectivity in FIG.  5 G 1 , and is expanded to include Bluetooth connectivity icon  5916  in response to the swipe gestures associated with navigation to the control panel user interface in FIG.  5 G 2 . 
     Displaying additional information about the status of the electronic device upon detecting an input associated with (e.g., that causes) display of a control panel user interface enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by providing visual feedback regarding the current status of the device when the user has indicated a desire to navigate to a user interface where the controls are, optionally, changed and by providing particular information to the user when they are most likely to want that information, while saving prominent display space during other times), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, wherein the plurality of controls for adjusting settings of the touch-sensitive display includes ( 1512 ) one or more controls that are responsive to inputs on the touch-sensitive display (e.g., one or more settings of the touch-sensitive device can be changed in response to detecting an input on a control corresponding to the one or more settings). This is illustrated, for example, in FIGS.  5 C 1 - 5 C 45  and described with respect to method  1100 . In some embodiments, the one or more settings of the touch-sensitive device can be changed in response to detecting an input that do not have a characteristic force above a predefined threshold (e.g., a light press), while inputs having a characteristic force above the predefined threshold (e.g., a deep press) triggers expansion of the control to allow for finer manipulation of the setting (e.g., the plurality of controls for adjusting settings of the touch-sensitive display includes a first control for controlling a first function of the device and a second control for controlling a second function of the device, as described in greater detail with respect to method  1100 . 
     In some embodiments, the control panel user interface further includes one or more additional control regions, each of which includes a respective plurality of controls for controlling corresponding functions of the device. In some embodiments, while displaying the plurality of controls for adjusting settings of the touch-sensitive display (e.g., after termination of the swipe gesture that activated control panel): detecting a first input by a first contact on the touch-sensitive surface; and in response to detecting the first input by the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface (including detecting the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface and detecting that the first contact is maintained at its initial touch location with less than a threshold amount of movement before lift-off of the contact is detected (e.g., the first contact is a stationary contact)): in accordance with a determination that the first input meets control-region-expansion criteria, wherein the control-region-expansion criteria require that an intensity of the first contact exceeds a first intensity threshold (e.g., the first input is a press input within the first control region) in order for the control-region-expansion criteria to be met, replacing display of the first control region with display of an expanded first control region, wherein the expanded first control region includes the first control, the second control, and one or more additional controls that are not included in the first control region (e.g., the controls displayed in the expanded control region include controls that are related to the first control and the second control (e.g., the first control is a playback control, the second control is a volume control, and the additional controls include a playlist selection control, an audio routing control, a fast forward control, etc.)). 
     In accordance with a determination that the first input meets first-control-activation criteria, wherein the first-control-activation criteria require that the first contact is detected at a first location on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to the first control in the first control region (e.g., the first input is a tap on the first control) and do not require that intensity of the first contact exceeds the first intensity threshold in order for the first-control-activation criteria to be met (e.g., the first control activation criteria are capable of being satisfied when the intensity of the first contact does not exceed the first intensity threshold), activating the first control for controlling the first function of the device. In some embodiments, the first-control-activation criteria are satisfied with a hard, quick, tap that is still registered as a “tap” by a tap gesture recognizer, and the first-control-activation criteria do not always require that the intensity of the contact remain below a particular intensity threshold in order for the first-control activation criteria to be satisfied. 
     In accordance with a determination that the first input meets second-control-activation criteria, wherein the second-control-activation criteria require that the first contact is detected at a second location on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to the second control in the first control region (e.g., the first input is a tap on the second control) and do not require that intensity of the first contact exceeds the first intensity threshold in order for the second-control-activation criteria to be met (e.g., the second control activation criteria are capable of being satisfied when the intensity of the first contact does not exceed the first intensity threshold), activating the second control for controlling the second function of the device. In some embodiments, the second-control-activation criteria are satisfied with a hard, quick, tap that is still registered as a “tap” by a tap gesture recognizer, and the second-control-activation criteria do not always require that the intensity of the contact remain below a particular intensity threshold in order for the second-control activation criteria to be satisfied. 
     In some embodiments, the device generates a first tactile output when the control-region-expansion criteria are met by the first input, and the device generates a second tactile output when the first-control-activation criteria and/or the second-control-activation criteria are met by the first input, where the first tactile output and the second tactile output have different tactile output properties. In some embodiments (e.g., for devices that do not detect multiple levels of intensity variations in a contact), the control-region-expansion criteria are met by a touch-hold input by the first contact. 
     Providing additional controls or activating a currently selected control based on characteristics of a single input enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by reducing the number of inputs needed to display additional controls, and thereby providing additional functionality and control functions without cluttering the UI with additional displayed controls) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, the device detects ( 1514 ) a second swipe gesture in a respective direction (e.g., up from the bottom of the device, relative to the current orientation of the display) from a second edge of the touch-sensitive display that is different than the first edge of the touch-sensitive display (e.g., the swipe gesture including contact  5040  having movement  5042  in FIGS.  5 A 19 - 5 A 23  and the swipe gesture including contact  5968  having movement  5970  in FIGS.  5 H 9 - 5 H 12 ). In some embodiments, detecting the swipe gesture includes detecting a second contact at an initial touch-down location that is within a predefined region of the device that is proximate to the edge of the display (e.g., an edge region that includes a predefined portion (e.g., 20 pixels wide) of the display near the bottom edge of the device and, optionally, a portion of the bottom edge of the display outside of the display). In some embodiments, detecting the swipe gesture includes detecting initial movement of a second contact (e.g., vertical movement away from the edge of the display). 
     In response to detecting the second swipe gesture from the second edge of the touch-sensitive display, the device displays ( 1516 ) a home screen user interface (that is distinct from the application-switcher user interface and) that includes a plurality of application icons (e.g., for launching or opening applications) that correspond to a plurality of applications (e.g., including the plurality of recently open applications and, optionally, one or more additional applications that are closed without retained state information, such that when activated, the applications are started from their default starting states)). For example, in response to detecting the swipe gesture in FIGS.  5 A 19 - 5 A 23  and  5 H 9 - 5 H 11 , the device navigates to a home screen, as illustrated in FIGS.  5 A 24  and  5 H 12 , respectively. 
     Displaying a home screen user interface in response to a swipe gesture from an edge of the display is described in greater detail with respect to methods  600 ,  700 , and  1900  illustrated in FIGS.  5 A 1 - 5 A 77  and  5 H 1 - 5 H 27 . 
     Allowing the user to navigate to the home screen user interface based on a swipe gesture initiated from an edge of the display that is different from the edge of the screen associated with navigation to the control panel and notification user interfaces enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, the device detects ( 1518 ) a second swipe gesture in a respective direction (e.g., up from the bottom of the device, relative to the current orientation of the display) from a second edge of the touch-sensitive display that is different than the first edge of the touch-sensitive display (e.g., the swipe gesture including contact  5004  having movement  5006  in FIGS.  5 A 2 - 5 A 7  and the swipe gesture including contact  5950  having movement  5952  in FIGS.  5 H 5 - 5 H 7 ). In some embodiments, detecting the swipe gesture includes detecting a second contact at an initial touch-down location that is within a predefined region of the device that is proximate to the edge of the display (e.g., an edge region that includes a predefined portion (e.g., 20 pixels wide) of the display near the bottom edge of the device and, optionally, a portion of the bottom edge of the display outside of the display). In some embodiments, detecting the swipe gesture includes detecting initial movement of a second contact (e.g., vertical movement away from the edge of the display). 
     In response to detecting the second swipe gesture from the second edge of the touch-sensitive display, the device displays ( 1520 ) an application-switcher user interface that includes a plurality of representations of applications (e.g., application launch icons, reduced scale images of application user interfaces, etc.) for selectively activating one of a plurality of applications represented in the application-switcher user interface (e.g., selection of a respective application-selection object re-activates the corresponding application to a state immediate prior to the suspension of the application). For example, in response to detecting the swipe gesture in FIGS.  5 A 2 - 5 A 7  and  5 H 5 - 5 H 7 , the device navigates to an application-switcher user interface, as illustrated in FIGS.  5 A 8  and  5 H 8 , respectively. In some embodiments, the representations of applications are ordered based on a recency of use of the applications to which they correspond (e.g., with representations of more recently used apps displayed before/above representations of less recently used apps). In some embodiments, the application-switcher user interface includes at least a portion of a control panel user interface). 
     Displaying an application-switcher user interface in response to a swipe gesture from an edge of the display is described in greater detail with respect to methods  600 ,  700 ,  800 , and  1900  illustrated in  FIGS. 5A - 5 A 77  and  5 H 1 - 5 H 27 . 
     Allowing the user to navigate to the application-switcher user interface based on a swipe gesture initiated from an edge of the display that is different from the edge of the screen associated with navigation to the control panel and notification user interfaces enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, the device detects ( 1522 ) a second swipe gesture in a respective direction (e.g., up from the bottom of the device, relative to the current orientation of the display) from a second edge of the touch-sensitive display that is different than the first edge of the touch-sensitive display (e.g., the swipe gestures including contacts  5004  and  5040 , having movements  5006  and  5042 , in FIGS.  5 A 2 - 5 A 7  and  5 A 19 - 5 A 23 , respectively). In some embodiments, detecting the swipe gesture includes detecting a second contact at an initial touch-down location that is within a predefined region of the device that is proximate to the edge of the display (e.g., an edge region that includes a predefined portion (e.g., 20 pixels wide) of the display near the bottom edge of the device and, optionally, a portion of the bottom edge of the display outside of the display). In some embodiments, detecting the swipe gesture includes detecting initial movement of a second contact (e.g., vertical movement away from the edge of the display). 
     In response to detecting the second swipe gesture from the second edge of the touch-sensitive display: in accordance with a determination that the second swipe gesture meets application-switcher-display criteria (e.g., based on a predefined movement parameter of the second portion of the input, or based on a predefined movement parameter of the first application view (e.g., either actual movement or projected movement), the device displays ( 1524 ) an application-switcher user interface that includes a plurality of representations of applications (e.g., application launch icons, reduced scale images of application user interfaces, etc.) for selectively activating one of a plurality of applications represented in the application-switcher user interface (e.g., selection of a respective application-selection object re-activates the corresponding application to a state immediate prior to the suspension of the application). For example, as illustrated in FIGS.  5 A 2 - 5 A 8 . 
     In some embodiments application-switcher-display criteria require that the second portion of the input or the first application view meets a first movement condition (e.g., a first condition regarding the contact&#39;s speed, acceleration, position, or a combination of one or more of the above, or a first condition regarding a derived movement parameter of the first application view that is based on one or more of the above and optionally one or more additional properties characterizing the state of the current user interface and/or the movements of one or more objects contained therein, etc.) in order for the application-switcher-display criteria to be met). In some embodiments, the representations of applications are ordered based on a recency of use of the applications to which they correspond (e.g., with representations of more recently used apps displayed before/above representations of less recently used apps). In some embodiments, the application-switcher user interface includes at least a portion of a control panel user interface. 
     In response to detecting the second swipe gesture from the second edge of the touch-sensitive display: in accordance with a determination that the second swipe gesture meets home-display criteria (e.g., based on a predefined movement parameter of the second portion of the input, or based on a predefined movement parameter of the first application view (e.g., either actual movement or projected movement), the device displays ( 1524 ) a home screen user interface (that is distinct from the application-switcher user interface and) that includes a plurality of application launch icons that correspond to a plurality of applications (e.g., including the plurality of recently open applications and, optionally, one or more additional applications that are closed without retained state information, such that when activated, the applications are started from their default starting states)). For example, as illustrated in FIGS.  5 A 19 - 5 A 24 . 
     In some embodiments, home-display criteria require that the second portion of the input or the first application view meets a second movement condition that is different from the first movement condition (e.g., a second condition regarding the contact&#39;s speed, acceleration, position, or a combination of one or more of the above, or a second condition regarding a derived movement parameter of the first application view that is based on one or more of the above and optionally one or more additional properties characterizing the state of the current user interface and/or movements of one or more objects contained therein, etc.) in order for the home-display criteria to be met. 
     Determining whether to display an application-switcher user interface or a home screen user interface in response to a swipe gesture from an edge of the display is described in greater detail with respect to methods  600 ,  700 ,  800 , and  1900  illustrated in FIGS.  5 A 1 - 5 A 77  and  5 H 1 - 5 H 27 . 
     Allowing the user to navigate to the home screen or application-switcher user interface based on a swipe gesture initiated from an edge of the display that is different from the edge of the screen associated with navigation to the control panel and notifications user interface and based on movement parameters of the input that are different for displaying the home screen than for displaying the application-switcher user interface, enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, the second edge of the touch-sensitive display is opposite ( 1526 ) the first edge of the touch-sensitive display on the electronic device (e.g., control panel is activated by a swipe gesture down from the upper right of the touch-sensitive display, notifications is activated by a swipe down from the upper left and center of the touch sensitive display, and navigation to the home screen and application-switcher is accessed through a swipe gesture up from the bottom of the touch-sensitive display, relative to the current orientation of the display on the device). For example, the swipe gestures in FIGS.  5 G 1 - 5 G 3 ,  5 G 7 - 5 G 9 , and  5 H 22 - 5 H 23  navigating to control panel and notifications, respectively, start from the top edge of the device, while the swipe gestures in FIGS.  5 A 2 - 5 A 7 ,  5 A 19 - 5 A 23 ,  5 H 5 - 5 H 7 , and  5 H 9 - 5 H 11 , navigating to the application-switcher and home screen, start from the bottom edge of the device. 
     Allowing the user to navigate to the home screen or application-switcher user interface based on a swipe gesture initiated from an opposite edge of the display than the edge of the screen associated with navigation to the control panel and notifications user interface enhances, and based on movement parameters of the input that are different for displaying the home screen than for displaying the application-switcher user interface, enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, while displaying the plurality of controls for adjusting settings of the touch-sensitive display, wherein the plurality of controls includes a first control (e.g., flashlight control  5922  in FIG.  5 G 5 ) for adjusting a first setting of the touch-sensitive display but does not include a second control (e.g., battery control  5924 ) for adjusting a second setting of the touch-sensitive display (e.g., if control panel includes more than a threshold quantity of controls, only a sub-plurality of all controls are displayed within control panel at any one time), the device detects ( 1528 ) a third swipe gesture in a respective direction across the plurality of controls for adjusting settings of the touch-sensitive display (e.g., the swipe gesture including contact  5918  and movement  5920 , across control panel  5914 , in FIG.  5 G 5 . In some embodiments, detecting the third swipe gesture includes detecting a third contact at an initial touch-down location that is within a predefined region displaying the pluralities of controls, e.g., the swipe must be initiated within control panel. 
     In response to detecting the third swipe gesture, the device ceases ( 1530 ) to display the first control (e.g., flashlight control  5922  is not displayed in control panel  5914  in FIG.  5 G 6 ) for adjusting the first setting of the touch-sensitive display in the plurality of controls for adjusting settings of the touch-sensitive display (e.g., sliding the first control out of the control panel display), and displays the second control (e.g., battery control  5924  is displayed in control panel  5914  in FIG.  5 G 6 ) for adjusting the second setting of the touch-sensitive display in the plurality of controls for adjusting settings of the touch-sensitive display (e.g., sliding the second control onto the control panel display by shifting which controls are visible in the control panel user interface while maintaining display of at least a portion of the control panel user interface on the display). In some embodiments, the controls in the control panel slide in response to a swipe gesture in the respective direction across the plurality of controls when there are more controls (e.g., an amount of controls that take up more than the allotted area for the control panel user interface on the touch-sensitive display) in the control panel user interface than can be displayed on the touch-sensitive display at the same time (e.g., in response to detecting the third swipe gesture, in accordance with a determination that there are more than a predetermined amount of controls in the control panel, the control panel shifts in the respective direction, and in accordance with a determination that there are less than the predetermined amount of controls in the control panel, the control panel does not shift in the respective direction). 
     In some embodiments, a swipe in the respective direction that starts from the second edge of the touch-sensitive display causes the control panel user interface to cease to be displayed instead of any of: maintaining at least a portion of the control panel user interface on the display (e.g., which occurs when the swipe in the respective direction occurs at a location that does not start from the second edge of the touch-sensitive display as described above), displaying a home screen user interface (e.g., which would occur in response to a long and/or fast swipe in the respective direction that started from the second edge of the touch-sensitive display, as described with respect to method  600 , illustrated in FIGS.  5 A 1 - 5 A 77 ), or displaying an application switching user interface on the display (e.g., which would occur in response to a short and/or slow swipe in the respective direction that started from the second edge of the touch-sensitive display, as described with respect to method  600 , illustrated in  FIGS. 5A - 5 A 77 ). 
     Allowing the user to navigate within the control panel user interface to display additional device controls enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device, and by allowing individual controls to be displayed at a large enough size on the display such that they can be directly manipulated without having to navigate between another layer of the user interface), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     It should be understood that the particular order in which the operations in  FIGS. 15A-15C  have been described is merely an example and is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations could be performed. One of ordinary skill in the art would recognize various ways to reorder the operations described herein. Additionally, it should be noted that details of other processes described herein with respect to other methods described herein (e.g., methods  600 ,  700 ,  800 ,  900 ,  1000 ,  1050 ,  1100 ,  1200 ,  1300 ,  1400 ,  1600 ,  1800 , and  1900 ) are also applicable in an analogous manner to method  1500  described above with respect to  FIGS. 15A-15C . For example, the control panel, controls, contacts, gestures, user interface objects, tactile outputs, thresholds, determinations, focus selectors, and animations described above with reference to method  1500  optionally have one or more of the characteristics of the control panel, controls, contacts, gestures, user interface objects, tactile outputs, thresholds, determinations focus selectors, animations described herein with reference to other methods described herein (e.g., methods  600 ,  700 ,  800 ,  900 ,  1000 ,  1050 ,  1100 ,  1200 ,  1300 ,  1400 ,  1600 ,  1800 , and  1900 ). For brevity, these details are not repeated here. 
     The operations in the information processing methods described above are, optionally implemented by running one or more functional modules in information processing apparatus such as general purpose processors (e.g., as described above with respect to  FIGS. 1A and 3 ) or application specific chips. 
     The operations described above with reference to  FIGS. 15A-15C  are, optionally, implemented by components depicted in  FIGS. 1A-1B . For example, detection operation  1502  and display operation  1504  are, optionally, implemented by event sorter  170 , event recognizer  180 , and event handler  190 . Event monitor  171  in event sorter  170  detects a contact on touch-sensitive display  112 , and event dispatcher module  174  delivers the event information to application  136 - 1 . A respective event recognizer  180  of application  136 - 1  compares the event information to respective event definitions  186 , and determines whether a first contact at a first location on the touch-sensitive surface (or whether rotation of the device) corresponds to a predefined event or sub-event, such as selection of an object on a user interface, or rotation of the device from one orientation to another. When a respective predefined event or sub-event is detected, event recognizer  180  activates an event handler  190  associated with the detection of the event or sub-event. Event handler  190  optionally uses or calls data updater  176  or object updater  177  to update the application internal state  192 . In some embodiments, event handler  190  accesses a respective GUI updater  178  to update what is displayed by the application. Similarly, it would be clear to a person having ordinary skill in the art how other processes can be implemented based on the components depicted in  FIGS. 1A-1B . 
       FIGS. 16A-16D  are a flow diagram illustrating a method  1600  of navigating between user interfaces, in accordance with some embodiments. The method  1600  is performed at an electronic device (e.g., device  300 ,  FIG. 3 , or portable multifunction device  100 ,  FIG. 1A ) with a display and a touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the electronic device includes one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the touch-sensitive surface and the display are integrated into a touch-sensitive display. In some embodiments, the display is a touch-screen display and the touch-sensitive surface is on or integrated with the display. In some embodiments, the display is separate from the touch-sensitive surface. Some operations in method  1600  are, optionally, combined and/or the order of some operations is, optionally, changed. 
     Method  1600  relates to navigating between user interfaces in response to a swipe gesture that meets different movement conditions. Allowing the user to navigate (i) to the home screen, (ii) to the application displayed on the screen prior (e.g., immediately prior) to a user interface that was displayed when the swipe gesture began (e.g., a “next or previous application”), (iii) to an application switching user interface (sometimes referred elsewhere as a “multitasking” user interface), or (iv) back to the user interface that was displayed when the swipe gesture began (the “current application”), depending on whether certain preset movement conditions (e.g., velocity and position threshold criteria) are met enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). In some embodiments, a dock is displayed on the currently displayed user interface in response to an initial portion of the input that meets a movement condition corresponding to dock-display. In some embodiments, some of the thresholds are adjusted depending on whether the dock was already displayed on the screen when the input began. Method  1600  relates to improving the accuracy of navigating between user interfaces, by dynamically adjusting threshold values based on predicted final user interface states. Additionally, method  1600  relates to improving the accuracy of navigating between user interfaces by reducing the impact of unintended inputs and artifacts associated with the lack of motion sensors outside of the display region. 
     Method  1600  is performed at a device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface (in some embodiments, the display is a touch-sensitive display), displaying a user interface (e.g., an application user interface or a home screen user interface) (e.g., on the touch-screen display). The device detects ( 1602 ) a contact at the bottom edge of the touch-screen display (e.g., contact  5004 ,  5040 ,  5052 ,  5056 ,  5060 ,  5064 ,  5065 ,  5069 ,  5070 ,  5074 ,  5950 ,  5968 ,  5972 ,  5980 , and  5988  in FIGS.  5 A 2 ,  5 A 19 ,  5 A 34 ,  5 A 37 ,  5 A 40 ,  5 A 43 ,  5 A 46 ,  5 A 49 ,  5 A 52 ,  5 A 57 ,  5 H 5 ,  5 H 9 ,  5 H 13 ,  5 H 18 , and  5 H 25  respectively) and enters a transitional user interface allowing the user to navigate to different user interfaces (e.g., back to the current application, to a different (e.g., next/previous) application user interface, to a home screen user interface, or to an application-switcher user interface). In some embodiment, the device replaces the user interface for the application with a corresponding application view (e.g., application views  5010 ,  5022 ,  5022 ,  5010 ,  5010 ,  5022 ,  5014 ,  5022 ,  5014 , and  5954  in FIGS.  5 A 3 ,  5 A 20 ,  5 A 35 ,  5 A 38 ,  5 A 41 ,  5 A 44 ,  5 A 47 ,  5 A 50 ,  5 A 53 ,  5 H 7 ,  5 H 10 ,  5 H 14 ,  5 H 19 , and  5 H 26 , respectively) in the transitional user interface. In some embodiments, before the device enters the transitional user interface, the device fully displays an application dock over the currently displayed user interface in response to an initial portion of the input, and the device displays the transitional user interface after the dock is fully displayed and the input meets a preset (e.g., static or dynamic) movement condition (e.g., positional threshold  5948  in FIGS.  5 H 6 - 5 H 7 ). In some embodiments, the device enters the transitional user interface before the dock is fully displayed on the screen. 
     The device monitors ( 1604 ) the position and velocity of the contact and provides visual feedback, (e.g., by moving, shrinking, or enlarging the application view that replaced the user interface when the input began) indicating to the user how the device will navigate (e.g., what user interface will be displayed and active) upon lift-off of the contact. In some embodiments, the position and velocity of the contact correspond to the display of the application view providing feedback to the user. For example, as illustrated in FIG.  5 A 5 , device  100  monitors the position and velocity of application view  5010 . Because the instantaneous velocity of application view  5010  meets home-display criteria, the device displays application view  5010  without displaying an application view for any other recently open application, indicating that the device will navigate to the home screen user interface upon immediate lift-off of the contact. 
     In contrast, as illustrated in FIG.  5 A 6 , because application view  5010  has paused at a position that meets application-switcher-display criteria, rather than home-display criteria, the device additionally displays a portion of application view  5014 , corresponding to a recently open application, and a portion of control panel view  5016 , corresponding to a control panel, indicating that the device will navigate to an application-switcher user interface upon immediate lift-off of the contact. In some embodiments, the control panel user interface is not accessible from the transitional user interface and, thus, when the device provides visual feedback indicating that the target state of the device is the application-switcher user interface it does not include display of a representation of a control panel user interface. Example embodiments, where the control panel is accessible in response to detecting a swipe-gesture from the top of the display, rather than a swipe-gesture from the bottom of the display is home state and the application-switcher state, are discussed in greater detail herein with respect to methods  1500  and  1900 , illustrated in FIGS.  5 G 1 - 5 G 17  and  5 H 1 - 5 H 27 . 
     The device then assigns ( 160   x   1 ) a current target state (e.g., a user interface that would be navigated to if the input were to be lifted-off at that time) based on the current properties of the input (e.g., predicting what user interface the user will navigate to upon lift-off of the input). As illustrated in  FIG. 16A , the device selects a target state by proceeding through one or more (e.g., a series of) decisions ( 160   x   2 - 160   x   11 ) based on the current characteristics of the input and the value of one or more thresholds (e.g., by comparing the input characteristics to various velocity and position thresholds). 
     Each of these decisions is shown in more detail in corresponding  FIGS. 16B-16D  and described below in greater detail. One or more of the decisions are, optionally excluded or rearranged within assignment operation  160   x   1 . In some embodiments, additional decisions are, optionally, added to the set of decisions within assignment operation  160   x   1 . Additionally, decisions resulting in the display of other user interfaces (e.g., a control panel user interface or a notifications user interface) are, optionally, added to the set of decisions within assignment operation  160   x   1 . 
     The device then determines ( 1636 ) whether liftoff of the contact was detected. If lift-off was detected, the device navigates to ( 1638 ) (e.g., displays the user interface for) the currently assigned target state (e.g., the target state assigned by assignment operation  160   x   1 ). For example, liftoff of contact  5004 ,  5040 ,  5052 ,  5056 ,  5060 ,  5064 ,  5065 ,  5069 ,  5070 ,  5074 ,  5950 ,  5968 ,  5972 ,  5980 , and  5988  in FIGS.  5 A 7 ,  5 A 24 ,  5 A 36 ,  5 A 39 ,  5 A 42 ,  5 A 45 ,  5 A 48 ,  5 A 51 ,  5 A 56 ,  5 A 59 ,  5 H 8 ,  5 H 12 ,  5 H 17 ,  5 H 21 , and  5 H 27 , respectively, results in navigation to the assigned user interface target state. For example, because contact  5004  was paused at position  5004 - e , in FIG.  5 A 6 , before liftoff was detected, in FIG.  5 A 7 , the device would have assigned application-switcher as the target state (e.g., according to decision  160   x   6  “pause for app-switcher,” because the current velocity of the threshold was located within sector V, near the origin in  FIG. 17A , application-switcher is assigned as the target state) such that the device navigates to the application-switcher user interface in FIG.  5 A 8  because it is the currently assigned target state when liftoff is detected in FIG.  5 A 7 . 
     If liftoff has not been detected, the device optionally updates ( 1640 ) a dynamic threshold affecting the selection of one or more current target user interfaces, e.g., according to the sub-method illustrated in  FIG. 16D . In some embodiments, dynamic thresholds are adjusted to favor a currently predicted final user interface target state to prevent unintended changes in the properties of the input during lift-off of the contact to affect the final determination. For example, in some embodiments, if the user pauses a contact at a position on the display corresponding to navigation to the application-switcher user interface, the device provides visual feedback by starting to slide representations of previous user interfaces under the representation of the “current application.” To prevent the device from navigating home if the user incidentally moves his finger quickly up while lifting-off, the device will increase a dynamic velocity threshold (e.g., velocity threshold range  1710  in  FIG. 17A ) while the contact is paused, in anticipation of a liftoff event navigating the device to the application-switcher user interface. 
     If liftoff was not detected, the device continues to monitor ( 1604 ) the properties of the input and provide visual feedback, update (e.g., assign) ( 160   x   1 ) the current target state, and optionally update ( 1640 ) dynamic threshold values until liftoff is detected ( 1636 ). 
     In some embodiments, when assigning ( 160   x   1 ) a current target state, the device first determines ( 160   x   2 ) whether the input appears to be a “flick up to go home” gesture (e.g., an input that is substantially fast in the vertical direction or fast enough and substantially vertical (e.g., more vertical than horizontal)), indicating an intent of the user (as determined by the device) to navigate to the home screen user interface. The device determines whether the velocity of the contact meets ( 1606 ) a first y-velocity threshold (e.g., velocity threshold  1702 , defining sector I in  FIG. 17A ) or meets ( 1608 ) a second velocity threshold (e.g., a lower y-velocity threshold such as velocity threshold  1710  in the y-direction (e.g., distinguishing sector II from sector V) in  FIG. 17A ) and is substantially upwards (e.g., within slope thresholds  1704  and  1706  (distinguishing sector II, where the velocity is more vertical, from sectors III and IV, where the velocity of the contact is more horizontal) in  FIG. 17A ). If the properties of the contact meet either of these criteria, the device assigns ( 1612 ) the home screen user interface as the current target state. 
     In some embodiments, the device then checks for one or more exceptions (e.g., via decisions  160   x   9 ,  160   x   10 , and  160   x   11 , described in more detail below) that, in some circumstances, reassign the current target state. The device then determines ( 1636 ) whether liftoff has been detected and, if so, navigates to (e.g., displays) ( 1638 ) the home screen user interface if the current target state was not reassigned according to an exception. For example, assuming that movement  5042  of contact  5022  in FIG.  5 A 22  was either faster than y-velocity threshold  1702  or fell within sector III in  FIG. 17A  (e.g., satisfying “flick up to go home” criteria ( 1606 ) or ( 1608 )), the device assigns the home screen user interface as the current target state, such that upon liftoff in FIG.  5 A 23 , the device navigates (e.g., displays) the home screen user interface because it was the current target state at the time of liftoff. 
     In some embodiments, if the device determines that the input does not satisfy “flick up to go home” criteria ( 160   x   2 ), the device then determines ( 160   x   3 ) whether the input appears to be a “drag up to go home” gesture (e.g., an input that travels sufficiently far in the vertical direction, regardless of how fast), indicating an intent of the user (as determined by the device) to navigate to the home screen user interface. The device determines ( 1610 ) whether the y-position of the input (e.g., either a current y-position of the contact/user interface representation or a predicted y-position of the user interface representation) meets a first y-position threshold (e.g., first y-position threshold  1716  in  FIG. 17B ). If the properties of the contact meet this criteria, the device assigns ( 1612 ) the home screen user interface as the current target state. 
     In some embodiments, the device then checks for exceptions (e.g., via decisions  160   x   9 ,  160   x   10 , and  160   x   11 , described in more detail below) that, in some circumstances, reassign the current target state. The device then determines ( 1636 ) whether liftoff has been detected and, if so, navigates to (e.g., displays) ( 1638 ) the home screen user interface if the current target state was not reassigned according to an exception. For example, assuming that the position of  5022  in FIG.  5 A 22  is sufficiently far enough from the bottom edge of the display (e.g., past y-position threshold  1716  depicted in  FIG. 17B ), e.g., satisfying “drag up to go home” criteria ( 1610 ), the device assigns the home screen user interface as the current target state, such that upon liftoff in FIG.  5 A 23 , the device navigates (e.g., displays) the home screen user interface because it was the current target state at the time of liftoff. 
     In some embodiments, if the device determines that the input does not satisfy “drag up to go home” criteria ( 160   x   3 ), the device then determines ( 160   x   4 ) whether the input appears to be a “side swipe for next/previous app” gesture (e.g., a swipe to the right or left with sufficient horizontal velocity, that is either moving downward or near the bottom of the display, and that is not indicative of returning from a peak of a next/previous application), indicating an intent of the user (as determined by the device) to navigate to a different application in the application stack (e.g., a previously displayed application user interface). The device first determines ( 1614 ) whether the x-velocity of the input meets a first x-velocity threshold in a horizontal direction (e.g., when traveling leftwards, a velocity threshold defined by the left boundary of the range of velocity threshold  1710  in conjunction with slope thresholds  1704  and  1712 , defining the union of sectors III and VI in  FIG. 17A  or, when traveling rightwards, a velocity threshold defined by the right boundary of the range of the velocity threshold  1710  in conjunction with slope thresholds  1706  and  1714 , defining the union of sectors IV and VII in  FIG. 17A . 
     In some embodiments, if the contact meets this criteria, the device then determines whether the projected y-position of the representation of the user interface corresponding to the user interface displayed when the input was first detected is below ( 1618 ) the current y-position of the representation (e.g., whether the card is traveling with downward motion on the display; in some embodiments, rather than determining a projected position of the representation, the device determines whether the y-velocity of the contact is negative (e.g., traveling towards the bottom edge of the display)) or the y-position of the contact (e.g., or UI representation) is below ( 1620 ) a y-position threshold (e.g., a minimal y-position threshold corresponding to a probability that the input was an inadvertent edge-touch). If the input does not meet either of these criteria, the device assigns ( 1622 ) the application-switcher user interface as the current target state. 
     In some embodiments, if the input meets either of the y-velocity ( 1618 ) or y-position ( 1620 ) criteria, the device determines ( 1621 ) whether the input is traveling in a direction opposite of a previous direction it traveled after a threshold amount of movement. If the input does not meet this criteria, the device assigns ( 1624 ) a next/previous application user interface as the current target state. For example, in FIG.  5 A 44 , contact  5064  is traveling to the right and did not previously travel to the left, so the device assigns a previous application user interface (e.g., corresponding to representation  5014 ) as the current target state. In some embodiments, the decision as to whether to select a next application or a previous application as a current target state depends on a direction of movement (e.g., a direction of change in position of the input or a direction of velocity of the input) of the input that is used to make the determination to set the next/previous application user interface as the current target state. In some embodiments, the direction of change in position of the input is used to determine whether to select a next application or a previous application as the current target state if the direction of change in position is the determining characteristic of the input. In some embodiments, the direction of velocity of the input is used to determine whether to select a next application or a previous application as the current target state if the direction of velocity is the determining characteristic of the input. For example, if the input moves to the left and next/previous application is selected as the current target state, then previous application is selected as the current target state and if the input moves to the right and next/previous application is selected as the current target state, then next application (or a control panel user interface, if there is no next application) is selected as the current target state, or vice versa. 
     In some embodiments, if the input is traveling in a direction opposite of a previous direction it traveled after a threshold amount of movement (e.g., satisfying criteria ( 1621 )), the device assigns ( 1630 ) the current application user interface as the current target state. This assignment avoids unintended navigations, for example, when a user starts a swipe gesture right to peek at a previous application user interface, without intent to actually navigate to the previous application user interface, and then changes the direction of the input to return to the “current application.” Without this rule, assignment logic  160   x   1  would assign a next application user interface (e.g., an application to the right of the “current” application), rather than the current application. For example, in FIG.  5 A 44  an email application corresponding to representation  5022  is assigned as the “current application” because that is the application that was active when contact  5064  was first detected in FIG.  5 A 43 . Contact  5064  has moved to the left to display a portion of an application interface (e.g., provide the user with the opportunity to peek at the messaging user interface corresponding to representation  5014 ). If, having peeked at the messaging application, the user changed the direction of contact  5064  back to the left, with intent to return to the email user interface, the device would assign the web browsing application, corresponding to representation  5010  in FIG.  5 A 41 , e.g., the “next application” user interface (because the card stack did not reshuffle after navigation from the web browsing user interface to the email user interface in FIGS.  5 A 40 - 5 A 41 , representation  5010  corresponding to web browsing application sits to the right—as the “next application”—of representation  5022  corresponding to the email application), as the current target state without this exception because the input otherwise meets x-velocity criteria ( 1614 ) to the left and y-position criteria ( 1620 ). 
     Having assigned the application-switcher user interface ( 1622 ), next/previous application user interface ( 1624 ), or current application user interface ( 1630 ) as the current target state, in some embodiments, the device then checks for exceptions (e.g., via decisions  160   x   9 ,  160   x   10 , and  160   x   11 , described in more detail below) that, in some circumstances, reassign the current target state. The device then determines ( 1636 ) whether liftoff has been detected and, if so, navigates to (e.g., displays) ( 1638 ) the currently assigned target state user interface. 
     In some embodiments, if the device determines that the input does not satisfy “side swipe for next/previous app” criteria ( 160   x   4 ), the device then determines ( 160   x   5 ) whether the input appears to be a “bottom edge swipe for next/previous app” gesture (e.g., an input traveling left or right along the bottom edge of the display), indicating an intent of the user (as determined by the device) to navigate to a previously displayed application user interface. The device determines ( 1616 ) whether the x-position of the input (e.g., either a current x-position of the contact/user interface representation or a predicted x-position of the user interface representation) meets a second x-position threshold (e.g., second x-position threshold  1720  depicted in  FIG. 17B ) in a right or left direction with minimal y-translation (e.g., below min y-translation threshold  1722  depicted in  FIG. 17B ). If the properties of the contact meet this criteria, the device assigns ( 1624 ) a next/previous application user interface as the current target state. 
     In some embodiments, the device then checks for exceptions (e.g., via decisions  160   x   9 ,  160   x   10 , and  160   x   11 , described in more detail below) that, in some circumstances, reassign the current target state. The device then determines ( 1636 ) whether liftoff has been detected and, if so, navigates to (e.g., displays) ( 1638 ) a next/previous user interface if the current target state was not reassigned according to an exception. For example, assuming that the position of contact  5064  in FIG.  5 A 44  is sufficiently far enough to the right (e.g., past x-position threshold  1720 - b  depicted in  FIG. 17B ) and close enough to the bottom edge of the display (e.g., below minimum y-translation threshold  1722  depicted in  FIG. 17B ), e.g., satisfying “side swipe for next/previous app” criteria ( 1616 ), the device assigns the messaging application user interface corresponding to representation  5014  in FIG.  5 A 44 , such that upon liftoff in FIG.  5 A 45 , the device navigates (e.g., displays) the messaging user interface because it was the current target state at the time of liftoff. 
     In some embodiments, if the device determines that the input does not satisfy “bottom edge swipe for next/previous app” criteria ( 160   x   5 ), the device then determines ( 160   x   6 ) whether the input appears to be a “pause for app-switcher” gesture (e.g., a pause or near pause in the velocity of an input), indicating an intent of the user (as determined by the device) to navigate to an application-switcher user interface. The device determines ( 1626 ) whether the x-velocity and y-velocity of the input (e.g., either current x,y-position of the contact/user interface representation or a predicted x,y-position of the user interface representation) have a minimal velocity (e.g., a velocity corresponding to a point near the origin, in sector V, of the velocity threshold scheme depicted in  FIG. 17A ). If the properties of the contact meet this criteria, the device assigns ( 1622 ) an application-switcher user interface as the current target state. 
     In some embodiments, the device then checks for exceptions (e.g., via decisions  160   x   9 ,  160   x   10 , and  160   x   11 , described in more detail below) that, in some circumstances, reassign the current target state. The device then determines ( 1636 ) whether liftoff has been detected and, if so, navigates to (e.g., displays) ( 1638 ) an application-switcher user interface if the current target state was not reassigned according to an exception. For example, assuming that the x- and y-velocity of contact  5004  where minimal in FIG.  5 A 6  (e.g., near the origin of the velocity threshold scheme depicted in  FIG. 17A ), e.g., satisfying “pause for app-switcher” criteria ( 1626 ), the device assigns the application switcher user interface as the current target state, such that upon liftoff in FIGS.  5 A 7 - 5 A 8 , the device navigates (e.g., displays) the application-switcher user interface because it was the current target state at the time of liftoff. 
     In some embodiments, if the device determines that the input does not satisfy “pause for app-switcher” criteria ( 160   x   6 ), the device then determines ( 160   x   7 ) whether the input appears to be a “swipe down to cancel” gesture (e.g., movement of the input back towards the bottom of the screen with a sufficiently vertical direction and sufficient y-velocity), indicating an intent of by the user (as determined by the device) to navigate back to the current application user interface (e.g., the user interface displayed when the input was first detected). The device determines ( 1628 ) whether the velocity of the input is in a substantially downward direction (e.g., within slope thresholds  1712  and  1714  (distinguishing sector VIII, where the velocity is more vertical, from sectors VI and VII, where the velocity of the contact is more horizontal) in  FIG. 17A ). This criteria requires that the velocity fall within sector VIII of the velocity threshold scheme depicted in  FIG. 7A , which requires a minimum y-velocity threshold satisfying the value equal to the bottom boundary of the range of velocity threshold  1710  in  FIG. 17A  (e.g., separating sector V from sector VIII). However, because the device already determined that the velocity of the contact did fall within sector V (e.g., the input is not a “pause for app-switcher”  160   x   6  gesture), the device does not need to check for a minimum y-velocity at this step. In some embodiments, where “swipe down to cancel” decision  160   x   7  is made before “pause for app-switcher” decision  160   x   6 , or “pause for app-switcher” decision  160   x   6  is not included, the application will determine whether the y-velocity of the contact meets a minimum y-velocity threshold, such as the lower boundary of the range of velocity threshold  1710  depicted in  FIG. 17A . If the properties of the contact meet this criteria, the device assigns ( 1630 ) the current application user interface as the current target state. 
     In some embodiments, the device then checks for exceptions (e.g., via decisions  160   x   9 ,  160   x   10 , and  160   x   11 , described in more detail below) that, in some circumstances, reassign the current target state. The device then determines ( 1636 ) whether liftoff has been detected and, if so, navigates to (e.g., displays) ( 1638 ) the current application user interface if the current target state was not reassigned according to an exception. For example, assuming that the velocity of contact  5070  in FIG.  5 A 55  was substantially downward (e.g., falling within sector VIII depicted in  FIG. 17A ), e.g., satisfying “swipe down to cancel” criteria ( 1628 ), the device assigns the messaging user interface corresponding to representation  5014  (e.g., the user interface displayed when the device first detected contact  5070  in FIG.  5 A 52 ) as the current target state, such that upon liftoff in FIG.  5 A 56 , the device navigates (e.g., displays) the messaging application user interface because it was the current target state at the time of liftoff. In some embodiments, in addition to returning to the current application user interface, the device also removes the application dock that was displayed in response to the initial portion of the input. In some embodiments, the device does not remove the application dock that was displayed in response to the initial portion of the input, and the dock remains displayed on the current application user interface after the device exits the transitional user interface. 
     In some embodiments, if the device determines that the input does not satisfy “swipe down to cancel” criteria ( 160   x   7 ), the device then determines ( 160   x   8 ) whether the input appears to be a “short, slow movement to app-switcher” gesture (e.g., a swipe with slow upwards y-velocity that has not translated significantly to the right or left), indicating an intent of the user (as determined by the device) an intent of the user (as determined by the device) to navigate to an application-switcher user interface. The device determines whether the y-velocity of the input is down ( 1632 ) (e.g., below the x-axis of the velocity threshold scheme depicted in  FIG. 17A ) or the x-position of the input (e.g., either a current x-position of the contact/user interface representation or a predicted x-position of the user interface representation) meets ( 1634 ) a third x-position threshold (e.g., 3rd x-position threshold  1724  in the right or left direction in  FIG. 7B ). If the properties of the contact do not meet either of these criteria, the device assigns ( 1622 ) an application-switcher user interface as the current target state. 
     In some embodiments, if the y-velocity of the input is down ( 1632 ) or the x-position of the input (e.g., either a current x-position of the contact/user interface representation or a predicted x-position of the user interface representation) meets ( 1634 ) the third x-position threshold, the device determines whether the swipe is a first swipe gesture (e.g., as opposed to a second swipe gesture in a series of application user interface navigating swipe gestures where the stack of cards has not yet been reshuffled). For example, the swipe gesture including movement  5062  of contact  5060  in FIGS.  5 A 40 - 5 A 42  is a first swipe gesture because there we no previous right or left swipe gestures in the series. In contrast, the swipe gesture including movement  5066  of contact  5064  in FIGS.  5 A 43 - 5 A 44  is not a first swipe gesture because the swipe gesture including movement  5062  of contact  5060  in FIGS.  5 A 40 - 5 A 42  occurred previously and time threshold TT 1  for “reshuffling the cards” (e.g., reordering the history of active user interfaces in the history of the device) was not met before contact  5064  was detected. In some embodiments, if the swipe gesture is not a first swipe gesture, the device assigns ( 1624 ) the next/previous application user interface as the current target state, because there is an increased probability the user intends to keep navigating between previously displayed user interface, since they just executed such a swipe gesture. 
     In some embodiments, if the swipe gesture is a first swipe gesture ( 1633 ), the device determines ( 1635 ) whether an x-position threshold is met (e.g., to distinguish between a purposeful navigation to a previously displayed application user interface and an incidental edge contact). If the x-position threshold is met, the device assigns ( 1624 ) the next/previous application user interface as the current target state. If the x-position threshold is not met, the device assigns ( 1624 ) the current application user interface as the target state, not finding a substantial similarity between the contact and a dedicated navigation gesture. 
     In some embodiments, having assigned the application-switcher user interface ( 1622 ), next/previous application user interface ( 1624 ), or current application user interface ( 1630 ) as the current target state, in some embodiments, the device then checks for exceptions (e.g., via decisions  160   x   9 ,  160   x   10 , and  160   x   11 , described in more detail below) that, in some circumstances, reassign the current target state. The device then determines ( 1636 ) whether liftoff has been detected and, if so, navigates to (e.g., displays) ( 1638 ) the currently assigned target state user interface. 
     In some embodiments, after each assignment of a current application state, the device checks to see if the properties of the contact meet an exception, each designed to avoid a different unintended navigation, as illustrated in  FIG. 16C . In some embodiments, the order and identity of the exceptions varies (e.g., the order of execution of the exceptions change, exceptions are, removed or modified, or additional exceptions are added). First, the device replaces ( 160   x   9 ) the currently assigned target state with the current application if it determines that the input was accidental (e.g., it did not travel far enough away from the bottom of the screen ( 1660 ) and the home screen or application-switcher was assigned as the target state ( 1666 )). 
     In some embodiments, after one or more of the determinations above, the device replaces ( 160   x   10 ) assignment of the next or previous application user interface with assignment of the application-switcher as the target state if the previous target state was application-switcher ( 1661 ). For example, when the input causes the device to display the application user interface, right and left movement is interpreted as swiping through the stack of cards, rather than moving to a next or previous application user interface). 
     In some embodiments, if the contact has entered the right or left edge region of the display, the device replaces ( 160   x   11 ) assignment of anything other than a next or previous application user interface with an assignment of an application-switcher user interface if the application-switcher user interface was the target state assigned prior to the contact entering the edge region. This compensates for an inadequate number of contact sensors at the edge region. For example, as a contact moves off the side of the display, there are no sensors to detect continuing lateral movement. However, as long as some part of the contact is over the display, the device is still registering vertical movement. Thus, the device optionally interprets a diagonal movement as a purely vertical movement. 
     In some embodiments, the device checks to see whether “ignore accidental inputs” criteria ( 160   x   9 ) (e.g., where the user accidentally touches the bottom edge of the device without intent to navigate to a different user interface) have been met. The device determines ( 1660 ) whether the y-position of the input (e.g., either current y-position of the contact/user interface representation or a predicted y-position of the user interface representation) meets a second y-position threshold (e.g., 2nd y-position threshold  1726 , close to the bottom edge of the display, in  FIG. 17B ). If the input meets the second y-position threshold (e.g., the contact has traveled sufficiently far from the bottom edge of the display to rule out an accidental edge touch), the device moves onto the next exception without updating the current target state (e.g., determining that the input was not an accidental edge touch). 
     If the input does not meet the second y-position threshold, the device determines ( 1666 ) whether the current target state is a home screen user interface or an application-switcher user interface. If so, the device assigns ( 1668 ) the current application user interface as the current target state (e.g., updates the current target state to ignore what is likely an inadvertent edge touch), and proceeds to the next exception. If the current target state is not a home screen user interface or an application-switcher user interface, the device moves onto the next exception without updating the current target state (e.g., determining that the input was not an accidental edge touch). For example, a contact that move significantly right or left without traveling away from the bottom edge of the display would indicate a clear intention to navigate to a previously displayed application user interface (e.g., satisfying “side swipe for next/previous app” criteria ( 160   x   4 )) as, thus, should not be determined to be an accidental input). 
     In some embodiments, after determining whether to “ignore accidental inputs” ( 160   x   9 ) (e.g., by updating the current target state to the current application user interface), the device checks to see whether “application-switcher preference” criteria ( 160   x   10 ) (e.g., where the target state changed from an application-switcher user interface to a next/previous application user interface) have been met. The device determines ( 1661 ) whether the current target state is next/previous application and the target state prior (e.g., immediately prior) was application-switcher (e.g., whether the device changed assignment of an application-switcher as the current target state to an assignment of a next/previous application as the current target state). If this is the case, the device assigns ( 1672 ) an application-switcher user interface as the current target state, and proceeds to the next exception. If this was not the case, the device proceeds to the next exception without updating the current target state. 
     In some embodiments, after determining whether to give “application-switcher preference” ( 160   x   10 ) (e.g., by updating the current target state from a next/previous application user interface to an application-switcher user interface), the device checks to see whether “edge error correction” criteria ( 160   x   11 ) (e.g., where the contact is sufficiently close to the right or left edge of the display, a recent target state was application-switcher, and the current target state is not next/previous application) have been met. The device determines ( 1662 ) whether the contact is within an x-edge region of the display (e.g., satisfying x-edge position threshold  1728  to the right or left in  FIG. 17B , for example, within about 1 mm, 2 mm, 3 mm, 4 mm, or 5 mm from a right or left edge of the display) and, if not, proceeds to determine ( 1636 ) whether liftoff has been detected (or to an additional or reordered exception), without updating the current target state. 
     In some embodiments, if the contact is within an x-edge region of the display, the device determines ( 1670 ) whether a previous target state (e.g., a target state assigned within a time threshold of entering the x-region, for example, within the previous 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, or 20 frame refreshes or target state determinations) was an application-switcher user interface and the current target state is not a next/previous application user interface. If these criteria are met, the device replaces ( 1672 ) the current target state with the previous target state (e.g., application-switcher), and then proceeds to determine ( 1636 ) whether liftoff has been detected (or to an additional or reordered exception). If these criteria are not met, the device proceeds to determine ( 1636 ) whether liftoff has been detected (or to an additional or reordered exception), without updating the current target state. 
     In some embodiments, after determining ( 1636 ) that lift off of the contact was not detected, the device determines ( 1640 ) whether a dynamic velocity threshold should be adjusted (e.g., where the current target application is an application-switcher user interface, and the contact has nearly stalled on the screen, the device increases the dynamic velocity threshold needed the transition from sector V in  FIG. 17A  to sector II, associated with assignment of a home screen user interface, preventing inadvertent increases in contact velocity as the user lifts the contact off the screen from being interpreted as a change in the user&#39;s intent to navigate home, rather than to the application-switcher user interface). This dynamic correction improves the prediction and accuracy of navigating to a particular target state user interface (e.g., an application-switcher user interface). 
     In some embodiments, the device determines ( 1642 ) whether the current target state is an application-switcher user interface and whether x-velocity and y-velocity of the contact do not meet a minimal velocity threshold (e.g., the range of velocity threshold  1710  in  FIG. 17A , or a range of velocity thresholds defining a smaller area in sector V of  FIG. 17A  (e.g., a smaller region around the origin of the velocity threshold scheme depicted in  FIG. 17A ). 
     In some embodiments, if these criteria are met (e.g., the contact has stalled or nearly at a time where the current target state is an application user interface), the device determines ( 1646 ) whether a dynamic velocity threshold is at a maximum range (e.g., whether dynamic velocity threshold range  1710  is at is maximum range  1710 - b ) and, if so, continues to monitor ( 1604 ) the position and velocity of the input and provide visual feedback without updating the dynamic threshold. If the dynamic threshold is not at a maximum range (e.g., dynamic velocity threshold range  1710  is smaller than maximum range  1710 - b ), the device increases ( 1648 ) the range of the dynamic velocity threshold (e.g., expands the threshold  1710  “box” out towards maximum threshold range  1710 - b ), before continuing to monitor ( 1604 ) the position and velocity of the input and provide visual feedback. 
     In some embodiments, if these criteria are not met (e.g., the contact has not stalled or nearly at a time where the current target state is an application user interface), the device determines ( 1642 ) whether a dynamic velocity threshold is at a minimum range (e.g., whether dynamic velocity threshold range  1710  is at is minimum range  1710 - a ) and, if so, continues to monitor ( 1604 ) the position and velocity of the input and provide visual feedback without updating the dynamic threshold. If the dynamic threshold is not at a minimum range (e.g., dynamic velocity threshold range  1710  is larger than minimum range  1710 - a ), the device decreases ( 1644 ) the range of the dynamic velocity threshold (e.g., contracts the threshold  1710  “box” out towards minimum threshold range  1710 - a ), before continuing to monitor ( 1604 ) the position and velocity of the input and provide visual feedback. It should be understood that the process described in the flow diagrams optionally applies to any of the methods described herein for determining whether to enter an application switching user interface, a home screen, and/or a previous/next application are used for navigating between the user interfaces described herein with respect to the user interfaces shown in FIGS.  5 A 1 - 5 F 45 . In some embodiments, a control panel user interface is switched to in place of a next or previous application using the rules for switching to the next/previous application. 
       FIGS. 18A-18G  are flow diagrams illustrating method  1800  of navigating between user interfaces using one or more dynamic thresholds, in accordance with some embodiments. Method  1800  is performed at an electronic device with one or more input devices (e.g., device  300 ,  FIG. 3 , or portable multifunction device  100 ,  FIG. 1A ). In some embodiments, the electronic device has a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the display is a touch-screen display and the touch-sensitive surface is on or integrated with the display. In some embodiments, the display is separate from the touch-sensitive surface. Some operations in method  1800  are, optionally, combined and/or the order of some operations is, optionally, changed. 
     As described below, method  1800  provides an intuitive way to transition between different user interfaces (e.g., a current application user interface, a prior application user interface, a home screen user interface, and an application-switcher user interface). The method reduces the number, extent, and/or nature of the inputs from a user when transitioning between different user interfaces, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated electronic devices, enabling a user to transition between different user interfaces faster and more efficiently conserves power and increases the time between battery charges. 
     Method  1800  relates to improving user accuracy when transitioning from an application user interface to the application-switcher user interface, the home screen user interface, or a second application (e.g., a last displayed application) in response to a swipe gesture. The final user interface state is determined by comparing characteristics of the swipe gesture associated with the end of the gesture to a set of thresholds that are dynamically adjusted during the gesture to improve user predictability and accuracy. Specifically, the device detects an edge-swipe gesture associated with transitioning between user interfaces, monitors the characteristics of the gesture, and makes predictions about what user interface will be navigated to after termination of the gesture (e.g., determines a target state for the device) based on the current properties of the gesture (e.g., an example scheme for determining which user interface to navigate to is illustrated in  FIGS. 16A-16D and 17A-17C ). The device then dynamically adjusts one or more thresholds, based on the predicted state of the device, to make it more likely that the predicted user interface state is selected as the final user interface displayed upon detecting the end of the input. 
     In some embodiments, method  1800  is performed at an electronic device with one or more input devices (e.g., a touch-sensitive surface, a touch-sensitive display, or a mouse). In some embodiments, the device does not have a home button (e.g., a mechanical button, a virtual button, a solid state button, etc.) that, when activated, is configured to dismiss a currently displayed user interface and replace the currently displayed user interface with a home screen that includes a plurality of application launch icons for a plurality of applications installed on the device. In some embodiments, the device has a home button (e.g., a mechanical button, a virtual button, a solid state button, etc.). 
     The device detects ( 1802 ), via the one or more input devices (e.g., a touch-sensitive display), an input (e.g., a touch input, such as edge-swipe inputs including contacts  5004 ,  5040 ,  5052 ,  5056 ,  5060 ,  5064 ,  5065 ,  5069 ,  5070 ,  5074 ,  5950 ,  5968 ,  5972 ,  5980 , and  5988 , having movements  5006 ,  5042 ,  5048 ,  5054 ,  5058 ,  5062 ,  5066 ,  5067 ,  5071 ,  5072 ,  5076 ,  5082 ,  5096 ,  5952 ,  5970 ,  5974 ,  5982 , and  5990  in FIGS.  5 A 2 ,  5 A 19 ,  5 A 34 ,  5 A 37 ,  5 A 40 ,  5 A 43 ,  5 A 46 ,  5 A 49 ,  5 A 52 ,  5 A 57 ,  5 H 5 ,  5 H 9 ,  5 H 13 ,  5 H 18 , and  5 H 25 , respectively). For example, the device detects ( 1602 ) an edge touch, as shown in  FIG. 16A . 
     While the input continues to be detected via the one or more input devices, the device enters ( 1804 ) a transitional user interface mode in which a plurality of different user interface states are available to be selected based on a comparison of a set of one or more properties (e.g., position, velocity, direction of movement) of the input to a corresponding set of one or more thresholds. For example, as contacts  5004 ,  5040 ,  5052 ,  5056 ,  5060 ,  5064 ,  5065 ,  5069 ,  5070 ,  5074 ,  5950 ,  5968 ,  5972 ,  5980 , and  5988 , continue movements  5006 ,  5042 ,  5048 ,  5054 ,  5058 ,  5062 ,  5066 ,  5067 ,  5071 ,  5072 ,  5076 ,  5082 ,  5096 ,  5952 ,  5970 ,  5974 ,  5982 , and  5990 , in FIGS.  5 A 3 ,  5 A 20 ,  5 A 26 ,  5 A 35 ,  5 A 38 ,  5 A 41 ,  5 A 44 ,  5 A 47 ,  5 A 50 ,  5 A 53 ,  5 A 58 ,  5 A 61 ,  5 A 73 ,  5 H 8 ,  5 H 11 ,  5 H 15 ,  5 H 20 , and  5 H 27 , respectively, the device displays a transitional user interface that shows the user interface displayed prior to detection of the respective contact as a representation (e.g., a “card”) on the screen (e.g., the web browsing user interface shown in FIG.  5 A 2  is displayed as card  5010  in FIG.  5 A 3  in response to detecting the edge-swipe gesture including movement  5006  of contact  5004 ). As illustrated in example method  1600 , after detecting the edge touch, the device monitors ( 1604 ) the position and velocity of the contact (e.g., the device monitors contact velocity  1730  in  FIG. 17C ) and provides visual feedback (e.g., via the transitional user interface), where a plurality of user interface can be selected ( 160   x   1 ). 
     While in the transitional user interface mode, the device detects ( 1806 ) a gesture that includes a first change in one or more respective properties in the set of one or more properties of the input (e.g., which causes the input to satisfy a corresponding threshold that was not satisfied by the input prior to the first change; for example, a change in the speed of the input which satisfies a threshold associated with assigning the application-switcher user interface as the current target state), followed by an end of the input (e.g., liftoff of a touch input). For example, contact velocity  1730  falls below dynamic velocity threshold  1710 -D at time T, and then lift-off of the contact is detected at time T+8, as illustrated in  FIG. 17C . 
     In response to detecting the gesture: in accordance with a determination that the end of the input is detected with a first temporal proximity to the first change in the one or more respective properties of the input (e.g., the first change in the input is a change that occurs within a predefined time threshold or sampling threshold of the end of the input. For example, the device monitors properties of the input (e.g., one or more of position, velocity, and pressure, such as contact velocity  1730  in  FIG. 17C , corresponding to the monitoring ( 1604 ) in  FIG. 16A ) and periodically updates the current target state (e.g., the user interface that would be navigated to if the input was terminated before the next periodic update, e.g., target states HS (home state) and AS (application-switcher) shown in  FIG. 17C ), corresponding to assigning a current target state ( 160   x   1 ) in  FIG. 16A ), the device selects ( 1808 ) (e.g., displays or goes ( 1638 ) to) a final state for the user interface based on one or more values for the set of one or more properties of the input that correspond to the end of the input (e.g., measured, predicted, and/or averaged values that are based on the values of the set of one or more properties of the input that were measured at or near an end of the input such as at or near a time of liftoff of the input from the touch-sensitive surface) and one or more first values of the corresponding set of one or more thresholds. For example, if the contact depicted in  FIG. 17C  were lifted-off before time T+1, the device would compare a velocity of the contact corresponding to lift-off (e.g., the last measured velocity of the contact) with the value of the dynamic threshold at time T. In some embodiments, the first temporal proximity is the periodicity of the target state update cycle (e.g., the period of time between updates, such as the time between iterations of assigning a current target state ( 160   x   1 )). 
     In accordance with a determination that the end of the input is detected with a second temporal proximity (e.g., the first change in the input is a change that does not occurs within a predefined time threshold or sampling threshold of the end of the input) to the first change in the one or more respective properties of the input, the device selects ( 1808 ) (e.g., displays or goes ( 1638 ) to) a final state for the user interface based on the one or more values for the set of one or more properties of the input that correspond to the end of the input (e.g., measured, predicted, and/or averaged values that are based on the values of the set of one or more properties of the input that were measured at or near an end of the input such as at or near a time of liftoff of the input from the touch-sensitive surface) and one or more second values of the corresponding set of one or more thresholds. For example, if the contact depicted in  FIG. 17C  were lifted-off between T+1 and T+2 (e.g., after time T+1), the device would compare a velocity of the contact corresponding to lift-off (e.g., the last measured velocity of the contact) with the value of the dynamic threshold at time T+1. 
     Dynamically adjusting (e.g., increasing) a threshold based on current properties of a user input enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by helping the user achieve an intended result by making it more likely that a user interface state associated with current parameters of the input is selected as the final user interface state upon detecting lift-off of the input and by reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device by improving navigation accuracy), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, the detected gesture satisfies ( 1810 ) a corresponding threshold that was not satisfied by the set of one or more properties of the input prior to the first change. For example, the change in contact velocity  1730  around time T+6 now satisfies dynamic velocity threshold  1710 -D, that was not satisfied at time T+5, as illustrated in  FIG. 17C . 
     Dynamically adjusting (e.g., increasing) a threshold based on a predicted final UI state enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by helping the user achieve an intended result by making it more likely that a predicted user interface is selected as the final user interface state upon detecting lift-off of the input and by reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device by improving navigation accuracy), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, the one or more second values of the corresponding set of one or more thresholds are selected ( 1812 ) based on a time period following satisfaction of a predetermined condition (e.g., where the predetermined condition is the first detection of an input meeting application-switcher-display criteria or a change in the input causing the input to no longer meet application-switcher-display criteria). For example, if the contact depicted in  FIG. 17C  were to end between T+3 and T+4, after detecting a change around time T that first satisfied application-switcher display criteria, the value for the dynamic velocity threshold used in the comparison would be the value at T+3, which increased as a function of time from the value of the dynamic threshold at time T. 
     Dynamically adjusting (e.g., increasing) a threshold based on how long a particular final UI state has been predicted to be the final UI state prior to termination of the input enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by helping the user achieve an intended result by increasing the confidence that a predicted user interface is the intended result and dynamically increasing the likelihood that the predicted UI state will be selected as the final user interface state upon detecting lift-off of the input based on the confidence of the prediction, and by reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device by improving navigation accuracy), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, the corresponding threshold satisfied by the first change in the one or more respective properties of the input is ( 1814 ) a position threshold (e.g., where an input otherwise meets all velocity and directional thresholds required for application-switcher-display criteria, a change in the position of the input from below a Y-translation threshold to above the Y-translational threshold triggers dynamic adaption of the velocity threshold for selecting the application-switcher user interface upon termination of the input, or where an input otherwise meets all velocity and directional thresholds required for application-switcher-display criteria, a change in the position of the input from above a Y-translation threshold to below the Y-translational threshold triggers dynamic adaption of the velocity threshold for selecting the application-switcher user interface upon termination of the input). For example, crossing 1st X-position threshold  1718  in  FIG. 17B  will, in some circumstances, trigger adjustment of a dynamic threshold used in the final state determination. 
     Dynamically adjusting (e.g., increasing) a threshold based on detecting the input crossing a position threshold enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by helping the user achieve an intended result by increasing the likelihood that a predicted UI state associated with the position threshold will be selected as the final user interface state upon detecting lift-off of the input, and by reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device by improving navigation accuracy), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, the corresponding threshold satisfied by the first change in the one or more respective properties of the input is ( 1816 ) a velocity threshold (e.g., where an input otherwise meets all translational and directional thresholds required for application-switcher-display criteria, a change in the velocity of the input from above a velocity threshold to below the velocity threshold triggers dynamic adaption of the velocity threshold for selecting the application-switcher user interface upon termination of the input or, where an input otherwise meets all translational and directional thresholds required for application-switcher-display criteria, a change in the velocity of the input from below a velocity threshold to above the velocity threshold triggers dynamic adaption of the velocity threshold for selecting the application-switcher user interface upon termination of the input). For example, the decrease in contact velocity  1730  around time T satisfies application-switcher velocity threshold criterion  1710 , thereby triggering adjustment of dynamic threshold  1710 -D in  FIG. 17C . 
     Dynamically adjusting (e.g., increasing) a threshold based on detecting the input crossing a velocity threshold enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by helping the user achieve an intended result by increasing the likelihood that a predicted UI state associated with the velocity threshold will be selected as the final user interface state upon detecting lift-off of the input, and by reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device by improving navigation accuracy), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, the set of one or more thresholds includes ( 1818 ) a position threshold (e.g., a translational threshold serving as a boundary between selecting an application-switcher user interface and a home user interface is dynamic relative to characteristics of the input). For example, 1st X-position threshold  1718  is, optionally, dynamically moved right or left on the screen in  FIG. 17B . 
     Dynamically adjusting (e.g., increasing) a position threshold based on a predicted final UI state enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by helping the user achieve an intended result by decreasing the likelihood that an unintended change in the position of the input during lift-off of the input will cause selection of a final user interface other than the predicted UI state, and by reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device by improving navigation accuracy), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, the set of one or more thresholds includes ( 1820 ) a velocity threshold (e.g., a velocity threshold serving as a boundary between selecting an application-switcher user interface and a home user interface is dynamic relative to characteristics of the input). For example, as depicted in  FIGS. 17A and 17C , the range of velocity threshold  1710  dynamically expands or contracts based on satisfaction of particular target state selection criteria (e.g., application-switcher target state selection criteria). 
     Dynamically adjusting (e.g., increasing) a velocity threshold based on a predicted final UI state enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by helping the user achieve an intended result by decreasing the likelihood that an unintended change in the velocity of the input during lift-off of the input will cause selection of a final user interface other than the predicted UI state, and by reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device by improving navigation accuracy), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, the set of one or more thresholds includes ( 1822 ) a position threshold and a velocity threshold (e.g., first X-position threshold  1718  in  FIG. 17B  and velocity threshold  1710  in  FIG. 17A ), a respective first value for the position threshold in the one or more first values of the corresponding set of one or more thresholds is the same as a respective second value for the position threshold in the one or more second values of the corresponding set of one or more thresholds (e.g., at least one position threshold, such as first X-position threshold  1718  in  FIG. 17B , is fixed), a respective first value for the velocity threshold in the one or more first values of the corresponding set of one or more thresholds is different than a respective second value for the velocity threshold in the one or more second values of the corresponding set of one or more thresholds (e.g., at least one velocity threshold, such as the range of velocity threshold  1710  in  FIG. 17A , is dynamic). 
     Dynamically adjusting (e.g., increasing) a velocity threshold based on a predicted final UI state enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by helping the user achieve an intended result by decreasing the likelihood that an unintended change in the velocity of the input during lift-off of the input will cause selection of a final user interface other than the predicted UI state, and by reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device by improving navigation accuracy), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, the set of one or more thresholds includes ( 1824 ) a position threshold and a velocity threshold (e.g., first X-position threshold  1718  in  FIG. 17B  and velocity threshold  1710  in  FIG. 17A ), a respective first value for the velocity threshold in the one or more first values of the corresponding set of one or more thresholds is the same as a respective second value for the velocity threshold in the one or more second values of the corresponding set of one or more thresholds (e.g., at least one velocity threshold, such as the range of velocity threshold  1710  in  FIG. 17A , is fixed), a respective first value for the position threshold in the one or more first values of the corresponding set of one or more thresholds is different than a respective second value for the position threshold in the one or more second values of the corresponding set of one or more thresholds (e.g., at least one position threshold, such as first X-position threshold  1718  in  FIG. 17B , is dynamic). 
     Dynamically adjusting (e.g., increasing) a position threshold based on a predicted final UI state enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by helping the user achieve an intended result by decreasing the likelihood that an unintended change in the position of the input during lift-off of the input will cause selection of a final user interface other than the predicted UI state, and by reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device by improving navigation accuracy), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, the one or more first values of the corresponding set of one or more thresholds are selected based on ( 1826 ) a previous change in one or more respective properties in the set of one or more properties (e.g., initial values for the one or more thresholds are based on previous properties of the input, e.g., the first value of a respective threshold at time ta is based on a change in the properties of the input at time t n-1  that caused the electronic device to update the dynamic threshold). For example, as illustrated in  FIG. 17C , the value for dynamic velocity threshold  1710 -D at time T+3 is selected based on an increase in the threshold over the previous value of the threshold at time T+2. 
     Iteratively adjusting (e.g., increasing) a threshold based on a previously adjusted value for the threshold enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by helping the user achieve an intended result by iteratively increasing the likelihood that the predicted UI state will be selected as the final user interface state upon detecting lift-off of the input based on increasing confidence in the prediction, and by reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device by improving navigation accuracy), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, selecting a final state for the user interface based on one or more values for the set of one or more properties of the input that correspond to the end of the input and one or more first values of the corresponding set of one or more thresholds includes ( 1828 ): selecting the one or more first values of the corresponding set of one or more thresholds based on the first change in the one or more respective properties of the input (e.g., determining whether one or more initial values for the set of thresholds needs to be updated based on a (e.g., previous) change in the input before comparing the selected thresholds with the input properties corresponding to the end of the input); and comparing the selected one or more first values of the corresponding set of one or more thresholds to the one or more values for the set of one or more properties of the input that correspond to the end of the input. For example, as illustrated in  FIGS. 16A and 16D , the device periodically updates dynamic thresholds by determining ( 1640 ) whether the threshold needs to be updated in accordance with determinations ( 1642  and  1646 ) that the dynamic velocity threshold is not at a minimum range ( 1642 ) or not at a maximum range ( 1646 ). 
     Adjusting (e.g., increasing) a threshold based on a change in the properties of an input enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by helping the user achieve an intended result by iteratively increasing or decreasing the likelihood that the predicted UI state will be selected as the final user interface state upon detecting lift-off of the input based on increasing or decreasing confidence in the prediction, and by reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device by improving navigation accuracy), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, after detecting the first change in the one or more respective properties of the input, and prior to detecting the end of the input, the device detects ( 1830 ) a second change in the one or more respective properties in the set of one or more properties of the input such that the input no longer satisfies the corresponding threshold that was satisfied by the first change in the one or more respective properties of the input. For example, after detecting a first change (e.g., decrease) in contact velocity  1730  around time T that first satisfied application-switcher selection criteria, in  FIG. 17C , a second change (e.g., an increase) in velocity  1730  around time T+6 caused the application-switcher selection criteria to no longer be satisfied (e.g., because velocity  1730  increased beyond dynamic velocity threshold  1710 -D). In response to detecting the end of the input, in accordance with a determination that the end of the input is detected with the first temporal proximity to the second change in the one or more respective properties of the input (e.g., the second change in the input is a change that occurs within a predefined time threshold or sampling threshold of the end of the input), the device selects ( 1832 ) (e.g., displaying or navigates to) a final state for the user interface based on one or more values for the set of one or more properties of the input that correspond to the end of the input (e.g., measured, predicted, and/or averaged values that are based on the values of the set of one or more properties of the input that were measured at or near an end of the input such as at or near a time of liftoff of the input from the touch-sensitive surface) and one or more third values of the corresponding set of one or more thresholds. For example, if the contact depicted in  FIG. 17C  were to be terminated between time T+6 and T+7 (e.g., within a first sampling threshold after detecting the change around time T+6), the device would use a first value for the dynamic temporal threshold as defined at time T+6, equal to velocity threshold maximum  1710 - b.    
     In some embodiments, the first temporal proximity to the second change is the periodicity of the target state update cycle (e.g., the period of time between updates). In some embodiments, the first temporal proximity to the second change is a same predefined threshold as the first temporal proximity to the first change in the one or more respective properties of the input. In some embodiments, the first temporal proximity to the second change is a different predefined threshold as the first temporal proximity to the first change in the one or more respective properties of the input.). 
     In accordance with a determination that the end of the input is detected with the second temporal proximity to the second change in the one or more respective properties of the input (e.g., the first change in the input is a change that does not occur within a predefined time threshold or sampling threshold of the end of the input), the device selects ( 1832 ) (e.g., displaying) a final state for the user interface based on the one or more values for the set of one or more properties of the input that correspond to the end of the input (e.g., measured, predicted, and/or averaged values that are based on the values of the set of one or more properties of the input that were measured at or near an end of the input such as at or near a time of liftoff of the input from the touch-sensitive surface) and the one or more fourth values of the corresponding set of one or more thresholds. For example, because the contact depicted in  FIG. 17C  was terminated around time T+8 (e.g., not within a first sampling threshold after detecting the change around time T+6), the device uses a second value for the dynamic temporal threshold that has been reduced relative to the value defined at time T+6, when the second change occurred. 
     Dynamically adjusting (e.g., decreasing) a threshold based on a second change in the properties of a user input enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by helping the user achieve an intended result by making it less likely that a user interface state not associated with current parameters of the input is selected as the final user interface state upon detecting lift-off of the input and by reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device by improving navigation accuracy), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, after detecting the first change in the one or more respective properties of the input, and prior to detecting the end of the input, the device updates ( 1834 ) one or more respective thresholds in the corresponding set of one or more thresholds (e.g., according to procedure  1640  in method  1600 ). For example, after detecting the decrease in contact velocity  1730  around time T, in  FIG. 17C , the device updates the dynamic velocity threshold at time T+1 to make it more likely that the final user interface state selected is application-switcher because lift-off of contact  1730  has not been detected. 
     Dynamically updating (e.g., increasing or decreasing) a threshold prior to termination of the input enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by helping the user achieve an intended result by increasing the confidence that a predicted user interface is the intended result and dynamically increasing the likelihood that the predicted UI state will be selected as the final user interface state upon detecting lift-off of the input based on the confidence of the prediction, and by reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device by improving navigation accuracy), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, the one or more respective thresholds in the corresponding set of one or more thresholds is updated ( 1836 ) based on a temporal proximity to the first change in the one or more respective properties of the input (e.g., the time between detecting the first change in the one or more respective properties of the input and the decision to update the threshold). For example, after detecting the change in contact velocity around time T in  FIG. 17C , the value used for dynamic velocity threshold  1710 -D is dependent upon the amount of time that passes, e.g., the value used for the threshold is greater at time T+4 than is the value used at time T+2 because more time has passed since the change in the input was detected. 
     Dynamically updating (e.g., increasing or decreasing) a threshold based on how long a particular final UI state has been predicted to be the final UI state prior to termination of the input enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by helping the user achieve an intended result by increasing the confidence that a predicted user interface is the intended result and dynamically increasing the likelihood that the predicted UI state will be selected as the final user interface state upon detecting lift-off of the input based on the confidence of the prediction, and by reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device by improving navigation accuracy), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, the one or more respective thresholds in the corresponding set of one or more thresholds is dynamically updated ( 1838 ) based on a changing temporal proximity to the first change in the one or more respective properties of the input (e.g., the one or more threshold is periodically updated after detecting the first change in the one or more respective properties of the input). For example, after detecting the change in contact velocity around time T in  FIG. 17C , the value used for dynamic velocity threshold  1710 -D is gradually increased from time T to time T+4. In some embodiments, when the current user interface state changes from a first user interface state to a second user interface state, the device gradually adjusts one or more thresholds (e.g., from threshold(s) associated with the first user interface state to threshold(s) associated with the second user interface state) by increments toward one or more target thresholds that are associated with the second user interface state (e.g., so long as the current user interface state continues to be the second user interface state). In some embodiments, number of increments is 5, 10, 15, 20, or some other reasonable number. In some embodiments, the number of increments is selected so that the one or more target thresholds will be reached within a predetermined time period such as 0.05, 0.2, 0.5, 1, or 2 seconds). 
     Gradually updating (e.g., increasing or decreasing) a threshold over time based on monitored parameters of the input enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by helping the user achieve an intended result by increasing the confidence that a predicted user interface is the intended result and gradually increasing the likelihood that the predicted UI state will be selected as the final user interface state upon detecting lift-off of the input based on the confidence of the prediction, and by reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device by improving navigation accuracy), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, after detecting the first change in the one or more respective properties of the input, and prior to detecting the end of the input ( 1840 ): the device monitors (e.g., periodically determines via procedure  1604  in method  1600 ) the set of one or more properties of the input, periodically selects a final state for the user interface (e.g., via procedure  160   x   1  in method  1600 ) based on the monitored set of one or more properties of the input and a previously determined value (e.g., the last updated threshold value) of the corresponding set of one or more thresholds, and updates (e.g., via procedure  1640  in method  1600 ) one or more values of the corresponding set of one or more thresholds based on the selected final state for the user interface. 
     Dynamically updating (e.g., increasing or decreasing) a threshold based on a predicted final UI state enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by helping the user achieve an intended result by making it more likely that a predicted user interface is selected as the final user interface state upon detecting lift-off of the input and by reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device by improving navigation accuracy), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, the one or more values of the corresponding set of one or more thresholds is updated ( 1842 ) to increase a difference between the one or more threshold values and the values for the set of one or more properties of the input that correspond to the end of the input (e.g., thresholds are changed to make it more likely that the predicted user interface state is selected as the final user interface state upon detecting the end of the input). For example, in  FIG. 17C , after detecting the change in contact velocity  1730  around time T that first satisfies application-switcher selection criteria, the device increases dynamic velocity threshold  1710 -D to increase the difference between contact velocity  1730  and the threshold (e.g., at time T+3, the difference between contact velocity  1730  and dynamic velocity threshold  1710 -D is greater than the difference between the two values at time T and T+1). 
     Dynamically updating (e.g., increasing or decreasing) a threshold to favor a predicted final UI state enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by helping the user achieve an intended result by making it more likely that a predicted user interface is selected as the final user interface state upon detecting lift-off of the input and by reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device by improving navigation accuracy), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, at least one respective threshold in the set of one or more thresholds has a predefined maximum threshold value ( 1844 ). For example, as illustrated in  FIG. 17C , dynamic velocity threshold  1710 -D has a predefined maximum value of  1710 - b . As such, when dynamic velocity threshold  1710 -D reaches velocity threshold maximum  1710 - b  at time T+4, the device ceases to continue increasing the threshold even though contact velocity  1730  is still below dynamic velocity threshold  1710 -D at time T+4. 
     Setting a maximum threshold value for a dynamic threshold enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by avoiding locking-in a final UI state due to excessive updating of the dynamic threshold, rendering the user unable to change the final navigation prior to lift-off of the input and by reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device by improving navigation accuracy), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments ( 1845 ), the plurality of different states include a home state (e.g., a user interface that includes a plurality of application launch icons that correspond to a plurality of applications (e.g., including the plurality of recently open applications and, optionally, one or more additional applications that are closed without retained state information, such that when activated, the applications are started from their default starting states)) and an application-switcher state (e.g., an user interface that includes a plurality of representations of applications (e.g., application launch icons, reduced scale images of application user interfaces, etc.)), selection between the home state and the application-switcher state is based at least in part on a movement threshold that is one of the one or more of the corresponding set of one or more thresholds; (e.g., a first condition regarding the contact&#39;s speed, acceleration, position, or a combination of one or more of the above, or a first condition regarding a derived movement parameter of the first application view that is based on one or more of the above and one or more additional properties characterizing the state of the current user interface and/or the movements of one or more objects contained therein, etc.). 
     When the properties of the input meet application-switcher-display criteria, wherein the application-switcher display criteria include a requirement that is satisfied when the movement of the contact is above the movement threshold, the final state of the user interface is the application-switcher state (e.g., the device displays the application-switcher user interface in response to detecting liftoff of the contact). 
     When the properties of the input meet home-display criteria, wherein the home display criteria include a requirement that is satisfied when the movement of the contact is below the movement threshold, the final state of the user interface is the home state (e.g., the device displays the home user interface in response to detecting liftoff of the contact). 
     The user interfaces displayed in response to detecting a gesture that is selecting between the home state and the application-switcher state are discussed in greater detail herein with respect to methods  600  and  1900 , illustrated in FIGS.  5 A 1 - 5 A 77  and  5 H 1 - 5 H 27 , respectively. Additionally, any of the thresholds discussed with respect to method  600  or  1900  could also be adjusted using the processes described above. 
     Allowing the user to either to go to application-switcher user interface or the home screen depending on whether certain preset conditions are met enhance the operability of the device and make the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by helping the user achieve an intended result by providing the required inputs, and reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device), which, additionally, reduce power usage and improve the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments ( 1846 ) the plurality of different states include a home state (e.g., a user interface that includes a plurality of application launch icons that correspond to a plurality of applications (e.g., including the plurality of recently open applications and, optionally, one or more additional applications that are closed without retained state information, such that when activated, the applications are started from their default starting states)) and an last-application state For example, a user interface that includes a second user interface of a second application that is distinct from the first application (e.g., the second application is the last application that the user had interacted with before having switched to the first application) In some embodiments, the second user interface of the second application is displayed without first displaying the home screen user interface or the application-switcher user interface. 
     Selection between the home state and the last-application state is based at least in part on a directional condition that is determined based on one or more of the corresponding set of one or more thresholds; (e.g., a first condition regarding a direction of movement of the contact optionally in conjunction with the contact&#39;s speed, acceleration, position, or a combination of one or more of the above, or a first condition regarding a derived movement parameter of the first application view that is based on one or more of the above and one or more additional properties characterizing the state of the current user interface and/or the movements of one or more objects contained therein, etc.). 
     When the properties of the input meet last-application-display criteria, wherein the last-application-display criteria include a requirement that is satisfied when the movement of the contact meets the directional condition, the final state of the user interface is the last-application state (e.g., the device displays the last-application user interface in response to detecting liftoff of the contact). 
     When the properties of the input meet home-display criteria, wherein the home display criteria include a requirement that is satisfied when the movement of the contact does not meet the directional condition, the final state of the user interface is the home state (e.g., the device displays the home user interface in response to detecting liftoff of the contact). 
     The user interfaces displayed in response to detecting a gesture that is selecting between the home state and the last-application state are discussed in greater detail herein with respect to methods  700  and  1900 , illustrated in FIGS.  5 A 1 - 5 A 77  and  5 H 1 - 5 H 27 . Additionally, any of the thresholds discussed with respect to method  700  or  1900  could also be adjusted using the processes described above. 
     Allowing the user to either to go to an application-switcher user interface or a previous application user interface depending on whether certain preset conditions are met enhance the operability of the device and make the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by helping the user achieve an intended result by providing the required inputs, and reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device), which, additionally, reduce power usage and improve the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments ( 1848 ), the plurality of different states include a control panel state (e.g., a user interface that includes a plurality of controls that correspond to a plurality of system functions of the device (e.g., a control panel user interface with controls for network connections, display brightness, audio playback, peripheral devices, etc.) and a last-application state. In some embodiments, the control panel user interface is overlaid on the first user interface of a last-used application) 
     Selection between the control panel state and the last-application state is based at least in part on a directional condition that is determined based on one or more of the corresponding set of one or more thresholds; (e.g., a first condition regarding a direction of movement of the contact optionally in conjunction with the contact&#39;s speed, acceleration, position, or a combination of one or more of the above, or a first condition regarding a derived movement parameter of the first application view that is based on one or more of the above and one or more additional properties characterizing the state of the current user interface and/or the movements of one or more objects contained therein, etc.). 
     When the properties of the input meet last-application-display criteria, wherein the last-application-display criteria include a requirement that is satisfied when the movement of the contact meets the directional condition, the final state of the user interface is the last-application state (e.g., the device displays the last-application user interface in response to detecting liftoff of the contact). 
     When the properties of the input meet control-panel display criteria, wherein the control-panel display criteria include a requirement that is satisfied when the movement of the contact does not meet the directional condition (e.g., when the movement of the contact is in a different direction), the final state of the user interface is the control panel state (e.g., the device displays the control panel user interface in response to detecting liftoff of the contact). 
     The user interfaces displayed in response to detecting a gesture that is selecting between the home state and the last-application state are discussed in greater detail herein with respect to methods  800  and  1900  illustrated in FIGS.  5 A 1 - 5 A 77  and  5 H 1 - 5 H 27 , respectively. Additionally, any of the thresholds discussed with respect to method  800  or  1900  could also be adjusted using the processes described above. 
     Allowing the user to either to go to an application-switcher user interface or a control panel user interface depending on whether certain preset conditions are met enhance the operability of the device and make the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by helping the user achieve an intended result by providing the required inputs, and reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device), which, additionally, reduce power usage and improve the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, selecting ( 1850 ) the final state for the user interface includes: in accordance with a determination that the one or more values for the set of one or more properties of the input that correspond to the end of the input satisfy a first respective threshold in the corresponding set of one or more thresholds (e.g., regardless of the value assigned to the threshold based on the proximity of the end of the input relative to the first or second change in the one or more respective properties of the input), selecting a first final state for the user interface (e.g., displaying an application launch user interface or a home screen user interface), and in accordance with a determination that the one or more values for the set of one or more properties of the input that correspond to the end of the input do not satisfy a first respective threshold in the corresponding set of one or more thresholds (e.g., regardless of the value assigned to the threshold based on the proximity of the end of the input relative to the first or second change in the one or more respective properties of the input), selecting a second final state for the user interface that is different from the first final state for the user interface (e.g., displaying an application launch user interface or a home screen user interface). For example, as illustrated in  FIG. 17A , where the velocity of a contact resides in either of sectors III and V, whether or not the velocity of the contact satisfies velocity threshold  1710  will determine whether the device will select the home state (e.g., the velocity of the contact is greater than threshold  1710 ) of the application-switcher (e.g., the velocity of the contact is less than threshold  1710 ) as the final state. 
     Allowing the user to go to either of two different user interfaces depending on whether certain preset conditions are met enhance the operability of the device and make the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by helping the user achieve an intended result by providing the required inputs, and reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device), which, additionally, reduce power usage and improve the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     It should be understood that the particular order in which the operations in  FIGS. 18A-18G  have been described is merely an example and is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations could be performed. One of ordinary skill in the art would recognize various ways to reorder the operations described herein. Additionally, it should be noted that details of other processes described herein with respect to other methods described herein (e.g., methods  600 ,  700 ,  800 ,  900 ,  1000 ,  1050 ,  1100 ,  1200 ,  1300 ,  1400 ,  1500 ,  1600 , and  1900 ) are also applicable in an analogous manner to method  1800  described above with respect to  FIGS. 18A-18G . For example, the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, application views, control panels, controls, position thresholds, directional conditions, navigation criteria, movement parameters, thresholds, determinations, focus selectors, and/or animations described above with reference to method  1800  optionally have one or more of the characteristics of the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, application views, control panels, controls, position thresholds, directional conditions, navigation criteria, movement parameters, thresholds, determinations, focus selectors, and/or animations described herein with reference to other methods described herein (e.g., methods  600 ,  700 ,  800 ,  900 ,  1000 ,  1050 ,  1100 ,  1200 ,  1300 ,  1400 ,  1500 ,  1600 , and  1900 ). For brevity, these details are not repeated here. 
     The operations in the information processing methods described above are, optionally implemented by running one or more functional modules in information processing apparatus such as general purpose processors (e.g., as described above with respect to  FIGS. 1A and 3 ) or application specific chips. 
     The operations described above with reference to  FIGS. 18A-18G  are, optionally, implemented by components depicted in  FIGS. 1A-1B . For example, detection operation  1802 , entering operation  1804  and detection operation  1806 , and selection operation  1808  are, optionally, implemented by event sorter  170 , event recognizer  180 , and event handler  190 . Event monitor  171  in event sorter  170  detects a contact on touch-sensitive display  112 , and event dispatcher module  174  delivers the event information to application  136 - 1 . A respective event recognizer  180  of application  136 - 1  compares the event information to respective event definitions  186 , and determines whether a first contact at a first location on the touch-sensitive surface (or whether rotation of the device) corresponds to a predefined event or sub-event, such as selection of an object on a user interface, or rotation of the device from one orientation to another. When a respective predefined event or sub-event is detected, event recognizer  180  activates an event handler  190  associated with the detection of the event or sub-event. Event handler  190  optionally uses or calls data updater  176  or object updater  177  to update the application internal state  192 . In some embodiments, event handler  190  accesses a respective GUI updater  178  to update what is displayed by the application. Similarly, it would be clear to a person having ordinary skill in the art how other processes can be implemented based on the components depicted in  FIGS. 1A-1B . 
       FIGS. 19A-19C  are flow diagrams illustrating method  1900  of displaying a dock and navigating between different user interfaces in accordance with some embodiments. Method  1900  is performed at an electronic device (e.g., device  300 ,  FIG. 3 , or portable multifunction device  100 ,  FIG. 1A ) with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the display is a touch-screen display and the touch-sensitive surface is on or integrated with the display. In some embodiments, the display is separate from the touch-sensitive surface. Some operations in method  1900  are, optionally, combined and/or the order of some operations is, optionally, changed. 
     As described below, method  1900  provides an intuitive way to display a dock and navigate between different user interfaces in response to an input in accordance with determinations of whether the input meets different movement conditions. The method reduces the number, extent, and/or nature of the inputs from a user when displaying a dock and navigating between different user interfaces, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated electronic devices, enabling a user to display a dock and navigate between different user interfaces faster and more efficiently conserves power and increases the time between battery charges, and enhances the operability of the device (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing/mitigating user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device). 
     Method  1900  relates to determining whether to display a dock or to transition from an application user interface to a different user interface (e.g., a different application user interface, a home user interface, or an application-switching user interface), e.g., instead of or in addition to displaying the dock, in response to a sequence of one or more edge-swipe gestures based on whether the sequence of one or more edge-swipe gestures meets respective criteria. For example, in some embodiments, the device displays the dock in response to a first upward swipe gesture (e.g., a short and/or slow swipe up) from the bottom edge of the device or an initial portion of an upward swipe gesture from the bottom edge of the device. In some embodiments, the device displays an application-switching user interface in response to a second upward swipe gesture (e.g., a slightly longer and/or faster swipe up) from the bottom edge of the device or a continuation of the upward swipe gesture from the bottom edge of the device that caused display of the dock. In some embodiments, the device displays a home user interface in response to a third upward swipe gesture (e.g., a long and/or fast swipe up) from the bottom edge of the device or a continuation of the upward swipe gesture from the bottom edge of the device that caused display of the dock. In some embodiments, the device displays a different application user interface in response to a substantially sideways swipe gesture from the bottom edge of the device. The dock display occurs without the device transitioning to other user interfaces (e.g., the application-switcher user interface, the home screen user interface, a different user interface), when the input only meets the dock-display criteria and does not meet the criteria for navigating to any of the other user interfaces. The dock display precedes navigation to another user interface in response to the same continuous edge swipe gesture, when the input meets both the dock-display criteria and the criteria for navigating to another user interface. Allowing the user to display a dock or to navigate to one of a plurality of user interfaces instead of or in addition to displaying the dock in response to a sequence of one or more edge-swipe gestures, depending on whether certain criteria are met, enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by providing easy access to navigation functions of the device, by helping the user to achieve an intended outcome with fewer required inputs, and by providing additional control options without cluttering the user interface with additional displayed controls), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, user interface navigation is controlled (e.g., the device determines which user interface to navigate to) based on the steps illustrated in  FIGS. 16A-16D , and described with respect to method  1600 , with the following rules: (i) if an application dock is already displayed when the navigation gesture is initiated, the device follows the steps illustrated in  FIGS. 16A-16D , and (ii) if an application dock is not already displayed when the navigation gesture is initiated, the device follows the steps illustrated in  FIGS. 16A-16D , except that in response to a gesture that meets ‘current application’ sub-criteria  1635  (e.g., a ‘no’ answer) of criteria  160   x   8  (e.g., a gesture with a final velocity that is not downward), the device displays the current application user interface with the dock overlaid while, in response to a gesture that meets ‘current application’ sub-criteria  1621  of criteria  160   x   4  or ‘current application’ criteria  160   x   7  (e.g., a gesture with a downward final velocity), the device displays the current application user interface without the dock overlaid (e.g., the device ceases to display the dock upon termination of the gesture). 
     In accordance with method  1900 , the device displays ( 1902 ) a user interface of an application. While displaying the user interface of the application, the device detects ( 1904 ) a swipe gesture by a first contact from an edge of the touch-sensitive display (e.g., a swipe gesture including movement  5944 ,  5952 ,  5970 ,  5974 ,  5980 ,  5984 , and  5990 , of contacts  5942 ,  5950 ,  5968 ,  5972 ,  5978 ,  5982 , and  5988  in FIGS.  5 H 1 - 5 H 27 ). 
     In response to detecting the swipe gesture from the edge of the touch-sensitive display, in accordance with a determination that the swipe gesture meets first movement criteria (e.g., the first movement criteria include dock-display criteria, where the dock-display criteria require that the first input includes movement of the first contact with a magnitude of a movement parameter (e.g., distance and/or speed) that is above a first movement threshold (e.g., a distance greater than 1/10 of the screen height, or a speed greater than 200 pixels per second) in order to be met), the device displays ( 1906 ) a dock overlaid on the user interface of the application (e.g., above the center of the bottom or side edge of the display). For example, device  100  displays dock  5946  in FIGS.  5 H 3 ,  5 H 6 , and  5 H 10  in response to swipe gestures including movement  5944 ,  5952 , and  5970  of contacts  5942 ,  5950 , and  5968 , respectively. 
     In accordance with a determination that the swipe gesture meets second movement criteria that are distinct from the first movement criteria (e.g., the second movement criteria include application-switcher-navigation criteria, where the application-switcher-navigation criteria require that the first input includes movement of the first contact with a magnitude of a movement parameter (e.g., distance and/or speed) that is above a second movement threshold (e.g., a distance greater than 2/10 of the screen height) in order to be met) that is greater than the first movement threshold), the device replaces display ( 1912 ) of the user interface of the application with display of an application-switcher user interface that includes representations of (e.g., thumbnail images of last active user interfaces for) a plurality of recently used applications on the display. For example, device  100  displays an application-switcher user interface in FIGS.  5 H 8  and  5 H 21  in response to swipe gestures including movement  5952  and  5980  of contacts  5950  and  5978 , respectively. In some embodiments, first criteria include criteria of  160   x   4 ,  160   x   6 , and  160   x   8 , as shown in  FIGS. 16A-16D  and described with respect to method  1600 . 
     In accordance with a determination that the swipe gesture meets third movement criteria that are distinct from the first criteria and the second criteria (e.g., the third movement criteria include home-navigation criteria, where the home-navigation criteria require that the first input includes movement of the first contact with a magnitude of a movement parameter (e.g., distance and/or speed) that is above the first and/or second movement threshold (e.g., a distance greater than ⅕ of the screen height, or a speed greater than 400 pixels per second) in order to be met), the device replaces display ( 1918 ) of the user interface of the application with display of a home screen that includes a plurality of application launch icons for launching a plurality of different applications. For example, device  100  displays a home screen in FIGS.  5 H 12  and  5 H 17  in response to swipe gestures including movement  5970  and  5974  of contacts  5968  and  5972 , respectively. In some embodiments, third criteria include criteria of  160   x   2  or criteria  160   x   3 , as shown in  FIGS. 16A-16D  and described with respect to method  1600 . 
     Displaying a dock when a first criteria is met (e.g., a first distance and/or velocity threshold), displaying an application-switcher user interface when a second criteria is met (e.g., a second distance and/or velocity threshold), and displaying a home screen when a third criteria is met (e.g., a third distance and/or velocity threshold) enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by providing easy access to navigation functions of the device, by helping the user to achieve an intended outcome with fewer required inputs, by reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device, and by providing additional control options without cluttering the user interface with additional displayed controls) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, in response to detecting the swipe gesture from the edge of the touch-sensitive display, in accordance with a determination that the swipe gesture meets the second movement criteria, the device displays ( 1914 ) the dock overlaid on the application-switcher user interface. For example, dock  5946  is displayed over the application-switcher user interface in FIGS.  5 H 8  and  5 H 21 . In some embodiments, when navigating to the application-switcher user interface, first movement criteria are met prior to second movement criteria being met and the dock is displayed before the application-switcher user interface is displayed (e.g., after first movement criteria are met, the dock is pulled-up from below the display screen while the user interface of the application is displayed, and then second movement criteria are met resulting in display of the application-switcher user interface). For example, dock  5946  is displayed in FIG.  5 H 6 , before the application-switcher user interface is displayed in FIG.  5 H 8  because first movement criteria are met (e.g., in FIGS.  5 H 5 - 5 H 6 ) before second movement criteria are met (e.g., in FIGS.  5 H 7 - 5 H 8 ). 
     Maintaining display of a dock after navigating to an application-switcher user interface enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by providing both the control options of the dock and the control options of the application-switcher user interface, by reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device, and reducing/mitigating user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the swipe gesture meets the third movement criteria, the device displays ( 1920 ) the dock overlaid on the home screen. For example, dock  5946  is displayed over the home screen in FIG.  5 H 12 . In some embodiments, when navigating to the home screen, first movement criteria are met prior to third movement criteria being met and the dock is displayed before the home screen is displayed (e.g., after first movement criteria are met, the dock is pulled-up from below the display screen while the user interface of the application is displayed, and then third movement criteria are met resulting in display of the home screen). For example, dock  5946  is displayed in FIG.  5 H 10 , before the home screen is displayed in FIG.  5 H 12  because first movement criteria are met (e.g., in FIGS.  5 H 9 - 5 H 10 ) before third movement criteria are met (e.g., in FIGS.  5 H 11 - 5 H 12 ). 
     Maintaining display of a dock after navigating to a home screen user interface enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by providing both the control options of the dock and the control options of the home screen user interface, by reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device, and reducing/mitigating user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, in response to detecting the swipe gesture from the edge of the touch-sensitive display, in accordance with a determination that the swipe gesture meets the first movement criteria, the device animates ( 1908 ) the initial display of the dock in accordance with further movement of the swipe gesture that is made after the first movement criteria have been met (e.g., pulling the dock further upward onto the display with continued movement of the first contact away from the bottom edge of the display). For example, dock  5946  is gradually displayed from the bottom of the display in FIGS.  5 H 2 - 5 H 3  in accordance with upward movement  5944  of contact  5942 . 
     Displaying an animated transition of the dock appearance provides improved feedback, enhances the operability of the device, and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by providing visual feedback to the user, thereby helping the user to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, while continuing to detect the swipe gesture from the edge of the touch-sensitive display, the device dynamically adjusts ( 1930 ) the size of the user interface of the application in accordance with movement of the swipe gesture (e.g., the application shrinks as the contact moves away from the edge of the display and grows as the contact moves back towards the edge of the display). For example, as contact  5968  moves away from the bottom of the display, from position  5968 - b , in FIG.  5 H 10 , to position  5968 - c , in FIG.  5 H 11 , application view  5954  becomes smaller. In some embodiments, after the swipe gesture is first detected, and prior to determining that the input meets the second and/or third criteria, replacing display of the user interface of the application with a replacement user interface that includes an application view of the user interface of the application (e.g., a transitional user interface that allows the user to navigate to a plurality of different user interfaces on that portion of the display, for example, an application switcher user interface, a previous/next application user interface, or a home screen, in accordance an evaluation of the swipe gesture against different navigation criteria corresponding to the different user interfaces, e.g., a comparison of a set of one or more properties of the swipe gesture to a corresponding set of thresholds corresponding to the different user interfaces). 
     Dynamically adjusting the size of the user interface in accordance with movement of the swipe gesture enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interaction more efficient (e.g., by providing real-time information about the internal state of the device, by helping the user to achieve a desired outcome with the required inputs, and by reducing/mitigating user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device), which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves the battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently). 
     In some embodiments, in response to detecting the swipe gesture (e.g., where swipe gesture criteria require that the input includes a threshold amount of movement from the edge of the touch-sensitive display in order for the swipe gesture criteria to be met) from the edge of the touch-sensitive display, in accordance with a determination that a dock is already displayed overlaid on the user interface of the application, the device dynamically adjusts ( 1932 ) the size of the user interface of the application in accordance with movement of the swipe gesture (e.g., immediately, as soon as the input is recognized as a swipe gesture meeting the swipe gesture criteria). And, in accordance with a determination that a dock is not displayed overlaid on the user interface of the application, the device delays ( 1934 ) the dynamic adjustment of the size of the user interface of the application in accordance with movement of the swipe gesture until a dock is displayed overlaid on the user interface of the application (e.g., until the dock is displayed fully in response to an initial portion of the swipe gesture). For example, because dock  5946  is not displayed over the interactive map user interface in FIG.  5 H 5 , device  100  delays replacing the user interface with application view  5954  (e.g., waits to adjust the size of the user interface), until dock  5946  is displayed in FIG.  5 H 6  (e.g., and contact  5950  crosses positional threshold  5948 . In contrast, because dock  5956  is already displayed over the interactive map user interface in FIG.  5 H 18 , device  100  does not delay replacing the user interface with application view  5954  in FIG.  5 H 19  (e.g., the size of the interactive map user interface is adjusted before contact  5978  crosses positional threshold  5948 ). 
     Delaying the dynamic adjustment of the user interface until after the dock has been displayed provides improved feedback, enhances the operability of the device, and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by avoiding animation/navigation that is unintended by the user, by providing visual feedback to the user, thereby helping the user to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device and reducing/mitigating user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, the first movement criteria are met ( 1910 ) when the swipe gesture includes a first threshold amount of movement (e.g., 1/10 of the display height) from the edge of the display followed by less than a predefined movement-tolerance threshold (e.g., movement threshold for detecting a substantially stationary contact) for at least a threshold amount of time (e.g., the first movement criteria are met by a drag and hold gesture near the edge of the screen). For example, dock  5946  is displayed in response to a short drag gesture including movement  5944  of contact  5942  from position  5942 , in FIG.  5 H 1 , to position  5942 - c , in FIG.  5 H 3 . In some embodiments, the first movement criteria require that the swipe gesture includes at least a first threshold amount of movement away from the edge of the screen in order for the first movement criteria to be met, regardless of whether liftoff (e.g., termination) of the gesture occurs). In some embodiments, a short swipe and hold gesture causes the dock to be displayed and maintained at the end of the swipe gesture, while a short swipe without the hold causes the dock to be displayed temporarily or partially and to retract after the swipe gesture terminates. 
     Displaying the dock in response to detecting a short drag and hold provides improved feedback, enhances the operability of the device, and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by reducing the number of steps that are needed to achieve an intended outcome when operating the device and reducing/mitigating user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, the second movement criteria are met ( 1916 ) when the swipe input includes a second threshold amount of movement (e.g., the second movement criteria are met by a drag gesture terminating near the middle of the display) (e.g., the second threshold amount of movement away from the edge of the screen is greater than the first threshold amount of movement necessary to meet the first movement criteria). For example, the application-switcher user interface is displayed in FIG.  5 H 8  because a medium-length swipe gesture, including movement  5950  of contact  5952  from position  5950 - a , in FIG.  5 H 5 , to position  5950 - c , in FIG.  5 H 7 , crossed positional threshold  5948  located further from the bottom edge of the display than the positional threshold satisfied to cause display of dock  5046  in FIG.  5 H 6 . 
     In some embodiments, application-switcher-interface-navigation criteria (e.g., the second movement criteria) requires that liftoff of the contact is detected when the assigned current target state of a transitional user interface is an application-switching user interface, e.g., as determined with reference to  FIGS. 16A-16D  and/or  FIGS. 17A-17C . For example, in some embodiments, application-switcher-interface-navigation criteria include that the input meets a first X-velocity threshold, is substantially horizontal, and does not meet a Y-position threshold, e.g., meeting sub-criteria  1614 , but not sub-criteria  1618  or sub-criteria  1620 , of criteria  160   x   4  in  FIG. 16B , when criteria  160   x   2  and  160   x   3  were not met, for example, a velocity falling within area III or IV in  FIG. 17A , immediately prior to detecting liftoff of the contact. Similarly, in some embodiments, application-switcher-interface-navigation criteria include that the input has no more than a minimal X-velocity and Y-velocity, e.g., meeting criteria  160   x   6  in  FIG. 16B , when none of criteria  160   x   2  through  160   x   5  were met, for example, a velocity falling within velocity boundary  1710  in  FIG. 17A , immediately prior to detecting liftoff of the contact. Similarly, in some embodiments, application-switcher-interface-navigation criteria include that the input does not have a downward velocity or meet a third X-position threshold, e.g., failing sub-criteria  1632  and  1634  of criteria  160   x   8  in  FIG. 16B , immediately prior to detecting liftoff of the contact. 
     Allowing navigation to an application-switcher user interface in response to detecting a medium-length swipe gesture from the bottom of the display enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by providing an easy navigation function, by helping the user to achieve an intended outcome with fewer required inputs, and by reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, the third movement criteria are met ( 1922 ) when the swipe gesture includes at least a nominal threshold amount of movement (e.g., a movement-detection threshold) and is terminated with at least a first threshold speed (e.g., the third movement criteria are met by a short swipe gesture having more than a threshold amount of velocity) (e.g., a flick gesture having a high velocity). For example, if contact  5942  would have had a high velocity when lifted-off in between FIGS.  5 H 3 - 5 H 4 , the device would have displayed a home screen in FIG.  5 H 4 , rather than maintaining display of the interactive map user interface. In some embodiments, the high velocity of a flick gesture overrides any movement thresholds, e.g., where third movement criteria are met when the swipe gesture includes a third threshold amount of movement that is greater than the first and second threshold amounts of movements, detection of a high velocity threshold bypasses the requirement for the third threshold amount of movement, such that gestures that include less than the second threshold amount of movement, or possibly even less than the first threshold amount of movement, still satisfy the third criteria for navigating home. 
     Allowing navigation to a home screen user interface in response to detecting an upwards flick gesture from the bottom of the display enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by providing an easy navigation function, by helping the user to achieve an intended outcome with fewer required inputs, and by reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, the third movement criteria are met ( 1924 ) when the swipe gesture includes a third threshold amount of movement (e.g., the third movement criteria are met by a drag gesture terminating near the top of the display). In some embodiments, the third threshold amount of movement away from the edge of the screen is greater than the first threshold and second threshold amounts of movement necessary to meet the first and second criteria, respectively. For example, the home screen is displayed in FIG.  5 H 12  because a long swipe gesture, including movement  5970  of contact  5968  from position  5968 - a , in FIG.  5 H 9 , to position  5968 - c , in FIG.  5 H 11 , crossed positional threshold  5958  located further from the bottom edge of the display than positional threshold  5948  associated with satisfaction of the second movement criteria. 
     In some embodiments, home-navigation criteria (e.g., the third movement criteria) requires that liftoff of the contact is detected when the assigned current target state of a transitional user interface is an application-switching user interface, e.g., as determined with reference to  FIGS. 16A-17D  and/or  FIGS. 17A-17C . For example, in some embodiments, home-navigation criteria include that the input meets a first Y-velocity threshold or a second Y-velocity threshold when movement is substantially upwards, e.g., meeting criteria  160   x   2  in  FIG. 16B , for example, a velocity falling within area I or II in  FIG. 17A , immediately prior to detecting liftoff of the contact. Similarly, in some embodiments, home-navigation criteria include that the input meets a Y-positional threshold, e.g., meeting criteria  160   x   3  in  FIG. 16B , for example, having a position past first Y-positional threshold  1716  in  FIG. 17B , immediately prior to detecting liftoff of the contact. 
     Allowing navigation to a home screen user interface in response to detecting a long swipe gesture from the bottom of the display enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by providing an easy navigation function, by helping the user to achieve an intended outcome with fewer required inputs, and by reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, in response to detecting the swipe gesture from the edge of the touch-sensitive display, in accordance with a determination that the swipe gesture meets fourth movement criteria, where the fourth movement criteria require that a dock is displayed on the touch-sensitive display when the swipe gesture is detected and that a first threshold amount of movement in a direction horizontal to the edge of the touch-sensitive display (e.g., a threshold amount of movement in a direction substantially parallel to the edge of the touch-screen display that the swipe gesture started from while having less than a second threshold movement in a direction away (e.g., substantially perpendicular to the edge of the touch-screen display)) is detected in order for the fourth movement criteria to be met, the device replaces display ( 1926 ) of the user interface of the application with a user interface of another application that was previously displayed (e.g., a user interface for the last active application on the device). For example, device  100  replaces display of the interactive map user interface with the email user interface, in FIG.  5 H 27 , in response to the arc gesture including movement  5990  of contact  5988  in a substantially horizontal direction, in FIGS.  5 H 25 - 5 H 26 . 
     In some embodiments, the fourth movement criteria require that liftoff of the contact is detected when the assigned current target state of a transitional user interface is a next/previous application user interface, e.g., as determined with reference to  FIGS. 16A-16D  and/or  FIGS. 17A-17C . For example, in some embodiments, next/previous-application-interface-navigation criteria (e.g., the fourth movement criteria) include that the input meets a first X-velocity threshold, has a projected downward position or meet a first Y-position threshold, and not include a direction shift after a threshold amount of movement, e.g., meeting sub-criteria  1614  and either or both of  1618  and  1620 , but not  1621  of criteria  160   x   4  in  FIG. 16B , when criteria  160   x   2  and  160   x   3  were not met, for example, a velocity falling within area VI or VII in  FIG. 17A , immediately prior to detecting liftoff of the contact. Similarly, in some embodiments, next/previous-application-interface-navigation criteria include that the input meets a second X-positional threshold with less than a minimal amount of Y-translation, e.g., meeting criteria  160   x   5  in  FIG. 16B , when none of criteria  160   x   2  through  160   x   4  were met, immediately prior to detecting liftoff of the contact. Similarly, in some embodiments, next/previous-application-interface-navigation criteria include that the input has either a downward Y-velocity or meets a third X-position threshold, but is not a first swipe in a compound gesture, e.g., meeting either of sub-criteria  1632  or  1634 , but not sub-criteria  1633 , of criteria  160   x   8  in  FIG. 16B , when none of criteria  160   x   2  through  160   x   7  were met, immediately prior to detecting liftoff of the contact. Similarly, in some embodiments, next/previous-application-interface-navigation criteria include that the input has either a downward Y-velocity or meets a third X-position threshold, is a first swipe, and meets an X-positional threshold, e.g., meeting criteria  160   x   8  in  FIG. 16B , when none of criteria  160   x   2  through  160   x   7  were met, immediately prior to detecting liftoff of the contact. 
     Allowing navigation to a previously displayed application user interface in response to detecting a sideways gesture from the bottom of the display enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by providing an easy navigation function, by helping the user to achieve an intended outcome with fewer required inputs, and by reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     In some embodiments, in response to detecting the swipe gesture from the edge of the touch-sensitive display, in accordance with a determination that the swipe gesture meets the fourth movement criteria, the device ceases display ( 1928 ) of the dock on the touch-sensitive display. For example, dock  5946  is not displayed over the email user interface in FIG.  5 H 27 , after navigation from the interactive map user interface, in FIG.  5 H 25 , over which dock  5946  was displayed. In some embodiments, when switching between previously active applications, the dock does not remain displayed, while the dock does remain displayed when navigating to an application switcher user interface or to a home screen. 
     Hiding display of the dock after navigating to a previously displayed application user interface enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by allowing the user to focus on the previously displayed application user interface without cluttering the user interface with additional displayed controls, by helping the user to achieve an intended outcome with fewer required inputs, and by reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. 
     It should be understood that the particular order in which the operations in  FIGS. 19A-19C  have been described is merely an example and is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations could be performed. One of ordinary skill in the art would recognize various ways to reorder the operations described herein. Additionally, it should be noted that details of other processes described herein with respect to other methods described herein (e.g., methods  600 ,  700 ,  800 ,  900 ,  1000 ,  1050 ,  1100 ,  1200 ,  1300 ,  1400 ,  1500 ,  1600 , and  1800 ) are also applicable in an analogous manner to method  1900  described above with respect to  FIGS. 19A-19C . For example, the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, application views, control panels, controls, position thresholds, directional conditions, navigation criteria, movement parameters, thresholds, determinations, focus selectors, and/or animations described above with reference to method  1900  optionally have one or more of the characteristics of the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, application views, control panels, controls, position thresholds, directional conditions, navigation criteria, movement parameters, thresholds, determinations, focus selectors, and/or animations described herein with reference to other methods described herein (e.g., methods  600 ,  700 ,  800 ,  900 ,  1000 ,  1050 ,  1100 ,  1200 ,  1300 ,  1400 ,  1500 ,  1600 , and  1800 ). For brevity, these details are not repeated here. 
     The operations in the information processing methods described above are, optionally implemented by running one or more functional modules in information processing apparatus such as general purpose processors (e.g., as described above with respect to  FIGS. 1A and 3 ) or application specific chips. 
     The operations described above with reference to  FIGS. 19A-19C  are, optionally, implemented by components depicted in  FIGS. 1A-1B . For example, display operation  1902 , detection operation  1904 , display operation  1906 , animation operation  1908 , replacement operation  1912 , display operation  1914 , replacement operation  1918 , display operation  1920 , replacement operation  1926 , and display operation  1928  are, optionally, implemented by event sorter  170 , event recognizer  180 , and event handler  190 . Event monitor  171  in event sorter  170  detects a contact on touch-sensitive display  112 , and event dispatcher module  174  delivers the event information to application  136 - 1 . A respective event recognizer  180  of application  136 - 1  compares the event information to respective event definitions  186 , and determines whether a first contact at a first location on the touch-sensitive surface (or whether rotation of the device) corresponds to a predefined event or sub-event, such as selection of an object on a user interface, or rotation of the device from one orientation to another. When a respective predefined event or sub-event is detected, event recognizer  180  activates an event handler  190  associated with the detection of the event or sub-event. Event handler  190  optionally uses or calls data updater  176  or object updater  177  to update the application internal state  192 . In some embodiments, event handler  190  accesses a respective GUI updater  178  to update what is displayed by the application. Similarly, it would be clear to a person having ordinary skill in the art how other processes can be implemented based on the components depicted in  FIGS. 1A-1B . 
     The foregoing description, for purpose of explanation, has been described with reference to specific embodiments. However, the illustrative discussions above are not intended to be exhaustive or to limit the invention to the precise forms disclosed. Many modifications and variations are possible in view of the above teachings. The embodiments were chosen and described in order to best explain the principles of the invention and its practical applications, to thereby enable others skilled in the art to best use the invention and various described embodiments with various modifications as are suited to the particular use contemplated.